Enclosure:

Annexure 1: List of new courses approved for B.Tech EIC Programme (Item No. 4):

Name of the Programme in which course introduction was done Name of the Course Course Code B.Tech EIC Physics (Waves and Optics) BSC101C

B.Tech EIC

Mathematics-I (Calculus and Linear Algebra) BSC103 D

B.Tech EIC Engineering Graphics & Design ESC102

B.Tech EIC Programming for Problem solving ESC103

B.Tech EIC Physics(Waves and Optics) lab BSC104C

B.Tech EIC Programming for Problem solving Lab ESC105

B.Tech EIC

Mathematics-II (Calculus, Ordinary Differential Equations and Complex Variable) BSC106 D

B.Tech EIC Basic Electrical Engineering ESC101 B.Tech EIC Chemistry BSC 102 B.Tech EIC English HSMC101 B.Tech EIC Basic Electrical Engineering Lab ESC107

B.Tech EIC Chemistry Lab BSC 105 B.Tech EIC English Lab HSMC102 B.Tech EIC Electronics Devices EC301 B.Tech EIC Digital System Design EC302 B.Tech EIC Signal and Systems ECC01 B.Tech EIC Mathematics-III BS301

B.Tech EIC

Indian Constitution/ Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge

MC01/ MC02

B.Tech EIC Electronics Devices Lab EC351 B.Tech EIC Digital System Design Lab EC352 B.Tech EIC Control System Enginnering EI401 B.Tech EIC Analog Circuits EC402 B.Tech EIC Electromagnetic Waves ECC02 B.Tech EIC Engineering Mechanics ESC01 B.Tech EIC Biology BSC01 B.Tech EIC Control System Engg. Lab EI451 B.Tech EIC Analog Circuits Lab EC452

B.Tech EIC

Electrical Measurement and Instrumentation Lab

EI453

B.Tech EIC Electromagnetic Waves Lab ECC52 B.Tech EIC Sensors, Signal Conditioning and Telemetry EI501

B.Tech EIC Modern Control System EI502 B.Tech EIC Microprocessors and Microcontrollers ECC03 B.Tech EIC Environmental Sciences MC03 B.Tech EIC Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab ECC51 B.Tech EIC Virtual Instrumentation Lab EIEL55 1B B.Tech EIC Computer Architecture OE501 B.Tech EIC Basics of Communication Engineering OE503 B.Tech EIC Financial Management OE504 B.Tech EIC Digital Signal Processing ECC04 B.Tech EIC Digital Signal Processing Lab ECC53 B.Tech EIC Internet of Things EIEL601 B.Tech EIC Numerical Methods EIEL603 B.Tech EIC Power Plant Instrumentation EIEL605 B.Tech EIC Process Modeling & Optimization EIEL606 B.Tech EIC Building Automation EIEL607 B.Tech EIC Analytical instrumentation EIEL608 B.Tech EIC Control System Components EIEL609 B.Tech EIC Optical Instrumentation EIEL610 B.Tech EIC Digital Communication OE601 B.Tech EIC Scientific Computing OE602 B.Tech EIC Soft Computing OE603 B.Tech EIC Industrial Economics OE604 B.Tech EIC Effective Tech. Comm. HSMC 01 B.Tech EIC Embedded System EIEL701 B.Tech EIC PLCs and SCADA EIEL702 B.Tech EIC Instrumentation & System Design EIEL703 B.Tech EIC Introduction to MEMS EIEL704 B.Tech EIC AI and Expert System EIEL706 B.Tech EIC Micro / Nano Devices and Sensors EIEL707 B.Tech EIC Digital Image & Video Processing EIEL708 B.Tech EIC Non Linear Control System EIEL709 B.Tech EIC Batch Process Control EIEL710

B.Tech EIC

Electromagnetic compatibility for Instruments EIEL712

B.Tech EIC Computer Network OE701 B.Tech EIC Banking System and Taxation OE702 B.Tech EIC Operational Research OE703 B.Tech EIC Human Resource Management OE704 B.Tech EIC Mobile Communication and Networks OE705 B.Tech EIC Wireless Sensor Networks OE706

B.Tech EIC Industrial Safety OE707 B.Tech EIC Cyber Laws & Security OE708

Annexure 2: List of new courses approved for B.Tech ECE Programme (Item No. 4):

Name of the Programme in which course introduction was done Name of the Course Course Code B.Tech ECE Physics (Waves and Optics) BSC101C

B.Tech ECE Mathematics-I (Calculus and Linear Algebra) BSC103 D B.Tech ECE Engineering Graphics & Design ESC102 B.Tech ECE Programming for Problem solving ESC103 B.Tech ECE Physics(Waves and Optics) lab BSC104C

B.Tech ECE Programming for Problem solving Lab ESC105

B.Tech ECE

Mathematics-II (Calculus, Ordinary Differential Equations and Complex Variable) BSC106 D

B.Tech ECE Basic Electrical Engineering ESC101

B.Tech ECE Chemistry BSC 102 B.Tech ECE English HSMC101 B.Tech ECE Basic Electrical Engineering Lab ESC107

B.Tech ECE Chemistry Lab BSC 105 B.Tech ECE English Lab HSMC102 B.Tech ECE Electronics Devices EC301 B.Tech ECE Digital System Design EC302 B.Tech ECE Network Theory EC304 B.Tech ECE Engineering Mechanics ESC01 B.Tech ECE Mathematics-III BS301

B.Tech ECE

Indian Constitution/ Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge

MC01/ MC02

B.Tech ECE Electronics Devices Lab EC351 B.Tech ECE Digital System Design Lab EC352 B.Tech ECE Network Theory Lab EC353 B.Tech ECE Analog and Digital Communication EC401 B.Tech ECE Analog Circuits EC402 B.Tech ECE Microprocessors & Microcontrollers ECC03 B.Tech ECE Computer Architecture EC404 B.Tech ECE Signal and Systems ECC01 B.Tech ECE Effective Technical Communication HSMC01 B.Tech ECE Biology BSC01 B.Tech ECE Analog and Digital Communication Lab EC451

B.Tech ECE Analog Circuits Lab EC452 B.Tech ECE Microprocessors & Microcontrollers Lab ECC51 B.Tech ECE Electromagnetic Waves ECC02 B.Tech ECE Probability Theory and Stochastic Processes EC502 B.Tech ECE Digital Signal Processing ECC04

B.Tech ECE Environmental Sciences MC03

B.Tech ECE Digital Signal Processing Lab ECC53 B.Tech ECE Electromagnetic Waves Lab ECC52

B.Tech ECE CMOS Design ECEL501 B.Tech ECE Nano Electronics ECEL502 B.Tech ECE Power Electronics ECEL503 B.Tech ECE Introduction to MEMS ECEL504 B.Tech ECE Smart Materials and Systems OEL501 B.Tech ECE Intelligent Instrumentation OEL503 B.Tech ECE Electromechanical Energy Conversion OEL504

B.Tech ECE Renewable Power Generation Systems OEL505

B.Tech ECE Control System EC601 B.Tech ECE Computer Network EC602 B.Tech ECE Computer Networks Lab EC652 B.Tech ECE Electronics Measurement Lab EC653 B.Tech ECE Bio Medical Electronics ECEL601 B.Tech ECE Information Theory & Coding ECEL602 B.Tech ECE Speech and Audio Processing ECEL603 B.Tech ECE Scientific Computing ECEL604 B.Tech ECE Microwave Theory & Techniques ECEL605 B.Tech ECE Digital Image and Video Processing ECEL606 B.Tech ECE Mobile Communication Network ECEL608 B.Tech ECE Wireless Sensor Networks ECEL609 B.Tech ECE MIMO Wireless Communication ECEL610 B.Tech ECE Virtual Instruments Design OEL601 B.Tech ECE Data Structure OEL602 B.Tech ECE Cyber Laws and Security OEL603 B.Tech ECE Quality Management OEL604 B.Tech ECE Measurement Data Analysis OEL605 B.Tech ECE Digital Image Processing Lab ECEL655B

B.Tech ECE Antenna and Propagation ECEL701 B.Tech ECE High Speed Electronics ECEL702 B.Tech ECE Wavelets ECEL703 B.Tech ECE Fiber Optic Communication ECEL704 B.Tech ECE Adaptive Signal Processing ECEL705

B.Tech ECE Mixed Signal Design ECEL706 B.Tech ECE Satellite Communication ECEL707 B.Tech ECE Embedded Systems ECEL708 B.Tech ECE Error Correcting Codes ECEL709 B.Tech ECE Human Resource Management OEL701 B.Tech ECE Power Plant Engineering OEL702 B.Tech ECE Soft Computing OEL703 B.Tech ECE Display Devices OEL704 B.Tech ECE Financial Management OEL705 B.Tech ECE Non Linear Control System OEL706 B.Tech ECE Operational Research OEL707 B.Tech ECE Operating System OEL708 B.Tech ECE Industrial Safety Engineering OEL709 B.Tech ECE Cloud Computing OEL710

Annexure 3: List of new courses approved for M.Tech Electronics and Communication Engineering Programme (Item No. 4):

Name of the Programme in which course introduction was done Name of the Course Course Code

M.Tech ECE Advanced Communication Networks

MEC101

M.Tech ECE Wireless and Mobile Communication MEC102

M.Tech ECE Research Methodology and IPR RMI101

M.Tech ECE Advanced Communication Networks Lab MEC151

M.Tech ECE Wireless Sensor Networks MECE101 M.Tech ECE Statistical Information Processing MECE103 M.Tech ECE Cognitive Radio MECE104 M.Tech ECE RF and Microwave Circuit Design MECE105 M.Tech ECE DSP Architecture MECE106 M.Tech ECE English for Research Paper Writing AUD01A M.Tech ECE Disaster Management AUD02A M.Tech ECE Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD03A M.Tech ECE Value Education AUD04A M.Tech ECE Constitution of India AUD05A M.Tech ECE Pedagogy Studies AUD06A M.Tech ECE Stress Management by Yoga AUD07A

M.Tech ECE

Personality Development through Life Enlightenment Skills.

AUD08A

M.Tech ECE Advanced Digital Signal Processing MEC202

M.Tech ECE Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab MEC252

M.Tech ECE Satellite Communication MECE201 M.Tech ECE Internet of Things MECE202 M.Tech ECE Voice and data networks MECE203 M.Tech ECE Digital Image Processing MECE204 M.Tech ECE Markov Chain and Queuing System MECE205 M.Tech ECE MIMO System MECE206 M.Tech ECE Programmable Networks – SDN, NFV MECE207 M.Tech ECE Advanced Digital Communication MECE208 M.Tech ECE High Performance Networks MECE301

M.Tech ECE Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning

MECE302

M.Tech ECE Remote Sensing MECE303 M.Tech ECE Business Analytics MECO-301 M.Tech ECE Industrial Safety MECO-302 M.Tech ECE Operations Research MECO-303

M.Tech ECE Cost Management of Engineering Projects

MECO-304

M.Tech ECE Composite Materials MECO-305 M.Tech ECE Waste to Energy MECO-306

Annexure 4: List of new courses approved for M.Tech E&I Programme (Item No. 4):

Name of the Programme in which course introduction was done Name of the Course Course Code M.Tech E&I Research Methodology and IPR RMI101 M.Tech E&I Advanced Mathematics MEIE102 M.Tech E&I Modeling and Simulation Techniques MEIE103 M.Tech E&I Industrial Instrumentation MEIE105 M.Tech E&I Embedded System MEIE106 M.Tech E&I English for Research Paper Writing AUD01A M.Tech E&I Disaster Management AUD02A M.Tech E&I Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD03A M.Tech E&I Value Education AUD04A M.Tech E&I Constitution of India AUD05A M.Tech E&I Pedagogy Studies AUD06A M.Tech E&I Stress Management by Yoga AUD07A

M.Tech E&I Personality Development through Life Enlightenment Skills.

AUD08A

M.Tech E&I Optimal Control Theory MEI202 M.Tech E&I Digital Signal Processing Lab MEI252 M.Tech E&I Industrial Measurement MEIE201

M.Tech E&I Bio-Medical Instrumentation MEIE202 M.Tech E&I Intelligent Instrumentation MEIE203 M.Tech E&I Advanced Digital Signal Processing MEIE204 M.Tech E&I Computer Network MEIE205 M.Tech E&I Digital Image Processing MEIE206 M.Tech E&I Digital Control System MEIE301 M.Tech E&I MEMS MEIE302 M.Tech E&I Process Instrumentation MEIE303 M.Tech E&I Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic MEIE305 M.Tech E&I Industrial Automation Control MEIE306 M.Tech E&I Business Analytics MECO-301 M.Tech E&I Industrial Safety MECO-302 M.Tech E&I Operations Research MECO-303 M.Tech E&I Cost Management of Engineering Projects MECO-304 M.Tech E&I Composite Materials MECO-305 M.Tech E&I Waste to Energy MECO-306

Annexure 5: List of new courses approved for M.Tech VLSI Programme (Item No. 4):

Name of the Programme in which course introduction was done Name of the Course Course Code M.Tech VLSI RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs MVL101

M.Tech VLSI Research Methodology and IPR

RMI101

M.Tech VLSI RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs Lab MVL151 M.Tech VLSI Physical Design Automation MVLE103

M.Tech VLSI Programming Languages for Embedded Software

MVLE104

M.Tech VLSI Digital Signal and Image Processing MVLE105 M.Tech VLSI VLSI Technology with MEMS Applications MVLE106 M.Tech VLSI Parallel Processing MVLE107 M.Tech VLSI System Design with Embedded Linux MVLE108 M.Tech VLSI Device Modeling for Circuit Simulation MVLE110 M.Tech VLSI English for Research Paper Writing AUD01A M.Tech VLSI Disaster Management AUD02A M.Tech VLSI Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD03A M.Tech VLSI Value Education AUD04A M.Tech VLSI Constitution of India AUD05A M.Tech VLSI Pedagogy Studies AUD06A M.Tech VLSI Stress Management by Yoga AUD07A

M.Tech VLSI Personality Development through Life Enlightenment Skills.

AUD08A

M.Tech VLSI Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design MVL201 M.Tech VLSI Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design Lab MVL251 M.Tech VLSI Memory Technologies MVLE203 M.Tech VLSI SoC Design MVLE204 M.Tech VLSI CMOS RF Circuit Design MVLE206 M.Tech VLSI Communication Buses and Interfaces MVLE207 M.Tech VLSI Network Security and Cryptography MVLE208 M.Tech VLSI VLSI signal Processing MVLE209 M.Tech VLSI Swami Vivekananda‘s thoughts AUD09A M.Tech VLSI Communication Networks MVLE301 M.Tech VLSI Selected Topics in Mathematics MVLE302 M.Tech VLSI Nano materials and nano technology MVLE303 M.Tech VLSI VLSI Interconnect MVLE304 M.Tech VLSI IOT and Applications MVLE305 M.Tech VLSI Business Analytics MECO-301 M.Tech VLSI Industrial Safety MECO-302 M.Tech VLSI Operations Research MECO-303 M.Tech VLSI Cost Management of Engineering Projects MECO-304 M.Tech VLSI Composite Materials MECO-305 M.Tech VLSI Waste to Energy MECO-306

Annexure 6: Syllabus Revision (in %) For B.Tech (EIC) Programme (Item No. 4): B.Tech EIC (New courses offered) 71 B.Tech EIC (total courses offered) 94 Syllabus Revision (in %) 71/94 = 76%

For B.Tech (ECE) Programme (Item No. 4): B.Tech ECE (New courses offered) 84 B.Tech ECE (total courses offered) 95 Syllabus Revision (in %) 84/95 = 88%

For M.Tech (ECE) Programme (Item No. 4): M.Tech ECE (New courses offered) 37 M.Tech ECE (total courses offered) 46 Syllabus Revision (in %) 37/46 = 80%

For M.Tech (E&I) Programme (Item No. 4):

M.Tech E&I (New courses offered) 32 M.Tech E&I (total courses offered) 45 Syllabus Revision (in %) 32/45 = 71%

For M.Tech (VLSI) Programme (Item No. 4):

M.Tech VLSI (New courses offered) 38 M.Tech VLSI (total courses offered) 48 Syllabus Revision (in %) 32/45 = 79%

For Ph.D. (Electronics Engineering) Programme (Item No. 7):

Ph.D. (Electronics Engineering) (New courses offered)

07

Ph.D. (Electronics Engineering) (total courses offered)

08

Syllabus Revision (in %) 7/8 = 88%

SCHEME & SYLLABUS

for

B.TECH. COURSE

in

Electronics and Communication Engineering

(w.e.f. Session 2018-19)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

J.C. BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, YMCA, FARIDABAD

2

J.C.BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY, YMCA, FARIDABAD

VISION

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, YMCA, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA University of Science and Technology) aspires to be a nationally and internationally acclaimed leader in technical and higher education in all spheres which transforms the life of students through integration of teaching, research and character building.

MISSION

To contribute to the development of science and technology by synthesizing

teaching, research and creative activities.

To provide an enviable research environment and state-of-the-art technological

exposure to its scholars.

To develop human potential to its fullest extent and make them emerge as world

class leaders in their professions and enthuse them towards their social

responsibilities.

3

Department of Electronics Engineering

VISION

To be a Centre of Excellence for producing high quality engineers and scientists

capable of providing sustainable solutions to complex problems and promoting cost

effective indigenous technology in the area of Electronics, Communication &

Control Engineering for Industry, Research Organizations, Academia and all sections

of society.

MISSION

To frame a well-balanced curriculum with an emphasis on basic theoretical

knowledge as well the requirements of the industry.

To motivate students to develop innovative solutions to the existing problems for

betterment of the society.

Collaboration with the industry, research establishments and other academic

institutions to bolster the research and development activities.

To provide infrastructure and financial support for culmination of novel ideas into

useful prototypes.

To promote research in emerging and interdisciplinary areas and act as a facilitator

for knowledge generation and dissemination through Research, Institute - Industry

and Institute-Institute interaction.

About Electronics Engineering Department

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA University

of Science & Technology, Faridabad) established in 2009, formerly known as YMCA

Institute of Engineering, Faridabad, established in year 1969 as a Joint Venture of Govt.

of Haryana and National Council of YMCA of India with active assistance from overseas

4

agencies of West Germany to produce highly practical oriented personnel in specialized

field of engineering to meet specific technical manpower requirement of industries.

Electronics Engineering Department started in 1969 and has been conducting B.Tech.

Courses in Electronics Instrumentation and Control and Electronics and Communication

Engineering of 4-Years duration since 1997. Students are admitted through centralized

counseling nominated by state govt. in 1st Year and 2nd year through lateral entry

entrance test. Besides under graduate degree courses, it is also running M.Tech. Courses

in VLSI, Instrumentation and Electronics & Communication. Department of Electronics

Engineering is also running Ph.D. Programme. All courses are duly approved by AICTE/

UGC. The Electronics Engineering Department has been well known for its track record

of employment of the pass out students since its inception. The Department has good

infrastructure consisting of 11 laboratories, 10 Lecture Halls and 1 Conference Room

beside 6 workshops. It has excellent faculty with 2 Professors, 4 Associate Professors and

23 Assistant Professors. At present, 8 faculty members are PhD in various specializations.

The various syllabi of UG/PG courses have been prepared with active participation from

Industry. The Department is organizing number of expert lectures from industry experts

for students in every semester. Seven month training is mandatory for every B.Tech.

Students. Emphasis has been given on project work and workshop for skill enhancement

of students. Choice based credit system allows students to study the subjects of his/her

choice from a number of elective courses /audit courses.

5

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOS)

1. To prepare students to excel in undergraduate programmes and succeed in

industry/ technical profession through global, rigorous education.

2. To provide students with a solid foundation in mathematical, scientific and

engineering fundamentals required to solve engineering problems and also to

pursue higher studies.

3. To provide students with foundation in skill development required to design,

develop and fabricate engineering products.

4. To inculcate in students professional and ethical attitude, effective communication

skills, teamwork skills, multidisciplinary approach, and an ability to relate

engineering issues to broader social context, additional courses with regard to

physical, psychological and career growth.

5. To provide student with an academic environment aware of excellence,

outstanding leadership, written ethical codes and guidelines with moral values, and

the life-long learning needed for successful professional career.

6

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs) Engineering Graduates will be able to: 1) Engineering knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and Electronics Engineering to the solution of engineering problems. 2) Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review literature and analyze Electronics Engineering problems to design, conduct experiments, analyze data and interpret data. 3) Design /development of solutions: Design solution for Electronics Engineering problems and design system component of processes that meet the desired needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal and the environmental considerations. 4) Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions in Electronics Engineering. 5) Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to Electronics Engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations. 6) The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to mechanical engineering practice. 7) Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the Electronics Engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge and need for sustainable development. 8) Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of the Electronics Engineering practice. 9) Individual and team work: Function affectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings in Electronics Engineering. 10) Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering committee and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write affective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations in Electronics Engineering. 11) Project Management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge & understanding of the mechanical engineering principles and management principles and apply these to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments in Electronics Engineering. 12) Life - long learning: Recognize the need for, and the preparation and ability to engage in independent research and lifelong learning in the broadest contest of technological changes in Electronics Engineering.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

1. To apply the fundamental and design knowledge in the areas of analog & digital circuits, Electronics and Communication Systems.

2. To pursue higher studies or get placed in Industries and Organizations.

7

Grading Scheme

Marks % Grade Grade points Category

90-100 O 10 Outstanding 80 ≤ marks <90 A+ 9 Excellent 70 ≤ marks < 80 A 8 Very good 60 ≤ marks < 70 B+ 7 Good 50 ≤ marks < 60 B 6 Above average 45 ≤ marks < 50 C 5 Average 40 ≤ marks < 45 P 4 Pass <40 F 0 Fail

Ab 0 Absent

Percentage calculation= CGPA * 9.5 SEMESTER WISE SUMMARY OF THE PROGRAMME: B.TECH. (ECE)

S.No. Semester No. of Contact Hours Marks Credits 1 I 26 600 18.5 2 II 25 650 19.5 3 III 31 850 23 4 IV 33 950 27 5 V 27 800 20 6 VI 30 850 24 7 VII 21 600 18 8 VIII - 500 10

Total 193 5800 160

8

Chapter -1

General, Course structure & Theme &

Semester-wise credit distribution

A. Definition of Credit:

1 Hr. Lecture (L) per week 1 credit 1 Hr. Tutorial (T) per week 1 credit 1 Hr. Practical (P) per week 2 Hours Practical(Lab)/week

0.5 credits 1 credit

B. Course code and definition:

Course code Definitions L Lecture T Tutorial P Practical BSC Basic Science Courses ESC Engineering Science Courses HSMC Humanities and Social Sciences including Management courses PCC Professional core courses PEC Professional Elective courses OEC Open Elective courses LC Laboratory course MC Mandatory courses PROJ Project

C. Category of Courses:

BASIC SCIENCE COURSES Sl. No.

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week Credits

L T P 1 Physics 3 1 3 5.5 2 Chemistry 3 1 3 5.5 3 Mathematics –I 3 1 0 4 4 Mathematics –2 3 1 0 4

9

ENGINEERING SCIENCE COURSES Sl. No.

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week Credits

L T P 1 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 1 2 5 2 Engineering Graphics & Design 0 0 4 2 3 Programming for Problem Solving 3 0 4 5 4 Workshop I 0 0 4 2 5 Workshop II 0 0 4 2

HUMANITIES & SOCIAL SCIENCES INCLUDING MANAGEMENT

Sl. No.

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week Credits

L T P 1 English 2 0 2 3

Chapter -2 Detailed first year curriculum contents

I. Mandatory Induction program

[Induction program for students to be offered right at the start of the first year.]

3 weeks duration Physical activity Creative Arts Universal Human Values Literary Proficiency Modules Lectures by Eminent People Visits to local Areas Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations

10

B.TECH 1st YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -I) COURSE STRUCTURE

S.No Course Code Course Title L T P Credits Sessional External Category

Code

1 BSC101C Physics (Waves and Optics) 3 1 - 4 25 75 BSC

2 BSC103 D Mathematics-I (Calculus and Linear Algebra)

3 1 - 4 25 75 BSC

3 ESC102 Engineering Graphics & Design - - 4 2 30 70 ESC

4 ESC103 Programming for Problem solving 3 - - 3 25 75 ESC

5 ESC104 Workshop- I - - 4 2 30 70 ESC

6 BSC104C Physics(Waves and Optics) lab - - 3 1.5 15 35 BSC

7 ESC105 Programming for Problem solving Lab

-

-

4 2 15 35 ESC

TOTAL 9 2 15 18.5 165 435

B.TECH 1st YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -II)

COURSE STRUCTURE

S.No. Course Code

Course Title

L

T

P

Credits Sessional External Category

Code

1 BSC106 D

Mathematics-II (Calculus, Ordinary

Differential Equations and Complex Variable)

3 1 - 4 25 75 BSC

2 ESC101 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 1 - 4 25 75 AECC

3 BSC 102 Chemistry 3 1 - 4 25 75 BEC

4 ESC106 Workshop- II -

-

4 2 30 70 BEC

5 HSMC101 English 2 - - 2 25 75 BEC

6 ESC107 Basic Electrical Engineering Lab - - 2 1 15 35 BSC

7 BSC 105 Chemistry Lab - - 3 1.5 15 35 BEC

8 HSMC102 English Lab - - 2 1 15 35 BEC

TOTAL 11 3 11 19.5 175 475 Note: Workshop I and Workshop II can be decided for specific branch by the respective Dean/Principal of respective UTD/Institutions

11

B.TECH 2nd YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -III) COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No.

Category

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits

Sessional

Marks

Final Mark

s

Total

L T P 1 PCC EC301 Electronics Devices 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 2 PCC EC302 Digital System Design 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC EC304 Network Theory 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 ESC ESC01 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4 25 75 100 5 BSC BS301 Mathematics-III 3 1 0 4 25 75 100 6 MC MC01/

MC02 Indian Constitution/ Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge

2 0 0 0 25 75 100

7 PCC EC351 Electronics Devices Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50 8 PCC EC352 Digital System Design

Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 PCC EC353 Network Theory Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50 10 ESC ES303 Electronics Workshop-I 0 0 6 3 30 70 100 Total Credits 23 225 625 850

B.TECH 2nd YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -IV) COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No.

Category

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits

Sessional

Marks

Final Mark

s

Total

L T P 1 PCC EC401 Analog and Digital

Communication 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC EC402 Analog Circuits 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC ECC03 Microprocessors &

Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

4 PCC EC404 Computer Architecture 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 PCC ECC01 Signal and Systems 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 6 HSMC HSMC01 Effective Technical

Communication 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

7 BSC BSC01 Biology 2 1 0 3 25 75 100 8 PCC EC451 Analog and Digital

Communication Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 PCC EC452 Analog Circuits Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50 10 PCC ECC51 Microprocessors &

Microcontrollers Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

11 ESC ES402 Electronics Workshop-II 0 0 6 3 30 70 100 Total Credits 27 250 700 950

12

B.TECH 3rd YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -V)

COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No.

Category

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits

Sessional Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC ECC02 Electromagnetic Waves 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 2 PCC EC502 Probability Theory and

Stochastic Processes 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

3 PCC ECC04 Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 PEC Program Elective-I 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 MC MC03 Environmental Sciences 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 6 OEC OE-1 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 7 PCC ECC53 Digital Signal Processing

Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

8 PCC ECC52 Electromagnetic Waves Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 ESC ES555 Electronics Workshop-III 0 0 6 3 30 70 100 Total Credits 20 210 590 800 Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-I

ECEL501 CMOS Design ECEL502 Nano Electronics ECEL503 Power Electronics ECEL504 Introduction to MEMS

Course Name Course Title

Open Elective-I

OEL501 Smart Materials and Systems OEL502 Electrical Measurement and Instrumentation OEL503 Intelligent Instrumentation OEL504 Electromechanical Energy Conversion OEL505 Renewable Power Generation Systems

Note: Exams Duration will be as under (a) Theory exams will be of 3 hours duration. (b) Practical exams will be of 08 hours duration (c) Workshop exam will be of 8 hours duration

13

B.TECH 3rd YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -VI) COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No.

Category

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Mark

s

Total

L T P 1 PCC EC601 Control System 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 2 PCC EC602 Computer Network 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PEC Program Elective-II 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 PEC Program Elective-III 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 PEC Program Elective-IV 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 6 OEC OE-II 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 7 PCC EC652 Computer Networks

Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

8 PCC EC653 Electronics Measurement Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 PEC *ECEL655A/ECEL655B/ ECEL655C

Microwave Lab /Digital Image Processing Lab /SDR Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 ESC ES654 Electronics Workshop-IV

0 0 6 3 25 75 100

Total Credits 24 220 630 850

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-II

ECEL601 Bio Medical Electronics ECEL602 Information Theory & Coding ECEL603 Speech and Audio Processing ECEL604 Scientific Computing

Program Elective-III ECEL605 Microwave Theory & Techniques ECEL606 Digital Image and Video Processing ECEL607 Software Defined Radio

Program Elective-IV ECEL608 Mobile Communication Network ECEL609 Wireless Sensor Networks ECEL610 MIMO Wireless Communication

Course Name Course Title

Open Elective-II

OEL601 Virtual Instruments Design OEL602 Data Structure OEL603 Cyber Laws and Security OEL604 Quality Management OEL605 Measurement Data Analysis

Note: Exams Duration will be as under (a) Theory exams will be of 3 hours duration. (b) Practical exams will be of 08 hours duration (c) Workshop exam will be of 8 hours duration *The Lab relevant to PEC-III should be choosen.

14

B.TECH 4th YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -VII)

COURSE STRUCTURE (May be carried out in 8th Semester*)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Mark

s

Total

L T P 1 PEC Program Elective-V 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 2 PEC Program Elective-VI 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PEC Program Elective-VII 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 OEC OE-III 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 OEC OE-IV 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 6 PROJ ECP701 Major Project 0 0 2 1 15 35 50 7 ESC ES751 Electronics Workshop-V 0 0 4 2 15 35 50 Total Credits 18 155 445 600

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-V ECEL701 Antenna and Propagation ECEL702 High Speed Electronics ECEL703 Wavelets

Program Elective-VI ECEL704 Fiber Optic Communication ECEL705 Adaptive Signal Processing ECEL706 Mixed Signal Design

Program Elective-VII ECEL707 Satellite Communication ECEL708 Embedded Systems ECEL709 Error Correcting Codes

Course Name Course Title

Open Elective-III

OEL701 Human Resource Management OEL702 Power Plant Engineering OEL703 Soft Computing OEL704 Display Devices OEL705 Financial Management

Open Elective-IV

OEL706 Non Linear Control System OEL707 Operational Research OEL708 Operating System OEL709 Industrial Safety Engineering OEL710 Cloud Computing

Note: Exams Duration will be as under (a) Theory exams will be of 3 hours duration. (b) Practical exams will be of 08 hours duration (c) Workshop exam will be of 8 hours duration The course contents of 7th Semester may be pursued by the students of UTDs/Departments of Affiliated colleges in 8th semester. In the case of pursuance of internship in 7th semester, the course contents of 7th semester will be taught in 8th semester and vice-versa. The approval of such interchangeability should be requested from the authority before the commencement of 7th semester.

15

B.TECH 4th YEAR ECE (SEMESTER -VIII)

COURSE STRUCTURE (May be carried out in 7th semester*)

Sr No.

Course Title Teaching Schedule

Examination Schedule (Marks)

Credits

Annual Exam.

Continuous Assessment

Total

1 EIP801 Industrial Training

6 Months 350 150 500 10

A) PROCEDURE FOR ANNUAL EXAMINATION AND MARKS. 1. PROJECT EVALUATION 150 MARKS 2. PROJECT SEMINAR 100 MARKS 3. PROJECT VIVA 100 MARKS

350

B) CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT MARKS 1. ASSESSMENT BY INSTITUTE FACULTY 50 MARKS. 2. ASSESSMENT BY INDUSTRIAL GUIDE 50 MARKS. 3. CONDUCT MARKS 50MARKS.

150

TOTAL 500 * The Industry Internship may be pursued by UTDs/Departments of Affiliated colleges in 7th or 8th semester. In the case of pursuance of internship in 7th semester, the course contents of 7th semester will be taught in 8th semester and vice-versa. The approval of such interchangeability should be requested from the authority before the commencement of 7th semester.

16

Course code BSC101C (Th)/ BSC104 (Lab) Category Basic Science Course

Course title Physics (Waves and Optics) (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester-I 3 1 3 5.5

(i) Physics (Waves and Optics) ( [L : 3; T:1; P : 0 (4 credits)] Prerequisites: (i) Mathematics course on Differential equations Unit 1: Simple harmonic motion, damped and forced simple harmonic oscillator (7)

Mechanical and electrical simple harmonic oscillators, complex number notation and phasor representation of simple harmonic motion, damped harmonic oscillator – heavy, critical and light damping, energy decay in a damped harmonic oscillator, quality factor, forced mechanical and electrical oscillators, electrical and mechanical impedance, steady state motion of forced damped harmonic oscillator, power absorbed by oscillator

Unit 2: Non-dispersive transverse and longitudinal waves in one dimension and introductionto dispersion (7): Transverse wave on a string, the wave equation on a string, Harmonic waves, reflection and transmission of waves at a boundary, impedance matching, standing waves and their eigenfrequencies, longitudinal waves and the wave equation for them, acoustics waves and speed of sound, standing sound waves. Waves with dispersion, water waves, superposition of waves and Fourier method, wave groups and group velocity.

Unit 3: The propagation of light and geometric optics (10): Fermat‘s principle of stationary time and its applications e.g. in explaining mirage effect, laws of reflection and refraction, Light as an electromagnetic wave and Fresnel equations, reflectance and transmittance, Brewster‘s angle, total internal reflection, and evanescent wave. Mirrors and lenses and optical instruments based on them, transfer formula and the matrix method

Unit 4: Wave optics (6): Huygens‘ principle, superposition of waves and interference of light by wavefront splitting and amplitude splitting; Young‘s double slit experiment, Newton‘s rings, Michelson interferometer, Mach-Zehnder interferometer. Farunhofer diffraction from a single slit and a circular aperture, the Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution and its application to vision; Diffraction gratings and their resolving power

Unit 5: Lasers (8): Einstein‘s theory of matter radiation interaction and A and B coefficients; amplification of light by population inversion, different types of lasers: gas lasers ( He-Ne, CO2), solid-state lasers(ruby,Neodymium), dye lasers; Properties of laser beams: monochromaticity, coherence, directionality and brightness, laser speckles, applications of lasers in science, engineering and medicine.

Reference books: (i) Ian G. Main, Oscillations and waves in physics (ii) H.J. Pain, The physics of vibrations and waves (iii) E. Hecht, A. Ghatak, Optics (iv) O. Svelto, Principles of Lasers

17

(ii) Physics (Waves & Optics) Lab [ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 3 (1.5credits)] At least 06 experiments from the following

1. To determine the frequency of an electric tuning fork by Melde‘s experiment and verify λ2 –T law.

2. To study Lissajous Figures. 3. Familiarization with: Schuster`s focusing; determination of angle of prism. 4. To determine refractive index of the Material of a prism using sodium source. 5. To determine the dispersive power and Cauchy constants of the material of a prism

using mercury source. 6. To determine the wavelength of sodium source using Michelson‘s interferometer. 7. To determine wavelength of sodium light using Fresnel‘s Biprism. 8. To determine wavelength of sodium light using Newton‘s Rings. 9. To determine wavelength of (1) Na source and (2) spectral lines of Hg

source using plane diffraction grating. 10. To determine dispersive power and resolving power of a plane diffraction grating. 11. To determine the wavelength of laser source using diffraction of single slit. 12. To determine the wavelength of laser source using diffraction of double slits. 13. To determine angular spread of He-Ne laser using plane diffraction grating

Note: Experiments may be added or deleted as per the availability of equipments.

Reference Books 1. Advanced Practical Physics for students, B.L. Flint and H.T. Worsnop, 1971, Asia

Publishing House 2. A Text Book of Practical Physics, I.Prakash & Ramakrishna, 11th Ed., 1511,Kitab

Mahal 3. Advanced level Physics Practicals, Michael Nelson and Jon M. Ogborn, 4th Edition,

reprinted 1985, Heinemann Educational Publishers 4. A Laboratory Manual of Physics for undergraduate classes, D.P.Khandelwal,1985, Vani

Pub.

18

Course code BSC103D Category Basic Science Course

Course title MATHEMATICS 1 (Calculus and Linear Algebra)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester –I 3 1 - 4

Pre-requisites (if any) -

OBJECTIVES: The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques in calculus, multivariate analysis and linear algebra. It aims to equip the students with standard concepts and tools at an intermediate to advanced level that will serve them well towards tackling more advanced level of mathematics and applications that they would find useful in their disciplines. More precisely, the objectives are: To introduce the idea of applying differential and integral calculus to notions of curvature

and to improper integrals. Apart from some applications it gives a basic introduction on Beta and Gamma functions.

To introduce the fallouts of Rolle‘s Theorem that is fundamental to application of analysis to Engineering problems.

To develop the tool of power series and Fourier series for learning advanced Engineering Mathematics.

To familiarize the student with functions of several variables that is essential in most branches of engineering.

To develop the essential tool of matrices and linear algebra in a comprehensive manner.

Module 1: Calculus: (6 hours): Evolutes and involutes; Evaluation of definite and

improper integrals; Beta and Gamma functions and their properties; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and volumes of revolutions.

Module 2: Calculus: (6 hours): Rolle‘s Theorem, Mean value theorems, Taylor‘s and

Maclaurin theorems with remainders; indeterminate forms and L'Hospital's rule; Maxima and minima.

Module 3:Sequences and series: (10 hours): Convergence of sequence and series, tests for

convergence; Power series, Taylor's series, series for exponential, trigonometric and logarithm functions; Fourier series: Half range sine and cosine series, Parseval‘s theorem.

Module 4:Multivariable Calculus (Differentiation): (8 hours): Limit, continuity and partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total derivative; Tangent plane and normal line; Maxima, minima and saddle points; Method of Lagrange multipliers; Gradient, curl and divergence.

Module 5:Matrices (10hours): Inverse and rank of a matrix,rank-nullity theorem; System of linear equations; Symmetric, skew- symmetric and orthogonal matrices;

19

Determinants; Eigenvalues and eigenvectors; Diagonalization of matrices; Cayley-Hamilton Theorem, and Orthogonal transformation.

Textbooks/References: 1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition,Pearson,

Reprint, 2002. 2. Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,

2006. 3. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,

2008. 4. Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi,

11thReprint, 2010. 5. D. Poole, Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction, 2nd Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005. 6. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi

Publications, Reprint, 2008. 7. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36th Edition, 2010.

Course code ESC 102 Category Engineering Science Courses Course title Engineering Graphics & Design (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits

Semester - I 0 0 4 2

Pre-requisites (if any)

-

Engineering Graphics & Design [[L : 0; T:0; P : 4 ( 2 credits)]

Detailed contents Traditional Engineering Graphics: Principles of Engineering Graphics; Orthographic Projection; Descriptive Geometry; Drawing Principles; Isometric Projection; Surface Development; Perspective; Reading a Drawing; Sectional Views; Dimensioning & Tolerances; True Length, Angle; intersection, Shortest Distance.

Computer Graphics: Engineering Graphics Software; -Spatial Transformations; Orthographic Projections; Model Viewing; Co-ordinate Systems; Multi-view Projection; Exploded Assembly; Model Viewing; Animation; Spatial Manipulation; Surface Modelling; Solid Modelling; Introduction to Building Information Modelling (BIM)

Module 1: Introduction to Engineering Drawing covering,

Principles of Engineering Graphics and their significance, usage of Drawing instruments, lettering, Conic sections including the Rectangular Hyperbola (General method only); Cycloid, Epicycloid, Hypocycloid and Involute; Scales – Plain, Diagonal and Vernier Scales;

20

Module 2: Orthographic Projections covering, Principles of Orthographic Projections-Conventions - Projections of Points and lines inclined to both planes; Projections of planes inclined Planes - Auxiliary Planes; Module 3: Projections of Regular Solids covering, Those inclined to both the Planes- Auxiliary Views; Draw simple annotation, dimensioning and scale. Floor plans that include: windows, doors, and fixtures such as WC, bath, sink, shower, etc. Module 4: Sections and Sectional Views of Right Angular Solids covering, Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone – Auxiliary Views; Development of surfaces of Right Regular Solids - Prism, Pyramid, Cylinder and Cone; Draw the sectional orthographic views of geometrical solids, objects from industry and dwellings (foundation to slab only)

Module 5: Isometric Projections covering, Principles of Isometric projection – Isometric Scale, Isometric Views, Conventions; Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids; Conversion of Isometric Views to Orthographic Views and Vice-versa, Conventions; Module 6: Overview of Computer Graphics covering, listing the computer technologies that impact on graphical communication, Demonstrating knowledge of the theory of CAD software [such as: The Menu System, Toolbars (Standard, Object Properties, Draw, Modify and Dimension), Drawing Area (Background, Crosshairs, Coordinate System), Dialog boxes and windows, Shortcut menus (Button Bars), The Command Line (where applicable), The Status Bar, Different methods of zoom as used in CAD, Select and erase objects.; Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids]; Module 7: Customisation& CAD Drawing consisting of set up of the drawing page and the printer, including scale settings, Setting up of units and drawing limits; ISO and ANSI standards for coordinate dimensioning and tolerance; Orthographic constraints, Snap to objects manually and automatically; Producing drawings by using various coordinate input entry methods to draw straight lines, Applying various ways of drawing circles. Course Outcomes All phases of manufacturing or construction require the conversion of new ideas and design concepts into the basic line language of graphics. Therefore, there are many areas (civil, mechanical, electrical, architectural and industrial) in which the skills of the CAD technicians play major roles in the design and development of new products or construction. Students prepare for actual work situations through practical training in a new state-of-the-art computer designed CAD laboratory using engineering software. This course is designed to:

Learn about the visual aspects of engineering design.

21

Analyse engineering graphics standards.

Prepare orthographic and isometric projection.

Draw section of solids and conic sections.

Exposure to computer-aided geometric design

Suggested Text/Reference Books: i. Bhatt N.D., Panchal V.M. & Ingle P.R., (2014), Engineering

Drawing, Charotar Publishing House

ii. Shah, M.B. & Rana B.C. (2008), Engineering Drawing and Computer

Graphics, Pearson Education

iii. Agrawal B. & Agrawal C. M. (2012), Engineering Graphics, TMH

Publication

iv. Aggarwal M L & Sandhya Dixit (2017), Engineering Graphics and

Machine Drawing, Dhanpat Rai & Company P Ltd.

v. Narayana, K.L. & P Kannaiah (2008), Text book on Engineering

Drawing, Scitech Publishers

vi. Corresponding set of) CAD Software Theory and User Manuals

22

Course code ESC103(Th)/ESC105(Lab)

Category Engineering Science Course

Course title Programming for Problem Solving (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester – I/II

3 0 4 5 Pre-requisites (if

any) -

(i)Programming for Problem Solving ( [L : 3; T:0; P : 0 (3 credits)] [contact hrs : 40]

Detailed contents Unit 1 Introduction to Programming (4 lectures) Introduction to components of a computer

system (disks, memory, processor, where a program is stored and executed, operating system, compilers etc.) - (1 lecture).

Idea of Algorithm: steps to solve logical and numerical problems. Representation of Algorithm: Flowchart/Pseudocode with examples. (1 lecture)

From algorithms to programs; source code, variables (with data types) variables and memory locations, Syntax and Logical Errors in compilation, object and executable code- (2 lectures)

Unit 2:Arithmetic expressions and precedence (2 lectures) Conditional Branching and Loops (6 lectures) Writing and evaluation of conditionals and consequent branching (3 lectures) Iteration and loops (3 lectures)

Unit 3 Arrays (6 lectures) Arrays (1-D, 2-D), Character arrays and Strings Unit 4 Basic Algorithms (6 lectures) Searching, Basic Sorting Algorithms (Bubble, Insertion

and Selection), Finding roots of equations, notion of order of complexity through example programs (no formal definition required)

Unit 5 Function (5 lectures) Functions (including using built in libraries), Parameter passing in functions, call by value, Passing arrays to functions: idea of call by reference

Unit 6 Recursion (4 -5 lectures) Recursion, as a different way of solving problems. Example programs, such as Finding Factorial, Fibonacci series, Ackerman function etc. Quick sort or Merge sort.

Unit 7 Structure (4 lectures) Structures, Defining structures and Array of Structures

Unit 8 Pointers (2 lectures) Idea of pointers, Defining pointers, Use of Pointers in self-referential structures, notion of linked list (no implementation)

Unit 9 File handling (only if time is available, otherwise should be done as part of the lab)

Suggested Text Books (i) Byron Gottfried, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C, McGraw-Hill (ii) E. Balaguruswamy, Programming in ANSI C, Tata McGraw-Hill

Suggested Reference Books

(i) Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, The C Programming Language, Prentice Hall of India

23

Course Outcomes The student will learn

To formulate simple algorithms for arithmetic and logical problems. To translate the algorithms to programs (in C language). To test and execute the programs and correct syntax and logical errors. To implement conditional branching, iteration and recursion. To decompose a problem into functions and synthesize a complete program

using divide and conquer approach. To use arrays, pointers and structures to formulate algorithms and programs. To apply programming to solve matrix addition and multiplication problems

and searching and sorting problems. To apply programming to solve simple numerical method problems, namely

rot finding of function, differentiation of function and simple integration.

(ii) Laboratory - Programming for Problem Solving[ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 4 (2credits)] [The laboratory should be preceded or followed by a tutorial to explain the approach or algorithm to be implemented for the problem given.]

Tutorial 1: Problem solving using computers: Lab1: Familiarization with programming environment

Tutorial 2: Variable types and type conversions: Lab 2: Simple computational problems using arithmetic expressions

Tutorial 3: Branching and logical expressions: Lab 3: Problems involving if-then-else structures

Tutorial 4: Loops, while and for loops: Lab 4: Iterative problems e.g., sum of series

Tutorial 5: 1D Arrays: searching, sorting: Lab 5: 1D Array manipulation

Tutorial 6: 2D arrays and Strings Lab 6: Matrix problems, String operations

Tutorial 7: Functions, call by value: Lab 7: Simple functions

Tutorial 8 &9: Numerical methods (Root finding, numerical differentiation, numerical integration): Lab 8 and 9: Programming for solving Numerical methods problems

Tutorial 10: Recursion, structure of recursive calls Lab 10: Recursive functions

Tutorial 11: Pointers, structures and dynamic memory allocation Lab 11: Pointers and structures

Tutorial 12: File handling: Lab 12: File operations

Laboratory Outcomes To formulate the algorithms for simple problems To translate given algorithms to a working and correct program To be able to correct syntax errors as reported by the compilers To be able to identify and correct logical errors encountered at run time

24

To be able to write iterative as well as recursive programs To be able to represent data in arrays, strings and structures and manipulate

them through a program To be able to declare pointers of different types and use them in defining

self- referential structures. To be able to create, read and write to and from simple text files.

********

25

Course code BSC106D Category Basic Science Course Course title Mathematics -II (Calculus, Ordinary Differential

Equations and Complex Variable )

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits

Semester-II 3 1 0 4

Pre-requisites (if any)

-

OBJECTIVES: The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques in multivariate integration, ordinary and partial differential equations and complex variables. It aims to equip the students to deal with advanced level of mathematics and applications that would be essential for their disciplines. More precisely, the objectives are: a. To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals

and their usage. b. To introduce effective mathematical tools for the solutions of differential equations that

model physical processes. c. To introduce the tools of differentiation and integration of functions of complex variable

that are used in various techniques dealing engineering problems. Module 1:Multivariable Calculus (Integration): (10 hours) Multiple Integration: Double

integrals (Cartesian), change of order of integration in double integrals, Change of variables (Cartesian to polar), Applications: areas and volumes, Center of mass and Gravity (constant and variable densities);Triple integrals (Cartesian), orthogonal curvilinear coordinates, Simple applications involving cubes, sphere and rectangular parallelepipeds; Scalar line integrals, vector line integrals, scalar surface integrals, vector surface integrals, Theorems of Green, Gauss and Stokes.

Module 2:First order ordinary differential equations:(6 hours) Exact, linear and

Bernoulli‘s equations, Euler‘s equations, Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for p, equations solvable for y, equations solvable for x and Clairaut‘s type.

Module 3: Ordinary differential equations of higher orders:(8 hours) Second order linear

differential equations with variable coefficients, method of variation of parameters, Cauchy-Euler equation; Power series solutions; Legendre polynomials, Bessel functions of the first kind and their properties.

Module 4: Complex Variable – Differentiation:(8 hours): Differentiation, Cauchy-

Riemann equations, analytic functions, harmonic functions, finding harmonic conjugate; elementary analytic functions (exponential, trigonometric, logarithm) and their properties; Conformal mappings, Mobius transformations and their properties.

Module 5: Complex Variable – Integration:(8 hours): Contour integrals, Cauchy-Goursat

theorem (without proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without proof), Liouville‘s theorem and Maximum-Modulus theorem (without proof); Taylor‘s series, zeros of analytic functions, singularities, Laurent‘s series; Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem (without proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving sine and cosine, Evaluation of certain improper integrals using the Bromwich contour.

26

Textbooks/References: 1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson, Reprint, 2002. 2. Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006. 3. W. E. Boyce and R. C. DiPrima, Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, 9th Edn., Wiley India, 2009. 4. S. L. Ross, Differential Equations, 3rd Ed., Wiley India, 1984. 5. E. A. Coddington, An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations, Prentice Hall India, 1995. 6. E. L. Ince, Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover Publications, 1958. 7. J. W. Brown and R. V. Churchill, Complex Variables and Applications, 7th Ed., Mc- Graw Hill, 2004. 8. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications, Reprint, 2008. 9. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36th Edition, 2010

27

Course code ESC 101(Th)/ESC107(Lab) Category Engineering Science Course

Course title Basic Electrical Engineering (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester –I/II 3 1 2 5

Pre-requisites (if any) -

(i) Basic Electrical Engineering [L : 3; T:1; P : 0 (4 credits)]

Detailed contents : Module 1 : DC Circuits (8 hours) Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), voltage and

current sources, Kirchoff current and voltage laws, analysis of simple circuits with dc excitation. Superposition, Thevenin and Norton Theorems. Time-domain analysis of first-order RL and RC circuits.

Module 2: AC Circuits (8 hours) Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, peak and rms

values, phasor representation, real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor. Analysis of single-phase ac circuits consisting of R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC combinations (series and parallel), resonance. Three- phase balanced circuits, voltage and current relations in star and delta connections.

Module 3: Transformers (6 hours) Magnetic materials, BH characteristics, ideal and practical transformer, equivalent circuit, losses in transformers, regulation and efficiency. Auto-transformer and three-phase transformer connections.

Module 4: Electrical Machines (8 hours) Generation of rotating magnetic fields, Construction and working of a three-phase induction motor, Significance of torque-slip characteristic. Loss components and efficiency, starting and speed control of induction motor. Single-phase induction motor. Construction, working, torque-speed characteristic and speed control of separately excited dc motor. Construction and working of synchronous generators.

Module 5: Power Converters (6 hours) DC-DC buck and boost converters, duty ratio control. Single-phase and three-phase voltage source inverters; sinusoidal modulation.

Module 6: Electrical Installations (6 hours) Components of LT Switchgear: Switch Fuse Unit (SFU), MCB, ELCB, MCCB, Types of Wires and Cables, Earthing. Types of Batteries, Important Characteristics for Batteries. Elementary calculations for energy consumption, power factor improvement and battery backup.

Suggested Text / Reference Books (i) D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, ―Basic Electrical Engineering‖ , Tata McGraw

Hill, 2010. (ii) D. C. Kulshreshtha, ― Basic Electrical Engineering‖, McGraw Hill, 2009. (iii)L. S. Bobrow, ― Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering‖, Oxford University

Press, 2011. (iv)E. Hughes, ―Electrical and Electronics Technology‖, Pearson, 2010. (v) V. D. Toro, ―Electrical Engineering Fundamentals‖, Prentice Hall India, 1989.

28

Course Outcomes To understand and analyze basic electric and magnetic circuits To study the working principles of electrical machines and power converters. To introduce the components of low voltage electrical installations

(ii)Basic Electrical Engineering Laboratory [ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 2 (1 credit)] List of experiments/demonstrations: Basic safety precautions. Introduction and use of measuring instruments –

voltmeter, ammeter, multi-meter, oscilloscope. Real-life resistors, capacitors and inductors.

Measuring the steady-state and transient time-response of R-L, R-C, and R-L-C circuits to a step change in voltage (transient may be observed on a storage oscilloscope). Sinusoidal steady state response of R-L, and R-C circuits – impedance calculation and verification. Observation of phase differences between current and voltage. Resonance in R-L-C circuits.

Transformers: Observation of the no-load current waveform on an oscilloscope (non- sinusoidal wave-shape due to B-H curve nonlinearity should be shown along with a discussion about harmonics). Loading of a transformer: measurement of primary and secondary voltages and currents, and power.

Three-phase transformers: Star and Delta connections. Voltage and Current relationships (line-line voltage, phase-to-neutral voltage, line and phase currents). Phase-shifts between the primary and secondary side. Cumulative three-phase power in balanced three-phase circuits.

Demonstration of cut-out sections of machines: dc machine (commutator-brush arrangement), induction machine (squirrel cage rotor), synchronous machine (field winging - slip ring arrangement) and single-phase induction machine.

Torque Speed Characteristic of separately excited dc motor. Synchronous speed of two and four-pole, three-phase induction motors.

Direction reversal by change of phase-sequence of connections. Torque-Slip Characteristic of an induction motor. Generator operation of an induction machine driven at super- synchronous speed.

Synchronous Machine operating as a generator: stand-alone operation with a load. Control of voltage through field excitation.

Demonstration of (a) dc-dc converters (b) dc-ac converters – PWM waveform (c) the use of dc-ac converter for speed control of an induction motor and (d) Components of LT switchgear.

Laboratory Outcomes Get an exposure to common electrical components and their ratings. Make electrical connections by wires of appropriate ratings. Understand the usage of common electrical measuring instruments. Understand the basic characteristics of transformers and electrical machines. Get an exposure to the working of power electronic converters.

29

Course code BSC102(Th)/BSC105(Lab) Category Basic Science Course Course title Chemistry (Theory & Lab.)

Contents (i) Chemistry (Concepts in chemistry for engineering) (ii) Chemistry Laboratory

Scheme and Credits L T P Credits Semester –II 3 1 3 5.5

Pre-requisites (if any) -

(i)Chemistry (Concepts in chemistry for engineering) [L : 3; T:1; P : 0 (4 credits)]

Detailed contents (i) Atomic and molecular structure (12 lectures)

Schrodinger equation. Particle in a box solutions and their applications for conjugated molecules and nanoparticles. Forms of the hydrogen atom wave functions and the plots of these functions to explore their spatial variations. Molecular orbitals of diatomic molecules and plots of the multicenter orbitals. Equations for atomic and molecular orbitals. Energy level diagrams of diatomic. Pi-molecular orbitals of butadiene and benzene and aromaticity. Crystal field theory and the energy level diagrams for transition metal ions and their magnetic properties. Band structure of solids and the role of doping on band structures.

(ii) Spectroscopic techniques and applications (8 lectures) Principles of spectroscopy and selection rules. Electronic spectroscopy. Fluorescence and its applications in medicine. Vibrational and rotational spectroscopy of diatomic molecules. Applications. Nuclear magnetic resonance and magnetic resonance imaging, surface characterisation techniques. Diffraction and scattering.

(iii) Intermolecular forces and potential energy surfaces (4 lectures)

Ionic, dipolar and van Der Waals interactions. Equations of state of real gases and critical phenomena. Potential energy surfaces of H3, H2F and HCN and trajectories on these surfaces.

(iv) Use of free energy in chemical equilibria (6 lectures)

Thermodynamic functions: energy, entropy and free energy. Estimations of entropy and free energies. Free energy and emf. Cell potentials, the Nernst equation and applications. Acid base, oxidation reduction and solubility equilibria. Water chemistry. Corrosion. Use of free energy considerations in metallurgy through Ellingham diagrams.

(v) Periodic properties (4 Lectures)

Effective nuclear charge, penetration of orbitals, variations of s, p, d and f orbital energies of atoms in the periodic table, electronic configurations, atomic and ionic sizes, ionization energies, electron affinity and electronegativity, polarizability, oxidation states, coordination numbers and geometries, hard soft acids and bases, molecular geometries

(vi) Stereochemistry (4 lectures) Representations of 3 dimensional structures, structural isomers and stereoisomers, configurations and symmetry and chirality, enantiomers, diastereomers, optical

30

activity, absolute configurations and conformational analysis. Isomerism in transitional metal compounds

(vii) Organic reactions and synthesis of a drug molecule (4 lectures)

Introduction to reactions involving substitution, addition, elimination, oxidation, reduction, cyclization and ring openings. Synthesis of a commonly used drug molecule.

Suggested Text Books

1. University chemistry, by B. H. Mahan 2. Chemistry: Principles and Applications, by M. J. Sienko and A. Plane 3. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, by C. N. Banwell 4. Engineering Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book), by B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin and M. S.

Krishnan 5. Physical Chemistry, by P. W. Atkins 6. Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function by K. P. C. Volhardt and N. E. Schore,

5th Edition

Course Outcomes The concepts developed in this course will aid in quantification of several concepts in chemistry that have been introduced at the 10+2 levels in schools. Technology is being increasingly based on the electronic, atomic and molecular level modifications.

Quantum theory is more than 100 years old and to understand phenomena at nanometer levels; one has to base the description of all chemical processes at molecular levels. The course will enable the student to: Analyse microscopic chemistry in terms of atomic and molecular orbitals and

intermolecular forces. Rationalise bulk properties and processes using thermodynamic considerations. Distinguish the ranges of the electromagnetic spectrum used for exciting different

molecular energy levels in various spectroscopic techniques Rationalise periodic properties such as ionization potential, electronegativity,

oxidation states and electronegativity. List major chemical reactions that are used in the synthesis of molecules.

(ii) Chemistry Laboratory[ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 3 (1.5 credits)]

Choice of 10-12 experiments from the following: Determination of surface tension and viscosity Thin layer chromatography Ion exchange column for removal of hardness of water Determination of chloride content of water Colligative properties using freezing point depression Determination of the rate constant of a reaction Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions Potentiometry - determination of redox potentials and emfs Synthesis of a polymer/drug Saponification/acid value of an oil Chemical analysis of a salt Lattice structures and packing of spheres Models of potential energy surfaces Chemical oscillations- Iodine clock reaction Determination of the partition coefficient of a substance between two immiscible

liquids

31

Adsorption of acetic acid by charcoal Use of the capillary viscosimeters to the demonstrate of the isoelectric point as the pH

of minimum viscosity for gelatin sols and/or coagulation of the white part of egg .

Laboratory Outcomes The chemistry laboratory course will consist of experiments illustrating the

principles of chemistry relevant to the study of science and engineering. The students will learn to:

Estimate rate constants of reactions from concentration of reactants/products as a function of time

Measure molecular/system properties such as surface tension,viscosity, conductance of solutions, redox potentials, chloride content of water, etc

Synthesize a small drug molecule and analyse a salt sample

32

Course code HSMC 101(Th)/HSMC102(Lab) Category Humanities and Social Sciences including Management

courses Course title English (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits

Semester – II 2 0 2 3

Pre-requisites (if any)

-

English Detailed contents 1. Vocabulary Building

The concept of Word Formation, Root words from foreign languages and their use in English, Acquaintance with prefixes and suffixes from foreign languages in English to form derivatives. Synonyms, antonyms, and standard abbreviations.

2. Basic Writing Skills Sentence Structures, Use of phrases and clauses in sentences, Importance of proper

punctuation, Creating coherence, Organizing principles of paragraphs in documents, Techniques for writing precisely

3. Identifying Common Errors in Writing Subject-verb agreement, Noun-pronoun agreement, Misplaced modifiers, Articles,

Prepositions, Redundancies, Clichés

4. Nature and Style of sensible Writing Describing, Defining, Classifying, Providing examples or evidence

5. Writing introduction and conclusion

6. Writing Practices Comprehension, Précis Writing, Essay Writing

7. Oral Communication (This unit involves interactive practice sessions in Language Lab) Listening Comprehension Pronunciation, Intonation, Stress and Rhythm Common Everyday Situations: Conversations and Dialogues Communication at Workplace Interviews Formal Presentations

Suggested Readings: (i) Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995. (ii) Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. acmillan.2007 (iii) On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001 (iv) Study Writing. Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasly. Cambridge University Press. 2006. (v) Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and PushpLata. Oxford University Press. 2011. (vi) Exercises in Spoken English. Parts. I-III. CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford University Press

Course Outcomes The student will acquire basic proficiency in English including reading and listening comprehension, writing and speaking skills.

*******

33

Course code ESC 104 Category Engineering Science Courses Course title Workshop-I

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester-I - 0 4 2

Pre-requisites (if any) -

Workshop-I

PART-A Computer Engineering Workshop

Course Outcomes (COs): After the completion of the course the student will be able to: CO1- Acquire skills in basic engineering practice. CO2- Have working knowledge of various equipments used in workshop. CO3- Have hands on experience about various machines and their components. CO4- Obtain practical skills of basic operation and working of tools used in the workshop.

1. To study and demonstrate Block diagram of Digital Computer System and brief explanation of each unit.

2. To demonstrate History/ Generation/ classifications and different types of Personnel Computer.To study and demonstrate internal parts of a Computer System (Card level) and other peripheral devices and explanation of POST & BIOS.

3. To study and demonstrate primary memory and secondary memory. 4. To demonstrate CPU Block diagram and other Peripheral chips, Mother Board/ Main

Board and its parts, Connectors, Add On Card Slots etc. 5. To study working of various types of monitors: CRT type, LCD type & LED type. 6. To study Keyboard and Mouse: Wired, Wireless, Scroll & Optical with detail

working. 7. To study Printers: Dot Matrix Printers, Daisy wheel Printers, Ink-Jet Printers and

Laser Jet Printers with detailed working explanation. 8. Assembly / Installation and Maintenance of Personnel Computer Systems: Practical

exercise on assembly of Personnel Computer System, Installation of Operating System: Windows & Linux etc, Installation of other Application Softwares and Utility Softwares, Fault finding in Personnel Computers: Software or Hardware wise, Virus: Introduction, its Types & Removal techniques, Data Backup and Restore, Data Recovery Concepts, Typical causes of Data loss.

9. To demonstrate networking concepts: Introduction of Connecting devices: Hub, Switch & Router etc, Networking Cable preparation: Normal & Cross Cables, Data Transferring Techniques from one Computer System to another Computer System, Configuration of Switch/ Routers etc.

PART-B Electrical Workshop

1. Introduction of Electrical Safety precautions, Electrical Symbols, Electrical Materials, abbreviations commonly used in Electrical Engg. and familiarization with tools used in Electrical Works.

2. To make a Straight Joint & Tee joint on 7/22 PVC wire and Britannia Joint on GI wire.

3. To study fluorescent Tube Light, Sodium Lamp and High Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamp.

34

4. To study different types of earthing and protection devices e.g. MCBs, ELCBs and fuses.

5. To study different types of domestic and industrial wiring and wire up a circuit used for Stair case and Godown wiring.

6. To make the connection of fan regulator with lamp to study the effect of increasing and decreasing resistance in steps on the lamp.

7. To fabricate half wave and full wave rectifiers with filters on PCB. 8. Maintenance and Repair of Electrical equipment i,e Electric Iron , Electric Toaster

,Water heater, Air coolers and Electric Fans etc. 9. To study soldering process with simple soldering exercises. 10. To make the connection of a three core cable to three pin power plug and connect the

other cable end by secured eyes connection using 23/0.0076‖or 40/0.0076‖ cable. PART- C

Electronics Workshop 1. To study and demonstrate basic electronic components, Diode, Transistor, Resistance,

Inductor and capacitor. 2. To study and demonstrate resistance color coding, measurement using color code and

multimeter and error calculation considering tolerance of resistance. 3. To study and demonstrate Multimeter and CRO- front panel controls, description of

block diagram of CRT and block diagram of CRO. 4. To study and demonstrate Vp(peak voltage),Vpp(peak to peak voltage), Time,

frequency and phase using CRO. 5. Introduction to function generator. Functions of front panel controls and measurement

of different functions on CRO. 6. To study and demonstrate variable DC regulated power supply, function of controls

and DC measurement using multimeter and CRO. 7. Soldering practice on wire mesh or a resistance decade board includes fabrication,

soldering, lacing, harnessing forming and observation. 8. Testing of components using multimeter and CRO like diode, transistor, resistance

capacitor, Zener diode and LED. 9. To study and demonstrate rectification, half wave, Full wave and bridge rectifier.

Fabrication,assembly and waveform observation. 10. To design and fabricate a printed circuit board of a Zener regulated/ series regulated

power supply and various measurements, testing of power supply. Note: At least 8 exercises are to be performed from each part by the students.

35

Course code ESC 106 Category Engineering Science Courses Course title Workshop-II

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester-II - 0 4 2

Pre-requisites (if any) -

MECHANICAL WORKSHOP

Course Outcomes (COs): After studying this course the students would: CO 1- Have exposure to mechanical workshop layout and safety aspects. CO 2- Understand the functions of various machines and cutting tools used in machine shop. CO 3- Practice real time job preparation using various operations related to machine shop such as filing, drilling, milling & turning. CO 4 - Practice job preparation in welding shop. CO 5 - Learn to use different measuring tools like vernier caliper, vernier height gauge and micrometer. CO 6 - Practice job preparation in sheet metal shop. List of Exercises:

Fitting, sheet metal and welding workshop:

1. To study layout, safety measures and different engineering materials (mild steel, medium carbon steel, high carbon steel, high speed steel and cast iron etc) used in workshop.

2. To study and use of different types of tools, equipments, devices & machines used in fitting, sheet metal and welding section.

3. To determine the least count of vernier calliper, vernier height gauge, micrometer and take different reading over given metallic pieces using these instruments.

4. To study and demonstrate the parts, specifications & operations performed on lathe machine.

5. To study and demonstrate the parts, specifications & operations performed on milling machine.

6. To study and demonstrate the parts, specifications & operations performed on shaper machine.

7. To prepare a job involving different type of filing practice exercise in specified dimensions.

8. To prepare a job involving multi operational exercise (drilling, counter sinking, tapping, reaming, hack sawing etc.)

9. To prepare a multi operational sheet metal job (self secured single groove joint/ hasp & stay etc.).

10. To practice striking an arc, straight short bead, straight continuous bead and restart of electrode in flat position by arc welding on given M.S. plate as per size.

11. To practice tack weld of two close plate in flat position by arc welding on given M.S. plate as per size.

12. To practice close butt joint in flat position by arc welding on given M.S. plate as per size.

NOTE: - At least nine exercises should be performed from the above list; remaining three may either be performed from above list or designed by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus and facilities available in institute.

36

EC301 Electronics Devices L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam. : 3 Hrs. Course Objects:

To give exposure to students about Semiconductor Physics. To give the exposure about characteristics of semiconductor devices. To introduce the working of different semiconductor electronics devices. To introduce about the fabrication technologies of semiconductor electronics devices.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Semiconductor Physics: Review of Quantum Mechanics, Electrons in

periodic Lattices, E-k diagrams. Energy bands in intrinsic and extrinsic silicon: Carrier transport: diffusion current, drift current, mobility and resistivity, sheet resistance, design of resistors

Unit 2: Generation and recombination of carriers, Poisson and continuity equation P-N

junction characteristics, I-V characteristics, and small signal switching models: Avalanche breakdown, Zener diode, Schottky diode

Unit 3: Bipolar Junction Transistor, I-V characteristics, Ebers-Moll Model, MOS capacitor,

C-V characteristics, MOSFET, I-V characteristics, and small signal models of MOS transistor, LED, photodiode and solar cell

Unit 4: Integrated circuit fabrication process: oxidation, diffusion, ion implantation,

photolithography, etching, chemical vapor deposition, sputtering, twin-tub CMOS process.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the principles of semiconductor Physics. Understand and utilize the mathematical models of semiconductor junctions and MOS

transistors for circuits and systems. Understand the design & characteristics of semiconductor device. Understand various semiconductor, fabrication process.

Text /Reference Books:

1. G. Streetman, and S. K. Banerjee, ―Solid State Electronic Devices,‖ 7th edition, Pearson,2014.

2. D. Neamen, D. Biswas "Semiconductor Physics and Devices," McGraw-Hill Education

3. S. M. Sze and K. N. Kwok, ―Physics of Semiconductor Devices,‖ 3rd edition, John Wiley &Sons, 2006.

4. C.T. Sah, ―Fundamentals of solid state electronics,‖ World Scientific Publishing Co. Inc, 1991.

5. Y. Tsividis and M. Colin, ―Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor,‖ Oxford Univ.Press, 2011.

37

EC302 Digital System Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the fundamentals of digital electronics. To familiar the students about the design and analyze various combinational circuits. To give exposure to the students about design and analyze various sequential circuits. To introduce logic families & semiconductor memories. To introduce the basic knowledge of HDL & their ways of implementation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Logic Simplification and Combinational Logic Design: Review of Boolean Algebra

and De Morgan‘s Theorem, SOP & POS forms, Canonical forms, Karnaugh maps up to 6 variables, Binary codes, Code Conversion.

Unit 2: MSI devices like Comparators, Multiplexers, Encoder, Decoder, Driver &

Multiplexed Display, Half and Full Adders, Subtractors, Serial and Parallel Adders, BCD Adder, Barrel shifter and ALU

Unit 3: Sequential Logic Design: Building blocks like S-R, JK and Master-Slave JK FF,

Edge triggered FF, Ripple and Synchronous counters, Shift registers, Finite state machines, Design of synchronous FSM, Algorithmic State Machines charts. Designing synchronous circuits like Pulse train generator, Pseudo Random Binary Sequence generator, Clock generation

Unit 4: Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: TTL NAND gate, Specifications,

Noise margin, Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, Tristate TTL, ECL, CMOS families and their interfacing, Memory elements, Concept of Programmable logic devices like FPGA, Logic implementation using Programmable Devices.

Unit 5: VLSI Design flow: Design entry, Schematic, FSM & HDL, different modeling styles

in VHDL, Data types and objects, Dataflow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling, Synthesis and Simulation VHDL constructs and codes for combinational and sequential circuits.

Course outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Design and analyze combinational logic circuits. Acquire basic knowledge of digital logic families & semiconductor memories. Design & analyze synchronous sequential logic circuits. Use HDL & appropriate EDA tools for digital logic design and simulation.

Text/Reference Books:

1. R.P. Jain, ―Modern digital Electronics‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2009. 2. Douglas Perry, ―VHDL‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002. 3. W.H. Gothmann, ―Digital Electronics- An introduction to theory and practice‖, PHI,

2nd edition, 2006. 4. D.V. Hall, ―Digital Circuits and Systems‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 1989. 5. Charles Roth, ―Digital System Design using VHDL‖, Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition

2012.

38

EC304 Network Theory L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce students about basic electrical circuits with nodal & mesh analysis. To give exposure to the students about various network theorem applicable to AC &

DC circuits. To introduce the application of Laplace & Fourier behavior. To introduce students about synthesis and analysis of electrical network. To introduce students about transient analysis, two port of network and various types

of filters.

Syllabus Unit 1: Node and Mesh Analysis, matrix approach of network containing voltage and current

sources, and reactances, source transformation and duality. Network theorems: Superposition, reciprocity, Thevenin‘s, Norton‘s, Maximum power Transfer, compensation and Tallegen's theorem as applied to AC, circuits. Trigonometric and exponential Fourier series: Discrete spectra and symmetry of waveform, steady state response of a network to non-sinusoidal periodic inputs, power factor, effective values, Fourier transform and continuous spectra, three phase unbalanced circuit and power calculation.

Unit 2: Laplace transforms and properties: Partial fractions, singularity functions, waveform

synthesis, analysis of RC, RL, and RLC networks with and without initial conditions with Laplace transforms evaluation of initial conditions.

Unit 3: Transient behavior, concept of complex frequency, Driving points and transfer

functions poles and zeros of admittance function, their properties, sinusoidal response from pole-zero locations, convolution theorem and Two four port network and interconnections, Behaviors of series and parallel resonant circuits, Introduction to band pass, low pass, high pass and band reject filters.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand basics electrical circuits with nodal and mesh analysis. Appreciate electrical network theorems. Apply Laplace Transform for steady state and transient analysis. Determine different network functions. Appreciate the frequency domain techniques.

Text/Reference Books

1. Van, Valkenburg; ―Network analysis‖; Prentice hall of India, 2000. 2. Sudhakar, A., Shyammohan, S. P.; ―Circuits and Network‖; Tata McGraw-Hill New

Delhi, 1994. 3. A William Hayt, ―Engineering Circuit Analysis‖ 8th Edition, McGraw-Hill

Education.

39

ESC01 Engineering Mechanics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 1 0 4 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective:-

To provide an introductory treatment of Engineering To give a working knowledge of statics with emphasis on force equilibrium and free body

diagrams. To provide an understanding of the kinds of stress and deformation and how to determine

them in a wide range of simple, practical structural problems. To give an understanding of the mechanical behavior of materials under various load

conditions

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Engineering Mechanics covering, Force Systems Basic concepts, Particle equilibrium in 2-D & 3-D; Rigid Body equilibrium; System of Forces, Coplanar Concurrent Forces, Components in Space – Resultant- Moment of Forces and its Application; Couples and Resultant of Force System, Equilibrium of System of Forces, Free body diagrams, Equations of Equilibrium of Coplanar Systems and Spatial Systems; Static Indeterminancy

Unit 2: Friction covering, Types of friction, Limiting friction, Laws of Friction, Static and

Dynamic Friction; Motion of Bodies, wedge friction, screw jack & differential screw jack.

Unit 3: Basic Structural Analysis covering, Equilibrium in three dimensions; Method of Sections;

Method of Joints; How to determine if a member is in tension or compression; Simple Trusses; Zero force members; Beams & types of beams; Frames & Machines;

Unit 4: Centroid and Centre of Gravity covering, Centroid of simple figures from first principle,

centroid of composite sections; Centre of Gravity and its implications; Area moment of inertia- Definition, Moment of inertia of plane sections from first principles, Theorems of moment of inertia, Moment of inertia of standard sections and composite sections; Mass moment inertia of circular plate, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Hook.

Unit 5: Virtual Work and Energy Method- Virtual displacements, principle of virtual work for

particle and ideal system of rigid bodies, degrees of freedom. Active force diagram, systems with friction, mechanical efficiency. Conservative forces and potential energy (elastic and gravitational), energy equation for equilibrium. Applications of energy method for equilibrium. Stability of equilibrium.

Unit 6: Review of particle dynamics- Rectilinear motion; Plane curvilinear motion (rectangular,

path, and polar coordinates). 3-D curvilinear motion; Relative and constrained motion; Newton‘s 2nd law (rectangular, path, and polar coordinates). Work-kinetic energy power, potential energy.Impulse-momentum (linear, angular); Impact (Direct and oblique).

Unit 7:Introduction to Kinetics of Rigid Bodies covering, Basic terms, general principles in

dynamics; Types of motion, Instantaneous centre of rotation in plane motion and simple problems; D‘Alembert‘s principle and its applications in plane motion and connected bodies Work energy principle and its application in plane motion of connected bodies; Kinetics of rigid body rotation.

40

Unit 8:Mechanical Vibrations covering, Basic terminology, free and forced vibrations, resonance

and its effects; Degree of freedom; Derivation for frequency and amplitude of free vibrations without damping and single degree of freedom system, simple problems, types of pendulum, use of simple, compound and torsion pendulums; Tutorialsfrom the above Units covering, To find the various forces and angles including resultants in various parts of wall crane, roof truss, pipes, etc.; To verify the line of polygon on various forces; To find coefficient of friction between various materials on inclined plan; Free body diagrams various systems including block-pulley; To verify the principle of moment in the disc apparatus; Helical block; To draw a load efficiency curve for a screw jack

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Use scalar and vector analytical techniques for analyzing forces in statically determinate structures

Apply fundamental concepts of kinematics and kinetics of particles to the analysis of simple, practical problems

Apply basic knowledge of maths and physics to solve real-world problems, Understand measurement error, and propagation of error in processed data.

Understand basic kinematics concepts – displacement, velocity and acceleration (and their angular counterparts);

Understand basic dynamics concepts – force, momentum, work and energy; Understand and be able to apply Newton‘s laws of motion;

Understand and be able to apply other basic dynamics concepts - the Work-Energy principle, Impulse-Momentum principle and the coefficient of restitution;

Extend all of concepts of linear kinetics to systems in general plane motion (applying Euler's Equation and considering energy of a system in general plane motion, and the work of couples and moments of forces)

Learn to solve dynamics problems. Appraise given information and determine which concepts apply, and choose an appropriate solution strategy; and Attain an introduction to basic machine parts such as pulleys and mass-spring systems.

Text/Reference Books: 1. Irving H. Shames (2006), Engineering Mechanics, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall 2. F. P. Beer and E. R. Johnston (2011), Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol I - Statics,

Vol II, – Dynamics, 9th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill 3. R. C. Hibbler (2006), Engineering Mechanics: Principles of Statics and Dynamics,

Pearson Press. 4. Andy Ruina and Rudra Pratap (2011), Introduction to Statics and Dynamics, Oxford

University Press 5. Shanes and Rao (2006), Engineering Mechanics, Pearson Education, 6. Hibler and Gupta (2010),Engineering Mechanics (Statics, Dynamics) by Pearson

Education 7. Reddy Vijaykumar K. and K. Suresh Kumar(2010), Singer‘s Engineering Mechanics 8. Bansal R.K.(2010), A Text Book of Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications 9. Khurmi R.S. (2010), Engineering Mechanics, S. Chand & Co. 10. Tayal A.K. (2010), Engineering Mechanics, Umesh Publications

41

BS301 Mathematics-III L T P CR Theory : 75 3 1 0 4 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: To gain knowledge about: Laplace Transform, Fourier Transform, Z- transform and Numerical Methods.

Unit 1: Transform Calculus-1: Polynomials – Orthogonal Polynomials – Lagrange‘s, Chebysev Polynomials; Trigonometric Polynomials. Laplace Transform, Properties of Laplace Transform, Laplace transform of periodic functions. Finding inverse Laplace transform by different methods, convolution theorem. Evaluation of integrals by Laplace transform, solving ODEs and PDEs by Laplace Transform method.

Unit 2: Transform Calculus-2: Fourier transforms, Z-transform : Properties, methods, inverses

and their applications. Unit 3: Vector differentiation, gradient, divergence and curl, line and surface integrals, path

independence, statements and illustrations of theorems of Green, Stokes and Gauss, arc length parameterization, applications.

Course Outcome:

To understand Laplace Transform and its applications To understand Fourier Transform, Z Transform and their applications To solve the curl, gradient and divergence To apply the applications curl, gradient and divergence in various theorems in

various applications Textbooks/References

1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.

2. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 35th Edition, 2000. 3. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008. 4. P. Kandasamy, K. Thilagavathy, K. Gunavathi, Numerical Methods, S. Chand

& Company, 2nd Edition, Reprint 2012. 5. S.S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.

42

MC01 Indian Constitution L T P CR Theory :75 2 0 0 0 Class Work :25

Total :100

Basic features and fundamental principles

The Constitution of India is the supreme law of India. Parliament of India cannot make any law which violates the Fundamental Rights enumerated under the Part III of the Constitution. The Parliament of India has been empowered to amend the Constitution under Article 368, however, it cannot use this power to change the ―basic structure‖ of the constitution, which has been ruled and explained by the Supreme Court of India in its historical judgments. The Constitution of India reflects the idea of ―Constitutionalism‖ – a modern and progressive concept historically developed by the thinkers of ―liberalism‖ – an ideology which has been recognized as one of the most popular political ideology and result of historical struggles against arbitrary use of sovereign power by state. The historic revolutions in France, England, America and particularly European Renaissance and Reformation movement have resulted into progressive legal reforms in the form of ―constitutionalism‖ in many countries. The Constitution of India was made by borrowing models and principles from many countries including United Kingdom and America. The Constitution of India is not only a legal document but it also reflects social, political and economic perspectives of the Indian Society. It reflects India‘s legacy of ―diversity‖. It has been said that Indian constitution reflects ideals of its freedom movement; however, few critics have argued that it does not truly incorporate our own ancient legal heritage and cultural values. No law can be ―static‖ and therefore the Constitution of India has also been amended more than one hundred times. These amendments reflect political, social and economic developments since the year 1950. The Indian judiciary and particularly the Supreme Court of India has played an historic role as the guardian of people. It has been protecting not only basic ideals of the Constitution but also strengthened the same through progressive interpretations of the text of the Constitution. The judicial activism of the Supreme Court of India and its historic contributions has been recognized throughout the world and it gradually made it ―as one of the strongest court in the world‖.

Course content 1. Meaning of the constitution law and constitutionalism 2. Historical perspective of the Constitution of India 3. Salient features and characteristics of the Constitution of India 4. Scheme of the fundamental rights 5. The scheme of the Fundamental Duties and its legal status 6. The Directive Principles of State Policy – Its importance and implementation 7. Federal structure and distribution of legislative and financial powers between the

Union and the States 8. Parliamentary Form of Government in India – The constitution powers and

status of the President of India 9. Amendment of the Constitutional Powers and Procedure 10. The historical perspectives of the constitutional amendments in India 11. Emergency Provisions: National Emergency, President Rule,

Financial Emergency 12. Local Self Government – Constitutional Scheme in India 13. Scheme of the Fundamental Right to Equality

43

14. Scheme of the Fundamental Right to certain Freedom under Article 19

15. Scope of the Right to Life and Personal Liberty under Article 21.

REFERENCES:

1. The Constitutional Law Of India 9th Edition, by Pandey. J. N. 2. The Constitution of India by P.M.Bakshi 3. Constitution Law of India by Narender Kumar 4. Bare Act by P. M. Bakshi

44

MC02 Essence of Indian Tradition Knowledge

भारतीयविद्यासार

L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam: 3 Hrs. Course objective The course aims at imparting basic principles of thought process, reasoning and inferencing. Sustainability is at the core of Indian Traditional knowledge Systems connecting society and nature. Holistic life style of yogic science and wisdom capsules in Sanskrit literature are also important in modern society with rapid technological advancements and societal disruptions. Part-I focuses on introduction to Indian Knowledge Systems, Indian perspective of modern scientific world-view, and basic principles of Yoga and holistic health care system.

Course Contents

Modern Science and Indian Knowledge System

Yoga and Holistic Health care

Case studies

References

V. Sivaramakrishnan (Ed.), Cultural Heritage of India-course material, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Mumbai. 5th Edition, 2014

Swami Jitatmanand, Modern Physics and Vedant, Bharatiya Vidya

Bhavan

Swami Jitatmanand, Holistic Science and Vedant, Bharatiya Vidya

Bhavan

Fritzof Capra, Tao of Physics

Fritzof Capra, The Wave of life

VN Jha (Eng. Trans.), Tarkasangraha of Annam Bhatta,

International Chinmay Foundation, Velliarnad, Arnakulam

Yoga Sutra of Patanjali, Ramakrishna Mission, Kolkata

GN Jha (Eng. Trans.), Ed. RN Jha, Yoga-darshanam with Vyasa Bhashya, Vidyanidhi Prakashan, Delhi 2016

RN Jha, Science of Consciousness Psychotherapyand Yoga Practices, Vidyanidhi Prakashan, Delhi 2016

P B Sharma (English translation), Shodashang Hridayan Pedagogy: Problem based learning, group discussions, collaborative mini projects.

Outcome: Ability to understand, connect up and explain basics of Indian traditional knowledge in modern scientific perspective.

45

EC 351 Electronics Devices Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments

1. Study of IV Characteristics of PN junction diode.

2. Study of IV Characteristics of zener diode.

3. Study of transistor common base characteristics

4. Study of transistor common emitter characteristics.

5. Study of Zener diode as a voltage regulator.

6. Study of FET common source amplifier.

7. Study of FET common Drain amplifier.

8. Study of Zener diode as a voltage regulator.

9. Study of CC amplifier as a buffer.

10. Study of 3-terminal IC regulator.

11. Study of LED, photo diode and solar cell.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the characteristics of PN junction diode. Understand the application of diode & Zener diode experimentally. Obtain input and output characteristics of transistors in CE, CB & CC configurations. Obtain FET characteristics. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way.

46

EC 352 Digital System Design Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50 List of Experiments 1. Study of TTL gates – AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EX-OR, EX-NOR.

2. Design & realize a given function using K-maps and verify its performance.

3. To verify the operation of multiplexer & Demultiplexer.

4. To verify the operation of comparator.

5. To verify the truth tables of S-R, J-K, T & D type flip flops.

6. To verify the operation of bi-directional shift register.

7. To design & verify the operation of 3-bit synchronous counter.

8. Design all gates using VHDL.

9. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the

hardware generated a. half adder b. full adder

10. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the

hardware generated a. multiplexer b. demultiplexer

11. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the

hardware generated a. decoder b. encoder

12. Write a VHDL program for a comparator and check the wave forms and the

hardware generated

13. Write a VHDL program for a code converter and check the wave forms and the

hardware generated

14. Write a VHDL program for a FLIP-FLOP and check the wave forms and the

hardware generated

15. Write a VHDL program for a up/down counter and check the wave forms and the

hardware generated.

Course Outcome: On the successful competition of this course, the students should be able to: Verify the operation of basic & universal gates. Design & verify the standards of combinational circuits. Verify the operations of different type of flip flops. Design the counters using flip flops for a given sequence. Verify the working of shift registers. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way

47

EC 353 Network Theory Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments 1. Transient response of RC circuit.

2. Transient response of RL circuit.

3. To find the resonance frequency, Band width of RLC series circuit.

4. To calculate and verify ―Z" parameters of a two port network.

5. To calculate and verify "Y" parameters of a two port network.

6. To determine equivalent parameter of parallel connections of two port network.

7. To plot the frequency response of low pass filter and determine half-power frequency.

8. To plot the frequency response of high pass filters and determines the half-power frequency.

9. To plot the frequency response of band-pass filters and determines the band-width.

10. To calculate and verify "ABCD" parameters of a two port network.

11. To synthesize a network of a given network function and verify its response.

12. Introduction of P-Spice

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Design RC & RL circuits and check their transient response experimentally. Design RLC series circuits & find the frequency response. Analyse the circuits of two port network and verify ‗ABCD‘ ‗Z‘ & ‗Y‘ parameters of two

port network. Design & plot the frequency response of low pass filter, high pass filter & band-pass filter

experimentally. Synthesize a network using Foster & Cauer Forms. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way.

48

ES 303 Electronics Workshop-I L T P CR Theory : 70 0 0 6 3 Class Work : 30

Total : 100

List of Problems 1. Testing of Electronics Devices

1) Diode 2) Transoms 3) Capacitors 4) Inductor

2. Design, Fabrication, Testing & Measurement of half & full wave rectifier

3. Design and fabrication of fixed & variable regulators (Zenes, Transistor and IC)

4. Design of transistor as a switch, amplifier and multivibrator.

5. To study of 555 as Astable, Monostable, Bistable multivibrator.

6. To design various applications of OP amp such as

1) Amplifiers (Inverting & Non Inverting)

2) Adder, Subtractor & scale changer

3) Integrator and differentiator

4) Oscillator and Schmitt trigger

7. Mini project based on anolog circuits of above.

49

EC401 Analog and Digital Communication L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To study the concepts of signal & system as well as various modulation techniques. To study the concept of probability and random process as well as behavior of noises

in communication system. To introduce the concept of Sampling Theorem and Pulse Modulation Techniques. To introduce the concept of different digital modulations schemes and evaluate their

bit error performances.

Syllabus Unit 1: Review of signals and systems, Frequency domain representation of signals, Principles of

Amplitude Modulation Systems, DSB, SSB and VSB modulations, Angle Modulation, Representation of FM and PM signals, Spectral characteristics of angle modulated signals.

Unit 2: Review of probability and random process, Gaussian and white noise characteristics,

Noise in amplitude modulation systems, Noise in Frequency modulation systems, Pre-emphasis and Deemphasis, Threshold effect in angle modulation.

Unit 3: Pulse modulation, sampling process, Pulse Amplitude and Pulse code modulation (PCM),

Differential pulse code modulation, Delta modulation, Noise considerations in PCM, Time Division multiplexing, Digital Multiplexers.

Unit 4: Elements of Detection Theory, Optimum detection of signals in noise, Coherent

communication with waveforms, Probability of Error evaluations, Baseband Pulse Transmission, Inter symbol Interference and Nyquist criterion, Pass band Digital Modulation schemes, Phase Shift Keying, Frequency Shift Keying, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, Continuous Phase Modulation and Minimum Shift Keying.

Unit 5: Digital Modulation tradeoffs, Optimum demodulation of digital signals over band-limited

channels, Maximum likelihood sequence detection (Viterbi receiver), Equalization Techniques, Synchronization and Carrier Recovery for Digital modulation.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Analyze and compare different analog modulation schemes for their efficiency and bandwidth.

Analyze the behaviour of a communication system in presence of noise. Investigate pulsed modulation system and analyze their system performance. Analyze different digital modulation schemes and can compute the bit error performance.

Text/Reference Books: 1. Haykin S., "Communications Systems", John Wiley and Sons, 2001. 2. Proakis J. G. and Salehi M., "Communication Systems Engineering", Pearson Education,

2002. 3. Taub H. and Schilling D.L., "Principles of Communication Systems‖, Tata McGraw Hill,

2001. 4. Wozencraft J. M. and Jacobs I. M., ``Principles of Communication Engineering'',John

Wiley, 1965. 5. Barry J. R., Lee E. A. and Messerschmitt D. G., ``Digital Communication'', Kluwer

Academic Publishers, 2004. 6. Proakis J.G., ``Digital Communications'', 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2000.

50

EC402 Analog Circuits L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study the concept of diode circuits, BJT and FET with their configurations To familiar with different types of power amplifiers and different types of feedback

configuration. To introduce the concept of different types of oscillators. To give exposure to the students regarding OP-AMP and their various applications To give exposure to the students regarding the concepts of different types of DAC and

ADC. Syllabus

Unit 1: Diode Circuits, Amplifier models: Voltage amplifier, current amplifier, trans-

conductance amplifier and trans-resistance amplifier. Biasing schemes for BJT and FET amplifiers, bias stability, various configurations (such as CE/CS, CB/CG, CC/CD) and their features, small signal analysis, low frequency transistor models, estimation of voltage gain, input resistance, output resistance etc., design procedure for particular specifications, low frequency analysis of multistage amplifiers.

Unit 1: High frequency transistor models, frequency response of single stage and multistage

amplifiers, cascode amplifier. Various classes of operation (Class A, B, AB, C etc.), their power efficiency and linearity issues. Feedback topologies: Voltage series, current series, voltage shunt, current shunt, effect of feedback on gain, bandwidth etc., calculation with practical circuits, concept of stability, gain margin and phase margin.

Unit 2: Oscillators: Review of the basic concept, Barkhausen criterion, RC oscillators (phase

shift, Wien bridge etc.), LC oscillators (Hartley, Colpitt, Clapp etc.), non-sinusoidal oscillators.

Unit 3: Current mirror: Basic topology and its variants, V-I characteristics, output resistance and

minimum sustainable voltage (VON), maximum usable load. Differential amplifier: Basic structure and principle of operation, calculation of differential gain, common mode gain, CMRR and ICMR. OP-AMP design: design of differential amplifier for a given specification, design of gain stages and output stages, compensation.

Unit 4: OP-AMP applications: review of inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, integrator and

differentiator, summing amplifier, precision rectifier, Schmitt trigger and its applications. Active filters: Low pass, high pass, band pass and band stop, design guidelines.

Unit 5: Digital-to-analog converters (DAC): Weighted resistor, R-2R ladder, resistorstring etc.,

Analog to-digital converters (ADC): Single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, flash etc. Switched capacitor circuits: Basic concept, practical configurations, application in amplifier, integrator, ADC etc.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the characteristics of diodes and transistors. Design and analyze various rectifier and amplifier circuits. Design sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal oscillators. Understand the functioning of OP-AMP and design OP-AMP based circuits. Design ADC and DAC.

51

Text/Reference Books:

1. J.V. Wait, L.P. Huelsman and GA Korn, Introduction to Operational Amplifier theory and applications, McGraw Hill, 1992.

2. J. Millman and A. Grabel, Microelectronics, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill, 1988. 3. P. Horowitz and W. Hill, The Art of Electronics, 2nd edition, Cambridge University

Press, 1989. 4. A.S. Sedra and K.C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, Saunder's College11 5. Publishing, Edition IV. 6. Paul R. Gray and Robert G.Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits,

John Wiley, 3rd Edition.

52

ECC03 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study and familiarise with building blocks of micro computers systems and Assembly programming of 8086.

To apply the fundamental of programming and Interfacing through 8051. To know about virtual, cache and architecture of advance processors. To know fundamentals of RISC and ARM microcontrollers and interfaces design.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Overview of microcomputer systems and their building blocks, memory interfacing,

concepts of interrupts and Direct Memory Access, 8086 Instruction, addressing modes, instruction set of Microcontroller (with examples of 8085 and 8086)

Unit 2: Peripherals and Interfacing with Microprocessor (8086)-PPI-8255, Timers-

8253/8254, Programmable Interrupt Controller 8259, Interfacing of Microprocessor with I/O, A/D, D/A, Switches & LEDs

Unit 3: Microcontroller 8051, Architecture, programming, interfacing with peripherals - timer,

serial I/O, parallel I/O, A/D and D/A converters, Arithmetic Coprocessors, System level interfacing design

Unit 4: Concepts of virtual memory, Cache memory, advanced coprocessor Architectures- 286,

486, Pentium Unit 5: Introduction to RISC processors, PIC, ARM microcontrollers architectures. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Do assembly language programming Do interfacing design of peripherals like, I/O, A/D, D/A, timer etc. Develop systems using different microcontrollers Understand RSIC processors and design ARM microcontroller based systems

Text/Reference Books:

1. R. S. Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture: Programming and Applications with the 8085/8080A, Penram International Publishing, 1996.

2. D A Patterson and J H Hennessy, "Computer Organization and Design The hardware and software interface. Morgan Kaufman Publishers.

3. Douglas Hall, Microprocessors Interfacing, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991. 4. Kenneth J. Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller, Penram International Publishing, 1996.

53

EC404 Computer Architecture L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects:

To study the basic of computer system. To study general system architecture. To study memory hierarchy & I/O techniques. To study basic non-pipelined CPU architecture & how its performance can be enhanced

using pipelining. Syllabus

Unit 1: Basic Structure of Computers, Functional units, software, performance issues software,

machine instructions and programs, Types of instructions, Instruction sets: Instruction formats, Assembly language, Stacks, Ques, Subroutines.

Unit 2: Processor organization, Information representation, number formats. Unit 3: Multiplication & division, ALU design, Floating Point arithmetic, IEEE 754 floating

point Formats, Control Design, Instruction sequencing, Interpretation, Hard wired control-Design methods, and CPU control unit, Microprogrammed Control-Basic concepts, minimizing microinstruction size, multiplier control unit, Microprogrammed computers-CPU control unit

Unit 4: Memory organization, device characteristics, RAM, ROM, Memory management,

Concept of Cache & associative memories, Virtual memory. System organization, Input-Output systems, Interrupt, DMA, Standard I/O interfaces

Unit 5: Concept of parallel processing, Pipelining, Forms of parallel processing, interconnect

network Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Learn how computers work. Know basic principles of computer‘s working. Analyze the performance of computers. Know how computers are designed and built. Understand issues affecting modern processors (caches, pipelines etc.).

Text/Reference Books:

1. V.Carl Hammacher, ―Computer Organisation‖, Fifth Edition. 2. A.S.Tanenbum, ―Structured Computer Organisation‖ , PHI, Third edition. 3. Y.Chu, "Computer Organization and Microprogramming‖, II, Englewood Chiffs, N.J.,

Prentice Hall Edition. 4. M.M.Mano, ―Computer System Architecture‖, Edition. 5. C.W.Gear, ―Computer Organization and Programming‖, McGraw Hill, N.V. Edition. 6. Hayes J.P, ―Computer Architecture and Organization‖, PHI, Second edition.

54

ECC01 Signal and Systems L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects:

To introduce students about various types of signals and their classifications. To introduce students about LSI (linear shift invariant) systems and their properties. To introduce students about properties of Fourier Series, Fourier Transforms like DTFT

and DFT. To introduce students about Laplace Transform, Z Transform and State-Space Analysis.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Signals and systems as seen in everyday life, and in various branches of engineering and

science, Energy and power signals, continuous and discrete time signals, continuous and discrete amplitude signals, System properties, linearity: additivity and homogeneity, shift-invariance, causality, stability, realizability.

Unit 2: Linear shift-invariant (LSI) systems, impulse response and step response, convolution,

input output behavior with a periodic convergent inputs, Characterization of causality and stability of linear shift-invariant systems, System representation through differential equations and difference equations.

Unit 3: Periodic and semi-periodic inputs to an LSI system, the notion of a frequency response

and its relation to the impulse response, Fourier series representation, the Fourier Transform, convolution/multiplication and their effect in the frequency domain, magnitude and phase response, Fourier domain duality. The Discrete-Time Fourier Transform (DTFT) and the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), Parseval's Theorem, the idea of signal space and orthogonal bases

Unit 4: The Laplace Transform, notion of eigen functions of LSI systems, a basis of eigen

functions, region of convergence, poles and zeros of system, Laplace domain analysis, solution to differential equations and system behavior

Unit 5: The z-Transform for discrete time signals and systems eigen functions, region of

convergence, z-domain analysis. Unit 6: State-space analysis and multi-input, multi-output representation, the state-transition

matrix and its role, The Sampling Theorem and its implications spectra of sampled signals. Reconstruction: ideal interpolator, zero-order hold, first order hold, and so on, Aliasing and its effects, relation between continuous and discrete time systems.

Course outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Analyze different types of signals. Represent continuous and discrete systems in time and frequency domain using different

transforms. Investigate stability of system. Perform sampling and reconstruction of a signal.

55

Text/Reference books: 1. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and I.T. Young, "Signals and Systems", Prentice Hall,

1983. 2. R.F. Ziemer, W.H. Tranter and D.R. Fannin, "Signals and Systems - Continuous and

Discrete", 4th edition, Prentice Hall, 1998. 3. Papoulis, "Circuits and Systems: A Modern Approach", HRW, 1980. 4. B.P. Lathi, "Signal Processing and Linear Systems", Oxford University Press, 1998. 5. Douglas K. Lindner, "Introduction to Signals and Systems", McGraw Hill International

Edition: 1999. 6. Simon Haykin, Barry van Veen, "Signals and Systems", John Wiley and Sons (Asia)

Private Limited, 1998. 7. Robert A. Gabel, Richard A. Roberts, "Signals and Linear Systems", John Wiley and

Sons, 1995. 8. M. J. Roberts, "Signals and Systems - Analysis using Transform methods and

MATLAB", TMH, 2003. 9. J. Nagrath, S. N. Sharan, R. Ranjan, S. Kumar, "Signals and Systems", TMH New Delhi,

2001. 10. Ashok Ambardar,"Analog and Digital Signal Processing", 2nd Edition, Brooks/ Cole

Publishing Company (An international Thomson Publishing Company), 1999.

56

HSMC01 Effective Technical Communication

L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Unit 1: Module 1: Information Design and Development- Different kinds of technical documents, Information development life cycle, Organization structures, factors affecting information and document design, Strategies for organization, Information design and writing for print and for online media.

Unit 2: Module 2: Technical Writing, Grammar and Editing, Technical writing process,

forms of discourse, Writing drafts and revising, Collaborative writing, creating indexes, technical writing style and language. Basics of grammar, study of advanced grammar, editing strategies to achieve appropriate technical style. Introduction to advanced technical communication, Usability, Hunan factors, Managing technical communication projects, time estimation, Single sourcing, Localization.

Unit 3: Module 3: Self Development and Assessment: Self assessment, Awareness,

Perception and Attitudes, Values and belief, Personal goal setting, career planning, Self-esteem, Managing Time, Personal memory, Rapid reading, Taking notes, Complex problem solving, Creativity

Unit 4: Module 4: Communication and Technical Writing- Public speaking, Group

discussion, Oral; presentation, Interviews, Graphic presentation, Presentation aids, Personality Development. Writing reports, project proposals, brochures, newsletters, technical articles, manuals, official notes, business letters, memos, progress reports, minutes of meetings, event report.

Unit 5: Module 5: Ethics- Business ethics, Etiquettes in social and office settings, Email

etiquettes, Telephone Etiquettes, Engineering ethics, Managing time, Role and responsibility of engineer, Work culture in jobs, Personal memory, Rapid reading, Taking notes, Complex problem solving, Creativity.

Text/Reference Books:

1. David F. Beer and David McMurrey, Guide to writing as an Engineer, John Willey. New York, 2004.

2. Diane Hacker, Pocket Style Manual, Bedford Publication, New York, 2003. (ISBN 0312406843).

3. Shiv Khera, You Can Win, Macmillan Books, New York, 2003. 4. Raman Sharma, Technical Communications, Oxford Publication, London, 2004. 5. Dale Jungk, Applied Writing for Technicians, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004. (ISBN:

07828357-4). 6. Sharma, R. and Mohan, K. Business Correspondence and Report Writing, TMH New

Delhi 2002. 7. Xebec, Presentation Book, TMH New Delhi, 2000. (ISBN 0402213).

57

BSC01 Biology L T P CR Theory : 75 2 1 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Pre- Requisite: Nil Successive: Environmental Science Course Objectives: To convey that Biology is as important a scientific discipline as Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry.

1) ―Genetics is to biology what Newton‘s laws are to Physical Sciences‖, 2) all forms of life have the same building blocks and yet the manifestations are as diverse as one can imagine, 3) without catalysis life would not have existed on earth, 4) molecular basis of coding and decoding (genetic information) is universal and that 5) fundamental principles of chemical and physical energy transactions are the same in physical/chemical and biological world.

Module 1.(2 hours)- Introduction

Purpose: To convey that Biology is as important a scientific discipline as Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry

Bring out the fundamental differences between science and engineering by drawing a comparison between eye and camera, Bird flying and aircraft. Mention the most exciting aspect of biology as an independent scientific discipline. Why we need to study biology? Discuss how biological observations of 18th Century that lead to major discoveries. Examples from Brownian motion and the origin of thermodynamics by referring to the original observation of Robert Brown and Julius Mayor. These examples will highlight the fundamental importance of observations in any scientific inquiry.

Module 2. (3 hours)- Classification

Purpose: To convey that classification per se is not what biology is all about.The underlying criterion, such as morphological, biochemical or ecological be highlighted. Hierarchy of life forms at phenomenological level. A common thread weaves this hierarchy Classification. Discuss classification based on (a) cellularity- Unicellular or multicellular (b) ultrastructure- prokaryotes or eucaryotes. (c) energy and Carbon utilization -Autotrophs, heterotrophs, lithotropes (d) Ammonia excretion – aminotelic, uricoteliec, ureotelic (e) Habitata- acquatic or terrestrial (e) Molecular taxonomy- three major kingdoms of life. A given organism can come under different category based on classification. Model organisms for the study of biology come from different groups. E.coli, S.cerevisiae, D. Melanogaster, C. elegance, A. Thaliana, M.musculus

Module 3. (4 hours)-Genetics

Purpose: To convey that ―Genetics is to biology what Newton‘s laws are to Physical Sciences‖ Mendel‘s laws, Concept of segregation and independent assortment. Concept of allele.Gene mapping, Gene interaction, Epistasis. Meiosis and Mitosis

58

be taught as a part of genetics. Emphasis to be give not to the mechanics of cell division nor the phases but how genetic material passes from parent to offspring.Concepts of recessiveness and dominance.Concept of mapping of phenotype to genes. Discuss about the single gene disorders in humans. Discuss the concept of complementation using human genetics.

Module 4. (4 hours)-Biomolecules

Purpose: To convey that all forms of life has the same building blocks and yet the manifestations are as diverse as one can imagine Molecules of life. In this context discuss monomeric units and polymeric structures. Discuss about sugars, starch and cellulose. Amino acids and proteins.Nucleotides and DNA/RNA.Two carbon units and lipids.

Module 5. (4 Hours). Enzymes

Purpose: To convey that without catalysis life would not have existed on earth

Enzymology: How to monitor enzyme catalyzed reactions. How does an enzyme catalyzereactions. Enzyme classification.Mechanism of enzyme action. Discuss at least two examples. Enzyme kinetics and kinetic parameters. Why should we know these parameters to understand biology? RNA catalysis.

Module 6. (4 hours)- Information Transfer

Purpose: The molecular basis of coding and decoding genetic information is universal Molecular basis of information transfer. DNA as a genetic material. Hierarchy of DNA structure- from single stranded to double helix to nucleosomes. Concept of genetic code.Universality and degeneracy of genetic code. Define gene in terms of complementation and recombination.

Module 7. (5 hours). Macromolecular analysis

Purpose: How to analyses biological processes at the reductionistic level Proteins- structure and function. Hierarch in protein structure.Primary secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure.Proteins as enzymes, transporters, receptors and structural elements.

Module 8. (4 hours)- Metabolism

Purpose: The fundamental principles of energy transactions are the same in physical and biological world. Thermodynamics as applied to biological systems. Exothermic and endothermic versus endergonic and exergoinc reactions.Concept of Keq and its relation to standard free energy.Spontaneity.ATP as an energy currency. This should include the breakdown of glucose to CO2 + H2O (Glycolysis and Krebs cycle) and synthesis of glucose from CO2 and H2O (Photosynthesis). Energy yielding and energy consuming reactions. Concept of Energy charge

Module 9. (3 hours)- Microbiology

Concept of single celled organisms.Concept of species and strains.Identification and classification of microorganisms.Microscopy.Ecological aspects of single celled

59

organisms.Sterilization and media compositions.Growth kinetics.

Course Outcomes (COs)

1. Classify enzymes and distinguish between different mechanisms of enzyme action. 2. Identify DNA as a genetic material in the molecular basis of information transfer. 3. Analyze biological processes at the reductionist level 4. Apply thermodynamic principles to biological systems. 5. Identify and classify microorganisms.

Textbooks/ References:

1) Biology: A global approach: Campbell, N. A.; Reece, J. B.; Urry, Lisa; Cain, M, L.; Wasserman, S. A.; Minorsky, P. V.; Jackson, R. B. Pearson Education Ltd

2) Outlines of Biochemistry, Conn, E.E; Stumpf, P.K; Bruening, G; Doi, R.H., John Wiley and Sons

3) Principles of Biochemistry (V Edition), By Nelson, D. L.; and Cox, M. M.W.H. Freeman and Company

4) Molecular Genetics (Second edition), Stent, G. S.; and Calender, R.W.H. Freeman and company, Distributed by Satish Kumar Jain for CBS Publisher

5) Microbiology, Prescott, L.M J.P. Harley and C.A. Klein 1995. 2nd edition Wm, C. Brown Publishers

60

EC451 Analog and Digital Communication Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments

1. Study of Amplitude Modulation and determination of Modulation index.

2. Study of Frequency Modulation and determination of Modulation index.

3. Study of Phase Modulation.

4. Study of Pulse Amplitude Modulation.

5. Study of Pulse Width Modulation.

6. Study of Pulse Frequency Modulation.

7. Study of Pulse Code Modulation.

8. Study of frequency Shift Keying.

9. Study of ASK

10. Study of PSK

11. Study of Delta modulation Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Demonstrate about various blocks in communication system. Analyze the types of modulations. Analyze and design the analog modulator and demodulator circuits. Generate the waveforms of AM,FM, PM, PWM,PPM and PAM. Calculate Power relations in Amplitude and Frequency modulated waves. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way

61

EC452 Analog Circuits Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15 Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments 1. Design & measure the frequency response of an RC coupled amplifier using discrete

components. 2. Design a two stage RC coupled amplifier and determine the effect of cascading on gain

and bandwidth. 3. Design & realize inverting amplifier, non-inverting and buffer amplifier using 741 Op

Amp. 4. Verify the operation of a differentiator circuit using 741 op amp and show that it acts as

a high pass filter. 5. Verify the operation of a integrator circuit using 741 op amp and show that it ac ts as a

low pass filter. 6. Design and verify the operations of op amp adder and subtractor circuits. 7. To design & realize Schmitt trigger using op amp 741. 8. Design and realize Wein-bridge oscillator using op amp 741 9. To design & realize square wave generator using op amp 741. 10. To design & realize zero crossing detector using op amp 741

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Measure & verify the frequency response of RC coupled amplifier.

Measure the effect of various types of feedback on amplifiers.

Implement amplifiers, differentiator, Integrator and active filters circuit using op amp.

Design op-amp as Wein-Bridge Oscillator, Square Wave Generator, Logarithmic Amplifier and Voltage Controlled Circuits.

Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way.

62

ECC51 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments 1. Study of architecture of 8085 & familiarization with its hardware , commands &

operation of Microprocessor kit. 2. Write a program using 8085 and verify for :

(i) Addition of two 8-bit numbers. (ii) Addition of two 8-bit numbers (with carry).

3. Write a program using 8085 and verify for : (i) 8-bit subtraction (display borrow)

(ii) 16-bit subtraction (display borrow) 4. Write a program using 8085 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by repeated

addition method. Check for minimum number of additions and test for typical data. 5. Write a program using 8085 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by bit rotation

method and verify. 6. Write a program using 8085 for division of two 8- bit numbers by repeated subtraction

method and test for typical data. 7. Write a program using 8085 for dividing two 8- bit numbers by bit rotation method and

test for typical data. 8. Write a program using 8086 and verify for:

(i) Finding the largest number from an array. (ii) Finding the smallest number from an array. 9. Write a program using 8086 for arranging an array of numbers in descending order and

verify. 10. Write a program using 8086 for arranging an array of numbers in ascending order and

verify. 11. Write a program for finding square of a number using look-up table and verify. 12. Write a program to interface microprocessor with 8253 to generate square wave. Use

8085/8086 microprocessor. 13. Write a program to interface microprocessor with 8253 to generate interrupt on terminal

count. Use 8085/8086 microprocessor. 14. Write a program to interface a two digit number using seven-segment LEDs. Use

8085/8086 microprocessor and 8255 PPI. 15. Write a program to control the operation of stepper motor using 8085/8086

microprocessor and 8255 PPI.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Identify various modules embedded on the kit. Write the assembly code for various operations on 8-bit and 16-bit numbers. Interface various peripherals with microprocessor and to write the program for same. Interface various devices such as seven segment LEDS & stepper motor with

microprocessor through 8255 and to write the program for same.

63

ES 402 Electronics Workshop-II L T P CR Theory : 70 0 0 6 3 Class Work : 30

Total : 100

List of Problems

1. Fabrication of all the gates using Diode & transistors and verification of truth table. 2. To design & realize combinational circuit using K-map & logic simplification. 3. To design 4 bit parallel adder/ subtractor/ for unsigned/ signed numbers. 4. To verify the operation of Multiplexer & to implement any given function with a

MUX. 5. To verify the operation of DEMUX & decoder. 6. To indentify common cathode & common anode of seven segment display with its

various segment. 7. Implement binary to BCD conversion. 8. To fabricate BCD to seven segment decoder 9. To verify the truth table of SR, JK, D & T Flip-Flop & conversion of one Flip-Flop to

another FF. 10. To design Mod-8 Synchronous Counter using T Flip-Flop. 11. To design UP-DOWN decade counter using JK/T Flip-Flop & derive o/p into SSD. 12. To design a minute clock. 13. To verify the function of Universal Shift Register. 14. To design Ring & Johson counter using Universal shift Register. 15. To verify the function of RAM. 16. To verify the function of 4- bit ALU. 17. To study the operation of 8-bit A/D converter. 18. To design 4 bit DAC. 19. Mini project based on concepts of digital electronics.

64

ECC02 Electromagnetic Waves L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects: To introduce the concept of Transmission line, how the no loss transmission occurs

and understanding the concept of Smith Chart. To give exposure to the students regarding the physical meaning and importance of

Maxwell‘s equation and how it derived from basic laws of Electromagnetic. To introduce how the Electromagnetic waves are formed, its propagation in different

medium and the concept of Poynting Vector. To introduce the phenomenon of Reflection or refraction of wave when strikes

obliquely or normally to any surface. To introduce the concept of travelling of wave in waveguides and other phenomena. To impart the knowledge of principle of radiation and radiation characteristics of an

antenna.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Transmission Lines: Equations of Voltage and Current on TX line, Propagation constant and characteristic impedance, and reflection coefficient and VSWR, Impedance Transformation on Loss-less and Low loss Transmission line, Power transfer on TX line, Smith Chart, Admittance Smith Chart, Applications of transmission lines, Impedance Matching, use transmission line sections as circuit elements.

Unit 2: Maxwell‘s Equations- Basics of Vectors, Vector calculus, Basic laws of

Electromagnetics, Maxwell's Equations, Boundary conditions at Media Interface. Unit 3: Uniform Plane Wave: Uniform plane wave, Propagation of wave, Wave polarization,

Poincare‘s Sphere, Wave propagation in conducting medium, phase and group velocity, Power flow and Poynting vector, Surface current and power loss in a conductor

Unit 4: Plane Waves at a Media Interface: Plane wave in arbitrary direction, Reflection and

refraction at dielectric interface, Total internal reflection, wave polarization at media interface, Reflection from a conducting boundary.

Unit 5: Wave propagation in parallel plane waveguide, Analysis of waveguide general approach,

Rectangular waveguide, Modal propagation in rectangular waveguide, Surface currents on the waveguide walls, Field visualization, Attenuation in waveguide.

Unit 6: Radiation: Solution for potential function, Radiation from the Hertz dipole, Power

radiated by hertz dipole, Radiation Parameters of antenna, receiving antenna, Monopole and Dipole antenna,

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand characteristics and wave propagation on high frequency transmission lines as well as carryout impedance transformation on TL.

Use sections of transmission line sections for realizing circuit elements. Characterize uniform plane wave and calculate reflection & transmission of waves at

media interface. Analyze wave propagation on metallic waveguides in modal form. Understand principle of radiation and radiation characteristics of an antenna.

65

Text/Reference Books:

R.K. Shevgaonkar, Electromagnetic Waves, Tata McGraw Hill India, 2005. E.C. Jordan & K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic waves & Radiating Systems, Prentice Hall,

India. Narayana Rao, N: Engineering Electromagnetics, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall, 1997. David Cheng, Electromagnetics, Prentice Hall.

66

EC502 Probability Theory and Stochastic Processes L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the concepts of probability & random signals. To give exposure to the students about the properties of random signal & random

processes. To know the theorems related to random signals. To introduce the concepts of transmission of random process through LTI.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Sets and set operations; Probability space: Conditional probability and Bayes theorem,

Combinatorial probability and sampling models. Unit 2: Discrete random variables, probability mass function, probability distribution function,

example random variables and distributions, Continuous random variables, probability density function, probability distribution function, example distributions.

Unit 3: Joint distributions, functions of one and two random variables, moments of random

variables, Conditional distribution, densities and moments, Characteristic functions of a random variable; Markov, Chebyshev and Chernoff bounds.

Unit 4: Random sequences and modes of convergence (everywhere, almost everywhere,

probability, distribution and mean square), Limit theorems, Strong and weak laws of large numbers, central limit theorem.

Unit 5: Random process. Stationary processes, Mean and covariance functions. Ergodicity,

Transmission of random process through LTI, Power spectral density. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand representation of random signals. Investigate characteristics of random processes. Make use of theorems related to random signals. To understand propagation of random signals in LTI systems.

Text/Reference Books:

1. H. Stark and J. Woods, ``Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal Processing,'' Third Edition, Pearson Education.

2. A.Papoulis and S. Unnikrishnan Pillai, ``Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes,'' Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill.

3. K. L. Chung, Introduction to Probability Theory with Stochastic Processes, Springer International.

4. P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, Introduction to Probability, UBS Publishers. 5. P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, Introduction to Stochastic Processes, UBS

Publishers. 6. S. Ross, Introduction to Stochastic Models, Harcourt Asia, Academic Press.

67

ECC04 Digital Signal Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course objectives:

To study concept of basic signal and implementation of discrete time system. To introduce concept of Z-transform & discrete Fourier Transform and FFT. To give exposure to students about design of FIR digital filter. To familiar with the concept of multirate signal processing and spectral estimation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Discrete time signals: Sequences, representation of signals on orthogonal basis, Sampling

and reconstruction of signals, Discrete systems attributes, Z-Transform, Analysis of LSI systems, frequency Analysis, Inverse Systems, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), Fast Fourier Transform Algorithm, Implementation of Discrete Time Systems

Unit 2: Design of FIR Digital filters: Window method, Park-McClellan's method, Design of IIR

Digital Filters, Butterworth, Chebyshev and Elliptic Approximations, Low pass, Band pass, Band stop and High pass filters.

Unit 3: Effect of finite register length in FIR filter design, Parametric and non-parametric spectral

estimation, Introduction to multirate signal processing, Application of DSP Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Represent signals mathematically in continuous and discrete time and frequency domain. Get the response of an LSI system to different signals. Design of different types of digital filters for various applications. Understand multirate signal processing

Text/Reference Books:

1. S.K.Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: A computer based approach.TMH. 2. A.V. Oppenheim and Schafer, Discrete Time Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 1989. 3. John G. Proakis and D.G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms

And Applications, Prentice Hall, 1997. 4. L.R. Rabiner and B. Gold, Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing, Prentice

Hall, 1992. 5. J.R. Johnson, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 1992. 6. D.J.DeFatta, J. G. Lucas andW.S.Hodgkiss, Digital Signal Processing, John Wiley&

Sons, 1988.

68

Program Elective – I ECEL501 CMOS Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the micro-electronics technology based on MOSFET, design concepts of MOS circuits.

To learn the basics of MOS modelling and non ideal effects in MOSFET. To learn the basics of MOS circuits layout and estimation of various performance

parameter. To introduce both combinational and sequential Circuits designs.

Syllabus

Unit 1. Review of MOS Transistor Model: Introduction to IC technology, MOS Transistor

enhancement mode and depletion mode operations, fabrication of NMOS, CMOS, Equivalent circuit model for MOSFET.

Unit 2. Ideal and Non Ideal Behaviour of MOS Transistor: Ideal I-V characteristics,

threshold voltage, MOS transistor transconductance, , Non ideal I-V effects, velocity saturation, channel length modulation, body effects, subthreshold conduction, junction leakage, tunneling and temperature dependence. Transistor as a switch, Pass transistor, alternative forms of pull-up in inverter, Inverter characteristics, CMOS and nMOS-inverters. Latch up in CMOS circuitry.

Unit 3. Integrated Circuit Layout: Basic physical design of simple logic gates using n-

MOS, p-MOS and CMOS, stick diagrams, design rules. Unit 4. MOS Performance Estimation Delay, RC delay model, linear delay model,

Parasitic delay, logical path efforts, power dissipation, interconnect and robustness in CMOS circuits.

Unit 5. Combinational Logic Design: CMOS logic family including static, dynamic and

dual rail logic. Unit6. Sequential Logic Design: Static circuits, design of latches and flip flop. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand about the trends in MOSFET based semiconductor technology, and design concept of MOS circuits.

Analyse the MOS equivalent model and non ideal effects. Design MOSFET circuit layouts and estimate various performance parameters. Design combination and sequential CMOS circuits.

69

Text Books: 1. N. H.E. Weste and D.M. Harris, CMOS VLSI DESIGN: A Circuit and System

perspective, Pearson Education India. 2. D.A. Pucknell, K. Eshraghian, Basic VLSI Design, Prentice Hall India, Third Edition,

1994 3. S.M. Kang, Y. Leblebici, CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits, Analysis and Design, Tata

McGraw Hill,Third Edition, 2003. 4. D. Das, VLSI Design, Oxford Higher Education, 2010

Reference Books:

1. Integrated Circuits: K.R. Botkar; Khanna Publication. 2. C.Mead and L. Conway, Introduction to VLSI Systems, Addison Wesley, 1971. 3. J. Rabaey, Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall India, 1997.

70

ECEL502 Nano Electronics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To learn the basics of quantum mechanics and the processes involved in making nanomaterial.

To study the band theory of solids. To learn the shrink-down approaches of CMOS. To give exposure to students regarding the advantages of the nanomaterial.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to nanotechnology, meso structures, Basics of Quantum Mechanics,

Schrodinger equation, Density of States, Particle in a box Concepts, Degeneracy, Band Theory of Solids. Kronig-Penny Model, Brillouin Zones.

Unit 2: Shrink-down approaches: Introduction, CMOS Scaling, The nanoscale MOSFET, Finfets,

Vertical MOSFETs, limits to scaling, system integration limits (interconnect issues etc.) Unit 3: Resonant Tunneling Diode, Coulomb dots, Quantum blockade, Single electron

transistors, Carbon nanotube electronics, Bandstructure and transport, devices, applications, 2D semiconductors and electronic devices, Graphene, atomistic simulation

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand various aspects of nano-technology and the processes involved in making nano components and material.

Able to understand the band theory of solids. Understand the various shrink down approaches of CMOS. Leverage advantages of the nano-materials and appropriate use in solving practical

problems. Text/ Reference Books:

1. G.W. Hanson, Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics, Pearson, 2009. 2. W. Ranier, Nanoelectronics and Information Technology (Advanced Electronic

Materialand Novel Devices), Wiley-VCH, 2003. 3. K.E. Drexler, Nanosystems, Wiley, 1992. 4. J.H. Davies, The Physics of Low-Dimensional Semiconductors, Cambridge University

Press, 1998. 5. C.P. Poole, F. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley, 2003.

71

ECEL503 Power Electronics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the students about various types of power devices & their characteristics. To introduce the students about controlled rectifiers, choppers & inverters. To impart the knowledge regarding the analysis of inverters. To impart the knowledge regarding switching power supplies & their applications.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Characteristics of Semiconductor Power Devices: Thyristor, power MOSFET and IGBT Treatment should consist of structure, Characteristics, operation, ratings, protections and thermal considerations. Brief introduction to power devices viz, TRIAC, MOS controlled thyristor (MCT), Power Integrated Circuit (PIC) (Smart Power), Triggering/Driver, commutation and snubber circuits for thyristor, power MOSFETs and IGBTs (discrete and IC based), Concept of fast recovery and schottky diodes as freewheeling and feedback diode.

Unit 2: Controlled Rectifiers: Single phase, Study of semi and full bridge converters for R, RL,

RLE and level loads. Analysis of load voltage and input current, Derivations of load form factor and ripple factor, Effect of source impedance, Input current Fourier series analysis of input current to derive input supply power factor, displacement factor and harmonic factor.

Unit 3: Choppers: Quadrant operations of Type A, Type B, Type C, Type D and type E

choppers, Control techniques for choppers, TRC and CLC, Detailed analysis of Type A chopper, Step up chopper, Multiphase Chopper.

Unit 4: Single-phase inverters: Principle of operation of full bridge square wave, quasi-square

wave, PWM inverters and comparison of their performance. Driver circuits for above inverters and mathematical analysis of output (Fourier series) voltage and harmonic control at output of inverter (Fourier analysis of output voltage). Filters at the output of inverters, Single phase current source inverter.

Unit 5: Switching Power Supplies: Analysis of fly back, forward converters for SMPS,

Resonant converters need, concept of soft switching, switching trajectory and SOAR, Load resonant converter series loaded half bridge DC-DC converter. Applications: Power line disturbances, EMI/EMC, power conditioners, Block diagram and configuration of UPS, salient features of UPS, selection of battery and charger ratings, sizing of UPS, Separately excited DC motor drive, P M Stepper motor Drive.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to: Build and test circuits using power devices such as SCR. Analyze and design controlled rectifier, DC to DC converters, DC to AC inverters. Learn how to analyze these inverters and some basic applications. Design SMPS and UPS.

Text /Reference Books: 1. Muhammad H. Rashid, ―Power electronics‖ Prentice Hall of India. 2. Ned Mohan, Robbins, ―Power electronics‖, edition III, John Wiley and sons. 3. P.C. Sen., ―Modern Power Electronics‖, edition II, Chand& Co. 4. V.R.Moorthi, ―Power Electronics‖, Oxford University Press. 5. Cyril W., Lander,‖ Power Electronics‖, edition III, McGraw Hill. 6. G K Dubey, S R Doradla,: Thyristorised Power Controllers‖, New Age International

Publishers. SCR manual from GE, USA.

72

ECEL504 Introduction to MEMS L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce about MEMS & Micro fabrications. To give exposure about essential material properties. To introduce about various sensing and transducers techniques. To introduce about various fabrication & machining process of MEMS.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction and Historical Background, Scaling Effects. Micro/Nano Sensors,

Actuators and Systems overview, Case studies, Review of Basic MEMS fabrication modules, Oxidation, Deposition Techniques, Lithography (LIGA), and Etching. Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, sacrificial layer processes, Stiction, Bulk Micromachining, Isotropic Etching and Anisotropic Etching, Wafer Bonding, Mechanics of solids in MEMS/NEMS, Stresses, Strain, Hookes‘s law, Poisson effect, Linear Thermal Expansion, Bending, Energy methods, Overview of Finite Element Method, Modeling of Coupled Electromechanical Systems.

Unit 2: MEMS types and their applications: Mechanical MEMS, Strain and pressure sensors,

Accelerometers etc., Electromagnetic MEMS, Micromotors, Wireless and GPS MEMS etc Magnetic MEMS, all effect sensors, SQUID magnetometers, Optical MEMS, Micromachined fiber optic component, Optical sensors, Thermal MEMS, thermo-mechanical and thermo-electrical actuators, Peltier heat pumps.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Appreciate the underlying working principles of MEMS and NEMS devices. Be comfortable with the design, analysis & testing of MEMS. . Apply the MEMS for different applications. Understand about the different MEMS process used in MEMS/NEMS devices.

Text/Reference Book:

1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalkrishnan K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, Micro and Smart Systems, Wiley India, 2012.

2. S. E.Lyshevski, Nano-and Micro-Electromechanical systems: Fundamentals of Nano-and Microengineering (Vol. 8). CRC press, (2005).

3. S. D. Senturia, Microsystem Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001. 4. M. Madou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, 1997. 5. G. Kovacs, Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook, McGraw-Hill, Boston, 1998. 6. M.H. Bao, Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, and

Gyroscopes, Elsevier, New York, 2000. 7. R.C Jaeger, ―Introduction to Microelectronics Fabrication‖, 2nd edition, Addison Wesley,

2000.

73

MC03 Environmental Sciences L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective

The prime objective of the course is to provide the students a detailed knowledge on the threats and challenges to the environment due to developmental activities.

The students will be able to identify the natural resources and suitable methods for their conservation and sustainable development.

The focus will be on awareness of the students about the importance of ecosystem and biodiversity for maintaining ecological balance.

The students will learn about various attributes of pollution management and waste management practices.

The course will also describe the social issues both rural and urban environment and environmental legislation.

Unit 1: THE MULTIDISCIPLINARY NATURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Definition, scope and importance. Need for public awareness. Unit 2: NATURAL RESOURCES: RENEWABLE AND NON-RENEWABLE

RESOURCES Natural resources and associated problems, Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people. Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems. Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and mineral resources, case studies. Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies. Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non- renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. Case studies. Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification., Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources. Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.

Unit 3: ECOSYSTEMS Concept of an ecosystem Structure and Concept of an ecosystem,

Structure and function of an ecosystem. Producers, consumers and decomposers, Energy flow in the ecosystem. Ecological succession. Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids, Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystem: a) Forest ecosystem b) Grassland ecosystem c) Desert ecosystem d) Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries).

Unit 4: BIODIVERSITY AND ITS CONSERVATION Definition: genetic, species and

ecosystem diversity. Biogeographical classification of India. Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values. Biodiversity at global, National and local levels. India as a mega-diversity nation. Hot-spots of biodiversity. Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts. Endangered and endemic species of India. Conservation of biodiversity: insitu and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

Unit 5: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION Definition, Causes, effects and control measures

of: Air pollution b) Water pollution c) Soil pollution d) Marine pollution e) Noise pollution f) Thermal pollution g) Nuclear hazards, Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes. Role of an individual in

74

prevention of pollution. Pollution case studies. Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

Unit 6: SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT From Unsustainable to Sustainable development Urban problems related to energy. Water

conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management. Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns. Case studies, Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions. Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust. Case studies. Wasteland reclamation. Consumerism and waste products, Environment Protection Act. Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act. Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act , Wildlife Protection Act. Forest Conservation Act. Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation , Public awareness.

Unit 7: HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT Population growth, variation

among nations. Population explosion, Family Welfare Programme, Environment and human health, Human Rights, Value Education. HIV/AIDS. Women and Child Welfare. Role of Information Technology in Environment and human health. Case Studies.

Unit 8: FIELD WORK: Visit to a local area to document environmental assets-river, forest,

grassland, hill, mountain, Visit to a local polluted site, Urban, Rural, Industrial, Agricultural, Study of common plants, insects, birds. Study of simple ecosystems, pond, river, hill slopes, etc.

TEXT/ REFERENCES

1. ―Perspectives in Environmental Studies‖ by A. Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik, New age international publishers.

2. ―Environmental Studies by Benny Joseph‖, Tata McGraw Hill Co, New Delhi 3. ―Environmental Science: towards a sustainable future‖ by Richard T. Wright. 2008 PHL

Learning Private Ltd. New Delhi. 4. ―Environmental Engineering and science‖ by Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela

2008 PHI Learning Pvt Ltd. 5. ―Environmental Science‖ by Daniel B. Botkin& Edwards A. Keller, Wiley INDIA

edition. 6. ―Fundamentals of Ecology‖ by Odum, E.P., Barrick, M. and Barret, G.W. Thomson

Brooks/Cole Publisher, California, 2005

75

OEL501 Smart Materials and Systems L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To familiarize the students with the different smart materials and their characteristics. To expose the students to understand the functionalities through the mathematical

equations. To teach the students about the significant features of smart materials in sensing,

actuation and control. To teach the students to design and develop smart structures using smart material

based actuators and sensors.

Syllabus Unit 1: Piezoelectric materials: Properties, Piezoelectricity, characteristics, applications,

vibration control, health monitoring, energy harvesting. Unit2: Shape-memory materials: Properties, shape memory materials, characteristics,

applications – vibration control, shape control, health monitoring. Unit 3: Electro-Rheological (ER) fluids: Suspensions and ER fluids, ER phenomenon,

charge migration mechanism, ER fluid actuators, applications of ER fluids. Unit 4: Magneto-Rheological (MR) fluids: Composition of MR fluid, applications of MR

fluids. Unit 5: Other smart materials and their applications: Magnetostrictive materials,

Electrostrictive materials, Magnetic Shape Memory Alloy, Composites, Ionic Polymer Metal Composites. Bio inspired engineering and micro electro mechanical systems using smart materials.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Acquire knowledge about the smart materials, their characteristics and design aspects. Design, model and control smart materials based structures/systems, through

simulation and experimentation. Understand the various applications of smart materials. Analyze and design techniques, to offer solutions to industrial problems using smart

materials.

Text Books: 1. Mukesh V Gandhi, Brian S Thompson, Smart Materials and Structures, Chapman &

Hall Publishers, 1st Edition, 1992. 2. Mel Schwartz, Encyclopedia of smart materials, John Wiley and Sons, 1st

Edition,2002. 3. Srinivasan A.V., Michael McFarland D., Smart Structures Analysis and Design,

Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition,2010. 4. Culshaw B., Smart structures and Materials, Artech house, 1st Edition, 2004. 5. Leo, D.J. Engineering Analysis of Smart Material Systems, John Wiley & sons,1st

Editon 2008. 6. R.C.Smith, smart material systems: model development, frontiers in applied

76

mathematics, SIAM, 2005. 7. H.Janocha, Adaptronics and smart structures: Basics, Materials, Design,and

Applications, springer, 2nd Edition, 2007. Reference Material:

1. www.iop.org/sms 2. http:jim.sagepub.com.

77

OEL502 Electrical Measurement and Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the fundamentals of various types of Instruments. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of measuring

instruments. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of Wattmeters

and Energy Meters. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of Instrument

Transformers. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of AC and DC

bridges. To introduce the various types of transducers and Electronics Instruments.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Analog Ammeters and Voltmeters: PMMC and MI Instruments, Construction,

Torque Equation, Range Extension, Effect of temperature, Classification, Errors, Advantages and Disadvantages.

Unit 2: Analog Wattmeters and Power Factor Meters: Power and Power Factor,

Electrodynamometer type wattmeter, power factor meter, Construction, theory, Shape of scale, torque equation, Advantages and disadvantages, active and reactive power measurement in single phase, Measurement in three phase.

Unit 3: Analog Energy Meter: Single phase induction type energy meters, construction,

theory, Operation, lag adjustments, Max Demand meters/indicators, Measurement of VAH and VARh.

Unit 4: DC and AC Bridges: Measurement of resistance, Wheatstone Bridge, Kelvin‗s

Bridge, Kelvin‗s Double Bridge, Measurement of inductance, Capacitance, Maxwell‗s Bridge, Desauty Bridge, Anderson Bridge, Schering Bridge, Wien Bridge, Applications and Limitations.

Unit 5: Instrument Transformers: Current Transformer and Potential Transformer

construction, theory, phasor diagram, errors, testing and applications. Unit 6: Transducers: Transducers Measurement of Temperature, RTD, Thermistors,

LVDT, Strain Gauge, Piezoelectric Transducers, Digital Shaft Encoders, Tachometer, Hall effect sensors.

Unit 7: Electronic Instruments: Electronic Display Device, Digital Voltmeters, CRO,

Digital Storage Oscilloscope, measurement of voltage and frequency, Lissajous Patterns, Wave Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion Analyzer.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Compare performance of MC, MI and Dynamometer types of measuring instruments, Energy meters and CRO.

Determine the circuit parameters using AC and DC bridges. Understand the principle and working of various types of Instrument Transformers.

78

Select transducers for the measurement of various electrical quantities like temperature, displacement and strain

Understand operating principles of electronic measuring instruments TEXT BOOK:

1. A course in Electrical And Electronic measurement and instrumentation : A.K. Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai Publication.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Electrical Measurements: E.W. Golding, TMH 2. Electrical and Electronic measurement and instrumentation: J.B. Gupta, Kataria and

Sons. 3. Electronic instrumentation and measurement technique : W.D. Cooper & A.D.

Helfrick 4. Measuring systems: E.O. Doeblin; TMH.

79

OEL503 Intelligent Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about intelligent instrumentation system and characteristics of intelligent instrumentation.

To introduce the students for various types of instrumentation/computer networks. To introduce students virtual instrumentation and programming in Labview. To introduce the students about various types of interfacing techniques. To introduce the students about various types of analysis techniques.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction: Definition of an intelligent instrumentation system, Static and Dynamic characteristics of intelligent instrumentation, feature of intelligent instrumentation, Block Diagram of an intelligent instrumentation.

Unit 2: Instrumentation/Computer Networks: Serial & parallel interfaces, serial

communication standards, parallel data bus, EEE 488bus, Local area networks (LANs), Star networks, Ring & bus networks, Fiber optic distributed networks.

Unit 3: Virtual Instrumentation: Introduction to graphical programming data flow &

graphical programming techniques, advantage of Virtual Instrumentation techniques, Virtual Instrumentations and sub Virtual Instrumentation loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structure, formula notes, string and file Input/Output.

Unit 4: Interfacing Instruments & Computers: Basic issues of interfacing, Address

decoding, Data transfer control, A/D converter, D/A converter, other interface consideration.

Unit 5: Analysis Technique: DSP software, Measurement filters and wavelets, windows,

curve fitting probability and statistics. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Define the meaning of intelligent instrumentation syatem and its static and dynamic characteristics.

Understand the various serial and parallel data transfer standards i.e. RS232 and IEEE488.

Write VI program in LABVIEW to implement various virtual instrumentation system. Do interfacing of ADC and DAC and other peripherals to microprocessor using

decoders. To implement various filters and wavelets using DSP software.

BOOKS:

1. Intelligent instrumentation :G.C. Barney: PHI. 2. Labview for everyone: Lisa, K. Wells and Jeffery Travis: PHI.

REFRENCES:

1. Principles of measurement & instrumentation: Alan S. Moris; PHI. 2. Labview graphical programming 2nd edition: Gray Johanson; TMH.

80

OEL504 Electromechanical Energy Conversion L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To provide the knowledge of the Energy balance equation, Principle of Electromechanical Energy Conversion, force & torque equations of singly excited magnetic system as well as dynamic equations.

To explain construction, theory, working Principle of transformer, O.C.,S.C. test, regulation & efficiency, auto-transformer, three phase transformer.

To explain construction, theory, working principle of d.c. motors and generators, load characteristics, starting & speed control of d.c. motors.

To explain construction, theory, working principle, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit, phasor diagram, load characteristics, introduction to single phase induction motors, stepper, servo, reluctance and universal motors.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Electromechanical Energy Conversion: Principles Of Force and torque in magnetic

field system, energy balance, energy and force in singly excited magnetic field system, concept of co-energy, forces and torques in system with permanent magnets, dynamic equation.

Unit 2: Transformers: Basic theory, construction, operation at no-load and full-load,

equivalent circuit, phasor diagram, O.C. and S.C., tests for parameters determination, efficiency and regulation, auto-transformer, introduction to three-phase transformer, Current and Potential Transformers, Principle, construction, analysis and applications.

Unit 3: DC Machines: Basic theory of DC generator, brief idea of construction, emf

equation, load characteristics, basic theory of DC motor, concept of back emf, torque and power equations, load characteristics, starting and speed control of DC motors, applications.

Unit 4: Induction Motor: Basic theory, construction, Phasor diagram, Equivalent circuit,

Torque equation, Load characteristics, starting and speed control of induction motor, Introduction to single phase Induction motor and its applications, Fractional H.P. Motors, Introduction to stepper, servo reluctance and universal motors.

Unit 5: Synchronous Machines: Construction and basic theory of synchronous generator,

emf equation, model of generator, Phasor diagram, Regulation, Basic theory of synchronous motor, v-curves, synchronous condenser, applications.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Know basics of various types of electric machines, singly excited magnetic field system, dynamic equations.

Understand theory, various tests, calculate various parameters of transformers. Design d.c machine depending on the performance characteristics & use them in

various applications. Understand the basic principles of Induction machines, synchronous machines and

81

their characteristics. Text Book:

1. Electrical Machines: Nagarath and Kothari; TMH. Reference Books:

1. Electrical Machines :P.S. Bimbhra; Khanna. 2. Electrical Machines: Mukherjee and Chakravorti; DhanpatRai& Sons. 3. Electrical Technology (Vol-II) : B.L Theraja; S. Chand.

82

OEL505 Renewable Power Generation Systems L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the environmental impacts of conventional energy resources. To introduce the process of PV generation. To introduce the process of wind power generation. To impart the knowledge regarding fuel cell power generation and hybrid systems.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Environmental aspects of electric power generation from conventional sources: Limitation of fossil fuels, Atmospheric pollution, effects of hydro-electric projects, disposal of nuclear waste, GHG emission from various energy sources and its effects, need for renewable energy sources.

Unit 2: Solar Photo-Voltaic system: Solar radiation and its measurement, Angle of sun rays

on solar collector, optimal angle for fixed collector, sun tracking, an introduction to solar cell, solar PV module, PV system design and applications, stand-alone and grid connected systems, environmental impacts.

Unit 3: Wind power generation: Wind energy, classification of wind turbines, aerodynamic

operation of wind turbine, extraction of wind turbine power, wind turbine power curve, horizontal axis wind turbine generator, modes of wind power generation, stand-alone and grid connected system, environmental impacts.

Unit 4: Fuel cell system: Principle of operation of fuel cell, technical parameters of fuel cell,

Type of fuel cell, advantages of fuel cell power plants, energy output, efficiency and emf of fuel cell, operating characteristics, applications and environmental impacts.

Unit 5: Hybrid energy systems: Need for hybrid systems, types, configuration and

coordination, electrical interface, PV-Diesel, Wind diesel, wind-PV, wind-PV, fuel cell.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Apprise the environmental impacts of conventional energy sources and the need of renewable energy.

Explain the process of PV generation and design stand-alone and grid connected system.

Explain the process of wind power generation and choose stand-alone and grid connected configuration.

Explain the process of fuel cell power generation and its applications. Suggest and configure the various hybrid systems

Text Books:

1. G D Rai, ‗Non-conventional Energy sources‘, Khanna Publishers, 5th Edition, 2014. 2. D P Kothari, K C Singal and Rakesh Ranjan, ‗Renewable Energy Sources and

Emerging Technologies‘ 2nd Edition, 2012. 3. C S Solanki, ‗Solar Photo-voltaics – Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications‘,

PHI Pvt., Ltd., 2 nd Edition, 2011. 4. S N Bhadra, D Kastha and S Banerjee, ‗Wind Electric Systems‘, Oxford Publications,

2nd Edition, 2007.

83

EC601 Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study different control problem, control hardware and their models. To study different control algorithm and to familiarize with stability of a system using

different tests. To study designing of various controllers and tuning of process controller. To study linear, nonlinear and optimal control problems.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Control Problem: Industrial Control examples, Transfer function,

System with dead-time, System response, Control hardware and their models, potentiometers, synchros, LVDT, dc and ac servomotors, tacho-generators, electro hydraulic valves, hydraulic servomotors, electro pneumatic valves, pneumatic actuators, Closed-loop systems. Block diagram and signal flow graph analysis.

Unit 2: Feedback control systems: Stability, steady-state accuracy, transient accuracy,

disturbance rejection, insensitivity and robustness, proportional, integral and derivative systems, Feedforward and multi-loop control configurations, stability concept, relative stability, Routh stability criterion.

Unit 3: Time response of second order systems, steady-state errors and error constants,

Performance specifications in time-domain, Root locus method of design, Lead and lag compensation

Unit 4: Frequency-response analysis- Polar plots, Bode plot, stability in frequency domain, Nyquist plots, Nyquist stability criterion, Performance specifications in frequency-domain, Frequency domain Methods of design, Compensation & their realization in time & frequency domain, Lead and Lag compensation, Op-amp based and digital implementation of compensators, Tuning of process controllers, State variable formulation and solution.

Unit 5: State variable Analysis: Concepts of state, state variable, state model, state modelsfor

linear continuous time functions, diagonalization of transfer function, solution of state equations, concept of controllability & observability

Unit 6: Introduction to Optimal control & Nonlinear control, Optimal Control problem,

Regulator problem, Output regulator, treking problem, Nonlinear system, Basic concept & analysis.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Characterize a system and find its study state behaviour. Investigate stability of a system using different tests. Design various controllers. Solve liner, non-liner and optimal control problems.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Gopal. M., ―Control Systems: Principles and Design‖, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1997. 2. Kuo, B.C., ―Automatic Control System‖, Prentice Hall, sixth edition, 1993. 3. Ogata, K., ―Modern Control Engineering‖, Prentice Hall, second edition, 1991. 4. Nagrath & Gopal, ―Modern Control Engineering‖, New Age International, New Delhi

84

EC602 Computer Network L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To give exposure to student that how data is transferred in computers. To study the performance of a network. To study the basics of different layers of TCP/ & how information is transferred between

them. To solve issues occurring at different layers.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to computer networks and the Internet: Application layer: Principles of

network applications, The Web and Hyper Text Transfer Protocol, File transfer, Electronic ail, Domain name system, Peer-to-Peer file sharing, Socket programming, Layering concepts.

Unit 2: Switching in networks: Classification and requirements of switches, a generic switch,

Circuit Switching, Time-division switching, Space-division switching, Crossbar switch and evaluation of blocking probability, 2-stage, 3-stage and n-stage networks, Packet switching, Blocking in packet switches, Three generations of packet switches, switch fabric, Buffering, Multicasting, Statistical Multiplexing

Unit 3: Transport layer: Connectionless transport, User Datagram Protocol, Connection

oriented transport – Transmission Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call. Unit 4: Congestion Control and Resource Allocation: Issues in Resource Allocation, Queuing

Disciplines, TCP congestion Control, Congestion Avoidance Mechanisms and Quality of Service.

Unit 5: Network layer: Virtual circuit and Datagram networks, Router, Internet Protocol,

Routing algorithms, Broadcast and Multicast routing. Unit 6: Link layer: ALOHA, Multiple access protocols, IEEE 802 standards, Local Area

Networks, addressing, Ethernet, Hubs, Switches. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the concepts of networking thoroughly. Design a network for a particular application. Analyze the performance of the network. Understand various issues at different layers.

Text Reference books:

1. J.F. Kurose and K. W. Ross, ―Computer Networking – A top down approach featuring the Internet‖, Pearson Education, 5th Edition

2. L. Peterson and B. Davie, ―Computer Networks – A Systems Approach‖ Elsevier Morgan Kaufmann Publisher, 5th Edition.

3. T. Viswanathan, ―Telecommunication Switching System and Networks‖, Prentice Hall 4. S. Keshav, ―An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking‖ , Pearson Education 5. B. A. Forouzan, ―Data Communications and Networking‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition 6. Andrew Tanenbaum, ―Computer networks‖, Prentice Hall 7. D. Comer, ―Computer Networks and Internet/TCP-IP‖, Prentice Hall 8. William Stallings, ―Data and computer communications‖, Prentice Hall

85

Program Elective – II ECEL601 Bio-Medical Electronics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the students about human anatomy and imparting knowledge about types

of Bio-electric signals. To give exposure to students about various machines used for medical diagnosis of

illness. To introduce the students about recording systems used for measurement of the bio-

electric signals. To introduce students about latest technologies.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Brief introduction to human physiology, origin of bioelectric signals, basic biomedical

instrumentation system, transducers and sensors, displacement, velocity, force, acceleration, flow, temperature, potential, dissolved ions and gases.

Unit 2: Measurement of blood temperature, blood pressure, blood flow, blood pH,pCO2,pO2. Unit 3: Bio-electrodes and biomedical recorders, ECG, EMG, EEG, Phono cardiograph,

Unit 4: MRI and ultrasonic imaging systems, X-Ray machines, X-Ray computed

tomography, Echo-cardiograph. Prostheses and aids, pacemakers, External pacemaker, implantable pacemaker, programmable pacemaker, defibrillators, heart-lung machine, artificial kidney. Unit 5: Introduction to bio telemetry and its applications in patient care, patient monitoring system, aids for the handicapped, Safety aspects

Unit 6: LASER application in bio-medical field. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the human anatomy and types of bioelectric signals and analyze the biological processes like other electronic processes.

Understand mechanism of various machines used for medical diagnosis of illness. Understand various types of recording systems used for measurement of the bio-

electric signals. Understand about latest technologies.

Text Books:

1. Introduction to Bio-Medical Instrumentation: R.S. Khandpur,Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

2. Bio-Medical Instrumentation: Crambell, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi Reference Books:

1. W.F. Ganong, Review of Medical Physiology, 8th Asian Ed, Medical Publishers, 1977. 2. J.G. Websster, ed., Medical Instrumentation, Houghton Mifflin, 1978. 3. A.M. Cook and J.G. Webster, eds., Therapeutic Medical Devices, Prentice-Hall, 1982.

86

ECEL602 Information Theory and Coding L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To study the concept of information, measurement and entropy. To impart the knowledge to analyze different types of channel and their capacity. To study the concept of Gaussian channel and Gaussian theorem. To study different types of encoders for source coding.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Measures of Information: Basics of information theory, information theory versus coding theory, model of information processing system, information and probability, Information measurement, self information, mutual information and joint information, Entropy, discrete and continuous entropy, Relative Entropy, Joint and conditional entropy, Encoding a source alphabet,

Unit 2: Channel Capacity: Stationary Markov Sources, Entropy Rate and Data

Compression, Discrete Memory Less Channels, Statics of discrete channel, Channel Capacity And Its Computation Of Discrete Memory Less Channels (BNC, BSC, BEC, Cascaded Channels, Noiseless Channels, distortion-less channel, Noisy Typewriter), The Channel Coding Theorem, Shannon‘s theory And The Physical Significance Of Capacity, Continuous channel, capacity of Gaussian channel, bandwidth and S/N trade off

Unit 3: Data Compression by Fixed-To-Variable-Length Codes: Unique Decodability and

The Prefix Condition, Kraft Inequality, Relationship of Average Codeword Length to Source Entropy, source efficiency and redundancy, Fixed and Variable length coding, Examples of Coding Techniques, Huffman, Shannon-Fano-Elias, Lempel-Ziv, Universal coding.

Unit 4: Line Coding: Line coding and its properties, to understand the various PAM formats

or line codes, Unipolar RZ & NRZ, Polar RZ & NRZ, Bipolar NRZ, Split Phase Manchaster format, Polar Quaternary NRZ format.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the concept of information and entropy. Understand different types of channel and Calculation of channel capacity. Understand Shannon‘s theorem for coding. Encode messages using different types of coding techniques. Encode source message using line coding technique.

Textbooks/References

1. T.M. Cover and J.A. Thomas, Elements of Information Theory, John Wiley (1991). 2. R.G. Gallager, Information Theory and Reliable Communication, Wiley (1968). 3. R.J. McEliece, Theory of Information and Coding, Addison-Wesley (1977). 4. Stefan M. Moser, Po-Ning Chen, Coding and Information Theory, Cambridge

University Press, 2012. 5. N. Abramson, ―Information and coding‖ McGraw Hill, 1963.

87

ECEL603 Speech and Audio Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about production & modelling of speech signal, coding techniques & speech signal processing.

To study linear prediction of speech & speech quantization. To familiarize with LPC model & scalar quantization. To familiarize with CELP model & speech coding standards.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction: Speech production and modelling, Human Auditory System, General structure of speech coders, Classification of speech coding techniques, parametric, waveform and hybrid, Requirements of speech codecs, quality, coding delays, robustness.

Unit 2: Speech Signal Processing: Pitch-period estimation, all-pole and all-zero filters,

convolution, Power spectral density, periodogram, autoregressive model, autocorrelation estimation.

Unit 3: Linear Prediction of Speech: Basic concepts of linear prediction, Linear Prediction

Analysis of non-stationary signals, prediction gain, examples, Levinson-Durbin algorithm, Long term and short-term linear prediction models, Moving average prediction.

Unit 4: Speech Quantization: Scalar quantization–uniform quantizer, optimum quantizer,

logarithmic quantizer, adaptive quantizer, differential quantizers, Vector quantization, distortion measures, codebook design, codebook types.

Unit 5: Scalar Quantization of LPC: Spectral distortion measures, Quantization based on

reflection coefficient and log area ratio, bit allocation; Line spectral frequency, LPC to LSF conversions, quantization based on LSF.

Unit 6: Linear Prediction Coding: LPC model of speech production, Structures of

LPCencoders and decoders, Voicing detection, Limitations of the LPC model. Unit 7: Code Excited Linear Prediction: CELP speech production model, Analysis-by-

synthesis, Generic CELP encoders and decoders, Excitation codebook search, state-save method, zero-input zero state method, CELP based on adaptive codebook, Adaptive Codebook search, Low Delay CELP and algebraic CELP.

Unit 8: Speech Coding Standards-An overview of ITU-T G.726, G.728 and G.729standards. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Mathematically model the speech signal. Analyze the quality and properties of speech signal. Modify and enhance the speech and audio signals. To familiarize with CELP model & speech coding standards

Text/Reference Books: 1. ―Digital Speech‖ by A.M.Kondoz, Second Edition (Wiley Students_ Edition), 2004. 2. ―Speech Coding Algorithms: Foundation and Evolution of Standardized Coders‖, W.C.

Chu, WileyInter science, 2003.

88

ECEL604 Scientific Computing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Unit 1: Introduction: Sources of Approximations, Data Error and Computational, Truncation

Error and Rounding Error, Absolute Error and Relative Error, Sensitivity and Conditioning, Backward Error Analysis, Stability and Accuracy

Unit 2: Computer Arithmetic: Floating Point Numbers, Normalization, Properties of Floating

Point System, Rounding, Machine Precision, Subnormal and Gradual Underflow, Exceptional Values, Floating-Point Arithmetic, Cancellation

Unit 3: System of liner equations: Linear Systems, Solving Linear Systems, Gaussian

elimination,Pivoting, Gauss-Jordan, Norms and Condition Numbers, Symmetric Positive Definite Systems and Indefinite System, Iterative Methods for Linear Systems

Unit 4: Linear least squares: Data Fitting, Linear Least Squares, Normal Equations Method,

Orthogonalization Methods, QR factorization, Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization, Rank Deficiency, and Column Pivoting

Unit 5: Eigen values and singular values: Eigen values and Eigenvectors, Methods for

Computing All Eigen values, Jacobi Method, Methods for Computing Selected Eigenvalues, Singular Values Decomposition, Application of SVD

Unit 6: Nonlinear equations: Fixed Point Iteration, Newton‘s Method, Inverse Interpolation

Method Optimization, One-Dimensional Optimization, Multidimensional Unconstrained Optimization, Nonlinear Least Squares

Unit 7: Interpolation: Purpose for Interpolation, Choice of Interpolating, Function, Polynomial

Interpolation, Piecewise Polynomial Interpolation Unit 8: Numerical Integration And Differentiation: Quadrature Rule, Newton-Cotes Rule,

Gaussian Quadrature Rule, Finite Difference Approximation, Initial Value Problems for ODES, Euler‘s Method, Taylor Series Method, Runga-Kutta Method, Extrapolation Methods, Boundary Value Problems For ODES, Finite Difference Methods, Finite Element Method, Eigenvalue Problems, Partial Differential Equations, Time Dependent Problems, Time Independent Problems, Solution for Sparse Linear Systems, Iterative Methods, Fast Fourier Transform, FFT Algorithm, Limitations, DFT, Fast polynomial Multiplication, Wavelets, Random Numbers And Simulation, Stochastic Simulation, Random Number Generators, Quasi-Random Sequences

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the significance of computing methods, their strengths and application areas. Perform the computations on various data using appropriate computation tools.

Text/ Reference Books:

1. Heath Michael T., ―Scientific Computing: An Introductory Survey‖ , McGraw-Hill, 2nd Ed., 2002.

2. Press William H., Saul A. Teukolsky, Vetterling William T and Brian P. Flannery, ―Numerical Recipes: The Art of Scientific Computing‖, Cambridge University Press, 3rd Ed., 2007.

3. Xin-she Yang (Ed.)., ―Introduction To Computational Mathematics‖, World Scientific Publishing Co., 2nd Ed., 2008.

89

4. Kiryanov D. and Kiryanova E., ―Computational Science‖, Infinity Science Press, 1st Ed., 2006.

5. Quarteroni, Alfio, Saleri, Fausto, Gervasio and Paola, ―Scientific Computing With MATLAB And Octave‖, Springer, 3rd Ed., 2010.

90

Program Elective - III ECEL605 Microwave Theory and Techniques L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To familiarize with microwave frequency band and understand the mathematical model

of microwave the transmission. To give exposure regarding analysis of the RF and Microwave transmission line and

microwave networks. To study the microwave active and passive devices and understand design principle of

filters, amplifiers, oscillators and microwave antennas. To study the microwave measurement and understand the concept of microwave systems.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Microwaves: History of Microwaves, Microwave Frequency bands;

Applications of Microwaves: Civil and Military, Medical, EMI/ EMC. Unit 2: Mathematical Model of Microwave Transmission: Concept of Mode, Features of

TEM, TE and TM Modes, Losses associated with microwave transmission, Concept of Impedance in Microwave transmission.

Unit 3: Analysis of RF and Microwave Transmission Lines: Coaxial line, Rectangular

waveguide, Circular waveguide, Strip line, Micro strip line. Unit 4: Microwave Network Analysis: Equivalent voltages and currents for non- TEMlines,

Network parameters for microwave circuits, Scattering Parameters. Unit 5: Passive and Active Microwave Devices: Microwave passive components, Directional

Coupler, Power Divider, Magic Tee, Attenuator, Resonator, Microwave active components, Diodes, Transistors, Oscillators, Mixers. Microwave Semiconductor Devices, Gunn Diodes, IMPATT diodes, Schottky Barrier diodes, PIN diodes. Microwave Tubes, Klystron, TWT, Magnetron.

Unit 6: Microwave Design Principles: Impedance transformation, Impedance

Matching,Microwave Filter Design, RF and Microwave Amplifier Design, Microwave Power Amplifier Design, Low Noise Amplifier Design, Microwave Mixer Design, Microwave Oscillator Design. Microwave Antennas, Antenna parameters, Antenna for ground based systems, Antennas for airborne and satellite borne systems, Planar Antennas.

Unit 7: Microwave Measurements: Power, Frequency and impedance measurement

atmicrowave frequency, Network Analyzer and measurement of scattering parameters, Spectrum Analyzer and measurement of spectrum of a microwave signal, Noise at microwave frequency and measurement of noise figure, Measurement of Microwave antenna parameters.

Unit 8: Microwave Systems: Radar, Terrestrial and Satellite Communication, Radio Aidsto

Navigation, RFID, GPS. Modern Trends in Microwaves Engineering Effect of Microwaves on human body, Medical and Civil applications of microwaves, Electromagnetic interference and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMI & EMC),

91

Monolithic Microwave ICs, RFMEMS for microwave components, Microwave Imaging.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand various microwave system components their properties. To understand passive & active microwave devices and design principles. Appreciate that during analysis/ synthesis of microwave systems, the different

mathematical treatment is required compared to general circuit analysis. Design microwave systems for different practical application.

Text/Reference Books:

1. R.E. Collins, Microwave Circuits, McGraw Hill 2. K.C. Gupta and I.J. Bahl, Microwave Circuits, Artech house

92

ECEL606 Digital Image & Video Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students with the fundamentals of digital image processing techniques as well as image enhancement & filtering.

To give exposure to students regarding color image processing & image segmentation. To introduce the concept of Multi-resolution image processing tech, as well as image

compression techniques and standards. To impart knowledge regarding video coding & video segmentation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Digital Image Fundamentals: Elements of visual perception, image sensing and

acquisition, image sampling and quantization, basic relationships between pixels–neighbourhood, adjacency, connectivity, distance measures.

Unit 2: Image Enhancements and Filtering: Gray level transformations, histogram equalization

and specifications, pixel-domain smoothing filters, linear and order-statistics, pixel-domain sharpening filters, first and second derivative, two-dimensional DFT and its inverse, frequency domain filters, low-pass and high-pass.

Unit 3: Color Image Processing: Color models–RGB, YUV, HSI; Color transformations–

formulation, color complements, color slicing, tone and color corrections; Color image smoothing and sharpening; Color Segmentation.

Unit 4: Image Segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, edge linking and boundary detection,

thresholding – global and adaptive, region-based segmentation. Unit 5: Wavelets and Multi-resolution image processing: Uncertainty principles of Fourier

Transform, Time-frequency localization, continuous wavelet transforms, wavelet bases and multi-resolution analysis, wavelets and Subband filter banks, wavelet packets.

Unit 6: Image Compression: Redundancy, inter-pixel and psycho-visual, Lossless compression

predictive, entropy, Lossy compression, predictive and transform coding, Discrete Cosine Transform, Still image compression standards, JPEG and JPEG-2000.

Unit 7: Fundamentals of Video Coding: Inter-frame redundancy, motion estimation techniques

fullsearch, fast search strategies, forward and backward motion prediction, frame classification-I, P and B, Video sequence hierarchy, Group of pictures, frames, slices, macro-blocks and blocks; Elements of a video encoder and decoder; Video coding standards, MPEG and H.26X.

Unit 8: Video Segmentation: Temporal segmentation–shot boundary detection, hard-cutsand

soft-cuts, spatial segmentation – motion-based, Video object detection and tracking. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Mathematically represent the various types of images and analyze them. Process these images for the enhancement of certain properties or for optimized use of the

resources. Develop algorithms for image compression and coding. Understand the various types of video segmentation.

93

Text/Reference Books:

1. R.C. Gonzalez and R.E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Second Edition, Pearson Education 3rd edition 2008.

2. Anil Kumar Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall of India.2nd edition 2004.

3. Murat Tekalp , Digital Video Processing" Prentice Hall, 2nd edition 2015.

94

ECEL607 Software Defined Radio L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To make student capable of the SDR and implementation details To introduce the students about the blocks of SDR for a specific application To introduce the students about the challenges in the implementation of SDR To introduce the students about transmitter and receiver architectures in SDR

Syllabus Introduction – Software Defined Radio – A Traditional Hardware Radio Architecture –

Signal Processing Hardware History – Software Defined Radio Project Complexity. A Basic Software Defined Radio Architecture – Introduction – 2G Radio Architectures-

Hybrid Radio Architecture- Basic Software Defined Radio Block Diagram- System Level Functioning Partitioning-Digital Frequency Conversion Partitioning.

RF System Design – Introduction- Noise and Channel Capacity- Link Budget- Receiver

Requirements- Multicarrier Power Amplifiers- Signal Processing Capacity Tradeoff. Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog Conversion- Introduction – Digital Conversion

Fundamentals- Sample Rate- Bandpass Sampling- Oversampling- Antialias Filtering – Quantization – ADC Techniques-Successive Approximation- Figure of Merit-DACs- DAC Noise Budget- ADC Noise Budget.

Digital Frequency Up- and Down Converters- Introduction- Frequency Converter

Fundamentals- Digital NCO- Digital Mixers- Digital Filters- Halfband Filters- CIC Filters- Decimation, Interpolation, and Multirate Processing-DUCs - Cascading Digital Converters and Digital Frequency Converters.

Signal Processing Hardware Components- Introduction- SDR Requirements for Processing

Power- DSPs- DSP Devices- DSP Compilers- Reconfigurable Processors- Adaptive Computing Machine- FPGAs

Software Architecture and Components – Introduction- Major Software Architecture

Choices – Hardware – Specific Software Architecture- Software Standards for Software Radio-Software Design Patterns- Component Choices- Real Time Operating Systems- High Level Software Languages- Hardware Languages.

Smart Antennas for Software Radio- Introduction- 3G smart Antenna Requirements-

Phased Antenna Array Theory- Applying Software Radio Principles to Antenna Systems- Smart Antenna Architectures- Optimum Combining/ Adaptive Arrays- DOA Arrays- Beam Forming for CDMA- Downlink Beam Forming.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Conceptualize the SDR and implementation details Identify the blocks of SDR for a specific application Recognize the challenges in the implementation of SDR Analyze the transmitter and receiver architectures in SDR

Text Books:

95

1. Paul Burns, Software Defined Radio for 3G, Artech House, 2002. 2. Tony J Rouphael, RF and DSP for SDR, Elsevier Newnes Press, 2008 3. Jouko Vanakka, Digital Synthesizers and Transmitter for Software Radio, Springer,

2005. 4. P Kenington, RF and Baseband Techniques for Software Defined Radio, Artech

House, 2005.

96

Program Elective – IV

ECEL608 Mobile Communication Network L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce working principles of mobile communication system. To introduce various technologies of mobile communication. To introduce various analysis techniques of communication systems. To introduce various multiple access techniques for mobile communication.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Cellular concepts: Cell structure, frequency reuse, cell splitting, channel assignment,

handoff, interference, capacity, power control, Wireless Standards, Overview of 2G and 3G cellular standards.

Unit 2: Signal propagation: Propagation mechanism, reflection, refraction, diffraction and

scattering, large scale signal propagation and lognormal shadowing. Fading channels-Multipath and small scale fading, Doppler shift, statistical multipath channel models, narrowband and wideband fading models, power delay profile, average and rms delay spread, coherence bandwidth and coherence time, flat and frequency selective fading, slow and fast fading, average fade duration and level crossing rate.

Unit 3: Capacity of flat and frequency selective channels. Antennas: Antennas for mobile

terminal monopole antennas, PIFA, base station antennas and arrays. Unit 4: Multiple access schemes: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and SDMA, Modulation schemes,

BPSK, QPSK and variants, QAM, MSK and GMSK, multicarrier modulation, OFDM. Unit 5: Receiver structure: Diversity receivers, selection and MRC receivers, RAKE receiver,

equalization, linear-ZFE and adaptive, DFE, Transmit diversity-Altamonte scheme. Unit 6: MIMO and space time signal processing, spatial multiplexing, diversity/multiplexing

tradeoff, Performance measures, Outage, average snr, average symbol/bit error rate. System examples, GSM, EDGE, GPRS, IS-95, CDMA 2000 and WCDMA.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the working principles of the mobile communication systems. Understand the relation between the user features and underlying technology. Analyze mobile communication systems for improved performance. Understand various multiple access techniques.

Text/Reference Books:

1. WCY Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Systems, McGraw Hill, 1990. 2. WCY Lee, Mobile Communications Design Fundamentals, Prentice Hall, 1993. 3. Raymond Steele, Mobile Radio Communications, IEEE Press, New York, 1992. 4. AJ Viterbi, CDMA: Principles of Spread Spectrum Communications, Addison Wesley,

1995. 5. VK Garg &JE Wilkes, Wireless & Personal Communication Systems, Prentice Hall,

1996.

97

ECEL609 Wireless Sensor Networks L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce designing of wireless sensor network applications. To introduce various research areas in wireless sensor networks. To introduce various MAC protocol used in WSN. To teach students how to explore new protocols for WSN.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Sensor Networks, unique constraints and challenges, Advantage of Sensor

Networks, Applications of Sensor Networks, Types of wireless sensor networks. Unit 2: Mobile Ad-hoc Networks (MANETs) and Wireless Sensor Networks, Enabling

technologies for Wireless Sensor Networks. Issues and challenges in wireless sensor networks.

Unit 3: Routing protocols, MAC protocols: Classification of MAC Protocols, S-MAC Protocol,

B-MAC protocol, IEEE 802.15.4 standard and ZigBee. Unit 4: Dissemination protocol for large sensor network, Data dissemination, data gathering, and

data fusion; Quality of a sensor network; Real-time traffic support and security protocols. Unit 5: Design Principles for WSNs, Gateway Concepts Need for gateway, WSN to Internet

Communication, and Internet to WSN Communication. Unit 6: Single-node architecture, Hardware components & design constraints, Operating systems

and execution environments, introduction to TinyOS and nesC. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Design wireless sensor networks for a given application Understand emerging research areas in the field of sensor networks Understand MAC protocols used for different communication standards used in WSN Explore new protocols for WSN

Text/Reference Books:

1. Waltenegus Dargie , Christian Poellabauer, ―Fundamentals Of Wireless Sensor Networks Theory And Practice‖, By John Wiley & Sons Publications ,2011

2. Sabrie Soloman, ―Sensors Handbook" by McGraw Hill publication. 2009 3. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, ―Wireless Sensor Networks‖, Elsevier Publications,2004 4. Kazem Sohrby, Daniel Minoli, ―Wireless Sensor Networks‖: Technology, Protocols and

Applications, Wiley-Inter science 5. Philip Levis, And David Gay "TinyOS Programming‖ by Cambridge University Press

2009

98

ECEL610 MIMO Wireless Communication L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce basic terms of performance measurement. To introduce fading channel characteristics To introduce the students performance of multi channel receivers To introduce multi channel transmission To introduce error probability analysis

Unit1: Introduction: System Performance Measures, Average Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR), Outage

Probability, Average Bit Error Probability (BEP) , Amount of Fading , Average Outage Duration, Conclusions

Unit2: Fading Channel Characterization and Modeling: Main Characteristics of Fading Channels,

Envelope and Phase Fluctuation, Slow and Fast Fading , Frequency-Flat and Frequency-Selective Fading, Modeling of Flat-Fading Channels, Multipath Fading, Rayleigh, Nakagami-q (Hoyt), Nakagami-n (Rice), Nakagami-m , Weibull , Log-Normal Shadowing , Composite Multipath/, Composite Gamma/Log-Normal Distribution , Suzuki Distribution, Rician Shadowed Distributions ,Modeling of Frequency-Selective Fading Channels

Unit 3: Performance of Multichannel Receivers: Diversity Combining , Diversity Concept,

Mathematical Modeling , Brief Survey of Diversity Combining Techniques, Pure Combining Techniques, Complexity–Performance ,Maximal-Ratio Combining (MRC),Receiver, PDF-Based , MGF-Based Approach.

Unit 4: Multichannel Transmission—Transmit Diversity and Space-Time : A Historical

Perspective, Transmit versus Receive Diversity—Basic Concepts, Alamouti‘s Diversity Technique—a Simple Transmit Diversity Scheme Using Two Transmit Antennas, Generalization of Alamouti‘s Diversity Technique to Orthogonal Space-Time Block Codes. MIMO channel, MIMO information Theory.

Unit 5: Error probability analysis, Transmit diversity and space-time coding, Linear STBC design,

Differential coding for MIMO, Precoding, Multiuser MIMO Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the basic terms of performance measurement. Understand fading channel characteristics Understand the students performance of multi channel receivers Understand multi channel transmission Understand error probability analysis

Textbook: 1. E. G. Larsson and P. Stoica, Space-Time Block Coding for Wireless Communications,

Cambridge University Press, 2003. 2. Marvin K. Simon and Mohamed-Slim Alouini, Digital Communication over Fading

Channels, Second Edition, A JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC., PUBLICATION

Reference: A. Paulraj, R. Nabar and D. Gore, Introduction to Space-Time Wireless Communications, Cambridge Univ. Press, 2003.

99

OEL601 Virtual Instruments Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce to the students about the interfacing techniques of various transducers. To expose the students to different signal conditioning circuits. To impart knowledge on the hardware required to build Virtual Instrument. To impart knowledge to build GUI for Virtual Instrument.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Transducer Interfacing: Interfacing techniques for the following transducers,

Potentiometers, Temperature sensors, Thermocouple, RTD, Thermistors, Load cells, High and low range tension, Low and mid range precision, Torque Sensors, Pressure sensors, Vibration Sensors, Acoustic Sensors, Automotive Sensors, Displacement sensors, Biomedical transducers.

Unit 2: Signal Conditioning: Filtering, Cold Junction Compensation, Amplification,

Instrumentation Amplifier, Linearization, Circuit Protection, Ground loops, CMRR, Noise Reduction and Isolation, Attenuation, Multiplexing, Digital signal conditioning, IEEE1451 standards, Transducer Electronic Data Sheet (TEDS)

Unit 3: Data Acquisition and Hardware Selection: Overview of DAQ architecture, Analog

IO & Digital IO, Finite and continuous buffered acquisition, Data acquisition with C language, Industrial Communication buses, Wireless network standards, Micro-controller selection parameters for a virtual instrument, CPU, code space (ROM), data space (RAM) requirements.

Unit 4: Real-Time OS for Small Devices: Small device real-time concepts, Resources,

Sequential programming, Multitasking, RTOS, Kernels, Timing loops, Synchronization and scheduling, Fixed point analysis, Building embedded real-time application for small devices.

Unit 5: Graphical User Interface for Virtual Instrument: Building an embedded Virtual

Instrument GUI, Text and Number display, GUI Windows management, Simulation, Display drivers, Creating and distributing applications, Examples of Virtual Instrument design using GUI in any of the applications like consumer goods, robotics, machine vision, and process control automation.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Interface the target transducer to the signal conditioning board. Condition the acquired signal from the transducer to standard data formats. Select the most appropriate hardware for the virtual instrument to be built. Implement the real-time OS for the selected micro-controller and the GUI interface

for the virtual instrument.

100

Text Books:

1. Daniel H. Sheingold, Transducer Interfacing Handbook – A Guide to Analog Signal Conditioning, Analog Devices Inc. 1980.

2. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition - Techniques for Measurement, Instrumentation and Control, Newnes, 2000.

3. Timothy Wilmshurst, Designing Embedded Systems with PIC Microcontrollers- Principles and Applications, Elsevier, 2007.

Reference Books:

1. Jean Labrosse, Embedded System Building Blocks, 2nd Edition. R&D Books, 2000 2. Jean Labrosse, MicroC/OS-II – The Real-Time Kernel, 2nd Edition. CMP Books,

2002

101

OEL602 Data Structure L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To study in detail the concept of Loops, Conditional statements, Arrays, Functions,

pointers, structures, file handling file concepts, file organization in C language. To study link list, Header Link list, Multiway link list and perform various data

structure operations. To study the concept of stack and Queues and implement the same using array and

link list form. To implement Binary Trees type and implement the same in array and link list form. To study the Graphs using set, linked and matrix representation. To study and implement file handling concepts.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Overview of ‘C’: Introduction, Flow of Control, Input output functions, Arrays and

Structures, Functions. Unit 2: Data structures and Algorithms an overview: concept of data structure, choice of

right data structures, types of data structures, basic terminology Algorithms, how to design and develop an algorithm, stepwise refinement, use of accumulators and counters, algorithm analysis, complexity of algorithms Big-oh notation, Arrays, Searching Sorting, Introduction, One Dimensional Arrays,

Unit 3: Operations Defined: traversal, selection, searching, insertion, deletion, and sorting,

Multidimensional arrays, address calculation of a location in arrays. Searching: Linear search, Recursive and Non recursive binary Search. Sorting: Selection sort, Bubble sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort, Quick sort, Shell sort, Heap sort

Unit 4: Stacks and queues: Stacks, array representation of stack, Applications of stacks,

Queues, Circular queues, array representation of Queues, Deque, priority queues, Applications of Queues.

Unit 5: Pointers and Linked Lists: Pointers, Pointer variables, Pointer and arrays, array of

pointers, pointers and structures, Dynamic allocation. Linked Lists: Concept of a linked list,. Circular linked list, doubly linked list, operations on linked lists. Concepts of header linked lists. Applications of linked lists, linked stacks, linked Queues.

Unit 6: Tree and Graphs: Trees: Introduction to trees, binary trees, representation and

traversal of trees, operations on binary trees, types of binary trees, threaded binary trees, B Trees, Application of trees. Graphs: Introduction, terminology, set, linked and matrix representation, Graph traversal techniques: BFS, DFS, operations on graphs, Minimum spanning trees, Applications of graphs.

Unit 7: File Handling and Advanced data Structure: Introduction to file handling, Data

and Information, File concepts, File organization, files and streams, working with files. AVL trees, Sets, list representation of sets, applications of sets, skip lists

102

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the programming of C language from basic to advance level. Understand the Concept of link list, stack, queue, binary tree its usage in real life. Understand the Working of binary trees and graph with their applications. Understand the concept of files and their organization of memory.

Text Books:

1. Data Structures using C by A. M. Tenenbaum, Langsam, Moshe J. Augentem, PHI Pub.

2. Data Structures using C by A. K. Sharma, Pearson Reference Books:

1. Data Structures and Algorithms by A.V. Aho, J.E. Hopcroft and T.D. Ullman, Original edition, Addison-Wesley, 1999, Low Priced Edition.

2. Fundamentals of Data structures by Ellis Horowitz & SartajSahni, Pub, 1983,AW 3. Fundamentals of computer algorithms by Horowitz Sahni and Rajasekaran. 4. Data Structures and Program Design in C By Robert Kruse, PHI, 5. Theory & Problems of Data Structures by Jr. SymourLipschetz, Schaum‗s outline by

TMH. 6. Introduction to Computers Science -An algorithms approach , Jean Paul Tremblay,

Richard B. Bunt, 2002, T.M.H.

103

OEL603 Cyber Laws and Security L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Unit 1: History of Information Systems and its Importance, basics, Changing Nature of

Information Systems, Need of Distributed Information Systems, Role of Internet and Web Services, Information System Threats and attacks, Classification of Threats and Assessing Damages Security in Mobile and Wireless Computing- Security Challenges in Mobile Devices, authentication Service Security, Security Implication for organizations, Laptops Security Basic Principles of Information Security, Confidentiality, Integrity Availability and other terms in Information Security, Information Classification and their Roles.

Unit 2: Security Threats to E Commerce, Virtual Organization, Business Transactions on

Web, E Governance and EDI, Concepts in Electronics payment systems, E Cash, Credit/Debit Cards. Physical Security- Needs, Disaster and Controls, Basic Tenets of Physical Security and Physical Entry Controls, Access Control- Biometrics, Factors in Biometrics Systems, Benefits, Criteria for selection of biometrics, Design Issues in Biometric Systems, Interoperability Issues, Economic and Social Aspects, Legal Challenges.

Unit 3: Model of Cryptographic Systems, Issues in Documents Security, System of Keys,

Public Key Cryptography, Digital Signature, Requirement of Digital Signature System, Finger Prints, Firewalls, Design and Implementation Issues, Policies Network Security- Basic Concepts, Dimensions, Perimeter for Network Protection, Network Attacks, Need of Intrusion Monitoring and Detection, Intrusion Detection Virtual Private Networks- Need, Use of Tunneling with VPN, Authentication Mechanisms, Types of VPNs and their Usage, Security Concerns in VPN.

Unit 4: Security metrics- Classification and their benefits Information Security & Law, IPR,

Patent Law, Copyright Law, Legal Issues in Data mIning Security, Building Security into Software Life Cycle Ethics- Ethical Issues, Issues in Data and Software Privacy Cyber Crime Types & overview of Cyber Crimes.

References: 1. Godbole,― Information Systems Security‖, Willey 2. Merkov, Breithaupt, ― Information Security‖, Pearson Education 3. Yadav, ―Foundations of Information Technology‖, New Age, Delhi 4. Schou, Shoemaker, ― Information Assurance for the Enterprise‖, Tata McGraw Hill

Sood,―Cyber Laws Simplified‖, Mc Graw Hill 5. Furnell, ―Computer Insecurity‖, Springer 7. IT Act 2000

104

OEL604 Quality Management L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To facilitate the understanding of total quality management principles and processes Course Contents: Unit 1: Introduction, need for quality, evolution of quality; Definitions of quality, product

quality and service quality; Basic concepts of TQM, TQM framework, contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby. Barriers to TQM; Quality statements, customer focus, customer orientation & satisfaction, customer complaints, customer retention; costs to quality.

Unit 2: TQM principles; leadership, strategic quality planning; Quality councils- employee

involvement, motivation; Empowerment; Team and Teamwork; Quality circles, recognition and reward, performance appraisal; Continuous process improvement; PDCE cycle, 5S, Kaizen; Supplier partnership, Partnering, Supplier rating & selection.

Unit 3: The seven traditional tools of quality; New management tools; Six sigma- concepts,

methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT, Bench marking process; FMEA- stages, types.

Unit 4: TQM tools and techniques, control charts, process capability, concepts of six sigma,

Quality Function Development (QFD), Taguchi quality loss function; TPM- concepts, improvement needs, performance measures.

Unit 5: Quality systems, need for ISO 9000, ISO 9001-9008; Quality system- elements,

documentation,; Quality auditing, QS 9000, ISO 14000- concepts, requirements and benefits; TQM implementation in manufacturing and service sectors.

Course Outcomes: Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to use the tools and techniques of TQM in manufacturing and service sectors. Text Books:

1. Besterfield D.H. et al., Total qualityManagement, 3rd ed., Pearson Education Asia, 2006.

2. Evans J.R. and Lindsay W.M., The management and Control of Quality, 8th ed., first Indian edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.

3. Janakiraman B. and Gopal R.K., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.

4. Suganthi L. and Samuel A., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.

105

OEL605 Measurement Data Analysis L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To familiarize the student regarding measurement inaccuracies. To give exposure to students about measurement system based on its quality and cost. To familiarize the student regarding both theoretical knowledge and practical skills in

working with measurement data. To give exposure to students about design and conduct experiments to analyze and

interpret the data and generate reports.

Syllabus Unit 1: General information about measurements, measuring instruments and their

properties: Statistical methods for Experimental Data Processing, Estimation of the parameters, Construction of confidence intervals, Methods for testing Hypotheses and sample homogeneity, Trends in applied statistics and experimental data processing, Direct measurements, Method for calculating the errors and uncertainties, Methods for combining systematic and random errors.

Unit 2: Indirect measurements: Correlation coefficient and its calculation, the method of

reduction, method of transformation, errors and uncertainty of indirect measurement. Examples of measurements and measurement data processing.

Unit 3: Combined Measurements: Method of least squares, linearization of nonlinear

conditional equations, and determination of the parameters in formulas from empirical data and construction of calibration curves, combining the results of measurements, Calculation of the errors of measuring instruments.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Estimate measurement inaccuracies. Evaluate the measurement system based on its quality and cost. Acquire both theoretical knowledge and practical skills in working with measurement

data. Design and conduct experiments to analyze and interpret the data and generate

reports. Text Books:

1. Semyon G. Rabinovich, Measurement Errors and Uncertainties – Theory and Practice, Springer Publication, 3rd Edition, 2005.

2. S.V. Gupta, Measurement Uncertainties: Physical Parameters and Calibration of Instruments, Springer, 2012.

Reference Books:

1. Ifan Hughes and Thomas Hase, Measurements and Their Uncertainties: A Practical Guide to Modern Error Analysis, Oxford University Press, 2010.

2. Michael, Grabe, Measurement Uncertainties in Science and Technology, Springer 2005.

106

EC653 Electronics Measurement Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments

1. Find the value of unknown resistance using Wheatstone Bridge.

2. To measure unknown frequency using CRO by Lissajous pattern

3. To find value of unknown resistance using Kelvin Double Bridge

4. To measure power factor of AC load using voltage current method.

5. Study and analysis of working principle of energy meter.

6. To study potential transformer (PT).

7. To study current transformer (CT).

8. To measure high power using Instrument Transformer.

9. To determine B-H curve of ferromagnetic material.

10. To study AC bridges (Hay‘s bridge, Maxwell bridge, Schering bridge)

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Operate and make the various measurements on Wheatstone Bridge, CRO, Kelvin Double

Bridge and thermocouple. Operate potential transformer and current transformer. Measure high power using Instrument Transformer. Determine B-H curve of ferromagnetic material

107

Program Elective – V ECEL701 Antenna and Propagation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To study the fundamental concepts of antennas. To familiarize the design concept of aperture, reflector and microstrip antennas. To familiarize the concept of antenna arrays. To study the basic concept of smart antenna and radio wave propagation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Fundamental Concepts: Physical concept of radiation, Radiation pattern, near-andfar-field regions, reciprocity, directivity and gain, effective aperture, polarization, input impedance, efficiency, Friis transmission equation, radiation integrals and auxiliary potential functions.

Unit 2: Radiation from Wires and Loops: Infinitesimal dipole, finite-length dipole, linear

elements near conductors, dipoles for mobile communication, small circular loop. Unit 3: Aperture and Reflector Antennas: Huygens' principle, radiation from rectangular and

circular apertures, design considerations, Babinet's principle, Radiation from sectoral and pyramidal horns, design concepts, prime-focus parabolic reflector and cassegrain antennas.

Unit 4: Broadband Antennas- Log-periodic and Yagi-Uda antennas, frequency independent

antennas, broadcast antennas. Unit 5: Micro strip Antennas: Basic characteristics of micro strip antennas, feeding methods,

methods of analysis, design of rectangular and circular patch antennas. Unit 6: Antenna Arrays: Analysis of uniformly spaced arrays with uniform and non-uniform

excitation amplitudes, extension to planar arrays, synthesis of antenna arrays using Schelkunoff polynomial method, Woodward-Lawson method.

Unit 7: Basic Concepts of Smart Antennas: Concept and benefits of smart antennas, fixed

weight beam forming basics, Adaptive beam forming. Different modes of Radio Wave propagation used in current practice.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the properties and various types of antennas. Analyze the properties of different types of antennas and their design. Operate antenna design software tools and come up with the design of the antenna of

required specifications. Understand the concept of smart antenna and radio wave propagation.

Text/Reference Books: 1. J.D. Kraus, Antennas, McGraw Hill, 1988. 2. C.A. Balanis, Antenna Theory - Analysis and Design, John Wiley, 1982. 3. R.E. Collin, Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill, 1985. 4. R.C. Johnson and H. Jasik, Antenna Engineering Handbook, McGraw ill, 1984. 5. I.J. Bahl and P. Bhartia, Micro Strip Antennas, Artech House, 1980. 6. R.K. Shevgaonkar, Electromagnetic Waves, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005. 7. R.E. Crompton, Adaptive Antennas, John Wiley

108

ECEL702 High Speed Electronics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the basics of transmission line and impact of various parameters for optimisation.

To give exposure to students regarding myriad electronics devices for distortion free output.

To impart the knowledge of various signal conversion techniques with transceiver, architecture.

To introduce CAD tools for PCB designing & identify control & design challenges.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Transmission line theory (basics) crosstalk and non ideal effects, signal integrity, impact of packages, vias, traces, connectors, non-ideal return current paths, high frequency power delivery, methodologies for design of high speed buses, radiated emissions and minimizing system noise, Noise Analysis, Sources, Noise Figure, Gain compression, Harmonic distortion, Inter modulation, Cross-modulation, Dynamic range

Unit 2: Devices, Passive and active, Lumped passive devices (models), Active (models, low vs.

high frequency). Unit 3: RF Amplifier Design, Stability, Low Noise Amplifiers, Broadband Amplifiers (and

Distributed) Power Amplifiers, Class A, B, AB and C, D E Integrated circuit realizations, Cross-over distortion Efficiency RF power output stages.

Unit 4: Mixers, Up conversion Down conversion, Conversion gain and spurious response,

Oscillators Principles, PLL Transceiver architectures. Unit 5: Printed Circuit Board Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard fabrication,

Microvia Boards, Board Assembly, Surface Mount Technology, Through Hole Technology, Process Control and Design challenges.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand significance and the areas of application of high-speed electronics circuits. Understand the properties of various components used in high speed electronics. Design High-speed electronic system using appropriate components. Able to design system using CAD tools for PCB design.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Stephen H. Hall, Garrett W. Hall, James A. McCall ―High-Speed Digital System Design: A Handbook of Interconnect Theory and Design Practices‖, August 2000, Wiley-IEEE Press

2. Thomas H. Lee, ―The Design of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits‖, Cambridge University Press, 2004, ISBN 0521835399.

3. Behzad Razavi, ―RF Microelectronics‖, Prentice-Hall 1998, ISBN 0-13-887571-5. 4. Guillermo Gonzalez, ―Microwave Transistor Amplifiers‖, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall 5. Kai Chang, ―RF and Microwave Wireless systems‖, Wiley. 6. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, Electronic Product design, Wiley India, 2011

109

ECEL703 Wavelets L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study the concept of Time analysis resolution problem associated with STFT. To study the concept of origins of wavelets. To study the concept of continuous wavelet & discrete wavelet transform. To study the concept of Biorthogonal wavelets and application of wavelets.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Short Time Fourier Transform (STFT): Signal representation with continuous and

discrete STFT, concept of time-frequency resolution, Resolution problem associated with STFT, Heisenberg's Uncertainty principle and time frequency tiling, Why wavelet transform?

Unit 2: Introduction to Wavelet Transform: The origins of wavelets, Wavelets and other

wavelet like transforms, History of wavelet from Morlet to Daubechies via Mallat, Different communities and family of wavelets, Different families of wavelets within wavelet communities

Unit 3: Continuous Wavelet Transform: Wavelet transform-A first level introduction,

Continuous time-frequency representation of signals, Properties of wavelets used in continuous wavelet transform, Continuous versus discrete wavelet transform.

Unit 4: Discrete Wavelet Transform: Haar scaling functions and function spaces,

Translation and scaling of ϕ(t), Orthogonality of translates of ϕ(t), Function space V0, Finer Haar scaling functions, Concepts of nested vector spaces, Haar wavelet function, Scaled and translated Haar wavelet functions, Orthogonality of ϕ(t) and ψ(t), Normalization of Haar bases at different scales, Refinement relation with respect to normalized bases, Support of a wavelet system, Daubechies wavelets, Plotting the Daubechies wavelets,

Unit 5: Biorthogonal Wavelets: Biorthogonality in vector space, Introduction to

Biorthoeonal Wavelet Systems, Signal Representation Using Biorthogonal Wavelet System,

Unit 6: Applications of Wavelets: Application of wavelet theory to signal denoising, image

and video compression, multi-tone digital communication, transient detection. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand time-frequency nature of the signals. Apply the concept of wavelets to practical problems. Mathematically analyze the systems or process the signals using appropriate wavelet

functions. To understand the Biorthogonal wavelets & application of wavelets.

110

Text/Reference Books: 1. K. P. Soman, K. I. Rmachandran, N. G. Resmi, ―Insight into Wavelets: From Theory

to Practice, (Third Edition)‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2010. 2. A.N. Akansu and R.A. Haddad, ―Multiresolution signal Decomposition: Transforms,

Subbands and Wavelets‖, Academic Press, Oranld, Florida, 1992. 3. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, ―Digital Signal Processing‖, Pearson

Prentice Hall, 2007. 4. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods ―Digital Image Processing (Third Edition)‖,

Pearson International Edition, 2009. 5. C. S. Burrus, Ramose and A. Gopinath, Introduction to Wavelets and Wavelet Transform,

Prentice Hall Inc.

111

Program Elective – VI ECEL704 Fiber Optic Communication L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

Introduce the concept of optical fiber communication, different models of optics. Introduce the concept of optical fiber characteristics (dispersion and attenuation) and

understand fabrication of fibers and measurement techniques. Introduce the concept of optical sources (LED and LASER), photo detector, Optical

switches and Optical amplifiers. Introduce the basic concept of WDM, DWDM system and nonlinear effect on optical

fibers.

Syllabus Unit 1: Introduction to vector nature of light, propagation of light, propagation of light ina

cylindrical dielectric rod, Ray model, wave model. Unit 2: Different types of optical fibers, Modal analysis of a step index fiber, Signal degradation

on optical fiber due to dispersion and attenuation, Fabrication of fibers and measurement techniques like OTDR.

Unit 3: Optical sources- LEDs and Lasers, Photo-detectors, pin-diodes, APDs, detector

responsivity, noise, optical receivers, Optical link design, BER calculation, quantum limit, power penalties.

Unit 4: Optical switches-coupled mode analysis of directional couplers, electro-optic switches. Unit 5: Optical amplifiers-EDFA, Raman amplifier. Unit 6: WDM and DWDM systems, Principles of WDM networks. Unit 7: Nonlinear effects in fiber optic links, Concept of self-phase modulation, group velocity

dispersion and solition based communication. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the principles fiber-optic communication, the components and the bandwidth advantages.

Understand the properties of the optical fibers and optical components. Understand operation of lasers, LEDs, and detectors. Analyze system performance of optical communication systems. Design optical networks and understand non-linear effects in optical fibers.

Text/Reference Books 1. J. Keiser, Fibre Optic communication, McGraw-Hill, 5th Ed. 2013 (Indian Edition). 2. T. Tamir, Integrated optics, (Topics in Applied Physics Vol.7), Springer-Verlag, 1975. 3. J. Gowar, Optical communication systems, Prentice Hall India, 1987. 4. S.E. Miller and A.G. Chynoweth, eds., Optical fibres telecommunications, Academic

Press, 1979. 5. G. Agrawal, Nonlinear fibre optics, Academic Press, 2nd Ed. 1994. 6. G. Agrawal, Fiber optic Communication Systems, John Wiley and sons, New York, 1997. 7. F.C. Allard, Fiber Optics Handbook for engineers and scientists, McGraw Hill, New York

(1990).

112

ECEL705 Adaptive Signal Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the concept of adaptive filtering & estimation. To explain the concept of LMS algorithm and excess mean square error. To introduce the concept of signal space concepts, orthogonality, Gram-Schmidt

orthogonalization, orthogonal decomposition of vector spaces. To introduce recursive least squares (RLS).

Syllabus

Unit 1: General concept of adaptive filtering and estimation, applications and motivation, Review

of probability, random variables and stationary random processes, Correlation structures, properties of correlation matrices.

Unit 2: Optimal FIR (Wiener) filter, Method of steepest descent, extension to complexvalued,

The LMS algorithm (real, complex), convergence analysis, weight errorcorrelation matrix, excess mean square error and mis-adjustment

Unit 3: Variants of the LMS algorithm, the sign LMS family, normalized LMS algorithm, block

LMS and FFT based realization, frequency domain adaptive filters, Sub-band adaptive filtering, Signal space concepts, introduction to finite dimensional vector space theory, subspace, basis, dimension, linear operators, rank and nullity, inner product space, orthogonality, Gram- Schmidt orthogonalization, concepts of orthogonal projection, orthogonal decomposition of vector spaces.

Unit 4: Vector space of random variables, correlation as inner product, forward and backward

projections, Stochastic lattice filters, recursive updating of forward and backward prediction errors, relationship with AR modeling, joint process estimator, gradient adaptive lattice.

Unit 5: Introduction to recursive least squares (RLS), vector space formulation of RLS

estimation, pseudo-inverse of a matrix, time updating of inner products, development of RLS lattice filters, RLS transversal adaptive filters. Advanced topics: affine projection and subspace based adaptive filters, partial update algorithms, QR decomposition and systolic array.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the concept of adaptive filtering & estimation. Understand the concept of LMS algorithm and excess mean square error. Understand the concept of signal space concepts. Understand the recursive least squares(RLS).

Text/Reference Books: 1. S. Haykin, Adaptive filter theory, Prentice Hall, 1986. 2. C.Widrow and S.D. Stearns, Adaptive signal processing, Prentice Hall, 1984.

113

ECEL706 Mixed Signal Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To familiarize the concept of signal processing of analog & digital signals. To introduce the concept of switched capacitor filters & its application in various areas. To familiarize the various conversion techniques. To introduce the concept of data transmission on integrated circuits.

Unit 1: Analog and discrete-time signal processing, introduction to sampling theory, Analog

continuous time filters, passive and active filters, Basics of analog discrete-time filters and Z-transform.

Unit 2: Switched, capacitor filters, Nonidealities in switched-capacitor filters, Switched-capacitor

filter architectures, Switched-capacitor filter applications. Unit 3: Basics of data converters, Successive approximation ADCs, Dual slope ADCs, Flash

ADCs, Pipeline ADCs, Hybrid ADC structures, High-resolution ADCs, DACs. Unit 4: Mixed-signal layout, Interconnects and data transmission, Voltage-mode signalingand

data transmission, Current-mode signaling and data transmission. Unit 5: Introduction to frequency synthesizers and synchronization, Basics of PLL,Analog PLLs,

Digital PLLs, DLLs. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the practical situations where mixed signal analysis is required. Analyze and handle the inter-conversions between signals. Design systems involving mixed signals. Design various type of high speed & low power interconnects & frequency synthesisers.

Text/Reference Books:

1. R. Jacob Baker, CMOS mixed-signal circuit design, Wiley India, IEEE press, reprint 2008.

2. Behzad Razavi , Design of analog CMOS integrated circuits, McGraw-Hill, 2003. 3. R. Jacob Baker, CMOS circuit design, layout and simulation, Revised second edition,

IEEE press, 2008. 4. Rudy V. dePlassche, CMOS Integrated ADCs and DACs, Springer, Indian edition, 2005. 5. Arthur B. Williams, Electronic Filter Design Handbook, McGraw-Hill, 1981. 6. R. Schauman, Design of analog filters by, Prentice-Hall 1990 (or newer additions). 7. M. Burns et al., An introduction to mixed-signal IC test and measurement by, Oxford

university press, first Indian edition, 2008.

114

Program Elective – VII ECEL707 Satellite Communication L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about basics of satellite communication and orbital mechanics. To study satellite subsystems and typical phenomenon in satellite communication. To familiarize with mathematical equations required for link designing considering clear

air & rainy conditions. To familiarize with modulation & multiple access schemes in satellite communication.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Satellite Communication: Principles and architecture of satellite Communication, Brief history of Satellite systems, advantages, disadvantages, applications and frequency bands used for satellite communication.

Unit 2: Orbital Mechanics: Orbital equations, Kepler's laws, Apogee and Perigee for an

elliptical orbit, evaluation of velocity, orbital period, angular velocity etc. of a satellite, concepts of Solar day and Sidereal day.

Unit 3: Satellite sub-systems: Study of Architecture and Roles of various sub-systems of a

satellite system such as Telemetry, tracking, command and monitoring (TTC & M), Attitude and orbit control system (AOCS), Communication sub-system, power sub-systems etc.

Unit 4: Typical Phenomena in Satellite Communication: Solar Eclipse on satellite, its effects,

remedies for Eclipse, Sun Transit Outage phenomena, its effects and remedies, Doppler frequency shift phenomena and expression for Doppler shift.

Unit 5: Satellite link budget: Flux density and received signal power equations, Calculation of

System noise temperature for satellite receiver, noise power calculation, Drafting of satellite link budget and C/N ratio calculations in clear air and rainy conditions.

Unit 6: Modulation and Multiple Access Schemes: Various modulation schemes used in

satellite communication, Meaning of Multiple Access, Multiple access schemes based on time, frequency, and code sharing namely TDMA, FDMA and CDMA.

Text /Reference Books:

1. Timothy Pratt Charles W. Bostian, Jeremy E. Allnutt: Satellite Communications: Wiley India. 2nd edition 2002

2. Tri T. Ha: Digital Satellite Communications: Tata McGraw Hill, 2009 3. Dennis Roddy: Satellite Communication: 4th Edition, McGraw Hill,2009

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Visualize the architecture of satellite systems as a means of high speed, high range communication system.

State various aspects related to satellite systems such as orbital equations, sub-systems in a satellite, link budget, modulation and multiple access schemes.

Solve numerical problems related to orbital motion and design of link budget for the given parameters and conditions.

Understand various modulation and multiple access techniques.

115

ECEL708 Embedded Systems L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Syllabus

Course Objectives:

To learn design concept and approach of embedded systems using advanced controllers. To learn hardware design features and memories of embedded systems. To learn software design features of embedded systems. To learn processor peripherals and their interfacing with microprocessors.

UNIT 1: Concept of Embedded Systems Design: Embedded system overview, design

challenges, processor technology, design technology, and Examples of Embedded System.

UNIT 2: Custom single-purpose processors: Hardware, Basic combinational logic design,

Sequential logic design, custom single purpose processor design. UNIT 3: General purpose processors: Software, Basic architecture, operation,

programmer‘s view, development environment, ASIC processors. UNIT 4: Microprocessors memories: Memory write ability and storage permanence,

common memory types, memory hierarchy and cache, Advanced RAM. UNIT 5: Standard single: purpose processors, peripherals, Timers, counters, watchdog

timers, UART, PWM, RTC, LCD controllers, keypad controllers, ADCs, Stepper motor controllers.

UNIT 6: Microprocessor Interfacing: Communication basics, I/O addressing, Interrupts,

DMA, arbitration. Text/Reference Books:

1. Frank Vahid , ―Embedded System Design‖ Wiley India Edition, 2001. 2. J.W. Valvano, "Embedded Microcomputer System: Real Time Interfacing", Brooks/Cole, 3. 2000. 4. Jack Ganssle, "The Art of Designing Embedded Systems", Newness, 1999. 5. V.K. Madisetti, "VLSI Digital Signal Processing", IEEE Press (NY, USA), 1995. 6. David Simon, "An Embedded Software Primer", Addison Wesley, 2000. 7. K.J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming, and Applications",

Penram Intl, 1996. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand design concept and approach of embedded systems using advanced controllers.

Understand hardware design features and memories of embedded systems. Understand software design features of embedded systems. Understand processor peripherals and their interfacing with microprocessors.

116

ECEL709 Error Correcting Codes L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study the concept of error correction and detection using Parity and hamming Codes. To study Linear Block Codes and Cyclic codes. To get knowledge about Convolution, Turbo codes and BCH codes. To study the performance of convolution and Linear codes and probability error limits.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Design of error detection and correction codes: Introduction of error detection and

correction codes, single parity check codes, simple burst error detecting codes, encoder and decoder, hamming codes: encoding and decoding, trade off between redundancy and error detecting capability.

Unit 2: Design of Linear Block Codes: Introduction of Linear Block Codes, properties of

Linear block codes, The Generator & parity check matrices, Syndrome And Error Detection, Minimum Distance of A Block Code, Error Detecting And Error Correcting Capability of A Block Code, Design of Encoder And Syndrome Decoder For Linear Block Codes.

Unit 3: Design of Cyclic Codes: Description Cyclic Codes, properties of cyclic codes,

systematic cyclic codes, Generator And Parity Check Matrices of Cyclic Codes, Encoding of Cyclic Codes, Syndrome Computation And Error Detection, Decoding of Cyclic Codes, Cyclic Hamming Codes.

Unit 4: Convolutional Codes: Encoding of Convolutional Codes, convolution tree,

Structural Properties of Convolutional Codes, Distance Properties of Convolutional Codes, Design of Encoder And Decoder For Convolutional Codes, maximum likelihood Decoding and Viterbi decoding algorithm, Turbo codes, Turbo decoder, Interleaver, Turbo decoder

Unit 5: BCH Codes: BCH codes, Reed Solomon Codes, Justeen Codes, MDS codes,

properties of BCH codes, Galois field, generator polynomial of BCH codes, coding and decoding of BCH codes.

Unit 6: Performance of codes: Performance of codes, Performance of linear block codes &

convolution codes, code incurable error probability Upper & lower bounds. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the need for error correcting codes in data communication system Construct parity and hamming codes capable of correcting a specified number of

errors. Understand the operating principles of block codes, cyclic codes, convolution codes,

Turbo Codes, BCH Codes. Understand the fundamental limits of error correction and analyse the performance

measurement of different block codes.

117

Text/Reference Books: 1. C.B.Schlegel&L.C.Perez, ―Trellis and Turbo Coding‖, Wiley,2004. 2. F.J. McWilliams and N.J.A. Slone, The theory of error correcting codes, 1977. 3. R.Johannaesson& K.S.Zigangirov, ―Fundamentals of Convolutional Coding‖,

Universities Press, 2001. 4. Shu Lin, Daniel J. Costello, Jr., Error Control Coding(2005). 5. R.E. Balahut, Theory and practice of error control codes, Addison Wesley, 1983.

118

OEL701 Human Resource Management L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective: The primary concern of this course is to sensitize students to the various facts of managing people and to create an understanding of the various policies and practices of human resource management. Detailed contents: Unit 1: Human Resource Management: concept, evolution and scope; Strategic objectives

of HR management; Roles, responsibilities and competencies of HR manager; Challenges to HR professionals;Human Resource Planning & Forecasting: significance and process; Human Resource Information System.

Unit 2: Sourcing and Recruitment; Selection: process, Placement; Induction and

Socialization.Job Analysis: job Description and job Specification; Job Design: approaches and methods;Job Evaluation-concept &methods;Performance Management System: appraisal and counselling.

Unit 3: Training process, training need analysis (TNA): training methods and techniques;

Designing Training programs; Training evaluation; Career planning and Development; Potential Appraisal and Succession planning; Employee Compensation: basic concepts & determinants; New trends in compensation management.

Unit 4: Industrial Relations and Grievance Handling: Employee welfare; Dispute

Resolution; International Human Resource Management; Contemporary Issues in HRM: knowledge Management, HR Audit &Accounting, HR in virtual organizations, ethics &corporate social responsibility. Course Outcome: a. The course will help to understand the basics of HRM with roles and responsibilities of a HR manager. b. This course enables the students to meet HR challenges in present scenario c. It will facilitate them in employing, maintaining and promoting a motivated force in an organization. d. Students will be aware about contemporary issues of human resource management.

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS

1. K. Aswathapa, ―Human resource Management: Text and cases‖, 6th edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

2. Uday Kumar Haldar & Juthika Sarkar, ―Human resource Management‖, New Delhi, Oxford University Press.

3. De Cenvo, Da & Robbins S.P., ―Fundamentals of Human Resource Management‖, 9th edition, New York, John Wiley & Sons.

4. Gary Dessler, ―Human Resource Management‖, 11th edition New Delhi: Pearson Prentice Hall.

5. TanujaAgarwala, ―Strategic Human resource Management‖, Oxford University Press

119

OEL702 Power Plant Engineering L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To provide an overview of power plants and the associated energy conversion issues Course Contents: Unit 1: Coal based thermal power plants, basic Rankine cycle and its modifications, layout of

modern coal power plant, super critical boilers, FBC boilers, turbines, condensers, steam andheating rates, subsystems of thermal power plants, fuel and ash handling, draught system, feed water treatment, binary cycles and cogeneration systems

Unit 2: Gas turbine and combined cycle power plants, Brayton cycle analysis and

optimization, components of gas turbine power plants, combined cycle power plants, Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle (IGCC) systems.

Unit 3: Basics of nuclear energy conversion, Layout and subsystems of nuclear power plants,

Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANDU Reactor, Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor (PHWR), Fast Breeder Reactors (FBR), gas cooled and liquid metal cooled reactors, safety measures for nuclear power plants.

Unit 4: Hydroelectric power plants, classification, typical layout and components, principles

of wind, tidal, solar PV and solar thermal, geothermal, biogas and fuel cell power systems Energy, economic and environmental issues, power tariffs, load distribution parameters, load curve, capital and operating cost of different power plants, pollution control technologies including waste disposal options for coal and nuclear plants.

Course Outcomes: 1. Upon completion of the course, the students can understand the principles of operation for different power plants and their economics. Text Books:

1. Nag P.K., Power Plant Engineering, 3rd ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 2. El Wakil M.M., Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010. 3. Elliot T.C., Chen K and Swanekamp R.C., Power Plant Engineering, 2nd ed., McGraw

Hill, 1998.

120

OEL703 Soft Computing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

UNIT 1: Neural Networks: History, overview of biological Neuro-system, Mathematical

Models of Neurons, ANN architecture, Learning rules, Learning Paradigms- Supervised, Unsupervised and reinforcement Learning, ANN training Algorithmsperceptions, Training rules, Delta, Back Propagation Algorithm, Multilayer Perception Model, Hopfield Networks, Associative Memories, Applications of Artificial Neural Networks.

UNIT 2: Fuzzy Logic: Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical and Fuzzy Sets: Overview of

Classical Sets, Membership Function, Fuzzy rule generation. UNIT 3: Operations on Fuzzy Sets: Compliment, Intersections, Unions, Combinations of

Operations, Aggregation Operations. UNIT 4: Fuzzy Arithmetic: Fuzzy Numbers, Linguistic Variables, Arithmetic Operations on

Intervals & Numbers, Lattice of Fuzzy Numbers, Fuzzy Equations. UNIT 5: Fuzzy Logic: Classical Logic, Multivalued Logics, Fuzzy Propositions, Fuzzy

Qualifiers, Linguistic Hedges. Uncertainty based Information: Information & Uncertainty, Nonspecificity of Fuzzy & Crisp Sets, Fuzziness of Fuzzy Sets. Genetic Algorithms, Scope & application areas, solution of 0-1Knapsack problem using GA

References: 1. Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic: Theory and applications‖,G.J. Klir,B.Yuan, PHI 2. Introduction to Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic‖, M.Ganesh , PHI 3. An Introduction to Fuzzy Control‖, D Driankov, H Hellendoorn, M Reinfrank, Narosa

Publishing Company 4. Neural Networks: A classroom approach‖, Satish Kumar , Tata McGraw Hill 5. Haykin S., ―Neural Networks-A Comprehensive Foundations‖, Prentice-Hall

International, New Jersey, 1999.

121

OEL704 Display Devices L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce about various types of displays systems. To introduce the various low power lighting systems. To introduce the operation of TFTs and LCD displays. To introduce various kinds of emissive displays.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to displays, Requirements of displays, Display technologies, CRT, Flat

panel and advanced display technologies, Technical issues in displays. Unit 2: Head mounted displays, Displays less than and greater than 0.5 m diagonal, Low

power and light emitting displays. Unit 3: Operation of TFTs and MIMS, LCDs, Brightness. Types of LCD displays, Emissive

displays, ACTFEL, Plasma display and Field emission displays, operating principle and performance. Types of Displays: 3D, HDTV, LED, Touchscreen.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Appreciate the technical requirement of different types of displays systems. Analyze the various low power lighting systems. Understand the operation of TFTs and LCD displays. Analyze the various kinds of emissive displays and critically evaluate the recent

advancements in the displays device technology. Text Books

1. L.W. Mackonald& A.C. Lowe,Display Systems, Design and Applications, Wiley, 2003.

2. E.H. Stupp&M. S. Brennesholtz, Projection Displays, Wiley,1999. Reference Books:

1. Peter A. Keller, Electronic Display Measurement: Concepts, Techniques, and Instrumentation, Wiley-Interscience, 1997.

2. Recent literature in Display Systems.

122

OEL705 Financial Management L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective:

To develop understanding among the students regarding nature of finance and its interaction with other Management functions and the objectives of Financial Management. Detailed contents.

Unit 1: Financial management: Scope finance functions and its organisation, objectives of

financial management, time value of money, sources of long term finance. Unit 2: Investment decisions importance, difficulties, determining cash flows, methods of

capital budgeting with excel, risk analysis (risk adjusted discount rate method and certainty equivalent method), cost of different sources of raising capital, weighted average cost of capital.

Unit 3: Capital structure decisions: Financial and operating leverage, EBIT/EPS Analysis,

capital structure theories, NI, NOI, traditional and M-M theories, determinants of dividend policy and dividend models, Walter, Gordon & M.M. models.

Unit 4: Working Capital: meaning, need, determinants, estimation of working capital need,

management of cash, inventory and receivables. Course Outcome

It creates understanding among the students regarding the key decisions like Investment, Financing and dividend Decisions of financial Management.

They are able to understand the usage and applications of leverages in financial decisions. The students are able to use their best knowledge in finance towards the value creation for the organization.

The students will be made aware of working capital management concept. TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Pandey, I.M., ―Financial Management‖, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi 2. Khan M.Y, and Jain P.K., ―Financial Management‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 3. Keown, Arthur J., Martin, John D., Petty, J. William and Scott, David F, ―Financial

Management”, Pearson Education 4. Chandra, Prasanna, ―Financial Management‖, TMH, New Delhi 5. Van Horne, James C., ―Financial Management and Policy‖, Prentice Hall of India 6. Brigham & Houston, ―Fundamentals of Financial Management”, Thomson Learning,

Bombay. 7. Kishore, R., ―Financial Management‖, Taxman‟s Publishing House, New Delhi

123

OEL706 Non Linear Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the continuity of functions. To introduce about stability analysis of non linear systems. To introduce about feedback linearization. To introduce about sliding mode controller design.

Syllabus Unit 1: Open and closed sets, compact set, dense set, Continuity of functions, Lipschitz

condition, smooth functions, Vector space, norm of a vector, normed linear space, inner product space. Mathematical modeling of simple mechanical and electrical systems, concept of equilibrium points, isolated equilibrium points and limit cycles.

Unit 2: Stability analysis of nonlinear systems, Lyapunov stability, asymptotic stability,

relative stability, finitetime stability and exponential stability, Lasalles invariance principle.

Unit 3: Feedback linearization, dynamic feedback linearization, flatness and back stepping

controllers design. Unit 4: Sliding mode controller design, Lyapunov redesign and energy based controller

design Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the concept of non-linear system. Design non-linear controller for electrical system. Understand about feedback linearization. Design sliding mode controller.

Text Books:

1. Khalil H.K., ‗Nonlinear Systems‘, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, 2002. 2. Vidyasagar M., ‗Nonlinear System Analysis‘, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2002. 3. Isidori, ‗Nonlinear Control Systems‘, Communications and Control Engineering,

Springer Science & Business Media, 3 rd Edition, 2013. Reference Books:

1. Jean - Jacques. E. Slotine and W. Li, ‗Applied Nonlinear Control‘, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1991.

2. Zhihua Qu, ‗Robust Control of Nonlinear Uncertain Systems‘, John Wiley & Sons, Interscience Division, New York, 1998.

3. H. Nijmeijer and A. J. van der Schaft, ‗Nonlinear Dynamical Control Systems‘, Springer New York, 2016.

124

OEL707 Operational Research L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about Different types of o.r. models. To introduce the students about Linear Programming problem-Formulation and

graphical solution. To introduce the students about Dual simplex method. Sensitivity analysis. To introduce the students about Network minimisation, shortest route problem,

Maximum flow problem and project of scheduling by PERT, CPM. To introduce the students about Critical path calculations. To introduce the students about Dynamic Programmingand examples of D.P.models.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Different types of o.r. models, their construction and general methods of solution.

Linear Programming problem-Formulation and graphical solution. The standard form of the L.P.model. The simplex method, The dual of L.P.P, Primal-dual relationship, Dual simplex method, Sensitivity analysis, Transportation problem, its solution and applications, The assignment model, Travelling salesman problem.

Unit 2: Network minimization, Shortest route problem, Maximum flow problem, Project of

scheduling by PERT, CPM. Unit 3: Critical path calculations, Construction of the time chart and resource leveling,

Integer programming-examples, method of and algorithms, cutting plane algorithm only.

Unit 4: Dynamic Programming, Examples of D.P.models, Bellman‗s Principle of optimality

and method of recursive optimization, simple problems only involving upto one constraint.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand about Different types of o.r. models, LP model and Dual Simplex Method Understand about Network minimization, shortest route problem, Maximum flow

problem and project of scheduling by PERT, CPM Understand about Critical path calculations Understand about Dynamic Programmingand examples of D.P.models

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Taha H.A Operations Research-An Introduction, PHI 2. Wanger H.M, Principles of Operation Research, PHI

125

OEL708 Operating System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the different types of operating system. To introduce about the synchronization algorithms and semaphores. To introduce about conditional critical regions and continuous allocation. To introduce about the need for file system organization and disk scheduling.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Types of operating systems, Different views of the operating system, Principles of Design and Implementation. The process and threads, System programmer's view of processes, Operating system's views of processes, Operating system services for process management, Process scheduling, Schedulers, Scheduling algorithms, Overview of Linux operating system.

Unit 2: Interprocess synchronization, Mutual exclusion algorithms, Hardware support,

Semaphores, Concurrent programming using semaphores. Unit 3: Conditional critical regions, Monitors, Interprocess communication, Messages, Pipes.

Deadlocks: Characterization. Prevention, Avoidance. detection and recovery, Combined approach to deadlock handling.

Unit 4: Contiguous allocation. Static and dynamic partitioned memory allocation,

Segmentation, Non- contiguous allocation, Paging, Hardware support, Virtual Memory.

Unit 5: Need for files, File abstraction, File naming, File system organization, File system

optimization, Reliability, Security and protection, I/O management and disk scheduling, Recent trends and developments.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the different types of Operating systems and scheduling algorithms. Understand the synchronization algorithms and semaphores. Appreciate the inter process communication and deadlock handling. Critically evaluate the different memory allocation techniques. Appreciate the importance of file system organization, I/O management and disk

scheduling. Text Books

1. Gary: Operating Systems- A modern Perspective, (2/e), Addison Wesley,2000. 2. M.Milenkovic: Operating systems, Concepts and Design, McGraw Hill,1992.

Reference Books

1. C. Crowley: Operating Systems, Irwin,1997. 2. J.l. Peterson & A.S. Chatz: Operating System Concepts, Addison Wesley,1985. 3. W. Stallings: Operating Systems, (2/e), Prentice Hall,1995. 4. Mattuck,A., Introduction to Analysis,Prentice-Hall,1998. 5. Recent literature in

Operating Systems.

126

OEL709 Industrial Safety Engineering L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce about the principles of safety management. To introduce the factors causing accidents and their prevention. To impart the knowledge of material handling and realization of chemical hazards. To give exposure to students regarding factory act 1948.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Evolution of modern safety concept, safety policy, Safety Organization, Safety

Committee, budgeting for safety. Unit 2: Safety training, creating awareness, awards, celebrations, safety posters, safety

displays, safety pledge, safety incentive scheme, safety campaign Unit 3: Concept of an accident, reportable and non reportable accidents, reporting to

statutory authorities, principles of accident prevention, accident investigation and analysis, records for accidents, departmental accident reports, documentation of accidents, unsafe act and condition, domino sequence, supervisory role, cost of accident.

Unit 4: Machine Guarding, Guarding of hazards, Machine Guarding types and its

application, Safety in welding and Gas cutting, Safety in Manual and Mechanical material handling, Safety in use of electricity Toxicity, TLV, Types of Chemical Hazards, Occupational diseases caused by dust, fumes, gases, smoke and solvent hazards, control measures

Unit 5: Fire triangle, Types of fire, first aid firefighting equipment, flammability limit, PG

safety Overview of factories act 1948, OHSAS 18000 Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Apply principles of safety management, its functions and technique in any organization.

Classify and categorize the factors contributing to accident. Apply material handling and machine guarding principles in industrial applications. Realize chemical hazards, toxicity, fire and explosion in the work place and involve to

take various control measures to prevent hazards. Follow OHSAS 18000 standards.

Reference Books:

1. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations‖, N.S.C.Chicago, 1982 2. Blake R.B., ―Industrial Safety‖ Prentice Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 1973 3. Heinrich H.W. ―Industrial Accident Prevention‖ McGraw-Hill Company, New York,

1980. 4. Krishnan N.V. ―Safety Management in Industry‖ Jaico Publishing House, Bombay,

1997. 5. John Ridley, ―Safety at Work‖, Butterworth & Co., London, 1983

127

OEL710 Cloud Computing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives

To provide comprehensive knowledge of fundamental concepts and of cloud computing.

To provide an understanding of Service models, deployment models, Virtualization. To get the knowledge about the programming and software environments of Cloud To shed light on the security issues in Cloud.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Overview of Distributed Computing, Cluster Computing and Grid Computing,

Technologies for Network based systems, Software environments for Distributed Systems and Clouds, Overview of Services and Service oriented Architecture.

Unit 2: Virtual Machines and Virtualization, Implementation levels of Virtualization,

Virtualization structures/tools and Mechanisms, Virtualization of CPU, Memory and I/O Devices, Storage Virtualization.

Unit 3: Cloud Computing, Properties, challenges, Service models, IaaS, PaaS and SaaS

Deployment models, Service Composition and orchestration, Architecture design of Compute and Storage cloud, Public Cloud Platforms, Inter Cloud Resource Management.

Unit 4: Cloud Programming and Software Environments, Parallel and Distributed

Programming paradigms, Programming on AWS, Azure and GAE, Cloud software environments Eucalyptus, Open Stack, Open Nebula.

Unit 5: Cloud Security, Infrastructure security, Data security, Identity and access

management Privacy, Audit and Compliance. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Ability to articulate the virtualization concepts Ability to identify the architecture, service models and deployment models of Cloud Ability to master the programming aspects of Cloud Determine security issues in cloud

Text Book

1. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C, Fox and Jack J, Dongarra, ―Distributed and Cloud Computing from Parallel Processing to the Internet of Things‖, Morgan Kaufmann, Elsevier, 2012.

Reference Books

1. Barrie Sosinsky, ―Cloud Computing Bible‖ John Wiley & Sons, 2010. 2. Tim Mather, Subra Kumaraswamy, and Shahed Latif, ―Cloud Security and Privacy

An Enterprise Perspective on Risks and Compliance‖, O'Reilly 2009.

128

Implementation of Credit Transfer/Mobility Policy of online courses

Reference: Gazette of India (Extraordinary) Part-III, Section-4 No. 295, UGC (Credit Framework for Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM) Regulation, 2016, dated 19/07/2016.

With reference to 12th Academic Council Meeting dated 03/05/2017 (Agenda Item No. AC/11/12), wherein MOOCs were adopted in the CBCS scheme, In continuation to that, following modalities are proposed to introduce the credit transfer policy in academic curriculum for the Massive Open Online Courses (MOOC‘s) offered through SWAYAM (Study Webs of Active-Learning for Young Aspiring Minds) Portal.

A. General Guidelines 1. The SWAYAM shall notify in June and November every year, the list of the online

learning Courses going to be offered in the forthcoming Semester on its website https://swayam.gov.in.

2. All the UTDs/Affiliated Colleges shall, within 4 weeks from the date of notification by SWAYAM, consider through their Chairperson/Principal the online learning courses being offered through the SWAYAM platform; and keeping in view their academic requirements, decide upon the courses which it shall permit for credit transfer and keeping in view the following points:

a) There is non-availability of suitable teaching staff for running a course in the

Department. b) The facilities for offering the elective papers (courses), sought for by

the students are not on offer/scheme in the Institution, but are available on the SWAYAM platform.

c) The courses offered on SWAYAM would supplement the teaching-learning process in the Institution.

d) Online courses through SWAYAM should not be more than 20% of total courses offered in a particular semester of a programme.

3. The courses offered in a particular semester will be compiled by Digital India Cell as decided and forwarded by concerned UTDs and affiliated colleges in the prescribed format to digitalindia.ymca@gmail.com and compiled set will be put up in Academic Council for approval.

4. Student can opt for 12-16 weeks course equivalent to 3-6 credits under mentorship of faculty (MHRD MOOC‘s guidelines 11.1(J) issued by the MHRD vide its orders dated 11/03/2016).

5. Every student being offered a particular paper (course) would be required to register for the MOOCs for that course/paper on SWAYAM through University‘s/Affiliated College‘s SWAYAM-NPTEL Local Chapter.

Annexure-A

Approved in 17th Academic Council Dated 11.06.2019

129

6. The UTD/College may designate a faculty member as course coordinator/mentor to

guide the students (at least 20 students) throughout the course with 2 hours per week contribution and with mentor addition on the Local Chapter. The mentor Chairperson/Principal will ensure the provision of facilities for smooth running of the course viz. Internet facility and proper venue in the department/college.

7. Digital India Cell of the University will be the Nodal point for keeping track of MOOCs enrolments in the University and the concerned chairpersons/principals are expected to aware their students/faculty about the online courses.

8. Importance of online learning and credit transfer policy must be shared with the students at entry level by the concerned department/college. Same may be incorporated during induction program for newly admitted students.

9. The departmental/college MOOC coordinators appointed by chairpersons of concerned departments/Principals of affiliated colleges will be responsible for identification of relevant MOOCs in the UTDs/Colleges and smooth conduction during the course.

B. Credit Transfer/Mobility of MOOCs

1. The parent Institution (offering the Course) shall give the equivalent credit weightage to the students for the credits earned through online learning courses through SWAYAM platform in the credit plan of the program.

2. Following pattern will be followed for distribution of credits and will be applicable to all students from Jan 2018 onwards:

Program Duration Minimum Credits to be

earned* B.Tech Semester I to VIII 3 M.Tech/MBA/M.Sc./MA Semester I to IV 3 BBA/BCA/B.Sc./BA Semester I to VI 3

*All students of UTDs/Affiliated colleges of all courses have to mandatorily earn minimum prescribed credits. Note: From session 2019-20 onwards, for B.Tech program, a student has to earn at least 12 credits during the duration of the Degree subject to the passing of at least one MOOC course (carrying minimum 3 credits per year).

3. A student will be eligible to get Under-Graduate/Post-Graduate degree

(B.Tech/M.Tech) with Honours if he/she completes additional credits through MOOC‘s. (AICTE Model Curriculum, Chapter1(B)). Following pattern will be followed for earning additional credits for the award of Honours degree: Program Duration Credits to be

earned* Minimum CGPA

B.Tech Semester I to VIII 12 8.0 M.Tech Semester I to IV 6 8.0 *Inclusive of Minimum credits to be earned mentioned in clause B(2) above.

130

4. The earned credits shall be accepted and transferred to the total credits of the

concerned students by the University for Completion of his/her degree. Credits earned through MOOCs will be incorporated in the mark sheet issued to the student by Controller of Examination.

5. Credits for MOOC‘s will be verified by the concerned department/college and will be forwarded to Controller of Examination for further processing.

6. The courses where model curriculum of AICTE is not applicable, pattern laid down as in B(2) will be followed.

NOTE: These guidelines will be applicable to all Affiliating institutions under University along

with all UTDs. Affiliating colleges will establish their own Local Chapter on SWAYAM and follow the same process.

1. For further clarifications, Notifications ―Credit Framework for Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM‖ (UGC Regulations dated 19/07/2016) and ―MHRD MOOC‘s guidelines‖ (MHRD guidelines dated 11/03/2016) may be referred.

SCHEME & SYLLABUS

for

B.TECH. COURSE

in

Electronics Instrumentation & Control Engineering

(w.e.f. Session 2018-19)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

J.C. BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, YMCA, FARIDABAD

J.C.BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY, YMCA, FARIDABAD

VISION

J.C. Bose University of Science and Technology, YMCA Faridabad, aspires to be a

nationally and internationally acclaimed leader in technical and higher education in

all spheres which transforms the life of students through integration of teaching,

research and character building.

MISSION To contribute to the development of science and technology by synthesizing

teaching, research and creative activities.

To provide an enviable research environment and state-of-the-art technological

exposure to its scholars.

To develop human potential to its fullest extent and make them emerge as world

class leaders in their professions and enthuse them towards their social

responsibilities.

Department of Electronics Engineering

VISION

To be a Centre of Excellence for producing high quality engineers and scientists

capable of providing sustainable solutions to complex problems and promoting cost

effective indigenous technology in the area of Electronics, Communication &

Control Engineering for Industry, Research Organizations, Academia and all sections

of society.

MISSION

To frame a well-balanced curriculum with an emphasis on basic theoretical

knowledge as well the requirements of the industry.

To motivate students to develop innovative solutions to the existing problems for

betterment of the society.

Collaboration with the industry, research establishments and other academic

institutions to bolster the research and development activities.

To provide infrastructure and financial support for culmination of novel ideas into

useful prototypes.

To promote research in emerging and interdisciplinary areas and act as a facilitator

for knowledge generation and dissemination through Research, Institute - Industry

and Institute-Institute interaction.

About Electronics Engineering Department

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA University

of Science & Technology, Faridabad) established in 2009, formerly known as YMCA

Institute of Engineering, Faridabad, established in year 1969 as a Joint Venture of Govt.

of Haryana and National Council of YMCA of India with active assistance from overseas

agencies of West Germany to produce highly practical oriented personnel in specialized

field of engineering to meet specific technical manpower requirement of industries.

Electronics Engineering Department started in 1969 and has been conducting B.Tech.

Courses in Electronics Instrumentation and Control and Electronics and Communication

Engineering of 4-Years duration since 1997. Students are admitted through centralized

counseling nominated by state govt. in 1st Year and 2nd year through lateral entry

entrance test. Besides under graduate degree courses, it is also running M.Tech. Courses

in VLSI, Instrumentation and Electronics & Communication. Department of Electronics

Engineering is also running Ph.D. Programme. All courses are duly approved by AICTE/

UGC. The Electronics Engineering Department has been well known for its track record

of employment of the pass out students since its inception. The Department has good

infrastructure consisting of 11 laboratories, 10 Lecture Halls and 1 Conference Room

beside 6 workshops. It has excellent faculty with 2 Professors, 4 Associate Professors and

23 Assistant Professors. At present, 8 faculty members are PhD in various specializations.

The various syllabi of UG/PG courses have been prepared with active participation from

Industry. The Department is organizing number of expert lectures from industry experts

for students in every semester. Seven month training is mandatory for every B.Tech.

Students. Emphasis has been given on project work and workshop for skill enhancement

of students. Choice based credit system allows students to study the subjects of his/her

choice from a number of elective courses /audit courses.

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOS)

1. To prepare students to excel in undergraduate programmes and succeed in

industry/ technical profession through global, rigorous education.

2. To provide students with a solid foundation in mathematical, scientific and

engineering fundamentals required to solve engineering problems and also to

pursue higher studies.

3. To provide students with foundation in skill development required to design,

develop and fabricate engineering products.

4. To inculcate in students professional and ethical attitude, effective communication

skills, teamwork skills, multidisciplinary approach, and an ability to relate

engineering issues to broader social context, additional courses with regard to

physical, psychological and career growth.

5. To provide student with an academic environment aware of excellence,

outstanding leadership, written ethical codes and guidelines with moral values, and

the life-long learning needed for successful professional career.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs) Engineering Graduates will be able to: 1) Engineering knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and Electronics Engineering to the solution of engineering problems. 2) Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review literature and analyze Electronics Engineering problems to design, conduct experiments, analyze data and interpret data. 3) Design /development of solutions: Design solution for Electronics Engineering problems and design system component of processes that meet the desired needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal and the environmental considerations. 4) Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions in Electronics Engineering. 5) Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to Electronics Engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations. 6) The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to mechanical engineering practice. 7) Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the Electronics Engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge and need for sustainable development. 8) Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of the Electronics Engineering practice. 9) Individual and team work: Function affectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings in Electronics Engineering. 10) Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering committee and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write affective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations in Electronics Engineering. 11) Project Management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge & understanding of the mechanical engineering principles and management principles and apply these to one‟s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments in Electronics Engineering. 12) Life - long learning: Recognize the need for, and the preparation and ability to engage in independent research and lifelong learning in the broadest contest of technological changes in Electronics Engineering.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

1. To apply the fundamental and design knowledge in the areas of analog & digital circuits, Electronics Instrumentation and Control Systems.

2. To pursue higher studies or get placed in Industries and Organizations.

GRADING SCHEME

Grading Scheme

Marks % Grade Grade points Category

90-100 O 10 Outstanding 80 ≤ marks <90 A+ 9 Excellent 70 ≤ marks < 80 A 8 Very good 60 ≤ marks < 70 B+ 7 Good 50 ≤ marks < 60 B 6 Above average 45 ≤ marks < 50 C 5 Average 40 ≤ marks < 45 P 4 Pass <40 F 0 Fail

Ab 0 Absent

Percentage calculation= CGPA * 9.5 SEMESTER WISE SUMMARY OF THE PROGRAMME: B.TECH. (EIC)

S.No. Semester No. of Contact Hours Marks Credits

1 I 26 600 18.5 2 II 25 650 19.5 3 III 30 850 22 4 IV 33 900 26 5 V 27 800 20 6 VI 28 800 23 7 VII 24 750 21 8 VIII - 500 10

Total 193 5850 160*

NOTE:

*It is mandatory to pass the MOOC course(s) by all the students as

per implementation of credit transfer/ mobility policy of on line

courses of the University-as mentioned in Annexure-A at the end of

the syllabus.

Chapter -1

General, Course structure & Theme &

Semester-wise credit distribution

A. Definition of Credit:

1 Hr. Lecture (L) per week 1 credit 1 Hr. Tutorial (T) per week 1 credit 1 Hr. Practical (P) per week 2 Hours Practical(Lab)/week

0.5 credits 1 credit

B. Course code and definition:

Course code Definitions L Lecture T Tutorial P Practical BSC Basic Science Courses ESC Engineering Science Courses HSMC Humanities and Social Sciences including

Management courses PCC Professional core courses PEC Professional Elective courses OEC Open Elective courses LC Laboratory course MC Mandatory courses PROJ Project

C. Category of Courses:

BASIC SCIENCE COURSES Sl. No.

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week Credits

L T P 1 Physics 3 1 3 5.5 2 Chemistry 3 1 3 5.5 3 Mathematics –I 3 1 0 4 4 Mathematics –2 3 1 0 4

9

ENGINEERING SCIENCE COURSES Sl. No.

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week Credits

L T P 1 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 1 2 5 2 Engineering Graphics & Design 0 0 4 2 3 Programming for Problem Solving 3 0 4 5 4 Workshop I 0 0 4 2 5 Workshop II 0 0 4 2

HUMANITIES & SOCIAL SCIENCES INCLUDING MANAGEMENT

Sl. No.

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week Credits

L T P 1 English 2 0 2 3

Chapter -2 Detailed first year curriculum contents

I. Mandatory Induction program

[Induction program for students to be offered right at the start of the first year.]

3 weeks duration Physical activity Creative Arts Universal Human Values Literary Proficiency Modules Lectures by Eminent People Visits to local Areas Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations

10

B.TECH 1st YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -I) COURSE STRUCTURE

S.No Course Code Course Title L T P Credits Sessional External Category

Code

1 BSC101C Physics (Waves and Optics) 3 1 - 4 25 75 BSC

2 BSC103 D Mathematics-I (Calculus and Linear Algebra)

3 1 - 4 25 75 BSC

3 ESC102 Engineering Graphics & Design - - 4 2 30 70 ESC

4 ESC103 Programming for Problem solving 3 - - 3 25 75 ESC

5 ESC104 Workshop- I - - 4 2 30 70 ESC

6 BSC104C Physics(Waves and Optics) lab - - 3 1.5 15 35 BSC

7 ESC105 Programming for Problem solving Lab

-

-

4 2 15 35 ESC

TOTAL 9 2 15 18.5 165 435

B.TECH 1st YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -II)

COURSE STRUCTURE

S.No. Course Code

Course Title

L

T

P

Credits Sessional External Category

Code

1 BSC106 D

Mathematics-II (Calculus, Ordinary

Differential Equations and Complex Variable)

3 1 - 4 25 75 BSC

2 ESC101 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 1 - 4 25 75 AECC

3 BSC 102 Chemistry 3 1 - 4 25 75 BEC

- ESC106 Workshop- II -

- 4 2 30 70 BEC

5 HSMC101 English 2 - - 2 25 75 BEC

6 ESC107 Basic Electrical Engineering Lab - - 2 1 15 35 BSC

7 BSC 105 Chemistry Lab - - 3 1.5 15 35 BEC

8 HSMC102 English Lab - - 2 1 15 35 BEC

TOTAL 11 3 11 19.5 175 475 Note: Workshop I and Workshop II can be decided for specific branch by the respective Dean/Principal of respective UTD/Institutions

11

B.TECH 2nd YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -III) COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC EC301 Electronics Devices 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 2 PCC EC302 Digital System Design 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC ECC01 Signal and Systems 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 PCC EC304 Network Theory 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 BSC BS301 Mathematics-III 3 1 0 4 25 75 100 6 MC MC01/

MC02 Indian Constitution/ Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge

2 0 0 0 25 75 100

7 PCC EC351 Electronics Devices Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

8 PCC EC352 Digital System Design Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 PCC EC353 Network Theory Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50 10 ESC ES301 Electronics Workshop-I 0 0 6 3 30 70 100 Total Credits 22 225 625 850

B.TECH 2nd YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -IV)

COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC EI401 Control System

Enginnering 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC EC402 Analog Circuits 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC EI403 Electrical Measurement

and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

4 PCC ECC02 Electromagnetic Waves 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 ESC ESC01 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4 25 75 100 6 BSC BSC01 Biology 2 1 0 3 25 75 100 7 PCC EI451 Control System Engg.

Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

8 PCC EC452 Analog Circuits Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50 9 PCC EI453 Electrical Measurement

and Instrumentation Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

10 PCC ECC52 Electromagnetic Waves Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

11 ESC ES402 Electronics Workshop-II

0 0 6 3 30 70 100

Total Credits 26 240 660 900

12

B.TECH 3rd YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -V) COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No.

Category

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC EI501 Sensors, Signal

Conditioning and Telemetry

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC EI502 Modern Control System 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC ECC03 Microprocessors and

Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

4 PEC Program Elective-I 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 MC MC03 Environmental Sciences 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 6 OEC Open Elective -1 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 7 PCC ECC51 Microprocessors and

Microcontrollers Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

8 PEC *EIEL551A/ EIEL551B

Power Electronics/ Virtual Instrumentation Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 PCC EI555 Electronics Workshop-III

0 0 6 3 30 70 100

Total Credits 20 210 590 800 Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-I EIEL501 Power Electronics EIEL502 Industrial Instrumentation EIEL503 Virtual/Intelligent Instrumentation

Open Elective-I

OE501 Computer Architecture OE502 Data Structure OE503 Basics of Communication Engineering OE504 Financial Management

Note: Exams Duration will be as under (a) Theory exams will be of 3 hours duration. (b) Practical exams will be of 08 hours duration (c) Workshop exam will be of 8 hours duration

*The Lab relevant to PEC-I should be choosen.

13

B.TECH 3rd YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -VI) COURSE STRUCTURE

Sr. No

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC EI601 Industrial Process

Control 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC ECC04 Digital Signal Processing

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

3 PEC Program Elective-II 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 PEC Program Elective-III 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 PEC Program Elective-IV 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 6 OEC OE-II 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 7 PCC ECC53 Digital Signal

Processing Lab 0 0 2 1 15 35 50

8 PCC **EI653A/ EI653B

Instrumentation Lab/ VLSI Design Lab

0 0 2 1 15 35 50

9 PCC EI654 Electronics Workshop-IV

0 0 6 3 30 70 100

Total Credits 23 210 590 800 Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-II EIEL601 Internet of Things EIEL602 Digital Control EIEL603 Numerical Methods

Program Elective-III

EIEL604 Computer Based Instrumentation and Control EIEL605 Power Plant Instrumentation EIEL606 Process Modeling & Optimization EIEL607 Building Automation

Program Elective-IV

EIEL608 Analytical instrumentation EIEL609 Control System Components EIEL610 Optical Instrumentation EIEL611 VLSI Design

Open Elective-II

OE601 Digital Communication OE602 Scientific Computing OE603 Soft Computing OE604 Industrial Economics

Note: Exams Duration will be as under (a) Theory exams will be of 3 hours duration. (b) Practical exams will be of 08 hours duration (c) Workshop exam will be of 8 hours duration **The Lab relevant to PEC-IV should be choosen.

14

B.TECH 4th YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -VII)

COURSE STRUCTURE Semester 7(May be carried out in 8th Semester*)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PEC Program Elective-V 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 2 PEC Program Elective-VI 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PEC Program Elective-VII 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 OEC OE-III 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 OEC OE-IV 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 6 HSMC HSMC

01 Effective Tech. Comm. 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

7 PROJ EIP701 Major Project 0 0 2 1 15 35 50 8 PCC EI751 Electronics Workshop-

V 0 0 4 2 30 70 100

Total Credits 21 195 555 750

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-V

EIEL701 Embedded System EIEL702 PLCs and SCADA EIEL703 Instrumentation & System Design EIEL704 Introduction to MEMS

Program Elective-VI

EIEL705 Fuzzy Control System EIEL706 AI and Expert System EIEL707 Micro / Nano Devices and Sensors EIEL708 Digital Image & Video Processing

Program Elective-VII

EIEL709 Non Linear Control System EIEL710 Batch Process Control EIEL711 Stochastic Control EIEL712 Electromagnetic compatibility for Instruments

Open Elective-III

OE701 Computer Network OE702 Banking System and Taxation OE703 Operational Research

Open Elective-IV

OE704 Human Resource Management OE705 Mobile Communication and Networks OE706 Wireless Sensor Networks OE707 Industrial Safety OE708 Cyber Laws & Security

Note: Exams Duration will be as under (a) Theory exams will be of 3 hours duration. (b) Practical exams will be of 08 hours duration (c) Workshop exam will be of 8 hours duration The course contents of 7th Semester may be pursued by the students of UTDs/Departments of Affiliated colleges in 8th semester. In the case of pursuance of internship in 7th semester, the course contents of 7th semester will be taught in 8th semester and vice-versa. The approval of such interchangeability should be requested from the authority before the commencement of 7th semester.

15

B.TECH 4th YEAR EIC (SEMESTER -VIII)

COURSE STRUCTURE Semester- 8 (May be carried out in 7th semester*)

Sr No.

Course Title Teaching Schedule

Examination Schedule (Marks)

Credits

Annual Exam.

Continuous Assessment

Total

1 EIP801 Industrial Training

6 Months 350 150 500 10

A) PROCEDURE FOR ANNUAL EXAMINATION AND MARKS. 1. PROJECT EVALUATION 150 MARKS 2. PROJECT SEMINAR 100 MARKS 3. PROJECT VIVA 100 MARKS

350

B) CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT MARKS 1. ASSESSMENT BY INSTITUTE FACULTY 50 MARKS. 2. ASSESSMENT BY INDUSTRIAL GUIDE 50 MARKS. 3. CONDUCT MARKS 50MARKS.

150

TOTAL 500 * The Industry Internship may be pursued by UTDs/Departments of Affiliated colleges in 7th or 8th semester. In the case of pursuance of internship in 7th semester, the course contents of 7th semester will be taught in 8th semester and vice-versa. The approval of such interchangeability should be requested from the authority before the commencement of 7th semester.

16

Course code BSC101C (Th)/ BSC104 (Lab) Category Basic Science Course

Course title Physics (Waves and Optics) (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester-I 3 1 3 5.5

(i) Physics (Waves and Optics) ( [L : 3; T:1; P : 0 (4 credits)] Prerequisites: (i) Mathematics course on Differential equations Unit 1: Simple harmonic motion, damped and forced simple harmonic oscillator (7)

Mechanical and electrical simple harmonic oscillators, complex number notation and phasor representation of simple harmonic motion, damped harmonic oscillator – heavy, critical and light damping, energy decay in a damped harmonic oscillator, quality factor, forced mechanical and electrical oscillators, electrical and mechanical impedance, steady state motion of forced damped harmonic oscillator, power absorbed by oscillator

Unit 2: Non-dispersive transverse and longitudinal waves in one dimension and introductionto dispersion (7): Transverse wave on a string, the wave equation on a string, Harmonic waves, reflection and transmission of waves at a boundary, impedance matching, standing waves and their eigenfrequencies, longitudinal waves and the wave equation for them, acoustics waves and speed of sound, standing sound waves. Waves with dispersion, water waves, superposition of waves and Fourier method, wave groups and group velocity.

Unit 3: The propagation of light and geometric optics (10): Fermat‟s principle of stationary time and its applications e.g. in explaining mirage effect, laws of reflection and refraction, Light as an electromagnetic wave and Fresnel equations, reflectance and transmittance, Brewster‟s angle, total internal reflection, and evanescent wave. Mirrors and lenses and optical instruments based on them, transfer formula and the matrix method

Unit 4: Wave optics (6): Huygens‟ principle, superposition of waves and interference of light by wavefront splitting and amplitude splitting; Young‟s double slit experiment, Newton‟s rings, Michelson interferometer, Mach-Zehnder interferometer. Farunhofer diffraction from a single slit and a circular aperture, the Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution and its application to vision; Diffraction gratings and their resolving power

Unit 5: Lasers (8): Einstein‟s theory of matter radiation interaction and A and B coefficients; amplification of light by population inversion, different types of lasers: gas lasers ( He-Ne, CO2), solid-state lasers(ruby,Neodymium), dye lasers; Properties of laser beams: monochromaticity, coherence, directionality and brightness, laser speckles, applications of lasers in science, engineering and medicine.

Reference books: (i) Ian G. Main, Oscillations and waves in physics (ii) H.J. Pain, The physics of vibrations and waves (iii) E. Hecht, A. Ghatak, Optics (iv) O. Svelto, Principles of Lasers

17

(ii) Physics (Waves & Optics) Lab [ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 3 (1.5credits)] At least 06 experiments from the following

1. To determine the frequency of an electric tuning fork by Melde‟s experiment and verify λ2 –T law.

2. To study Lissajous Figures. 3. Familiarization with: Schuster`s focusing; determination of angle of prism. 4. To determine refractive index of the Material of a prism using sodium source. 5. To determine the dispersive power and Cauchy constants of the material of a prism

using mercury source. 6. To determine the wavelength of sodium source using Michelson‟s interferometer. 7. To determine wavelength of sodium light using Fresnel‟s Biprism. 8. To determine wavelength of sodium light using Newton‟s Rings. 9. To determine wavelength of (1) Na source and (2) spectral lines of Hg

source using plane diffraction grating. 10. To determine dispersive power and resolving power of a plane diffraction grating. 11. To determine the wavelength of laser source using diffraction of single slit. 12. To determine the wavelength of laser source using diffraction of double slits. 13. To determine angular spread of He-Ne laser using plane diffraction grating

Note: Experiments may be added or deleted as per the availability of equipments.

Reference Books 1. Advanced Practical Physics for students, B.L. Flint and H.T. Worsnop, 1971, Asia

Publishing House 2. A Text Book of Practical Physics, I.Prakash & Ramakrishna, 11th Ed., 1511,Kitab Mahal 3. Advanced level Physics Practicals, Michael Nelson and Jon M. Ogborn, 4th Edition,

reprinted 1985, Heinemann Educational Publishers 4. A Laboratory Manual of Physics for undergraduate classes, D.P.Khandelwal,1985, Vani

Pub.

18

Course code BSC103D Category Basic Science Course

Course title MATHEMATICS 1 (Calculus and Linear Algebra)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester –I 3 1 - 4

Pre-requisites (if any) -

OBJECTIVES: The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques in calculus, multivariate analysis and linear algebra. It aims to equip the students with standard concepts and tools at an intermediate to advanced level that will serve them well towards tackling more advanced level of mathematics and applications that they would find useful in their disciplines. More precisely, the objectives are: To introduce the idea of applying differential and integral calculus to notions of curvature

and to improper integrals. Apart from some applications it gives a basic introduction on Beta and Gamma functions.

To introduce the fallouts of Rolle‟s Theorem that is fundamental to application of analysis to Engineering problems.

To develop the tool of power series and Fourier series for learning advanced Engineering Mathematics.

To familiarize the student with functions of several variables that is essential in most branches of engineering.

To develop the essential tool of matrices and linear algebra in a comprehensive manner. Module 1: Calculus: (6 hours): Evolutes and involutes; Evaluation of definite and

improper integrals; Beta and Gamma functions and their properties; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and volumes of revolutions.

Module 2: Calculus: (6 hours): Rolle‟s Theorem, Mean value theorems, Taylor‟s and

Maclaurin theorems with remainders; indeterminate forms and L'Hospital's rule; Maxima and minima.

Module 3:Sequences and series: (10 hours): Convergence of sequence and series, tests for

convergence; Power series, Taylor's series, series for exponential, trigonometric and logarithm functions; Fourier series: Half range sine and cosine series, Parseval‟s theorem.

Module 4:Multivariable Calculus (Differentiation): (8 hours): Limit, continuity and partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total derivative; Tangent plane and normal line; Maxima, minima and saddle points; Method of Lagrange multipliers; Gradient, curl and divergence.

Module 5:Matrices (10hours): Inverse and rank of a matrix,rank-nullity theorem; System of linear equations; Symmetric, skew- symmetric and orthogonal matrices;

19

Determinants; Eigenvalues and eigenvectors; Diagonalization of matrices; Cayley-Hamilton Theorem, and Orthogonal transformation.

Textbooks/References: 1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition,Pearson,

Reprint, 2002. 2. Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,

2006. 3. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008. 4. Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi,

11thReprint, 2010. 5. D. Poole, Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction, 2nd Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005. 6. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi

Publications, Reprint, 2008. 7. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36th Edition, 2010.

20

Course code ESC 102 Category Engineering Science Courses Course title Engineering Graphics & Design (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits

Semester – I - 0 4 2

Pre-requisites (if any)

-

Detailed contents Traditional Engineering Graphics: Principles of Engineering Graphics; Orthographic Projection; Descriptive Geometry; Drawing Principles; Isometric Projection; Surface Development; Perspective; Reading a Drawing; Sectional Views; Dimensioning & Tolerances; True Length, Angle; intersection, Shortest Distance.

Computer Graphics: Engineering Graphics Software; -Spatial Transformations; Orthographic Projections; Model Viewing; Co-ordinate Systems; Multi-view Projection; Exploded Assembly; Model Viewing; Animation; Spatial Manipulation; Surface Modelling; Solid Modelling; Introduction to Building Information Modelling (BIM) Module 1: Introduction to Engineering Drawing covering, Principles of Engineering Graphics and their significance, usage of Drawing instruments, lettering, Conic sections including the Rectangular Hyperbola (General method only); Cycloid, Epicycloid, Hypocycloid and Involute; Scales – Plain, Diagonal and Vernier Scales; Module 2: Orthographic Projections covering, Principles of Orthographic Projections-Conventions - Projections of Points and lines inclined to both planes; Projections of planes inclined Planes - Auxiliary Planes; Module 3: Projections of Regular Solids covering, Those inclined to both the Planes- Auxiliary Views; Draw simple annotation, dimensioning and scale. Floor plans that include: windows, doors, and fixtures such as WC, bath, sink, shower, etc. Module 4: Sections and Sectional Views of Right Angular Solids covering, Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone – Auxiliary Views; Development of surfaces of Right Regular Solids - Prism, Pyramid, Cylinder and Cone; Draw the sectional orthographic views of geometrical solids, objects from industry and dwellings (foundation to slab only) Module 5: Isometric Projections covering, Principles of Isometric projection – Isometric Scale, Isometric Views, Conventions; Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids; Conversion of Isometric Views to Orthographic Views and Vice-versa, Conventions;

21

Module 6: Overview of Computer Graphics covering, listing the computer technologies that impact on graphical communication, Demonstrating knowledge of the theory of CAD software [such as: The Menu System, Toolbars (Standard, Object Properties, Draw, Modify and Dimension), Drawing Area (Background, Crosshairs, Coordinate System), Dialog boxes and windows, Shortcut menus (Button Bars), The Command Line (where applicable), The Status Bar, Different methods of zoom as used in CAD, Select and erase objects.; Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids]; Module 7: Customisation& CAD Drawing consisting of set up of the drawing page and the printer, including scale settings, Setting up of units and drawing limits; ISO and ANSI standards for coordinate dimensioning and tolerance; Orthographic constraints, Snap to objects manually and automatically; Producing drawings by using various coordinate input entry methods to draw straight lines, Applying various ways of drawing circles. Course Outcomes All phases of manufacturing or construction require the conversion of new ideas and design concepts into the basic line language of graphics. Therefore, there are many areas (civil, mechanical, electrical, architectural and industrial) in which the skills of the CAD technicians play major roles in the design and development of new products or construction. Students prepare for actual work situations through practical training in a new state-of-the-art computer designed CAD laboratory using engineering software. This course is designed to: Learn about the visual aspects of engineering design. Analyse engineering graphics standards. Prepare orthographic and isometric projection. Draw section of solids and conic sections. Exposure to computer-aided geometric design Suggested Text/Reference Books:

1. Bhatt N.D., Panchal V.M. & Ingle P.R., (2014), Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House

2. Shah, M.B. & Rana B.C. (2008), Engineering Drawing and Computer Graphics, Pearson Education

3. Agrawal B. & Agrawal C. M. (2012), Engineering Graphics, TMH Publication

4. Aggarwal M L & Sandhya Dixit (2017), Engineering Graphics and Machine Drawing, Dhanpat Rai & Company P Ltd.

5. Narayana, K.L. & P Kannaiah (2008), Text book on Engineering Drawing, Scitech Publishers, (Corresponding set of) CAD Software Theory and User Manuals

6. Narayana, K.L. & P Kannaiah (2008), Text book on Engineering Drawing, Scitech Publishers (Corresponding set of) CAD Software Theory and User Manuals

22

Course code ESC103(Th)/ESC105(Lab) Category Engineering Science Course

Course title Programming for Problem Solving (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester – I/II

3 0 4 5 Pre-requisites (if

any) -

(i)Programming for Problem Solving ( [L : 3; T:0; P : 0 (3 credits)] [contact hrs : 40]

Detailed contents Unit 1 Introduction to Programming (4 lectures) Introduction to components of a computer

system (disks, memory, processor, where a program is stored and executed, operating system, compilers etc.) - (1 lecture).

Idea of Algorithm: steps to solve logical and numerical problems. Representation of Algorithm: Flowchart/Pseudocode with examples. (1 lecture)

From algorithms to programs; source code, variables (with data types) variables and memory locations, Syntax and Logical Errors in compilation, object and executable code- (2 lectures)

Unit 2:Arithmetic expressions and precedence (2 lectures) Conditional Branching and Loops (6 lectures) Writing and evaluation of conditionals and consequent branching (3 lectures) Iteration and loops (3 lectures)

Unit 3 Arrays (6 lectures) Arrays (1-D, 2-D), Character arrays and Strings Unit 4 Basic Algorithms (6 lectures) Searching, Basic Sorting Algorithms (Bubble, Insertion

and Selection), Finding roots of equations, notion of order of complexity through example programs (no formal definition required)

Unit 5 Function (5 lectures) Functions (including using built in libraries), Parameter passing in functions, call by value, Passing arrays to functions: idea of call by reference

Unit 6 Recursion (4 -5 lectures) Recursion, as a different way of solving problems. Example programs, such as Finding Factorial, Fibonacci series, Ackerman function etc. Quick sort or Merge sort.

Unit 7 Structure (4 lectures) Structures, Defining structures and Array of Structures

Unit 8 Pointers (2 lectures) Idea of pointers, Defining pointers, Use of Pointers in self-referential structures, notion of linked list (no implementation)

Unit 9 File handling (only if time is available, otherwise should be done as part of the lab)

Suggested Text Books (i) Byron Gottfried, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C, McGraw-Hill (ii) E. Balaguruswamy, Programming in ANSI C, Tata McGraw-Hill

Suggested Reference Books

(i) Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, The C Programming Language, Prentice Hall of India

Course Outcomes

23

The student will learn To formulate simple algorithms for arithmetic and logical problems. To translate the algorithms to programs (in C language). To test and execute the programs and correct syntax and logical errors. To implement conditional branching, iteration and recursion. To decompose a problem into functions and synthesize a complete program

using divide and conquer approach. To use arrays, pointers and structures to formulate algorithms and programs. To apply programming to solve matrix addition and multiplication problems and

searching and sorting problems. To apply programming to solve simple numerical method problems, namely rot

finding of function, differentiation of function and simple integration.

(ii) Laboratory - Programming for Problem Solving[ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 4 (2credits)]

Tutorial 1: Problem solving using computers: Lab1: Familiarization with programming environment

Tutorial 2: Variable types and type conversions: Lab 2: Simple computational problems using arithmetic expressions

Tutorial 3: Branching and logical expressions: Lab 3: Problems involving if-then-else structures

Tutorial 4: Loops, while and for loops: Lab 4: Iterative problems e.g., sum of series

Tutorial 5: 1D Arrays: searching, sorting: Lab 5: 1D Array manipulation

Tutorial 6: 2D arrays and Strings Lab 6: Matrix problems, String operations

Tutorial 7: Functions, call by value: Lab 7: Simple functions

Tutorial 8 &9: Numerical methods (Root finding, numerical differentiation, numerical integration): Lab 8 and 9: Programming for solving Numerical methods problems

Tutorial 10: Recursion, structure of recursive calls Lab 10: Recursive functions

Tutorial 11: Pointers, structures and dynamic memory allocation Lab 11: Pointers and structures

Tutorial 12: File handling: Lab 12: File operations

Laboratory Outcomes To formulate the algorithms for simple problems To translate given algorithms to a working and correct program To be able to correct syntax errors as reported by the compilers To be able to identify and correct logical errors encountered at run time To be able to write iterative as well as recursive programs To be able to represent data in arrays, strings and structures and manipulate

them through a program

24

To be able to declare pointers of different types and use them in defining self- referential structures.

To be able to create, read and write to and from simple text files. ********

25

Course code BSC106D Category Basic Science Course Course title Mathematics -II (Calculus, Ordinary Differential

Equations and Complex Variable )

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits

Semester-II 3 1 0 4

Pre-requisites (if any)

-

OBJECTIVES: The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques in multivariate integration, ordinary and partial differential equations and complex variables. It aims to equip the students to deal with advanced level of mathematics and applications that would be essential for their disciplines. More precisely, the objectives are: a. To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and

their usage. b. To introduce effective mathematical tools for the solutions of differential equations that

model physical processes. c. To introduce the tools of differentiation and integration of functions of complex variable

that are used in various techniques dealing engineering problems. Module 1:Multivariable Calculus (Integration): (10 hours) Multiple Integration: Double

integrals (Cartesian), change of order of integration in double integrals, Change of variables (Cartesian to polar), Applications: areas and volumes, Center of mass and Gravity (constant and variable densities);Triple integrals (Cartesian), orthogonal curvilinear coordinates, Simple applications involving cubes, sphere and rectangular parallelepipeds; Scalar line integrals, vector line integrals, scalar surface integrals, vector surface integrals, Theorems of Green, Gauss and Stokes.

Module 2:First order ordinary differential equations:(6 hours) Exact, linear and

Bernoulli‟s equations, Euler‟s equations, Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for p, equations solvable for y, equations solvable for x and Clairaut‟s type.

Module 3: Ordinary differential equations of higher orders:(8 hours) Second order linear

differential equations with variable coefficients, method of variation of parameters, Cauchy-Euler equation; Power series solutions; Legendre polynomials, Bessel functions of the first kind and their properties.

Module 4: Complex Variable – Differentiation:(8 hours): Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann

equations, analytic functions, harmonic functions, finding harmonic conjugate; elementary analytic functions (exponential, trigonometric, logarithm) and their properties; Conformal mappings, Mobius transformations and their properties.

Module 5: Complex Variable – Integration:(8 hours): Contour integrals, Cauchy-Goursat

theorem (without proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without proof), Liouville‟s theorem and Maximum-Modulus theorem (without proof); Taylor‟s series, zeros of analytic functions, singularities, Laurent‟s series; Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem (without proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving sine and cosine, Evaluation of certain improper integrals using the Bromwich contour.

26

Textbooks/References: 1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson, Reprint, 2002. 2. Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006. 3. W. E. Boyce and R. C. DiPrima, Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, 9th Edn., Wiley India, 2009. 4. S. L. Ross, Differential Equations, 3rd Ed., Wiley India, 1984. 5. E. A. Coddington, An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations, Prentice Hall India, 1995. 6. E. L. Ince, Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover Publications, 1958. 7. J. W. Brown and R. V. Churchill, Complex Variables and Applications, 7th Ed., Mc- Graw Hill, 2004. 8. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications, Reprint, 2008. 9. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36th Edition, 2010

27

Course code ESC 101(Th)/ESC107(Lab) Category Engineering Science Course

Course title Basic Electrical Engineering (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester –I/II 3 1 2 5

Pre-requisites (if any) -

(i) Basic Electrical Engineering [L : 3; T:1; P : 0 (4 credits)]

Detailed contents : Module 1 : DC Circuits (8 hours) Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), voltage and

current sources, Kirchoff current and voltage laws, analysis of simple circuits with dc excitation. Superposition, Thevenin and Norton Theorems. Time-domain analysis of first-order RL and RC circuits.

Module 2: AC Circuits (8 hours) Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, peak and rms

values, phasor representation, real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor. Analysis of single-phase ac circuits consisting of R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC combinations (series and parallel), resonance. Three- phase balanced circuits, voltage and current relations in star and delta connections.

Module 3: Transformers (6 hours) Magnetic materials, BH characteristics, ideal and practical transformer, equivalent circuit, losses in transformers, regulation and efficiency. Auto-transformer and three-phase transformer connections.

Module 4: Electrical Machines (8 hours) Generation of rotating magnetic fields, Construction and working of a three-phase induction motor, Significance of torque-slip characteristic. Loss components and efficiency, starting and speed control of induction motor. Single-phase induction motor. Construction, working, torque-speed characteristic and speed control of separately excited dc motor. Construction and working of synchronous generators.

Module 5: Power Converters (6 hours) DC-DC buck and boost converters, duty ratio control. Single-phase and three-phase voltage source inverters; sinusoidal modulation.

Module 6: Electrical Installations (6 hours) Components of LT Switchgear: Switch Fuse Unit (SFU), MCB, ELCB, MCCB, Types of Wires and Cables, Earthing. Types of Batteries, Important Characteristics for Batteries. Elementary calculations for energy consumption, power factor improvement and battery backup.

Suggested Text / Reference Books (i) D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering” , Tata McGraw Hill,

2010. (ii) D. C. Kulshreshtha, “ Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2009. (iii)L. S. Bobrow, “ Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University

Press, 2011. (iv)E. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronics Technology”, Pearson, 2010. (v) V. D. Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall India, 1989.

Course Outcomes

To understand and analyze basic electric and magnetic circuits

28

To study the working principles of electrical machines and power converters. To introduce the components of low voltage electrical installations

(ii)Basic Electrical Engineering Laboratory [ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 2 (1 credit)] List of experiments/demonstrations: Basic safety precautions. Introduction and use of measuring instruments – voltmeter,

ammeter, multi-meter, oscilloscope. Real-life resistors, capacitors and inductors. Measuring the steady-state and transient time-response of R-L, R-C, and R-L-C

circuits to a step change in voltage (transient may be observed on a storage oscilloscope). Sinusoidal steady state response of R-L, and R-C circuits – impedance calculation and verification. Observation of phase differences between current and voltage. Resonance in R-L-C circuits.

Transformers: Observation of the no-load current waveform on an oscilloscope (non- sinusoidal wave-shape due to B-H curve nonlinearity should be shown along with a discussion about harmonics). Loading of a transformer: measurement of primary and secondary voltages and currents, and power.

Three-phase transformers: Star and Delta connections. Voltage and Current relationships (line-line voltage, phase-to-neutral voltage, line and phase currents). Phase-shifts between the primary and secondary side. Cumulative three-phase power in balanced three-phase circuits.

Demonstration of cut-out sections of machines: dc machine (commutator-brush arrangement), induction machine (squirrel cage rotor), synchronous machine (field winging - slip ring arrangement) and single-phase induction machine.

Torque Speed Characteristic of separately excited dc motor. Synchronous speed of two and four-pole, three-phase induction motors. Direction

reversal by change of phase-sequence of connections. Torque-Slip Characteristic of an induction motor. Generator operation of an induction machine driven at super- synchronous speed.

Synchronous Machine operating as a generator: stand-alone operation with a load. Control of voltage through field excitation.

Demonstration of (a) dc-dc converters (b) dc-ac converters – PWM waveform (c) the use of dc-ac converter for speed control of an induction motor and (d) Components of LT switchgear.

Laboratory Outcomes Get an exposure to common electrical components and their ratings. Make electrical connections by wires of appropriate ratings. Understand the usage of common electrical measuring instruments. Understand the basic characteristics of transformers and electrical machines. Get an exposure to the working of power electronic converters.

29

Course code BSC102(Th)/BSC105(Lab) Category Basic Science Course Course title Chemistry (Theory & Lab.)

Contents (i) Chemistry (Concepts in chemistry for engineering) (ii) Chemistry Laboratory

Scheme and Credits L T P Credits Semester –II 3 1 3 5.5

Pre-requisites (if any) -

(i)Chemistry (Concepts in chemistry for engineering) [L : 3; T:1; P : 0 (4 credits)]

Detailed contents (i) Atomic and molecular structure (12 lectures)

Schrodinger equation. Particle in a box solutions and their applications for conjugated molecules and nanoparticles. Forms of the hydrogen atom wave functions and the plots of these functions to explore their spatial variations. Molecular orbitals of diatomic molecules and plots of the multicenter orbitals. Equations for atomic and molecular orbitals. Energy level diagrams of diatomic. Pi-molecular orbitals of butadiene and benzene and aromaticity. Crystal field theory and the energy level diagrams for transition metal ions and their magnetic properties. Band structure of solids and the role of doping on band structures.

(ii) Spectroscopic techniques and applications (8 lectures) Principles of spectroscopy and selection rules. Electronic spectroscopy. Fluorescence and its applications in medicine. Vibrational and rotational spectroscopy of diatomic molecules. Applications. Nuclear magnetic resonance and magnetic resonance imaging, surface characterisation techniques. Diffraction and scattering.

(iii) Intermolecular forces and potential energy surfaces (4 lectures)

Ionic, dipolar and van Der Waals interactions. Equations of state of real gases and critical phenomena. Potential energy surfaces of H3, H2F and HCN and trajectories on these surfaces.

(iv) Use of free energy in chemical equilibria (6 lectures)

Thermodynamic functions: energy, entropy and free energy. Estimations of entropy and free energies. Free energy and emf. Cell potentials, the Nernst equation and applications. Acid base, oxidation reduction and solubility equilibria. Water chemistry. Corrosion. Use of free energy considerations in metallurgy through Ellingham diagrams.

(v) Periodic properties (4 Lectures)

Effective nuclear charge, penetration of orbitals, variations of s, p, d and f orbital energies of atoms in the periodic table, electronic configurations, atomic and ionic sizes, ionization energies, electron affinity and electronegativity, polarizability, oxidation states, coordination numbers and geometries, hard soft acids and bases, molecular geometries

(vi) Stereochemistry (4 lectures) Representations of 3 dimensional structures, structural isomers and stereoisomers, configurations and symmetry and chirality, enantiomers, diastereomers, optical activity,

30

absolute configurations and conformational analysis. Isomerism in transitional metal compounds

(vii) Organic reactions and synthesis of a drug molecule (4 lectures)

Introduction to reactions involving substitution, addition, elimination, oxidation, reduction, cyclization and ring openings. Synthesis of a commonly used drug molecule.

Suggested Text Books

1. University chemistry, by B. H. Mahan 2. Chemistry: Principles and Applications, by M. J. Sienko and A. Plane 3. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, by C. N. Banwell 4. Engineering Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book), by B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin and M. S.

Krishnan 5. Physical Chemistry, by P. W. Atkins 6. Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function by K. P. C. Volhardt and N. E. Schore,

5th Edition

Course Outcomes The concepts developed in this course will aid in quantification of several concepts in chemistry that have been introduced at the 10+2 levels in schools. Technology is being increasingly based on the electronic, atomic and molecular level modifications.

Quantum theory is more than 100 years old and to understand phenomena at nanometer levels; one has to base the description of all chemical processes at molecular levels. The course will enable the student to: Analyse microscopic chemistry in terms of atomic and molecular orbitals and

intermolecular forces. Rationalise bulk properties and processes using thermodynamic considerations. Distinguish the ranges of the electromagnetic spectrum used for exciting different

molecular energy levels in various spectroscopic techniques Rationalise periodic properties such as ionization potential, electronegativity,

oxidation states and electronegativity. List major chemical reactions that are used in the synthesis of molecules.

(ii) Chemistry Laboratory[ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 3 (1.5 credits)]

Choice of 10-12 experiments from the following: Determination of surface tension and viscosity Thin layer chromatography Ion exchange column for removal of hardness of water Determination of chloride content of water Colligative properties using freezing point depression Determination of the rate constant of a reaction Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions Potentiometry - determination of redox potentials and emfs Synthesis of a polymer/drug Saponification/acid value of an oil Chemical analysis of a salt Lattice structures and packing of spheres Models of potential energy surfaces Chemical oscillations- Iodine clock reaction Determination of the partition coefficient of a substance between two immiscible

liquids Adsorption of acetic acid by charcoal

31

Use of the capillary viscosimeters to the demonstrate of the isoelectric point as the pH of minimum viscosity for gelatin sols and/or coagulation of the white part of egg .

Laboratory Outcomes The chemistry laboratory course will consist of experiments illustrating the

principles of chemistry relevant to the study of science and engineering. The students will learn to:

Estimate rate constants of reactions from concentration of reactants/products as a function of time

Measure molecular/system properties such as surface tension,viscosity, conductance of solutions, redox potentials, chloride content of water, etc

Synthesize a small drug molecule and analyse a salt sample

32

Course code HSMC 101(Th)/HSMC102(Lab) Category Humanities and Social Sciences including Management

courses Course title English (Theory & Lab.)

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits

Semester – II 2 0 2 3

Pre-requisites (if any)

-

English Detailed contents 1. Vocabulary Building

The concept of Word Formation, Root words from foreign languages and their use in English, Acquaintance with prefixes and suffixes from foreign languages in English to form derivatives. Synonyms, antonyms, and standard abbreviations.

2. Basic Writing Skills Sentence Structures, Use of phrases and clauses in sentences, Importance of

proper punctuation, Creating coherence, Organizing principles of paragraphs in documents, Techniques for writing precisely

3. Identifying Common Errors in Writing Subject-verb agreement, Noun-pronoun agreement, Misplaced modifiers,

Articles, Prepositions, Redundancies, Clichés

4. Nature and Style of sensible Writing Describing, Defining, Classifying, Providing examples or evidence

5. Writing introduction and conclusion

6. Writing Practices Comprehension, Précis Writing, Essay Writing

English Laboratory[ L : 0; T:0 ; P : 2 (1 credit)]

Listening Comprehension Pronunciation, Intonation, Stress and Rhythm Common Everyday Situations: Conversations and Dialogues Communication at Workplace Interviews Formal Presentations

Suggested Readings: (i) Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995. (ii) Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. acmillan.2007 (iii) On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001 (iv) Study Writing. Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasly. Cambridge University Press. 2006. (v) Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and PushpLata. Oxford University Press. 2011. (vi) Exercises in Spoken English. Parts. I-III. CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford University Press

33

Course Outcomes The student will acquire basic proficiency in English including reading and listening comprehension, writing and speaking skills.

*******

Course code ESC 104 Category Engineering Science Courses Course title Workshop-I

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester-I - 0 4 2

Pre-requisites (if any) -

Workshop-I

PART-A Computer Engineering Workshop

Course Outcomes (COs): After the completion of the course the student will be able to: CO1- Acquire skills in basic engineering practice. CO2- Have working knowledge of various equipments used in workshop. CO3- Have hands on experience about various machines and their components. CO4- Obtain practical skills of basic operation and working of tools used in the workshop.

1. To study and demonstrate Block diagram of Digital Computer System and brief explanation of each unit.

2. To demonstrate History/ Generation/ classifications and different types of Personnel Computer.To study and demonstrate internal parts of a Computer System (Card level) and other peripheral devices and explanation of POST & BIOS.

3. To study and demonstrate primary memory and secondary memory. 4. To demonstrate CPU Block diagram and other Peripheral chips, Mother Board/ Main

Board and its parts, Connectors, Add On Card Slots etc. 5. To study working of various types of monitors: CRT type, LCD type & LED type. 6. To study Keyboard and Mouse: Wired, Wireless, Scroll & Optical with detail working. 7. To study Printers: Dot Matrix Printers, Daisy wheel Printers, Ink-Jet Printers and Laser

Jet Printers with detailed working explanation. 8. Assembly / Installation and Maintenance of Personnel Computer Systems: Practical

exercise on assembly of Personnel Computer System, Installation of Operating System: Windows & Linux etc, Installation of other Application Softwares and Utility Softwares, Fault finding in Personnel Computers: Software or Hardware wise, Virus: Introduction, its Types & Removal techniques, Data Backup and Restore, Data Recovery Concepts, Typical causes of Data loss.

9. To demonstrate networking concepts: Introduction of Connecting devices: Hub, Switch & Router etc, Networking Cable preparation: Normal & Cross Cables, Data Transferring Techniques from one Computer System to another Computer System, Configuration of Switch/ Routers etc.

PART-B Electrical Workshop

1. Introduction of Electrical Safety precautions, Electrical Symbols, Electrical Materials, abbreviations commonly used in Electrical Engg. and familiarization with tools used in Electrical Works.

2. To make a Straight Joint & Tee joint on 7/22 PVC wire and Britannia Joint on GI wire.

34

3. To study fluorescent Tube Light, Sodium Lamp and High Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamp.

4. To study different types of earthing and protection devices e.g. MCBs, ELCBs and fuses.

5. To study different types of domestic and industrial wiring and wire up a circuit used for Stair case and Godown wiring.

6. To make the connection of fan regulator with lamp to study the effect of increasing and decreasing resistance in steps on the lamp.

7. To fabricate half wave and full wave rectifiers with filters on PCB. 8. Maintenance and Repair of Electrical equipment i,e Electric Iron , Electric Toaster

,Water heater, Air coolers and Electric Fans etc. 9. To study soldering process with simple soldering exercises. 10. To make the connection of a three core cable to three pin power plug and connect the

other cable end by secured eyes connection using 23/0.0076”or 40/0.0076” cable. PART- C

Electronics Workshop 1. To study and demonstrate basic electronic components, Diode, Transistor, Resistance,

Inductor and capacitor. 2. To study and demonstrate resistance color coding, measurement using color code and

multimeter and error calculation considering tolerance of resistance. 3. To study and demonstrate Multimeter and CRO- front panel controls, description of

block diagram of CRT and block diagram of CRO. 4. To study and demonstrate Vp(peak voltage),Vpp(peak to peak voltage), Time,

frequency and phase using CRO. 5. Introduction to function generator. Functions of front panel controls and measurement

of different functions on CRO. 6. To study and demonstrate variable DC regulated power supply, function of controls and

DC measurement using multimeter and CRO. 7. Soldering practice on wire mesh or a resistance decade board includes fabrication,

soldering, lacing, harnessing forming and observation. 8. Testing of components using multimeter and CRO like diode, transistor, resistance

capacitor, Zener diode and LED. 9. To study and demonstrate rectification, half wave, Full wave and bridge rectifier.

Fabrication,assembly and waveform observation. 10. To design and fabricate a printed circuit board of a Zener regulated/ series regulated

power supply and various measurements, testing of power supply. Note: At least 8 exercises are to be performed from each part by the students.

35

Course code ESC 106 Category Engineering Science Courses Course title Workshop-II

Scheme and Credits

L T P Credits Semester-II - 0 4 2

Pre-requisites (if any) -

MECHANICAL WORKSHOP

Course Outcomes (COs): After studying this course the students would: CO 1- Have exposure to mechanical workshop layout and safety aspects. CO 2- Understand the functions of various machines and cutting tools used in machine shop. CO 3- Practice real time job preparation using various operations related to machine shop such as filing, drilling, milling & turning. CO 4 - Practice job preparation in welding shop. CO 5 - Learn to use different measuring tools like vernier caliper, vernier height gauge and micrometer. CO 6 - Practice job preparation in sheet metal shop. List of Exercises:

Fitting, sheet metal and welding workshop:

1. To study layout, safety measures and different engineering materials (mild steel, medium carbon steel, high carbon steel, high speed steel and cast iron etc) used in workshop.

2. To study and use of different types of tools, equipments, devices & machines used in fitting, sheet metal and welding section.

3. To determine the least count of vernier calliper, vernier height gauge, micrometer and take different reading over given metallic pieces using these instruments.

4. To study and demonstrate the parts, specifications & operations performed on lathe machine.

5. To study and demonstrate the parts, specifications & operations performed on milling machine.

6. To study and demonstrate the parts, specifications & operations performed on shaper machine.

7. To prepare a job involving different type of filing practice exercise in specified dimensions.

8. To prepare a job involving multi operational exercise (drilling, counter sinking, tapping, reaming, hack sawing etc.)

9. To prepare a multi operational sheet metal job (self secured single groove joint/ hasp & stay etc.).

10. To practice striking an arc, straight short bead, straight continuous bead and restart of electrode in flat position by arc welding on given M.S. plate as per size.

11. To practice tack weld of two close plate in flat position by arc welding on given M.S. plate as per size.

12. To practice close butt joint in flat position by arc welding on given M.S. plate as per size.

NOTE: - At least nine exercises should be performed from the above list; remaining three may either be performed from above list or designed by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus and facilities available in institute.

36

EC301 Electronics Devices L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects:

To give exposure to students about Semiconductor Physics. To give the exposure about characteristics of semiconductor devices. To introduce the working of difficult semiconductor electronics devices. To introduce about the fabrication terminologies semiconductor electronics devices.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Semiconductor Physics: Review of Quantum Mechanics, Electrons

in periodic Lattices, E-k diagrams. Energy bands in intrinsic and extrinsic silicon, Carrier transport, diffusion current, drift current, mobility and resistivity, sheet resistance, design of resistors

Unit 2: Generation and recombination of carriers: Poisson and continuity equation P-N

junction characteristics, I-V characteristics, and small signal switching models, Avalanche breakdown, Zener diode, Schottky diode

Unit 3: Bipolar Junction Transistor, I-V characteristics, Ebers-Moll Model, MOS capacitor, C-

V characteristics, MOSFET, I-V characteristics, and small signal models of MOS transistor, LED, photodiode and solar cell;

Unit 4: Integrated circuit fabrication process: oxidation, diffusion, ion implantation,

photolithography, etching, chemical vapor deposition, sputtering, twin-tub CMOS process.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the principles of semiconductor Physics. Understand and utilize the mathematical models of semiconductor junctions and MOS

transistors for circuits and systems. Understand various semiconductor, fabrication process. Understand the design & characteristics of semiconductor device.

Text /Reference Books:

1. G. Streetman, and S. K. Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” 7th edition, Pearson,2014.

2. D. Neamen, D. Biswas "Semiconductor Physics and Devices," McGraw-Hill Education 3. S. M. Sze and K. N. Kwok, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices,” 3rd edition, John

Wiley &Sons, 2006. 4. C.T. Sah, “Fundamentals of solid state electronics,” World Scientific Publishing Co.

Inc, 1991. 5. Y. Tsividis and M. Colin, “Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor,” Oxford

Univ.Press, 2011.

37

EC302 Digital System Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the fundamentals of digital electronics. To familiar the students about the design and analyze various combinational circuits. To get exposure to the students about design and analyze various sequential circuits. To introduce logic family & semiconductor memories. To introduce basic knowledge of HDL & their ways of implementation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Logic Simplification and Combinational Logic Design, Review of Boolean Algebra

and De Morgan‟s Theorem, SOP & POS forms, Canonical forms, Karnaugh maps up to 6 variables, Binary codes, Code Conversion.

Unit 2: MSI devices like Comparators, Multiplexers, Encoder, Decoder, Driver & Multiplexed

Display, Half and Full Adders, Subtractors, Serial and Parallel Adders, BCD Adder, Barrel shifter and ALU

Unit 3: Sequential Logic Design: Building blocks like S-R, JK and Master-Slave JK FF, Edge

triggered FF, Ripple and Synchronous counters, Shift registers, Finite state machines, Design of synchronous FSM, Algorithmic State Machines charts. Designing synchronous circuits like Pulse train generator, Pseudo Random Binary Sequence generator, Clock generation

Unit 4: Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: TTL NAND gate, Specifications,

Noise margin, Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, Tristate TTL, ECL, CMOS families and their interfacing, Memory elements, Concept of Programmable logic devices like FPGA, Logic implementation using Programmable Devices.

Unit 5: VLSI Design flow: Design entry, Schematic, FSM & HDL, different modeling styles

in VHDL, Data types and objects, Dataflow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling, Synthesis and Simulation VHDL constructs and codes for combinational and sequential circuits.

Course outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Design and analyze combinational logic circuits. Acquire basic knowledge of digital logic families & semiconductor memories. Design & analyze synchronous sequential logic circuits. Use HDL & appropriate EDA tools for digital logic design and simulation.

Text/Reference Books:

1. R.P. Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2009. 2. Douglas Perry, “VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002. 3. W.H. Gothmann, “Digital Electronics- An introduction to theory and practice”, PHI,

2nd edition, 2006. 4. D.V. Hall, “Digital Circuits and Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1989 Charles Roth,

“Digital System Design using VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition 2012.

38

ECC01 Signal and Systems L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects:

To introduce students about various types of signals and their classifications. To introduce students about LSI (linear shift invariant) systems and their properties. To introduce students about properties of Fourier Series, Fourier Transforms like DTFT

and DFT. To introduce students about Laplace Transform, Z Transform and State-Space Analysis.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Signals and systems as seen in everyday life, and in various branches of engineering and

science, Energy and power signals, continuous and discrete time signals, continuous and discrete amplitude signals, System properties, linearity: additivity and homogeneity, shift-invariance, causality, stability, realizability.

Unit 2: Linear shift-invariant (LSI) systems, impulse response and step response, convolution,

input output behavior with a periodic convergent inputs, Characterization of causality and stability of linear shift-invariant systems, System representation through differential equations and difference equations.

Unit 3: Periodic and semi-periodic inputs to an LSI system, the notion of a frequency response and

its relation to the impulse response, Fourier series representation, the Fourier Transform, convolution/multiplication and their effect in the frequency domain, magnitude and phase response, Fourier domain duality. The Discrete-Time Fourier Transform (DTFT) and the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), Parseval's Theorem, the idea of signal space and orthogonal bases

Unit 4: The Laplace Transform, notion of eigen functions of LSI systems, a basis of eigen

functions, region of convergence, poles and zeros of system, Laplace domain analysis, solution to differential equations and system behavior

Unit 5: The z-Transform for discrete time signals and systems eigen functions, region of

convergence, z-domain analysis. Unit 6: State-space analysis and multi-input, multi-output representation, the state-transition matrix

and its role, The Sampling Theorem and its implications spectra of sampled signals. Reconstruction: ideal interpolator, zero-order hold, first order hold, and so on, Aliasing and its effects, relation between continuous and discrete time systems.

Course outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Analyze different types of signals. Represent continuous and discrete systems in time and frequency domain using different

transforms. Investigate stability of system. Perform sampling and reconstruction of a signal.

39

Text/Reference books: 1. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and I.T. Young, "Signals and Systems", Prentice Hall,

1983. 2. R.F. Ziemer, W.H. Tranter and D.R. Fannin, "Signals and Systems - Continuous and

Discrete", 4th edition, Prentice Hall, 1998. 3. Papoulis, "Circuits and Systems: A Modern Approach", HRW, 1980. 4. B.P. Lathi, "Signal Processing and Linear Systems", Oxford University Press, 1998. 5. Douglas K. Lindner, "Introduction to Signals and Systems", McGraw Hill International

Edition: 1999. 6. Simon Haykin, Barry van Veen, "Signals and Systems", John Wiley and Sons (Asia)

Private Limited, 1998. 7. Robert A. Gabel, Richard A. Roberts, "Signals and Linear Systems", John Wiley and Sons,

1995. 8. M. J. Roberts, "Signals and Systems - Analysis using Transform methods and MATLAB",

TMH, 2003. 9. J. Nagrath, S. N. Sharan, R. Ranjan, S. Kumar, "Signals and Systems", TMH New Delhi,

2001. 10. Ashok Ambardar,"Analog and Digital Signal Processing", 2nd Edition, Brooks/ Cole

Publishing Company (An international Thomson Publishing Company), 1999.

40

EC304 Network Theory L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce students about basic electrical circuits with nodal & mesh analysis. To give exposure to the students about various network theorem applicable to AC &

DC circuits. To introduce application of Laplace & Fourier behavior. To introduce students about synthesis and analysis of electrical network. To introduce students about transient analysis, two port of network and various types of

filters.

Syllabus Unit 1: Node and Mesh Analysis, matrix approach of network containing voltage and current

sources, and reactances, source transformation and duality. Network theorems, Superposition, reciprocity, Thevenin‟s, Norton‟s, Maximum power Transfer, compensation and Tallegen's theorem as applied to AC, circuits. Trigonometric and exponential Fourier series, Discrete spectra and symmetry of waveform, steady state response of a network to non-sinusoidal periodic inputs, power factor, effective values, Fourier transform and continuous spectra, three phase unbalanced circuit and power calculation.

Unit 2: Laplace transforms and properties, Partial fractions, singularity functions, waveform

synthesis, analysis of RC, RL, and RLC networks with and without initial conditions with Laplace transforms evaluation of initial conditions.

Unit 3: Transient behavior, concept of complex frequency, Driving points and transfer

functions poles and zeros of admittance function, their properties, sinusoidal response from pole-zero locations, convolution theorem and Two four port network and interconnections, Behaviors of series and parallel resonant circuits, Introduction to band pass, low pass, high pass and band reject filters.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand basics electrical circuits with nodal and mesh analysis. Appreciate electrical network theorems. Apply Laplace Transform for steady state and transient analysis. Determine different network functions. Appreciate the frequency domain techniques.

Text/Reference Books

1. Van, Valkenburg.; “Network analysis”; Prentice hall of India, 2000. 2. Sudhakar, A., Shyammohan, S. P.; “Circuits and Network”; Tata McGraw-Hill New

Delhi, 1994. 3. A William Hayt, “Engineering Circuit Analysis” 8th Edition, McGraw-Hill Education.

41

BS301 Mathematics-III L T P CR Theory : 75 3 1 0 4 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

COURSE OBJECTIVES: To gain knowledge about: Laplace Transform, Fourier Transform, Z- transform and Numerical Methods.

Unit-1: Transform Calculus-1: Polynomials, Orthogonal, Polynomials – Lagrange‟s, Chebysev Polynomials; Trigonometric, Polynomials, Laplace Transform, Properties of Laplace Transform, Laplace transform of periodic functions. Finding inverse Laplace transform by different methods, convolution theorem. Evaluation of integrals by Laplace transform, solving ODEs and PDEs by Laplace Transform method.

Unit-2: Transform Calculus-2: Fourier transforms, Z-transform ,Properties, methods, inverses

and their applications. Unit 3: Vector differentiation, gradient, divergence and curl, line and surface integrals, path

independence, statements and illustrations of theorems of Green, Stokes and Gauss, arc length parameterization, applications.

Course Outcome: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

To understand Laplace Transform and its applications To understand Fourier Transform, Z Transform and their applications To solve the curl, gradient and divergence To apply the applications curl, gradient and divergence in various theorems in various

applications Textbooks/References

1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.

2. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 35th Edition, 2000. 3. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008. 4. P. Kandasamy, K. Thilagavathy, K. Gunavathi, Numerical Methods, S. Chand

& Company, 2nd Edition, Reprint 2012. 5. S.S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.

42

MC01 Indian Constitution L T P CR Theory :75 2 0 0 0 Class Work :25

Total :100

Basic features and fundamental principles

The Constitution of India is the supreme law of India. Parliament of India cannot make any law which violates the Fundamental Rights enumerated under the Part III of the Constitution. The Parliament of India has been empowered to amend the Constitution under Article 368, however, it cannot use this power to change the “basic structure” of the constitution, which has been ruled and explained by the Supreme Court of India in its historical judgments. The Constitution of India reflects the idea of “Constitutionalism” – a modern and progressive concept historically developed by the thinkers of “liberalism” – an ideology which has been recognized as one of the most popular political ideology and result of historical struggles against arbitrary use of sovereign power by state. The historic revolutions in France, England, America and particularly European Renaissance and Reformation movement have resulted into progressive legal reforms in the form of “constitutionalism” in many countries. The Constitution of India was made by borrowing models and principles from many countries including United Kingdom and America. The Constitution of India is not only a legal document but it also reflects social, political and economic perspectives of the Indian Society. It reflects India‟s legacy of “diversity”. It has been said that Indian constitution reflects ideals of its freedom movement; however, few critics have argued that it does not truly incorporate our own ancient legal heritage and cultural values. No law can be “static” and therefore the Constitution of India has also been amended more than one hundred times. These amendments reflect political, social and economic developments since the year 1950. The Indian judiciary and particularly the Supreme Court of India has played an historic role as the guardian of people. It has been protecting not only basic ideals of the Constitution but also strengthened the same through progressive interpretations of the text of the Constitution. The judicial activism of the Supreme Court of India and its historic contributions has been recognized throughout the world and it gradually made it “as one of the strongest court in the world”.

Course content 1. Meaning of the constitution law and constitutionalism 2. Historical perspective of the Constitution of India 3. Salient features and characteristics of the Constitution of India 4. Scheme of the fundamental rights 5. The scheme of the Fundamental Duties and its legal status 6. The Directive Principles of State Policy – Its importance and implementation 7. Federal structure and distribution of legislative and financial powers between the

Union and the States 8. Parliamentary Form of Government in India – The constitution powers and

status of the President of India 9. Amendment of the Constitutional Powers and Procedure 10. The historical perspectives of the constitutional amendments in India 11. Emergency Provisions: National Emergency, President Rule,

Financial Emergency 12. Local Self Government – Constitutional Scheme in India 13. Scheme of the Fundamental Right to Equality

14. Scheme of the Fundamental Right to certain Freedom under Article 19

43

15. Scope of the Right to Life and Personal Liberty under Article 21.

REFERENCES:

1. The Constitutional Law Of India 9th Edition, by Pandey. J. N. 2. The Constitution of India by P.M.Bakshi 3. Constitution Law of India by Narender Kumar 4. Bare Act by P. M. Bakshi

44

MC02 Essence of Indian Tradition Knowledge

भारतीय विद्यासार

L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam: 3 Hrs. Course objective The course aims at imparting basic principles of thought process, reasoning and inferencing. Sustainability is at the core of Indian Traditional knowledge Systems connecting society and nature. Holistic life style of yogic science and wisdom capsules in Sanskrit literature are also important in modern society with rapid technological advancements and societal disruptions. Part-I focuses on introduction to Indian Knowledge Systems, Indian perspective of modern scientific world-view, and basic principles of Yoga and holistic health care system.

Course Contents

Modern Science and Indian Knowledge System

Yoga and Holistic Health care

Case studies

References

V. Sivaramakrishnan (Ed.), Cultural Heritage of India-course material, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Mumbai. 5th Edition, 2014

Swami Jitatmanand, Modern Physics and Vedant, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan

Swami Jitatmanand, Holistic Science and Vedant, Bharatiya Vidya

Bhavan

Fritzof Capra, Tao of Physics

Fritzof Capra, The Wave of life

VN Jha (Eng. Trans.), Tarkasangraha of Annam Bhatta,

International Chinmay Foundation, Velliarnad, Arnakulam

Yoga Sutra of Patanjali, Ramakrishna Mission, Kolkata

GN Jha (Eng. Trans.), Ed. RN Jha, Yoga-darshanam with Vyasa Bhashya, Vidyanidhi Prakashan, Delhi 2016

RN Jha, Science of Consciousness Psychotherapyand Yoga Practices, Vidyanidhi Prakashan, Delhi 2016

P B Sharma (English translation), Shodashang Hridayan Pedagogy: Problem based learning, group discussions, collaborative mini projects.

Outcome: Ability to understand, connect up and explain basics of Indian traditional knowledge in modern scientific perspective.

45

EC 351 Electronics Devices Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments

1. Study of IV Characteristics of PN junction diode.

2. Study of IV Characteristics of zener diode.

3. Study of transistor common base characteristics

4. Study of transistor common emitter characteristics.

5. Study of Zener diode as a voltage regulator.

6. Study of FET common source amplifier.

7. Study of FET common Drain amplifier.

8. Study of Zener diode as a voltage regulator.

9. Study of CC amplifier as a buffer.

10. Study of 3-terminal IC regulator.

11. Study of LED, photo diode and solar cell.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the characteristics of PN junction diode. Understand the application of diode & Zener diode experimentally. Obtain input and output characteristics of transistors in CE, CB & CC configurations. Obtain FET characteristics. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way.

46

EC 352 Digital System Design Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments

1. Study of TTL gates – AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EX-OR, EX-NOR.

2. Design & realize a given function using K-maps and verify its performance.

3. To verify the operation of multiplexer & Demultiplexer.

4. To verify the operation of comparator.

5. To verify the truth tables of S-R, J-K, T & D type flip flops.

6. To verify the operation of bi-directional shift register.

7. To design & verify the operation of 3-bit synchronous counter.

8. Design all gates using VHDL.

9. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated a. half adder b. full adder

10. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated a. multiplexer b. demultiplexer

11. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated a. decoder b. encoder

12. Write a VHDL program for a comparator and check the wave forms and the hardware generated

13. Write a VHDL program for a code converter and check the wave forms and the hardware generated

14. Write a VHDL program for a FLIP-FLOP and check the wave forms and the hardware generated

15. Write a VHDL program for a up/down counter and check the wave forms and the hardware generated.

Course Outcome: On the successful competition of this course, the students should be able to:

Verify the operation of basic & universal gates.

Design & verify the standards of combinational circuits.

Verify the operations of different type of flip flops.

Design the counters using flip flops for a given sequence.

Write & execute VHDL program for combinational & sequential circuits.

Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way

47

EC 353 Network Theory Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments 1. Transient response of RC circuit.

2. Transient response of RL circuit.

3. To find the resonance frequency, Band width of RLC series circuit.

4. To calculate and verify ―Z" parameters of a two port network.

5. To calculate and verify "Y" parameters of a two port network.

6. To determine equivalent parameter of parallel connections of two port network.

7. To plot the frequency response of low pass filter and determine half-power frequency.

8. To plot the frequency response of high pass filters and determines the half-power frequency.

9. To plot the frequency response of band-pass filters and determines the band-width.

10. To calculate and verify "ABCD" parameters of a two port network.

11. To synthesize a network of a given network function and verify its response.

12. Introduction of P-Spice

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Design RC & RL circuits and check their transient response experimentally. Design RLC series circuits & find the frequency response. Analyse the circuits of two port network and verify „ABCD‟ „Z‟ & „Y‟ parameters of

two port network. Design & plot the frequency response of low pass filter, high pass filter & band-pass

filter experimentally. Synthesize a network using Foster & Cauer Forms. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way.

48

ES 301 Electronics Workshop-I L T P CR Theory : 70 0 0 6 3 Class Work : 30

Total : 100

List of Problems 1. Testing of Electronics Devices

1) Diode 2) Transoms 3) Capacitors 4) Inductor

2. Design, Fabrication, Testing & Measurement of half & full wave rectifier

3. Design and fabrication of fixed & variable regulators (Zenes, Transistor and IC)

4. Design of transistor as a switch, amplifier and multivibrator.

5. To study of 555 as Astable, Monostable, Bistable multivibrator.

6. To design various applications of OP amp such as

1) Amplifiers (Inverting & Non Inverting)

2) Adder, Subtractor & scale changer

3) Integrator and differentiator

4) Oscillator and Schmitt trigger

7. Mini project based on anolog circuits of above.

49

EI401 Control System Engineering L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study different control problem, control hardware and their models. To study different control algorithm and to familiarize with stability of a system using

different tests. To study designing of various controllers and tuning of process controller. To study linear, nonlinear and optimal control problems.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Control Problem: Industrial Control examples, Transfer function, System

with dead-time, System response, Control hardware and their models, potentiometers, synchros, LVDT, dc and ac servomotors, tacho-generators, electro hydraulic valves, hydraulic servomotors, electro pneumatic valves, pneumatic actuators, Closed-loop systems. Block diagram and signal flow graph analysis.

Unit 2: Feedback control systems: Stability, steady-state accuracy, transient accuracy,

disturbance rejection, insensitivity and robustness, proportional, integral and derivative systems, Feedforward and multi-loop control configurations, stability concept, relative stability, Routh stability criterion.

Unit 3: Time response of second order systems, steady-state errors and error constants,

Performance specifications in time-domain, Root locus method of design, Lead and lag compensation, Frequency-response analysis, Polar plots, Bode plot, stability in frequency domain, Nyquist plots, Nyquist stability criterion, Performance specifications in frequency-domain, Frequency domain

Unit 4: Methods of design, Compensation & their realization in time & frequency domain, Lead

and Lag compensation, Op-amp based and digital implementation of compensators, Tuning of process controllers, State variable formulation and solution.

Unit 5: Introduction to Optimal control & Nonlinear control, Optimal Control problem, Regulator

problem, Output regulator, treking problem, Nonlinear system, Basic concept & analysis. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Characterize a system and find its study state behaviour. Investigate stability of a system using different tests. Design various controllers. Solve liner, non-liner and optimal control problems.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Gopal. M., “Control Systems: Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1997. 2. Kuo, B.C., “Automatic Control System”, Prentice Hall, sixth edition, 1993. 3. Ogata, K., “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, second edition, 1991. 4. Nagrath & Gopal, “Modern Control Engineering”, New Age International, New Delhi

50

EC402 Analog Circuits L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study the concept of diode circuits, BJT and FET with their configurations and to analyse different amplifiers using BJT and EFT.

To familiar with different types of power amplifiers, their characteristics and different types of feedback configuration.

To introduce the concept of different types of oscillators. To give exposure to the students regarding of OP-AMP and application of OP-AMP. To give exposure to the students regarding the concepts of different types of DAC and

ADC. Syllabus

Unit 1: Diode Circuits, Amplifier models: Voltage amplifier, current amplifier, trans-

conductance amplifier and trans-resistance amplifier, Biasing schemes for BJT and FET amplifiers, bias stability, various configurations (such as CE/CS, CB/CG, CC/CD) and their features, small signal analysis, low frequency transistor models, estimation of voltage gain, input resistance, output resistance etc., design procedure for particular specifications, low frequency analysis of multistage amplifiers.

Unit 1: High frequency transistor models, frequency response of single stage and multistage

amplifiers, cascode amplifier, Various classes of operation (Class A, B, AB, C etc.), their power efficiency and linearity issues, Feedback topologies, Voltage series, current series, voltage shunt, current shunt, effect of feedback on gain, bandwidth etc., calculation with practical circuits, concept of stability, gain margin and phase margin.

Unit 2: Oscillators: Review of the basic concept, Barkhausen criterion, RC oscillators (phase shift,

Wien bridge etc.), LC oscillators (Hartley, Colpitt, Clapp etc.), non-sinusoidal oscillators. Unit 3: Current mirror: Basic topology and its variants, V-I characteristics, output resistance and

minimum sustainable voltage (VON), maximum usable load, Differential amplifier, Basic structure and principle of operation, calculation of differential gain, common mode gain, CMRR and ICMR. OP-AMP design, design of differential amplifier for a given specification, design of gain stages and output stages, compensation.

Unit 4: OP-AMP applications: review of inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, integratorand

differentiator, summing amplifier, precision rectifier, Schmitt trigger and its applications, Active Filters, Low pass, high pass, band pass and band stop, design guidelines.

Unit 5: Digital-to-analog converters (DAC): Weighted resistor, R-2R ladder, resistorstring etc.,

Analog to-digital converters (ADC), Single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, flash etc. Switched capacitor circuits, Basic concept, practical configurations, application in amplifier, integrator, ADC etc.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the characteristics of diodes and transistors. Design and analyze various rectifier and amplifier circuits. Design sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal oscillators. Understand the functioning of OP-AMP and design OP-AMP based circuits. Design ADC and DAC.

51

Text/Reference Books:

1. J.V. Wait, L.P. Huelsman and GA Korn, Introduction to Operational Amplifier theory and applications, McGraw Hill, 1992.

2. J. Millman and A. Grabel, Microelectronics, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill, 1988. 3. P. Horowitz and W. Hill, The Art of Electronics, 2nd edition, Cambridge University Press,

1989. 4. A.S. Sedra and K.C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, Saunder's College11 5. Publishing, Edition IV. 6. Paul R. Gray and Robert G.Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits,

John Wiley, 3rd Edition.

52

EI403 Electrical Measurement and Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the fundamentals of various types of Instruments. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of measuring

instruments. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of Wattmeters

and Energy Meters. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of Instrument

Transformers. To introduce the principle, working and applications of various types of AC and DC

bridges. To introduce the various types of transducers and Electronics Instruments.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Analog Ammeters and Voltmeters: PMMC and MI Instruments, Construction,

Torque Equation, Range Extension, Effect of temperature, Classification, Errors, Advantages and Disadvantages.

Unit 2: Analog Wattmeters and Power Factor Meters: Power and Power Factor,

Electrodynamometer type wattmeter, power factor meter, Construction, theory, Shape of scale, torque equation, Advantages and disadvantages, active and reactive power measurement in single phase, Measurement in three phase.

Unit 3: Analog Energy Meter: Single phase induction type energy meters, construction,

theory, Operation, lag adjustments, Max Demand meters/indicators, Measurement of VAH and VARh.

Unit 4: DC and AC Bridges: Measurement of resistance, Wheatstone Bridge, Kelvin„s

Bridge, Kelvin„s Double Bridge, Measurement of inductance, Capacitance, Maxwell„s Bridge, Desauty Bridge, Anderson Bridge, Schering Bridge, Wien Bridge, Applications and Limitations.

Unit 5: Instrument Transformers: Current Transformer and Potential Transformer

construction, theory, phasor diagram, errors, testing and applications. Unit 6: Transducers: Transducers Measurement of Temperature, RTD, Thermistors, LVDT,

Strain Gauge, Piezoelectric Transducers, Digital Shaft Encoders, Tachometer, Hall effect sensors.

Unit 7: Electronic Instruments: Electronic Display Device, Digital Voltmeters, CRO, Digital

Storage Oscilloscope, measurement of voltage and frequency, Lissajous Patterns, Wave Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion Analyzer.

53

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Compare performance of MC, MI and Dynamometer types of measuring instruments, Energy meters and CRO.

Determine the circuit parameters using AC and DC bridges. Understand the principle and working of various types of Instrument Transformers. Select transducers for the measurement of various electrical quantities like temperature,

displacement and strain Understand operating principles of electronic measuring instruments

TEXT BOOK:

1. A course in Electrical And Electronic measurement and instrumentation : A.K. Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai Publication.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Electrical Measurements: E.W. Golding, TMH 2. Electrical and Electronic measurement and instrumentation: J.B. Gupta, Kataria and

Sons. 3. Electronic instrumentation and measurement technique : W.D. Cooper & A.D. Helfrick 4. Measuring systems: E.O. Doeblin; TMH.

54

ECC02 Electromagnetic Waves L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects: To introduce the concept of Transmission line, how the no loss transmission occurs and

understanding the concept of Smith Chart. To give exposure to the students regarding the physical meaning and importance of

Maxwell‟s equation and how it derived from basic laws of Electromagnetic. To introduce how the Electromagnetic waves are formed, it‟s propagation in different

medium and the concept of Poynting Vector. To introduce the phenomenon of Reflection or refraction of wave when strikes

obliquely or normally to any surface. To introduce the concept of travelling of wave in waveguides and other phenomena. To impart the knowledge of principle of radiation and radiation characteristics of an

antenna.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Transmission Lines: Equations of Voltage and Current on TX line, Propagation constant and characteristic impedance, and reflection coefficient and VSWR, Impedance Transformation on Loss-less and Low loss Transmission line, Power transfer on TX line, Smith Chart, Admittance Smith Chart, Applications of transmission lines, Impedance Matching, use transmission line sections as circuit elements.

Unit 2: Maxwell’s Equations: Basics of Vectors, Vector calculus, Basic laws of Electromagnetics,

Maxwell's Equations, Boundary conditions at Media Interface. Unit 3: Uniform Plane Wave: Uniform plane wave, Propagation of wave, Wave polarization,

Poincare‟s Sphere, Wave propagation in conducting medium, phase and group velocity, Power flow and Poynting vector, Surface current and power loss in a conductor

Unit 4: Plane Waves at a Media Interface: Plane wave in arbitrary direction, Reflection and

refraction at dielectric interface, Total internal reflection, wave polarization at media interface, Reflection from a conducting boundary.

Unit 5: Wave propagation in parallel plane waveguide, Analysis of waveguide general approach,

Rectangular waveguide, Modal propagation in rectangular waveguide, Surface currents on the waveguide walls, Field visualization, Attenuation in waveguide.

Unit 6: Radiation: Solution for potential function, Radiation from the Hertz dipole, Power radiated

by hertz dipole, Radiation Parameters of antenna, receiving antenna, Monopole and Dipole antenna,

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand characteristics and wave propagation on high frequency transmission lines as well as carryout impedance transformation on TL.

Use sections of transmission line sections for realizing circuit elements. Characterize uniform plane wave and calculate reflection & transmission of waves at media

interface. Analyze wave propagation on metallic waveguides in modal form. Understand principle of radiation and radiation characteristics of an antenna.

55

Text/Reference Books:

R.K. Shevgaonkar, Electromagnetic Waves, Tata McGraw Hill India, 2005. E.C. Jordan & K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic waves & Radiating Systems, Prentice Hall,

India. Narayana Rao, N: Engineering Electromagnetics, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall, 1997. David Cheng, Electromagnetics, Prentice Hall.

56

ESC01 Engineering Mechanics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 1 0 4 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective:-

To provide an introductory treatment of Engineering To give a working knowledge of statics with emphasis on force equilibrium and free body

diagrams. To provide an understanding of the kinds of stress and deformation and how to determine

them in a wide range of simple, practical structural problems. To give an understanding of the mechanical behavior of materials under various load

conditions

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Engineering Mechanics covering, Force Systems Basic concepts, Particle equilibrium in 2-D & 3-D; Rigid Body equilibrium; System of Forces, Coplanar Concurrent Forces, Components in Space – Resultant- Moment of Forces and its Application; Couples and Resultant of Force System, Equilibrium of System of Forces, Free body diagrams, Equations of Equilibrium of Coplanar Systems and Spatial Systems; Static Indeterminancy

Unit 2: Friction covering, Types of friction, Limiting friction, Laws of Friction, Static and

Dynamic Friction; Motion of Bodies, wedge friction, screw jack & differential screw jack. Unit 3: Basic Structural Analysis covering, Equilibrium in three dimensions; Method of Sections;

Method of Joints; How to determine if a member is in tension or compression; Simple Trusses; Zero force members; Beams & types of beams; Frames & Machines;

Unit 4: Centroid and Centre of Gravity covering, Centroid of simple figures from first principle,

centroid of composite sections; Centre of Gravity and its implications; Area moment of inertia- Definition, Moment of inertia of plane sections from first principles, Theorems of moment of inertia, Moment of inertia of standard sections and composite sections; Mass moment inertia of circular plate, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Hook.

Unit 5: Virtual Work and Energy Method- Virtual displacements, principle of virtual work for

particle and ideal system of rigid bodies, degrees of freedom. Active force diagram, systems with friction, mechanical efficiency. Conservative forces and potential energy (elastic and gravitational), energy equation for equilibrium. Applications of energy method for equilibrium. Stability of equilibrium.

Unit 6: Review of particle dynamics- Rectilinear motion; Plane curvilinear motion (rectangular,

path, and polar coordinates). 3-D curvilinear motion; Relative and constrained motion; Newton‟s 2nd law (rectangular, path, and polar coordinates). Work-kinetic energy power, potential energy.Impulse-momentum (linear, angular); Impact (Direct and oblique).

Unit 7:Introduction to Kinetics of Rigid Bodies covering, Basic terms, general principles in

dynamics; Types of motion, Instantaneous centre of rotation in plane motion and simple problems; D‟Alembert‟s principle and its applications in plane motion and connected bodies Work energy principle and its application in plane motion of connected bodies; Kinetics of rigid body rotation.

57

Unit 8:Mechanical Vibrations covering, Basic terminology, free and forced vibrations, resonance and its effects; Degree of freedom; Derivation for frequency and amplitude of free vibrations without damping and single degree of freedom system, simple problems, types of pendulum, use of simple, compound and torsion pendulums; Tutorials from the above Units covering, To find the various forces and angles including resultants in various parts of wall crane, roof truss, pipes, etc.; To verify the line of polygon on various forces; To find coefficient of friction between various materials on inclined plan; Free body diagrams various systems including block-pulley; To verify the principle of moment in the disc apparatus; Helical block; To draw a load efficiency curve for a screw jack

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Use scalar and vector analytical techniques for analyzing forces in statically determinate structures

Apply fundamental concepts of kinematics and kinetics of particles to the analysis of simple, practical problems

Apply basic knowledge of maths and physics to solve real-world problems, Understand measurement error, and propagation of error in processed data.

Understand basic kinematics concepts – displacement, velocity and acceleration (and their angular counterparts);

Understand basic dynamics concepts – force, momentum, work and energy; Understand and be able to apply Newton‟s laws of motion;

Understand and be able to apply other basic dynamics concepts - the Work-Energy principle, Impulse-Momentum principle and the coefficient of restitution;

Extend all of concepts of linear kinetics to systems in general plane motion (applying Euler's Equation and considering energy of a system in general plane motion, and the work of couples and moments of forces)

Learn to solve dynamics problems. Appraise given information and determine which concepts apply, and choose an appropriate solution strategy; and Attain an introduction to basic machine parts such as pulleys and mass-spring systems.

Text/Reference Books: 1. Irving H. Shames (2006), Engineering Mechanics, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall 2. F. P. Beer and E. R. Johnston (2011), Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol I - Statics, Vol

II, – Dynamics, 9th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill 3. R. C. Hibbler (2006), Engineering Mechanics: Principles of Statics and Dynamics, Pearson

Press. 4. Andy Ruina and Rudra Pratap (2011), Introduction to Statics and Dynamics, Oxford

University Press 5. Shanes and Rao (2006), Engineering Mechanics, Pearson Education, 6. Hibler and Gupta (2010),Engineering Mechanics (Statics, Dynamics) by Pearson Education 7. Reddy Vijaykumar K. and K. Suresh Kumar(2010), Singer‟s Engineering Mechanics 8. Bansal R.K.(2010), A Text Book of Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications 9. Khurmi R.S. (2010), Engineering Mechanics, S. Chand & Co. 10. Tayal A.K. (2010), Engineering Mechanics, Umesh Publications

58

BSC01 Biology L T P CR Theory : 75 2 1 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To convey that Biology is as important a scientific discipline as Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry.

1) “Genetics is to biology what Newton‟s laws are to Physical Sciences”, 2) all forms of life have the same building blocks and yet the manifestations are as diverse as one can imagine, 3) without catalysis life would not have existed on earth, 4) molecular basis of coding and decoding (genetic information) is universal and that 5) fundamental principles of chemical and physical energy transactions are the same in physical/chemical and biological world.

Module 1.(2 hours)- Introduction

Purpose: To convey that Biology is as important a scientific discipline as Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry

Bring out the fundamental differences between science and engineering by drawing a comparison between eye and camera, Bird flying and aircraft. Mention the most exciting aspect of biology as an independent scientific discipline. Why we need to study biology? Discuss how biological observations of 18th Century that lead to major discoveries. Examples from Brownian motion and the origin of thermodynamics by referring to the original observation of Robert Brown and Julius Mayor. These examples will highlight the fundamental importance of observations in any scientific inquiry.

Module 2. (3 hours)- Classification

Purpose: To convey that classification per se is not what biology is all about.The underlying criterion, such as morphological, biochemical or ecological be highlighted. Hierarchy of life forms at phenomenological level. A common thread weaves this hierarchy Classification. Discuss classification based on (a) cellularity- Unicellular or multicellular (b) ultrastructure- prokaryotes or eucaryotes. (c) energy and Carbon utilization -Autotrophs, heterotrophs, lithotropes (d) Ammonia excretion – aminotelic, uricoteliec, ureotelic (e) Habitata- acquatic or terrestrial (e) Molecular taxonomy- three major kingdoms of life. A given organism can come under different category based on classification. Model organisms for the study of biology come from different groups. E.coli, S.cerevisiae, D. Melanogaster, C. elegance, A. Thaliana, M.musculus

Module 3. (4 hours)-Genetics

Purpose: To convey that “Genetics is to biology what Newton‟s laws are to Physical Sciences” Mendel‟s laws, Concept of segregation and independent assortment. Concept of allele.Gene mapping, Gene interaction, Epistasis. Meiosis and Mitosis be taught as a part of genetics. Emphasis to be give not to the mechanics of cell division nor the phases but how genetic material passes from parent to offspring.Concepts of recessiveness and dominance.Concept of mapping of phenotype

59

to genes. Discuss about the single gene disorders in humans. Discuss the concept of complementation using human genetics.

Module 4. (4 hours)-Biomolecules

Purpose: To convey that all forms of life has the same building blocks and yet the manifestations are as diverse as one can imagine Molecules of life. In this context discuss monomeric units and polymeric structures. Discuss about sugars, starch and cellulose. Amino acids and proteins.Nucleotides and DNA/RNA.Two carbon units and lipids.

Module 5. (4 Hours). Enzymes

Purpose: To convey that without catalysis life would not have existed on earth

Enzymology: How to monitor enzyme catalyzed reactions. How does an enzyme catalyzereactions. Enzyme classification.Mechanism of enzyme action. Discuss at least two examples. Enzyme kinetics and kinetic parameters. Why should we know these parameters to understand biology? RNA catalysis.

Module 6. (4 hours)- Information Transfer

Purpose: The molecular basis of coding and decoding genetic information is universal Molecular basis of information transfer. DNA as a genetic material. Hierarchy of DNA structure- from single stranded to double helix to nucleosomes. Concept of genetic code.Universality and degeneracy of genetic code. Define gene in terms of complementation and recombination.

Module 7. (5 hours). Macromolecular analysis

Purpose: How to analyses biological processes at the reductionistic level Proteins- structure and function. Hierarch in protein structure.Primary secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure.Proteins as enzymes, transporters, receptors and structural elements.

Module 8. (4 hours)- Metabolism

Purpose: The fundamental principles of energy transactions are the same in physical and biological world. Thermodynamics as applied to biological systems. Exothermic and endothermic versus endergonic and exergoinc reactions.Concept of Keq and its relation to standard free energy.Spontaneity.ATP as an energy currency. This should include the breakdown of glucose to CO2 + H2O (Glycolysis and Krebs cycle) and synthesis of glucose from CO2 and H2O (Photosynthesis). Energy yielding and energy consuming reactions. Concept of Energy charge

Module 9. (3 hours)- Microbiology

Concept of single celled organisms.Concept of species and strains.Identification and classification of microorganisms.Microscopy.Ecological aspects of single celled organisms.Sterilization and media compositions.Growth kinetics.

60

Course Outcomes (COs)

1. Classify enzymes and distinguish between different mechanisms of enzyme action. 2. Identify DNA as a genetic material in the molecular basis of information transfer. 3. Analyze biological processes at the reductionist level 4. Apply thermodynamic principles to biological systems. 5. Identify and classify microorganisms.

Textbooks/ References:

1) Biology: A global approach: Campbell, N. A.; Reece, J. B.; Urry, Lisa; Cain, M, L.; Wasserman, S. A.; Minorsky, P. V.; Jackson, R. B. Pearson Education Ltd

2) Outlines of Biochemistry, Conn, E.E; Stumpf, P.K; Bruening, G; Doi, R.H., John Wiley and Sons

3) Principles of Biochemistry (V Edition), By Nelson, D. L.; and Cox, M. M.W.H. Freeman and Company

4) Molecular Genetics (Second edition), Stent, G. S.; and Calender, R.W.H. Freeman and company, Distributed by Satish Kumar Jain for CBS Publisher

5) Microbiology, Prescott, L.M J.P. Harley and C.A. Klein 1995. 2nd edition Wm, C. Brown Publishers

61

EI451 Control System Engineering Lab L T P CR Internal Marks : 35 0 0 2 1 External Marks : 15

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments

1. To study A.C. servo motor and to plot its torque speed characteristics. 2. To study D.C. servo motor and to plot its torque speed characteristics. 3. To study the magnetic amplifier and to plot its load current v/s control current

characteristics for : 4. Series connected mod.e 5. Parallel connected mode. 6. To plot the load current v/s control current characteristics for self exited mode of the

magnetic amplifier. 7. To study the synchro& to:

(a) Use the synchro pair (synchro transmitter & control transformer) as an error detector. (b) Plot stator voltage v/s rotor angle for synchro transmitter i.e. to use the synchro

transmitter as position transducer. 8. To use the synchro pair (synchro transmitter &synchro motor) as a torquetransmitter. 9. To demonstrate simple motor driven closed loop position control system. 10. To study and demonstrate simple closed loop speed control system. 11. To study the lead, lag, lead-lag compensators and to draw their magnitude and phase

plots. 12. To study a stepper motor & to execute microprocessor or computer-based control of the

same by changing number of steps, direction of rotation & speed. 13. To implement a PID controller for level control of a pilot plant. 14. To implement a PID controller for temperature control of a pilot plant. 15. To study the MATLAB package for simulation of control system design.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand AC & DC servomotor & its characteristics. Understand the characteristics of characteristics of magnetic amplifier. Understand simple motor drives open loop & closed loop position and speed control

system. Understand Lag & Lead compensator. Understand microprocessor control of stepper motor. Understand level and temperature control of plant using PID. Demonstrate the transient responses to step inputs for stable and unstable systems using

MATLAB. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way.

62

EC452 Analog Circuits Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15 Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments 1. Design & measure the frequency response of an RC coupled amplifier using discrete

components.

2. Design a two stage RC coupled amplifier and determine the effect of cascading on gain and bandwidth.

3. Design & realize inverting amplifier, non-inverting and buffer amplifier using 741 Op Amp.

4. Verify the operation of a differentiator circuit using 741 op amp and show that it acts as a high pass filter.

5. Verify the operation of a integrator circuit using 741 op amp and show that it ac ts as a low pass filter.

6. Design and verify the operations of op amp adder and subtractor circuits.

7. To design & realize Schmitt trigger using op amp 741.

8. Design and realize Wein-bridge oscillator using op amp 741

9. To design & realize square wave generator using op amp 741.

10. To design & realize zero crossing detector using op amp 741

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Measure & verify the frequency response of RC coupled amplifier.

Measure the effect of various types of feedback on amplifiers.

Implement amplifiers, differentiator, Integrator and active filters circuit using op amp.

Design op-amp as Wein-Bridge Oscillator, Square Wave Generator, Logarithmic Amplifier and Voltage Controlled Circuits.

Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way.

63

EI453 Electrical Measurement and Instrumentation Lab L T P CR Internal Marks : 35 0 0 2 1 External Marks : 15

Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments

1. Measurement of displacement using LVDT.

2. Measurement of distance using LDR.

3. Measurement of temperature using R.T.D.

4. Measurement of temperature using Thermocouple.

5. Measurement of pressure using Strain Guage.

6. Measurement of pressure using Piezo-Electric Pick up.

7. Measurement of distance using Capacitive Pick up.

8. Measurement of distance using Inductive Pick up.

9. Measurement of speed of DC Motor using Magnetic Pick up.

10. Measurement of speed of DC Motor using Photo Electric Pick up.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Operate and make the various measurements on LVDT, LDR, RTD and thermocouple. Measure the pressure experimentally using various methods. Measure the distance experimentally using various methods. Measure the speed contact of DC motor using various methods. Write experimental reports and work in a team in professional way

64

ES 402 Electronics Workshop-II L T P CR Theory : 70 0 0 6 3 Class Work : 30

Total : 100

List of Problems

1. Fabrication of all the gates using Diode & transistors and verification of truth table. 2. To design & realize combinational circuit using K-map & logic simplification. 3. To design 4 bit parallel adder/ subtractor/ for unsigned/ signed numbers. 4. To verify the operation of Multiplexer & to implement any given function with a MUX. 5. To verify the operation of DEMUX & decoder. 6. To indentify common cathode & common anode of seven segment display with its

various segment. 7. Implement binary to BCD conversion. 8. To fabricate BCD to seven segment decoder 9. To verify the truth table of SR, JK, D & T Flip-Flop & conversion of one Flip-Flop to

another FF. 10. To design Mod-8 Synchronous Counter using T Flip-Flop. 11. To design UP-DOWN decade counter using JK/T Flip-Flop & derive o/p into SSD. 12. To design a minute clock. 13. To verify the function of Universal Shift Register. 14. To design Ring & Johson counter using Universal shift Register. 15. To verify the function of RAM. 16. To verify the function of 4- bit ALU. 17. To study the operation of 8-bit A/D converter. 18. To design 4 bit DAC. 19. Mini project based on concepts of digital electronics.

65

EI501 Sensors, Signal Conditioning and Telemetry L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the characteristics of measurement systems. To introduce the Resistive sensors To introduce the Reactance variation and electromagnetic sensors. To introduce the Self-generating sensors To introduce the Digital sensors To introduce the various Modes of data transmission.

Syllabus

UNIT I: Introduction to measurement systems: general concepts and terminology,

measurement systems, sensor classification, general input-output configuration, methods of correction performance characteristics: static characteristics of measurement systems, accuracy, precision, sensitivity, other characteristics: linearity, resolution, systematic errors , random errors, dynamic characteristics of measurement systems: zero-order, first-order, and second-order measurement systems and response

UNIT II: Resistive sensors: potentiometers, strain gages and types, resistive temperature

detectors (rtds) , thermistors, magneto resistors, light-dependent resistors (ldrs); Signal conditioning for resistive sensors: measurement of resistance , voltage dividers , Wheatstone bridge. Balance and deflection measurements, sensor bridge calibration and compensation instrumentation amplifiers, interference types and reduction

UNIT III: Reactance variation and electromagnetic sensors : capacitive sensors – variable &

differential, inductive sensors – reluctance variation, eddy current, linear variable differential transformers (lvdts) , variable transformers: synchros, resolvers, inductosyn , magneto elastic sensors, electromagnetic sensors – sensors based on faraday‟s law, hall effect sensors, Signal conditioning for reactance variation sensors : problems and alternatives, ac bridges, carrier amplifiers – application to the lvdt, variable oscillators, resolver-to-digital and digital-to-resolver converters

UNIT IV: Self-generating sensors: thermoelectric sensors, piezoelectric sensors, pyroelectric

sensors, photovoltaic sensors, electrochemical sensors, Signal conditioning for self-generating sensors: chopper and low-drift amplifiers, offset and drifts amplifiers , electrometer amplifiers, charge amplifiers, noise in amplifiers

UNIT V: Digital sensors: position encoders, variable frequency sensors – quartz digital

thermometer, vibrating wire strain gages , vibrating cylinder sensors, saw sensors, digital flow meters, Sensors based on semiconductor junctions : thermometers based on semiconductor junctions, magneto diodes and magneto transistors, photodiodes and phototransistors, sensors based on mosfet transistors, charge- coupled sensors – types of CCD imaging sensors , ultrasonic-based sensors , fiber-optic sensors.

UNIT VI: Modes of data transmission, DC telemetry system, voltage telemetry system, current

telemetry system, AC telemetry system, AM, FM, Phase modulation, pulse telemetry system, PAM, Pulse frequency system, pulse duration modulation(PDM), digital telemetry, pulse code modulation, transmission channels and media, wire line

66

channels, radio channels, micro wave channels, power line carrier channels, multiplexing in telemetry systems, TDM.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the characteristics of measurement systems. Understand and application of the Resistive sensors Understand and application of the Reactance variation and electromagnetic sensors. Understand and application of the Self-generating sensors Understand and application of the Digital sensors Understand and application of the various Modes of data transmission.

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Ramon Pallás Areny, John G. Webster, “Sensors and Signal Conditioning”, 2nd edition,

JohnWiley and Sons, 2000 2. D.Patranabis, “Sensors and Transducers”, TMH 2003 3. Jon Wilson , “Sensor Technology Handbook”, Newne 2004. 4. Herman K.P. Neubrat, “Instrument Transducers – An Introduction to Their

Performance and Design”, Oxford University Press. 5. E.O. Doeblin, “Measurement System : Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill

Publications 6. D. Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, John Wiley and Sons 7. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data acquisition, Elsevier, 2011 8. Graham Brooker, Introduction to Sensors for ranging and imaging, Yesdee, 200 Ian Sinclair, Sensors and Transducers, Elsevier, 3rd Edition, 2011

67

EI502 Modern Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives

To introduce State Space Models for LTI systems, controllability and observability. To impart knowledge of discrete systems and methods to analyze LTI systems using

discrete methods. To introduce State space models in discrete time. To Learn various design techniques in state space form.

Syllabus

Unit I: State Variable Analysis: Introduction, vectors and matrices, state variable

representation, conversion of transfer function model to state variable model, conversion of state variable model to transfer function model, decomposition of transfer function into canonical state variable models, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, solution of state equations. Concept of controllability and observability, equivalence between transfer function and state variable representation.

Unit II: State variable analysis of discrete time system: state space analysis of linear discrete

time system, controllability and observability, multivariable system. Unit III:Pole placement and state observers: introduction, stability improvement by state

feedback, necessary and sufficient condition for arbitrary pole placement, state regulator design, design of state observers, state feedback with integral control, introduction to digital control system with state feedback.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Develop and analyze state Space Models for LTI systems, controllability and observability.

Understand discrete systems and methods to analyze LTI systems using discrete methods.

Develop and analyze State space models in discrete time. Apply Design techniques in state space form.

Text books:

1. Control System by B. C. Kuo. 2. Digital and non linear control by M. Gopal 3. Control System by Nagrath and Gopal.

68

ECC03 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study and familiarise with building blocks of micro computers systems and Assembly programming of 8086.

To apply the fundamental of programming and Interfacing through 8051. To know about virtual, cache and architecture of advance processors. To know fundamentals of RISC and ARM microcontrollers and interfaces design.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Overview of microcomputer systems and their building blocks, memory interfacing,

concepts of interrupts and Direct Memory Access, 8086 Instruction, addressing modes, instruction set of Microcontroller (with examples of 8085 and 8086)

Unit 2: Peripherals and Interfacing with Microprocessor (8086)-PPI-8255, Timers-8253/8254,

Programmable Interrupt Controller 8259, Interfacing of Microprocessor with I/O, A/D, D/A, Switches & LEDs

Unit 3: Microcontroller 8051, Architecture, programming, interfacing with peripherals - timer,

serial I/O, parallel I/O, A/D and D/A converters, Arithmetic Coprocessors, System level interfacing design

Unit 4: Concepts of virtual memory, Cache memory, advanced coprocessor Architectures- 286,

486, Pentium Unit 5: Introduction to RISC processors, PIC, ARM microcontrollers, architectures Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Do assembly language programming Do interfacing design of peripherals like, I/O, A/D, D/A, timer etc. Develop systems using different microcontrollers Understand RSIC processors and design ARM microcontroller based systems

Text/Reference Books:

1. R. S. Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture: Programming and Applications with the 8085/8080A, Penram International Publishing, 1996.

2. D A Patterson and J H Hennessy, "Computer Organization and Design The hardware and software interface. Morgan Kaufman Publishers.

3. Douglas Hall, Microprocessors Interfacing, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991. 4. Kenneth J. Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller, Penram International Publishing, 1996.

69

EIEL501 Power Electronics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the students about various types of power devices & their characteristics. To introduce the students about controlled rectifiers, choppers & inverters. To impart the knowledge regarding the analysis of inverters. To impart the knowledge regarding switching power supplies & their applications.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Characteristics of Semiconductor Power Devices: Thyristor, power MOSFET and IGBT Treatment should consist of structure, Characteristics, operation, ratings, protections and thermal considerations. Brief introduction to power devices viz, TRIAC, MOS controlled thyristor (MCT), Power Integrated Circuit (PIC) (Smart Power), Triggering/Driver, commutation and snubber circuits for thyristor, power MOSFETs and IGBTs (discrete and IC based), Concept of fast recovery and schottky diodes as freewheeling and feedback diode.

Unit 2: Controlled Rectifiers: Single phase, Study of semi and full bridge converters for R, RL,

RLE and level loads. Analysis of load voltage and input current, Derivations of load form factor and ripple factor, Effect of source impedance, Input current Fourier series analysis of input current to derive input supply power factor, displacement factor and harmonic factor.

Unit 3: Choppers: Quadrant operations of Type A, Type B, Type C, Type D and type E choppers,

Control techniques for choppers, TRC and CLC, Detailed analysis of Type A chopper, Step up chopper, Multiphase Chopper.

Unit 4: Single-phase inverters: Principle of operation of full bridge square wave, quasi-square

wave, PWM inverters and comparison of their performance. Driver circuits for above inverters and mathematical analysis of output (Fourier series) voltage and harmonic control at output of inverter (Fourier analysis of output voltage). Filters at the output of inverters, Single phase current source inverter.

Unit 5: Switching Power Supplies: Analysis of fly back, forward converters for SMPS, Resonant

converters need, concept of soft switching, switching trajectory and SOAR, Load resonant converter series loaded half bridge DC-DC converter. Applications: Power line disturbances, EMI/EMC, power conditioners, Block diagram and configuration of UPS, salient features of UPS, selection of battery and charger ratings, sizing of UPS, Separately excited DC motor drive, P M Stepper motor Drive.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Build and test circuits using power devices such as SCR. Analyze and design controlled rectifier, DC to DC converters, DC to AC inverters. Learn how to analyze these inverters and some basic applications. Design SMPS and UPS.

Text /Reference Books: 1. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Power electronics” Prentice Hall of India. 2. Ned Mohan, Robbins, “Power electronics”, edition III, John Wiley and sons. 3. P.C. Sen., “Modern Power Electronics”, edition II, Chand& Co. 4. V.R.Moorthi, “Power Electronics”, Oxford University Press. 5. Cyril W., Lander,” Power Electronics”, edition III, McGraw Hill.

70

6. G K Dubey, S R Doradla,: Thyristorised Power Controllers”, New Age International Publishers. SCR manual from GE, USA.

EIEL502

Industrial Instrumentation

L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective :- 1. To get an adequate knowledge about various techniques used for various parameters of

measurement in Industries. 2. To provide exposure to various measuring techniques for vibration, density. 3. To acquire knowledge about the principles of humidity, moisture and viscosity

measurements. 4. To learn the working of different types of temperature and pressure transducers. 5. To understand, analyze and design various measurement schemes that meet the desired

specifications and requirements of real time processes

Syllabus

UNIT 1: Temperature Measurements: Importance, advantage and limitation of different instruments ,Seeback effect, peltier effect used for temperature measurement, thermocouples, Advantage and limitation of- Vapour filled, gas filled, Liquid filled, mercury in glass, Bimetallic, Pressure spring thermometer, pyrometers, thermistors, IC based metering, Low temperature and high temperature measurement schemes. Level Measurements: Importance, advantage and limitation of different instruments, visual level indicators, float type, Purge method of measuring level, Buoyancy method, Resistance and capcitance probes for level measurement, limit switches, level measurement in pressurized vessels, solid level measurement techniques, modern techniques for level measurements and their applications.

UNIT 2: Pressure Measurements: Principle of measurement of absolute/gauge/ Vaccuum,

Different type of manometers, Pressure switches, pirani gauge. Flow Measurements: Mechanical flow meter, Interferential type, Rotating vane, propeller type, orifice plate, venturi tube, flow nozzle, pivot tube, variable area flow meters, rotameters, Electromagnetic and ultrasonic flow meters, mass flow meters, and turbine flow meters, selection of flow meters and typical application scheme for very low flow and highly viscous fluid. Force and Torque Measurement: Various measuring methods, Mechanical weighing systems, Ballistic Weighing, Hydraulic and pneumatic system, Torque Measurement, Transmission Dynamometers, Combined Force and Moment Measurement.

UNIT 3: Density Measurement: Displacement and float type densitometry, hydrometer,

hydrostatic densitometry, miscellaneous densitometry, oscillating densitometer, radiation densitometer, vibrating densitometer & gas densitometer. Displacement, Linear Velocity Measurement: Gauge blocks, surface plates, use of comparators, optical methods, displacement transducer and typical applications.

UNIT 4: Moisture and Humidity Measurement: Wet analysis and Dry analysis based

methods, Principle Moisture sensing devices- electrical conductivity/capacitance methods/ impendence sensors/radio frequency/microwave/Infrared absorption meters, vibrating quartz crystal moisture sensors, principle of operational instrument for measurement of humidity, modern techniques for measurement of humidity.

71

Vibration and Noise Measurements: Importance and harmful effects, liming/permissible value under various types of industrial environments, modern measurement techniques.

Course Outcome:- The theory lectures and practical should be planned in such a manner that students can acquire different learning outcomes in cognitive, psychomotor and affective domain to demonstrate following course outcomes. After learning the course the students should be able to:-

Select a transducer based on its operating characteristics for the required application. Check various available techniques available and select appropriate to obtain

satisfactory task for the parameter to be measured. Know advantages and limitations of selected techniques. Interpret the measurement results and cause of any possible error.

Text Books:

1. K. Krishnaswamy, S. Vijaychitra, “Industrial Instrumentation”, New Age International Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2010

2. A.K.Ghosh,”Introduction to Measurements and Instrumentation”, 4th Edition, PHI

72

EIEL503 Virtual/Intelligent Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the students about intelligent instrumentation system and characteristics of

intelligent instrumentation. To introduce the students for various types of instrumentation/computer networks. To introduce students virtual instrumentation and programming in Labview. To introduce the students about various types of interfacing techniques. To introduce the students about various types of analysis techniques.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction: Definition of an intelligent instrumentation system, Static and Dynamic characteristics of intelligent instrumentation, feature of intelligent instrumentation, Block Diagram of an intelligent instrumentation.

Unit 2: Instrumentation/Computer Networks: Serial & parallel interfaces, serial

communication standards, parallel data bus, EEE 488bus, Local area networks (LANs), Star networks, Ring & bus networks, Fiber optic distributed networks.

Unit 3: Virtual Instrumentation: Introduction to graphical programming data flow &

graphical programming techniques, advantage of Virtual Instrumentation techniques, Virtual Instrumentations and sub Virtual Instrumentation loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structure, formula notes, string and file Input/Output.

Unit 3: Interfacing Instruments & Computers: Basic issues of interfacing, Address

decoding, Data transfer control, A/D converter, D/A converter, other interface consideration.

Unit 4: Analysis Technique: DSP software, Measurement filters and wavelets, windows,

curve fitting probability and statistics. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Define the meaning of intelligent instrumentation syatem and its static and dynamic characteristics.

Understand the various serial and parallel data transfer standards i.e. RS232 and IEEE488.

Write VI program in LABVIEW to implement various virtual instrumentation system. Do interfacing of ADC and DAC and other peripherals to microprocessor using

decoders. To implement various filters and wavelets using DSP software.

BOOKS:

1. Intelligent instrumentation :G.C. Barney: PHI. 2. Labview for everyone: Lisa, K. Wells and Jeffery Travis: PHI.

REFRENCES: 1. Principles of measurement & instrumentation: Alan S. Moris; PHI. 2. Labview graphical programming 2nd edition: Gray Johanson; TMH.

73

MC03 Environmental Sciences L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective

The prime objective of the course is to provide the students a detailed knowledge on the threats and challenges to the environment due to developmental activities.

The students will be able to identify the natural resources and suitable methods for their conservation and sustainable development.

The focus will be on awareness of the students about the importance of ecosystem and biodiversity for maintaining ecological balance.

The students will learn about various attributes of pollution management and waste management practices.

The course will also describe the social issues both rural and urban environment and environmental legislation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: THE MULTIDISCIPLINARY NATURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Definition, scope and importance. Need for public awareness. Unit 2: NATURAL RESOURCES: RENEWABLE AND NON-RENEWABLE RESOURCES

Natural resources and associated problems, Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people. Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems. Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and mineral resources, case studies. Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies. Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non- renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. Case studies. Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification., Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources. Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.

Unit 3: ECOSYSTEMS Concept of an ecosystem Structure and Concept of an ecosystem,

Structure and function of an ecosystem. Producers, consumers and decomposers, Energy flow in the ecosystem. Ecological succession. Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids, Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystem: a) Forest ecosystem b) Grassland ecosystem c) Desert ecosystem d) Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries).

Unit 4: BIODIVERSITY AND ITS CONSERVATION Definition: genetic, species and

ecosystem diversity, Biogeographical classification of India. Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values. Biodiversity at global, National and local levels. India as a mega-diversity nation. Hot-spots of biodiversity. Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts. Endangered and endemic species of India. Conservation of biodiversity: insitu and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

74

Unit 5: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION Definition, Causes, effects and control measures of: Air pollution b) Water pollution c) Soil pollution d) Marine pollution e) Noise pollution f) Thermal pollution g) Nuclear hazards, Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes. Role of an individual in prevention of pollution. Pollution case studies. Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

Unit 6: SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT From Unsustainable to Sustainable development Urban problems related to energy. Water

conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management. Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns. Case studies, Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions. Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust. Case studies. Wasteland reclamation. Consumerism and waste products, Environment Protection Act. Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act. Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act , Wildlife Protection Act. Forest Conservation Act. Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation , Public awareness.

Unit 7: HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT Population growth, variation

among nations. Population explosion, Family Welfare Programme, Environment and human health, Human Rights, Value Education. HIV/AIDS. Women and Child Welfare. Role of Information Technology in Environment and human health. Case Studies.

Unit 8: FIELD WORK: Visit to a local area to document environmental assets-river, forest,

grassland, hill, mountain, Visit to a local polluted site, Urban, Rural, Industrial, Agricultural, Study of common plants, insects, birds. Study of simple ecosystems, pond, river, hill slopes, etc.

TEXT/ REFERENCES

1. “Perspectives in Environmental Studies” by A. Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik, New age international publishers.

2. “Environmental Studies by Benny Joseph”, Tata McGraw Hill Co, New Delhi 3. “Environmental Science: towards a sustainable future” by Richard T. Wright. 2008 PHL

Learning Private Ltd. New Delhi. 4. “Environmental Engineering and science” by Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela 2008

PHI Learning Pvt Ltd. 5. “Environmental Science” by Daniel B. Botkin& Edwards A. Keller, Wiley INDIA edition. 6. “Fundamentals of Ecology” by Odum, E.P., Barrick, M. and Barret, G.W. Thomson

Brooks/Cole Publisher, California, 2005.

75

OE501 Computer Architecture L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects:

To study the basic of computer system. To study general system architecture. To study memory hierarchy & I/O techniques. To study basic non-pipelined CPU architecture & how its performance can be enhanced

using pipelining. Syllabus

Unit 1: Basic Structure of Computers, Functional units, software, performance issues software,

machine instructions and programs, Types of instructions, Instruction sets: Instruction formats, Assembly language, Stacks, Ques, Subroutines.

Unit 2: Processor organization, Information representation, number formats. Unit 3: Multiplication & division, ALU design, Floating Point arithmetic, IEEE 754 floating point

Formats Control Design, Instruction sequencing, Interpretation, Hard wired control-Design methods, and CPU control unit. Microprogrammed Control-Basic concepts, minimizing microinstruction size, multiplier control unit. Microprogrammed computers-CPU control unit

Unit 4: Memory organization, device characteristics, RAM, ROM, Memory management, Concept

of Cache & associative memories, Virtual memory. System organization, Input-Output systems, Interrupt, DMA, Standard I/O interfaces

Unit 5: Concept of parallel processing, Pipelining, Forms of parallel processing, interconnect

network Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand how computers work. Understand basic principles of computer‟s working. Understand and analyze the performance of computers. Understand and know how computers are designed and built. Understand issues affecting modern processors (caches, pipelines etc.).

Text/Reference Books:

1. V.Carl Hammacher, “Computer Organisation”, Fifth Edition. 2. A.S.Tanenbum, “Structured Computer Organisation” , PHI, Third edition. 3. Y.Chu, "Computer Organization and Microprogramming”, II, Englewood Chiffs, N.J.,

Prentice Hall Edition. 4. M.M.Mano, “Computer System Architecture”, Edition. 5. C.W.Gear, “Computer Organization and Programming”, McGraw Hill, N.V. Edition. 6. Hayes J.P, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, PHI, Second edition.

76

OE502 Data Structure L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study in detail the concept of Loops, Conditional statements, Arrays, Functions, pointers, structures, file handling file concepts, file organization in C language.

To study link list, Header Link list, Multiway link list and perform various data structure operations.

To study the concept of stack and Queues and implement the same using array and link list form.

To implement Binary Trees type and implement the same in array and link list form. To study the Graphs using set, linked and matrix representation. To study and implement file handling concepts.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Overview of ‘C’: Introduction, Flow of Control, Input output functions, Arrays and

Structures, Functions. Unit 2: Data structures and Algorithms an overview: concept of data structure, choice of

right data structures, types of data structures, basic terminology Algorithms, how to design and develop an algorithm, stepwise refinement, use of accumulators and counters, algorithm analysis, complexity of algorithms Big-oh notation, Arrays, Searching Sorting, Introduction, One Dimensional Arrays,

Unit 3: Operations Defined: traversal, selection, searching, insertion, deletion, and sorting,

Multidimensional arrays, address calculation of a location in arrays. Searching: Linear search, Recursive and Non recursive binary Search. Sorting: Selection sort, Bubble sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort, Quick sort, Shell sort, Heap sort

Unit 4: Stacks and queues: Stacks, array representation of stack, Applications of stacks,

Queues, Circular queues, array representation of Queues, Deque, priority queues, Applications of Queues.

Unit 5: Pointers and Linked Lists: Pointers, Pointer variables, Pointer and arrays, array of

pointers, pointers and structures, Dynamic allocation. Linked Lists: Concept of a linked list,. Circular linked list, doubly linked list, operations on linked lists. Concepts of header linked lists. Applications of linked lists, linked stacks, linked Queues.

Unit 6: Tree and Graphs: Trees: Introduction to trees, binary trees, representation and

traversal of trees, operations on binary trees, types of binary trees, threaded binary trees, B Trees, Application of trees. Graphs: Introduction, terminology, set, linked and matrix representation, Graph traversal techniques: BFS, DFS, operations on graphs, Minimum spanning trees, Applications of graphs.

Unit 7: File Handling and Advanced data Structure Introduction to file handling, Data and

Information, File concepts, File organization, files and streams, working with files. AVL trees, Sets, list representation of sets, applications of sets, skip lists

77

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Understand the programming of C language from basic to advance level. Understand the Concept of link list, stack, queue, binary tree its usage in real life. Understand the Working of binary trees and graph with their applications. Understand the concept of files and their organization of memory.

Text Books:

1. Data Structures using C by A. M. Tenenbaum, Langsam, Moshe J. Augentem, PHI Pub. 2. Data Structures using C by A. K. Sharma, Pearson

Reference Books:

1. Data Structures and Algorithms by A.V. Aho, J.E. Hopcroft and T.D. Ullman, Original edition, Addison-Wesley, 1999, Low Priced Edition.

2. Fundamentals of Data structures by Ellis Horowitz & SartajSahni, Pub, 1983,AW 3. Fundamentals of computer algorithms by Horowitz Sahni and Rajasekaran. 4. Data Structures and Program Design in C By Robert Kruse, PHI, 5. Theory & Problems of Data Structures by Jr. SymourLipschetz, Schaum„s outline by

TMH. 6. Introduction to Computers Science -An algorithms approach , Jean Paul Tremblay,

Richard B. Bunt, 2002, T.M.H.

78

OE503 Basics of Communication Engineering L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study the concepts of signal & system as well as various modes and media„s of Communication.

To introduce the various Analog modulation techniques. To introduce the concept of Sampling Theorem and Pulse Modulation Techniques. To introduce the concept of different digital modulations schemes To introduce various types of Noise

UNIT1. INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS: The essentials of a

Communication system, modes and media„s of Communication, Classification of signals and systems, Fourier analysis of signals.

UNIT2. AMPLITUDE MODULATION: Amplitude modulation, Generation of AM waves,

Demodulation of AM waves, DSBSC, Generation of DSBSC waves, Coherent detection of DSBSC waves, single side band modulation, generation of SSB waves, demodulation of SSB waves, vestigial sideband modulation (VSB).

UNIT3. ANGLE MODULATION: Basic definitions: Phase modulation (PM) & frequency

modulation (FM), narrow band frequency modulation, wideband frequency modulation, generation of FM waves, Demodulation of FM waves.

UNIT4. PULSE MODULATION: Sampling theory, pulse amplitude modulation (PAM),

pulse time modulation., Elements of pulse code modulation,Quantization, Uniform & nonuniform Quantization, Necessicity of nonuniform quantization, A law of Companding, μ law of companding, Quantization error in PCM, transmission BW of PCM, Differential Pulse Code Modulation, Delta Modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation, TDM, FDM.

UNIT5. DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES: ASK, Generation and detection of

ASK, FSK Generation and detection of FSK, BPSK , Generation & detection of BPSK, QPSK, generation and detection of QPSK, DPSK, M-ary PSK.

UNIT6. INTRODUCTION TO NOISE: External noise, internal noise, S/N ratio, noise

figure, noise temperature. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Undestand the concepts of signal & system as well as various modes and media„s of Communication.

Apply Analog modulation techniques on the basis of requirement. Understand Sampling Theorem and Pulse Modulation Techniques. Understand the concept of different digital modulations schemes Understand various types of Noise

79

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Communication systems (4th edn.): Simon Haykins; John wiley & sons. 2. Communication systems: Singh & Sapre; TMH. REFERENCE BOOKS:

1 Electronic Communication systems: Kennedy; TMH. 2 Communication Electronics: Frenzel; TMH. 3 Communication system: Taub & Schilling; TMH. 4 Communication systems: Bruce Carlson.

80

OE504 Financial Management L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective:

To develop understanding among the students regarding nature of finance and its interaction with other Management functions and the objectives of Financial Management. Detailed contents.

Unit 1: Financial management: Scope finance functions and its organisation, objectives of

financial management, time value of money, sources of long term finance. Unit 2: Investment decisions importance, difficulties, determining cash flows, methods of

capital budgeting with excel, risk analysis (risk adjusted discount rate method and certainty equivalent method), cost of different sources of raising capital, weighted average cost of capital.

Unit 3: Capital structure decisions: Financial and operating leverage, EBIT/EPS Analysis,

capital structure theories, NI, NOI, traditional and M-M theories, determinants of dividend policy and dividend models, Walter, Gordon & M.M. models.

Unit 4: Working Capital: meaning, need, determinants, estimation of working capital need,

management of cash, inventory and receivables. Course Outcome

It creates understanding among the students regarding the key decisions like Investment, Financing and dividend Decisions of financial Management.

They are able to understand the usage and applications of leverages in financial decisions. The students are able to use their best knowledge in finance towards the value creation for the organization.

The students will be made aware of working capital management concept. TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Pandey, I.M., “Financial Management”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi 2. Khan M.Y, and Jain P.K., “Financial Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 3. Keown, Arthur J., Martin, John D., Petty, J. William and Scott, David F, “Financial

Management”, Pearson Education 4. Chandra, Prasanna, “Financial Management”, TMH, New Delhi 5. Van Horne, James C., “Financial Management and Policy”, Prentice Hall of India 6. Brigham & Houston, “Fundamentals of Financial Management”, Thomson Learning,

Bombay. 7. Kishore, R., “Financial Management”, Taxman‟s Publishing House, New Delhi

81

ECC51 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 2 1 Class Work : 15

Total : 50

List of Experiments 1. Study of architecture of 8085 & familiarization with its hardware , commands & operation

of Microprocessor kit. 2. Write a program using 8085 and verify for :

(i) Addition of two 8-bit numbers. (ii) Addition of two 8-bit numbers (with carry).

3. Write a program using 8085 and verify for : (i) 8-bit subtraction (display borrow)

(ii) 16-bit subtraction (display borrow) 4. Write a program using 8085 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by repeated addition

method. Check for minimum number of additions and test for typical data. 5. Write a program using 8085 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by bit rotation

method and verify. 6. Write a program using 8085 for division of two 8- bit numbers by repeated subtraction

method and test for typical data. 7. Write a program using 8085 for dividing two 8- bit numbers by bit rotation method and

test for typical data. 8. Write a program using 8086 and verify for:

(i) Finding the largest number from an array. (ii) Finding the smallest number from an array. 9. Write a program using 8086 for arranging an array of numbers in descending order and

verify. 10. Write a program using 8086 for arranging an array of numbers in ascending order and

verify. 11. Write a program for finding square of a number using look-up table and verify. 12. Write a program to interface microprocessor with 8253 to generate square wave. Use

8085/8086 microprocessor. 13. Write a program to interface microprocessor with 8253 to generate interrupt on terminal

count. Use 8085/8086 microprocessor. 14. Write a program to interface a two digit number using seven-segment LEDs. Use

8085/8086 microprocessor and 8255 PPI. 15. Write a program to control the operation of stepper motor using 8085/8086 microprocessor

and 8255 PPI.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Identify various modules embedded on the kit. Write the assembly code for various operations on 8-bit and 16-bit numbers. Interface various peripherals with microprocessor and to write the program for same. Interface various devices such as seven segment LEDS & stepper motor with

microprocessor through 8255 and to write the program for same.

82

EI 601 Industrial Process Control L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about process control system . To introduce the students about dynamic behavior of first order lag system with various

types of processes. To introduce the students about P,I& D controllers. To introduce the students about designing feedback controller To introduce the students about control system with multiple loops. To introduce the students about interaction and de-coupling of control loop. To introduce the students about computer process interface for data acquisition and

control UNIT 1: BASIC CONSIDERATIONS: Introduction to process control system, control loop

study-Generalisation with load-changes at arbitrary points in the loop ,offset and its analysis,modeling consideration for control purposes, degree of freedom and process controllers ,formulating the scope at modeling for process control.dynamic behaviour of first order lag system,process with variable time constant and gain.Dynamic behaviour of 1st order lag system,process with variable time constant and gain. Dynamic behaviour of first order lag system-multicapacity process,real time process,inverse response process,inytroduction to feedback control and effects P,I& D controllers.

UNIT 2: DESIGNING FEEDBACK CONTROLLER: Outline of the design

problems,selection of type of feedback controller.Time-integral performance criterion, process reaction curve and frequency response characteristic,Ziegler-Nichole rule,effect of dead-time,dead time compensator inverse response compensator.

UNIT 3: CONTROL SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE LOOPS: Cascade, split-range

feedforward, ratio inferential and adaptive control. UNIT 4:INTERACTION AND DE-COUPLING OF CONTROL LOOP: Interaction of

control loops,relative gain array and selection of the loops,design of non-interacting current loop.

UNIT 5: COMPUTER PROCESS INTERFACE FOR DATA ACQUISITION AND

CONTROL: Introduction to digital computer control of processes. Design of control system for complete plant.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:-

Understand the basic principles & importance of process control in industrial process plants and First order, second order, and integrating systems including dead time are treated with basic controller algorithms.

Understand the dynamic behavior of processes and develop good understanding of their behavior in different situation and the key concepts in adaptive control system.

Understand for defining controller structure with respect to controlled process and perform parameters tuning in order to assure required performance of the system.

Understand the concepts involved in multiple single loops in various applications.

83

Obtain theoretical and empirical mathematical models of different processes.Design different types of controllers

TEXT BOOK:

1 Chemical process control; George Stephanopoulos;PHI REF BOOKS

1 Digital computer process control;C.L.Smith;Intext Educational publisher 2 Process control: F.G.Shinskey; McGraw Hill 3 Advanced process control: W.H.Ray: McGraw Hill] 4 Process system and analysis and control: D.R.Coushanour; T.M.H 5 Process instrument and control handbook: D.M.Considins; McGraw Hill

84

ECC04 Digital Signal Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course objectives:

To study concept of basic signal and implementation of discrete line system. To introduce concept of Z-transform & discrete Fourier Transform and FFT. To give exposure to students about design of FIR digital filter. To familiar with the concept of multirate signal processing and spectral estimation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Discrete time signals: Sequences, representation of signals on orthogonal basis, Sampling

and reconstruction of signals, Discrete systems attributes, Analysis of LSI systems, frequency Analysis, Inverse Systems, Algorithm, Implementation of Discrete Time Systems

Unit 2: Z-Transform, Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), Fast Fourier Transform Unit 3: Design of FIR Digital filters: Window method, Park-McClellan's method, Design of IIR

Digital Filters, Butterworth, Chebyshev and Elliptic Approximations, Low pass, Band pass, Band stop and High pass filters.

Unit 4: Effect of finite register length in FIR filter design, Parametric and non-parametric spectral

estimation, Introduction to multirate signal processing, Application of DSP Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Represent signals mathematically in continuous and discrete time and frequency domain. Get the response of an LSI system to different signals. Design of different types of digital filters for various applications.

Text/Reference Books:

1. S.K.Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: A computer based approach.TMH. 2. A.V. Oppenheim and Schafer, Discrete Time Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 1989. 3. John G. Proakis and D.G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms

And Applications, Prentice Hall, 1997. 4. L.R. Rabiner and B. Gold, Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing, Prentice

Hall, 1992. 5. J.R. Johnson, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 1992. 6. D.J.DeFatta, J. G. Lucas andW.S.Hodgkiss, Digital Signal Processing, John Wiley& Sons,

1988.

85

EIEL601 Internet of Things L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course objectives:

1. To assess the vision and introduction of IoT. 2. To Understand IoT Market perspective. 3. To Implement Data and Knowledge Management and use of Devices in IoT

Technology. 4. To Understand State of the Art - IoT Architecture. 5. To classify Real World IoT Design Constraints, Industrial Automation in IoT.

Unit 1: The IoT Networking Core :Technologies involved in IoT Development: Internet/Web

and Networking Basics: OSI Model, Data transfer referred with OSI Model, IP Addressing, Point to Point Data transfer, Point to Multi Point Data transfer & Network Topologies, Sub-netting, Network Topologies referred with Web, Introduction to Web Servers, Introduction to Cloud Computing IoT Platform overview, Overview of IoT supported Hardware platforms such as: Raspberry pi, ARM Cortex Processors, Arduino and Intel Galileo boards.Network Fundamentals:Overview and working principle of Wired Networking equipment‟s – Router, Switches,Overview and working principle of Wireless Networking equipment‟s – Access Points,Hubs etc. Linux Network configuration Concepts: Networking configurations in Linux Accessing Hardware & Device Files interactions.

Unit 2: IoT Architecture: History of IoT, M2M – Machine to Machine, Web of Things, IoT

protocols Applications: Remote Monitoring & Sensing, Remote Controlling,Performance Analysis The Architecture The Layering concepts , IoT Communication Pattern, IoT protocol Architecture, The 6LoWPAN Security aspects in IoT

Unit 3: IoT Application Development: Application Protocols MQTT, REST/HTTP, CoAP,

MySQL Back-end Application Designing Apache for handling HTTP Requests, PHP & MySQL for data processing, Mongo DB Object type Database, HTML, CSS & jQuery for UI Designing, JSON lib for data processing, Security & Privacy during development, Application Development for mobile Platforms: Overview of Android / IOS App Development tools

Unit 4: Case Study & advanced IoT Applications: IoT applications in home, infrastructures,

buildings, security, Industries, Home appliances, other IoT electronic equipments. Use of Big Data and Visualization in Industry 4.0 concepts. Sensors and sensor Node and interfacing using any Embedded target boards (Raspberry Pi / Intel Galileo/ARM Cortex/ Arduino)

Course Outcomes:

Interpret the vision of IoT from a global context. Determine the Market perspective of IoT. Compare and Contrast the use of Devices, Gateways and Data Management in IoT. Implement state of the art architecture in IoT. Illustrate the application of IoT in Industrial Automation and identify Real World

Design Constraints.

86

TEXT BOOKS:

1. LoWPAN: The Wireless Embedded Internet, Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann, Wiley 2. Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and Integrated

Ecosystems, Dr. Ovidiu Vermesan, Dr. Peter Friess, River Publishers 3. Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next Internet, Jean-Philippe Vasseur,

Adam Dunkels, Morgan Kuffmann

87

EIEL602 Digital Control L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

Study of different transform techniques for digital control Design of discrete controller for continuous system Stability analysis of discrete system

Unit 1: Introduction to digital control, Configuration of basic digital control system, discrete

transfer function, discrete model sampled data systems using z- transform, transfer function model, signal analysis and dynamic response, zero-order hold equivalent, introduction to first-order-hold equivalent, transformation between s, z, w plane, z-Domain description of sampled continuous time systems.

Unit 2: Controller design, Controller Design using transform techniques: Root locus and

frequency domain analysis compensator design. Unit 3 : State space theory, Control system analysis using state variable method, vector and

matrices, state variable representation, conversion of state variable to transfer function and vice versa, conversion of transfer function to canonical state variable models, system realization, solution of state equations.

Unit 4: State space design, Design using state-space methods: controllability and

observability, control law design, pole placement, pole placement design using computer aided control system design (CACSD).

Unit 5: Observer design, Deadbeat controller design, Delayed system, controller design for

delayed systems. Unit 6: Stability analysis and Jury„s stability criterion, Lyapunov stability analysis to linear

systems and discrete systems, Stability improvement by state feedback. Course Outcomes:

Ability to design discrete controllers for system in time domain. Ability to design discrete controllers for system in frequency domain. Ability to analyze stability of a discrete system.

Text Books

1. K. Ogata,―Discrete Control Systems‖, PHI,2nded., 1995 2. M. Gopal, ―Digital Control and state variable methods‖, TMH, 2nd ed., 2006

Reference Books

1. Isermann, ―Digital Control Systems‖, Springer-Verlag, 1989 2. B. C. Kuo, ―Digital Control System‖, 2nded., 1995

88

EIEL603 NUMERICAL METHODS L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:- 1. To be familiar with numerical solution of equations 2. To get exposed to finite differences and interpolation 3. To be familiar with the numerical Differentiation and integration 4. To find numerical solutions of ordinary differential equations 5. To find numerical solutions of partial differential equations

UNIT I - CURVE FITTING AND NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS

Method of Least Squares – Fitting a straight line – Fitting a parabola – Fitting an exponential curve – Fitting a curve of the form y = axb – Calculation of the sum of the squares of the residuals.- Newton-Raphson method – Gauss Elimination method – Gauss Jacobi method – Gauss Seidel method.

UNIT II - FINITE DIFFERENCES AND INTERPOLATION

First and Higher order differences – Forward differences and backward differences and Central Differences – Differences of a polynomial – Properties of operators Factorial polynomials – Shifting operator E – Relations between the operators. Interpolation – Newton-Gregory Forward and Backward Interpolation formulae - Divided differences – Newton‟s Divided difference formula – Lagrange‟s Interpolation formula – Inverse interpolation.

UNIT III - NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION

Numerical Differentiation and Integration: Newton‟s forward and backward differences formulae to compute first and higher order derivatives – The Trapezoidal rule – Simpson‟s one third rule and three eighth rule.

UNIT IV - NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Solution by Taylor‟s series – Euler‟s method – Improved and modified Euler method – Runge-Kutta methods of fourth order (No proof) – Milne‟s Method - Adam‟s Bashforth method.

UNIT V - NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Classification of Partial differential equations of the second order – Difference quotients – Laplace‟s equation and its solution by Liebmann‟s process – Solution of Poisson‟s equation – Solutions of Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.

Course Outcome:- On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Understand numerical solution of equations 2. Understand finite differences and interpolation 3. Understand numerical Differentiation and integration 4. Understand numerical solutions of ordinary differential equations 5. Understand to find numerical solutions of partial differential equations

89

TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal B.S., Numerical Methods in engineering and science, Khanna Publishers, 42nd edition, 2012. REFERENCES

1. Dr. Venkataraman M.K., “Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering”, National Publishing Co., 2005.

2. Sastry S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 4th edition,2005. 3. Balagurusamy E., “Computer Oriented Statistical and Numerical Methods” –Tata

McGraw Hill., 2000. 4. Jain M.K., SRK Iyengar and R.L.Jain, “Numerical Methods for Scientific and

Engineering Computation”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 4th edition, 2003. 5. Kandasamy etal P.., “Numerical Methods”, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2003.

90

EIEL604 Computer Based Instrumentation and Control

L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:-

1. To introduce the students about different components used for plant automation and Control

2. To introduce the students about the on-going contemporary issues in the field of control and Instrumentation used for plant automation.

3. To introduce the students about concept of distributed, centralized computer control schemes.

4. To introduce the students about the concept of sampling and different types of data transfer schemes and serial data communication standards.

5. To introduce the students about the need and concept of Modelling and Simulation for plant automation

6. To introduce the students about Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC 7. To introduce the students about distributed control systems (DCS) and supervisory

control systems (SCADA) for control of manufacturing and processing systems UNIT 1 : INTRODUCTION: Necessity and function of computers. Level of automation :

Classical approach and computer based plant automation : On line and Off line. Centralized computer control and Distributed computer control.

UNIT 2 : INTERFACING: Sampling , Multiplexing, need of multiplexing, A/D converter,

D/A converters, interfacing of A/D converter and D/A converters with microprocessor/microcomputer, programmable communication interface 8251 USART, Serial communication and serial communication standards: RS 232, MODEM, Bus arbitration, Current loop.

UNIT 3 : STRUCTURAL STUDY OF AUTOMATIC PROCESS CONTROL:

Fundamentals of automatic process control, building blocks of automatic system, Distributed control system (DCS) : characteristics, functional levels/ system architecture, SCADA system. Direct digital control (DDC): structure, DDC software : position and velocity algorithm, Dual computer and basic concept of DDC,

UNIT 4 : PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROL: Evolution of PLC, Block diagram,

Different components of PLC, Principle of operation, PLC Scan cycle, Programming of PLC : Instruction set including NO, NC, Set, Reset, Timer, Counter, data transfer, Mathematical and logical functions, LIFO, FIFO, Jump, Bit shift instructions etc., PLC selection Process, Application and software of PLCs.

UNIT 5 : MODELING AND SIMULATION FOR PLANT AUTOMATION: Basic

concept, need of modeling and simulation, building of mathematical model of a plant, Modern tools for modeling and simulation.

UNIT 6 : INDUSTRIAL CONTROL APPLICATIONS : Plant automation: cement plant,

thermal power plant, steel plant and water treatment plant.

91

Course Outcomes:- On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

1. Understand different components used for plant automation and control system, different types of control system i. e feedback, feedforward, inference, ratio, cascaded and modern control system, distributed, centralized computer control schemes.

2. Understand the concept of sampling, multiplexing, ADC, DAC and their need for plant automation and different types of data transfer schemes and serial data communication standards.

3. Understand Direct digital control (DDC), its software and their comparison, Distributed control systems (DCS) and supervisory control systems (SCADA) for control of manufacturing and processing systems.

4. Understand and utilize programmable logic controllers (PLC), its instruction set and programming.

5. Understand the need and concept of Modelling and simulation for plant automation. 6. Understand Control of thermal plant, steel plant, cement plant and water treatment plant

Recommended Books: 1. Anand, M.M.S., Electronic Instruments and Instrumentation technology, Prentice−Hall of India (2006). 2. Krishna Kant , Computer based industrial Control PrenticeHall of India.(2005) 3. Liptak B.G., Process control: Instrument engineers„ Handbook, Butterwirth Heinemann (2003) 4th ed.

92

EIEL605 Power Plant Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:-The objective of the course is to :- Introduce with Instrumentation used in power plant. Impart the Ability to demonstrate the standards used in power plants. Introduce the impact of power plant operation in environmental and societal context.

Unit 1: Introduction to Power Plant: Power plant terminologies and key terms, power plant

classification: thermal, hydro, nuclear, co-generation, comparison of various power plants based on technology, usage, efficiency, and limitations.

Unit 2: Boiler Ancillaries: Various ancillaries used in steam generation units, viz. water

treatment, electro-static precipitator, soot blower, economizer, de-aerator, super heater, chemical dosing systems, air pre-heater, coal and ash handling systems, fuel storage and distribution, bag house filters. IE- Power Plant Instrumentation

Unit 3: Boiler Control: Types of boilers, various control such as: combustion control, air to

fuel ratio control, 3- element drum level control, steam temperature and pressure control, O2/CO2 in flue gases, furnace draft, boiler interlocks, sequence event recorder, supervisory control, data acquisition controls, burner management systems and controllers,start-up and shut-down procedures, boiler safety standards, boiler inspection procedures,Boiler load calculation, boiler efficiency calculation.

Unit 4: Turbine Instrumentation: Turbine instrumentation and control, start-up and shut-

down, thermal stress control, turbine supervisory instrumentation, condition monitoring, generator, power distribution instrumentation.

Unit 5: Nuclear Power Plant Instrumentation: Classification of nuclear reactors, nuclear

reactor control loops, fuel cycle, control and safety instrumentation, reliability aspects and various modes of operations. 11

Unit 6: Non-conventional energy sources and Power Distribution Schemes: Wind power,

solar power, tidal power, diesel generator controls, sub station automation and smart grid, energy harvesting

Course Outcomes:-After the completion of course students will be able to :-

Understanding of Instrumentation used in power plant. Ability to demonstrate the standards used in power plants. Understanding the impact of power plant operation in environmental and societal

context. Text Books:-

1. Sam. G. Dukelow, ―The Control of Boilers‖, ISA Press, New York, 2 nd ed., 1991. 2. David Lindsley, ―Boiler Control Systems‖, McGraw Hill, New York, 1st ed., 1991.

Reference Books: 3. Manoj Kumar Gupta, ―Power Plant Engineering‖, PHI Learning Private Limited, 1st

ed., 2012. 4. G.S. Sawhney, ―Non-Conventional Energy Resources‖, PHI Learning Private Limited,

1st ed., 2012 5. Gill A.B, ―Power Plant Performance‖, Butterworth, London, 1st ed., 1984

93

EIEL606 Process Modeling & Optimization L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: 1. To introduce with models of physical and chemical processes. 2. To introduce the concepts of constrained and unconstrained optimization.

Unit I :- Mathematical models of Chemical systems

A. Applications of mathematical models and principles of formulation, Fundamental laws: Continuity equations, Energy equation, Equations of motion, Examples of models: Modeling of CSTR‟s (isothermal, non-isothermal, constant holdup, variable holdup), Batch reactor, Ideal binary distillation column, Heat exchanger, Boiler, Field controlled and Armature controlled D.C. Motors. B. Types of models, Equations of state, Equilibrium, Chemical kinetics.

Unit II :- Numerical methods for solving algebraic and differential equations and curve fitting

A. Solution of algebraic equations: Interval halving method, Newton Raphson method Solution of differential equations: Euler method, Modified Euler method, Runge Kutta methods (2nd and 4th order), Adom Bashforth method. Curve fitting: Lagrange interpolation method, Least squares method. B.Vapor-liquid equilibrium bubblepoint calculation problem.

Unit III :Computer simulation of chemical and physical systems

A .Gravity flow tank, three isothermal CSTR‟s in series, non-isothermal CSTR, Batch reactor, Ideal binary distillation column, First and second order electrical systems. B. Explicit convergence methods.

Unit IV: Basic concepts of optimization and unconstrained optimization A. Continuity of functions, Concave and convex functions, Unimodal and Multimodal functions, Necessary and sufficiency condition for an extremum of an unconstrained function. Unconstrained single-variable optimization: scanning and bracketing procedures. Numerical methods: Newton, Quasi Newton and Secant methods. Unconstrained Multivariable optimization: Direct methods: Conjugate search directions, Powell‟s method. Indirect methods: Gradient methods, Conjugate gradient method, Newton‟s method. B. Fibonacci method, Golden section method.

Unit V :Linear and nonlinear programming A. Linear programming: Degeneracies, Graphical method, Simplex method, Sensitivity analysis, Karmarkar algorithm. Nonlinear programming: Lagrange multiplier method, Quadratic programming. B. Generalized reduced gradient method.

Course Outcome: Upon completion of this course, student should able to: 1. Find models of physical and chemical processes. 2. Understand the concepts of constrained and unconstrained optimization.

Text Books 1. “Process, Modeling, Simulation and Control for Chemical Engineers”, W. L. Luyben, McGraw Hill. 2. “Optimization of Chemical Processes”, T.F.Edgar, D.M.Himmelblau, McGraw Hill. 3. “Advanced Practical Process Control”, B.Roffel, B.H.L.Betlem, Springer.

Reference Books 1. “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, B. S. Grewal, Khanna Publications. 2. “Practical Process Instrumentation and Control”, J. Malley, McGraw Hill. 3. “System Simulation with digital Computer”, Deo Narsingh, Prentice Hall India.

94

EIEL607 Building Automation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

1. To Familiarize with elements of building automation for homes, hotels, restaurants and industry.

2. To understand about HVAC system, security, access, alarm management and energy management systems

Unit 1: Introduction : Concept and application of Building Management System (BMS) and Automation, requirements and design considerations and its effect on functional efficiency of building automation system, architecture and components of BMS.

Unit 2: HVAC system : Different components of HVAC system like heating, cooling system,

chillers, AHUs, compressors and filter units and their types. Design issues in consideration with respect to efficiency and economics, concept of district cooling and heating.

Unit 3: Access control &security system : Concept of automation in access control system for

safety, Physical security system with components, RFID enabled access control with components, Computer system access control – DAC, MAC, RBAC.

Unit 4: Fire &alarm system: Different fire sensors, smoke detectors and their types, CO and

CO2 sensors, Fire control panels, design considerations for the FA system concept of IP enabled fire&alarm system, design aspects and components of PA system.

Unit 5: CCTV system &energy management system: Components of CCTV system like

cameras, types of lenses, typical types of cables, controlling system, concept of energy management system, occupancy sensors, fans & lighting controller.

Unit 6: EPBX System & BMS subsystem integration: Design consideration of EPBX system

and its components, integration of all the above systems to design BMS. Course Outcomes:

Understanding of basic blocks and systems for building automation. Designing different systems for building automation and integrate those systems.

Text Book

1 Jim Sinopoli,‖Smart Buildings‖, Butterworth-Heinemann imprint of Elsevier,2 nd ed., 2010. Reference Book

2 Albert Ting-Pat So, WaiLok Chan, ―Intelligent Building Systems‖ Kluwer Academic publisher,3 rd ed., 2012.

95

EIEL608 Analytical Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce and classify capabilities and limitations of analytical instruments. To impart knowledge of use of an analytical instrument in solving real world problem.

Unit 1 Introduction to Chemical instrumental analysis, advantages over classical methods,

classification: Spectral, electro analytical and separative methods, Interaction of radiation with matter, Laws of photometry (Beer and Lambert's law), Deviation from Beer‟s law, working of filters, prism and grating monochromators, concept of design of analytical instrument

Unit 2: Colorimeters, online colorimeter for process applications, turbidity meter, UV-Visible

spectrophotometers and its types with its optical system design, IR spectrophotometers, X-ray spectroscopy

Unit 3: Emission Spectra, Quantitative measurements, Flame Photometer and its applications,

concept of design atomic absorption spectrophotometer, spectrum interpretation, interferences, applications of atomic absorption spectrophotometer

Unit 4: Classification of Chromatographic methods, Gas chromatography, Process Gas

Chromatograph, Liquid Chromatography, High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC)

Unit 5: Different types of gas analyzers for measurement of Oxygen, NO2,ammonia, carbon

dioxide and hydrocarbons , Real world applications : Environmental monitoring system, real time gas leakage monitoring working principle and applications of laboratory instruments : centrifuge, oven, stirrers

Unit 6: Working principle, analyzers and detector types of mass spectrometer, applications Text Books:

1. Willard, Merritt, John AurieDean, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, Seventh ed., 1988.

2. R. S. Khandpur, “Handbook of Analytical Instruments”, Tata McGraw–Hill Publications, Second ed., 2006.

Reference Books:

1. Bela G Liptak, “Analytical Instrumentation Handbook”, Chilton, Second ed., 1994. 2. Leslie S Ettre, Albert Zlatkis, “The Practice of Gas Chromatography”, John Wiley and

son‟s publication, First ed., 1967. 3. Skoog, Holler, Nieman, “Principles of Instrumental Analysis”, Thomson bookscole

publications, Sixth ed., 2006.

Course Outcomes: Summarize and classify capabilities and limitations of analytical instruments. Justify use of an analytical instrument in solving real world problem. Familiarize with current literature, research in analytical instrumentation.

96

EIEL609 Control System Components L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce selection and use the components for electrical systems 2. To impart knowledge to identify, formulate and solve a problem using pneumatic

system in instrumentation and control engineering 3. To impart knowledge to identify, formulate and solve a problem using hydraulic system

in instrumentation and control engineering . Unit 1 Motors: Types, working principle, characteristic, and mathematical model of

following: Motors AC/DC motors, stepper, servo, linear, Synchronous, Generators, and Alternator

Unit 2: Types, working principle, characteristics, and symbolic representation of

following: Switches: Toggle, Slide, DIP, Rotary, Thumbwheel, Selector, Limit, Proximity, Combinational switches, zero speed, belt sway, pull cord. Relays: Electromechanical, Solid state relays, relay packages Contactors :Comparison between relay & contactor, contactor size and ratings Timers : On Delay, Off delay and Retentive

Unit 3: (Sequencing & Interlocking for motors: Concept of sequencing & Interlocking,

Standard symbols used for Electrical Wiring Diagram, Electrical Wiring diagrams for Starting, Stopping, Emergency shutdown, (Direct on line, star delta, soft starter) Protection devices for motors: Short circuit protection, Over load Protection, Over/ under voltage protection, Phase reversal Protection, high temperature and high current Protection, over speed, Reversing direction of rotation, Braking, Starting with variable speeds, Jogging/Inching Motor Control Center: Concept and wiring diagrams

Unit 4: Pneumatic components: Pneumatic Power Supply and its components: Pneumatic

relay (Bleed & Non bleed, Reverse & direct), Single acting & Double acting cylinder, Special cylinders: Cushion, Double rod, Tandem, Multiple position, Rotary Filter Regulator Lubricator (FRL), Pneumatic valves (direction controlled valves, flow control etc), Special types of valves like relief valve, pressure reducing etc. Hydraulic components: Hydraulic supply, Hydraulic pumps, Actuator (cylinder & motor), Hydraulic valves

Text Books:

B. L. Theraja, “A text book of Electrical Technology”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., IE - 09005 Control System Components Vol II First ed. 1959.

S. R. Majumdhar, “Pneumatic Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publisher, 2009. Reference Books:

Meixner H and Sauer E, “Intro to Electro-Pneumatics”, Festo didactic, First ed. 1989. Hasebrink J P and Kobler R, “Fundamentals of Pneumatic Control Engineering”,

FestoDidactic: Esslinger(W Germany),1989. Petruzella, “Industrial Electronics”, McGraw-Hill International First ed., 1996.

97

Course Outcomes: 1. Ability to select and use the components for electrical systems 2. Ability to identify, formulate and solve a problem using pneumatic system in

instrumentation and control engineering 3. Ability to identify, formulate and solve a problem using hydraulic system in

instrumentation and control engineering .

98

EIEL610 Optical Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective:- 1. To introduce Ray theory of transmission 2. To introduce Transmission characteristics of optical fiber 3. To introduce Optical sources and detectors and fiber dsensor

Unit 1: Optical fiber waveguide: Ray theory of transmission, total internal reflection, and

electromagnetic mode theory of optical propagation, cylindrical fiber, classification of fibers, manufacturing of optical fiber.

Unit 2: Transmission characteristics of optical fiber: Attenuation, material absorption

losses, scattering losses, nonlinear and linear scattering, fiber bend loss, dispersion, intermodal dispersion, dispersion modified single mode fiber, dispersion flattened fibers, polarization, nonlinear phenomena.

Unit 3: Optical sources and detectors: Optical emission from semiconductor, semiconductor

LASER, non semiconductor LASER, LED as an optical source, optical detector principles, absorption, quantum efficiency, responsively, photo diodes, modulation.

Unit 4: Optical fiber sensors: Introduction to fiber optics sensors, sensors based on intensity

modulation, application of optical fiber for displacement, strain, stress and pressure measurement. Active multimode FO sensors, micro-bend optical fiber sensors, current sensors, phase modulated, polarization modulated optical fiber sensors, fiber optic gyroscope.

Unit 5 LASER applications: Introduction, application of LASER in biomedical

instrumentation, LASER interferometry, performance parameters, LASER telemeters, measurement of distance, LIDAR, holography: basic principle of holography, measurement of strain, stress, bending moments and vibrations using hologram.

Unit 6 Optical amplification and integrated optics: Optical amplifiers, integrated optics

integrated optical devices: beam splitters, directional couplers, modulators, switches, optoelectronics integration and differentiation, analog arithmetic operations, digital optics.

Outcomes:

Apply LASER and Optical fiber for various physical parameter measurements. Analyzing the optical sensor technology on various parameters of measurements.

Text Books:

1 Jose Miguel Lopez, ―Optical fiber sensing technology‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2002 2 AjoyGhatak, ―Optics‖, Tata Mc- Graw Hill Publishing, 5thed., 2012

Reference Book:

1 Joseph T Verdeyen, ―LASER Electronics‖, Prentice Hall of India, 3rded., 2003 2 John M. Senior, ―Optical fiber Communications Principles and Practice‖, PHI

publication, 2nded., 2008

99

EIEL611 VLSI Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:-

1. To introduce the students about Evolution of VLSI technology, VLSI Design Flow, Basic MOS Transistor.

2. To introduce the students about electrical properties of MOS 3. To introduce the students about design process of NMOS and CMOS technology, Stick

diagrams, Lambda based design rules and layout 4. To introduce the students about MOS transistor switching characteristics 5. To introduce the students about Dynamic Logic Circuits, Scaling of MOS Circuits and

Subsystem Design UNIT I: REVIEW OF MOS TECHNOLOGY

Evolution of VLSI technology, VLSI Design Flow, Basic MOS Transistor: Enhancement and depletion mode, MOS structure, NMOS, PMOS and CMOS fabrication.

UNIT II: ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MOS Threshold voltage, MOSFET current voltage characteristics, second order effects, MOS inverters: VTC characteristics of NMOS inverter, CMOS inverter and BiCMOS inverter. Noise margins, Latch-up in CMOS circuits.

UNIT III: DESIGN PROCESS

Physical design of simple and complex logic gates using NMOS and CMOS technology, Stick diagrams, NMOS Design Style. CMOS Design Style, Lambda based Design Rules. Layout.

UNIT IV: MOS TRANSISTOR SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS Sheet resistance, area capacitance, inverter delay. Switching power dissipation of

CMOS inverters. UNIT V: DYANAMIC LOGIC CIRCUITS

CMOS Logic Structure: Complementary CMOS Logic, Pseudo NMOS Logic, Dynamic CMOS Logic, CMOS Domino Logic, Clocked CMOS Logic, Pass

Transistor Logic, CMOS transmission gate Logic UNIT VI SCALING OF MOS CIRCUITS

Scaling models, scaling factor for device parameters, Advantages and Limitations of scaling.

UNIT VII SUBSYSTEM DESIGN

Architectural issues in VLSI, Design of CMOS parity generator, Multiplexer, n-Bit Comparator, Incrementer/ Decrementer, ALU subsystem.

100

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Understand about Evolution of VLSI technology, VLSI Design Flow, Basic

MOS Transistor 2. Understand about electrical properties of MOS 3. Understand about design process of NMOS and CMOS technology, Stick diagrams,

Lambda based design rules and layout 4. Understand about MOS transistor switching characteristics 5. Understand about Dynamic Logic Circuits, Scaling of MOS Circuits and

Subsystem Design TEXT BOOKS: 1. Kang and Leblebici “CMOS Digital integrated circuits” TMH 2003. 2. Pucknell D.A and Eshrachain K. “Basic VLSI Design Systems & circuits”(PHI) 3. Introduction to Digital Circuits: Rabaey (PH)

101

OE601 Digital Communication L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: 1. To introduce with different type of signals 2. To introduce with digital communication system 3. To introduce with different types of filters

Unit 1: Analog to Digital Conversion: Sampling Theorem, Pulse Amplitude Modulation,

Channel bandwidth for PAM signal, Natural sampling, Flat top sampling, quantization of signals, Quantization error, Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), The PCM system, Companding, Multiplexing PCM signals, Differential PCM, Delta Modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation.

Unit 2: Digital Baseband Transmission: A baseband digital communication system, Digital

Data formats, Line coding and its properties,Various PAM formats or line codes, Unipolar RZ and NRZ, Polar RZ and NRZ, Bipolar NRZ, Split Phase Manchaster format, Polar Quanternary NRZ format, The Optimum filter, Matched Filter, Calculation of Probablity of error for matched filter, Intersymbol Interference(ISI), Cause of intersymbol interference, Nyquist‟s criterion for distortion less baseband binary transmission.

Unit 3: Signal Space Analysis: Concept of Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) Channel,

Concept of Optimum Receiver, Geometric representation of signals, Gram – Schmidt Orthogonalisation procedure.

Unit 4: Digital Modulation Techniques: Coherent binary modulation techniques, Coherent

binary amplitude shift keying, Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK), Coherent Binary Frequency Shift Keying (BFSK), Noncoherent binary modulation, Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK), Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), Minimum shift Keying (MSK), Calculation of probability of error of BPSK, BFSK, QPSK, Relationship between bit error rate, symbol error rate, Comparison of modulation techniques.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

1. Understand & analyze of different type of signals 2. Understand Learn the baseband digital communication system 3. Understand the different types of filters

Text Books: 1. Taub and Schilling, “Principal of Communication System”,TMH 2. S.Haykin, “Digital communication”,Willey Pub. Reference Books: 1. WayenTomasi, “Electronic Communication System” ,Pearson pub. 2. J.Dass, S.K.Mullick& P.K. Chatterjee, “Principal of Digital Communication” , Willey Eastern Pub

102

OE602 Scientific Computing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective :

To introduce with the significance of computing methods, their strengths and application areas.

To give the knowledge of the computations on various data using appropriate computation tools.

Unit 1: Introduction: Sources of Approximations, Data Error and Computational, Truncation

Error and Rounding Error, Absolute Error and Relative Error, Sensitivity and Conditioning, Backward Error Analysis, Stability and Accuracy

Unit 2: Computer Arithmetic: Floating Point Numbers, Normalization, Properties of Floating

Point System, Rounding, Machine Precision, Subnormal and Gradual Underflow, Exceptional Values, Floating-Point Arithmetic, Cancellation

Unit 3: System of liner equations: Linear Systems, Solving Linear Systems, Gaussian

elimination,Pivoting, Gauss-Jordan, Norms and Condition Numbers, Symmetric Positive Definite Systems and Indefinite System, Iterative Methods for Linear Systems

Unit 4: Linear least squares: Data Fitting, Linear Least Squares, Normal Equations Method,

Orthogonalization Methods, QR factorization, Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization, Rank Deficiency, and Column Pivoting

Unit 5: Eigen values and singular values: Eigen values and Eigenvectors, Methods for

Computing All Eigen values, Jacobi Method, Methods for Computing Selected Eigenvalues, Singular Values Decomposition, Application of SVD

Unit 6: Nonlinear equations: Fixed Point Iteration, Newton‟s Method, Inverse Interpolation

Method Optimization, One-Dimensional Optimization, Multidimensional Unconstrained Optimization, Nonlinear Least Squares

Unit 7: Interpolation: Purpose for Interpolation, Choice of Interpolating, Function, Polynomial

Interpolation, Piecewise Polynomial Interpolation Unit 8: Numerical Integration And Differentiation: Quadrature Rule, Newton-Cotes Rule,

Gaussian Quadrature Rule, Finite Difference Approximation, Initial Value Problems for ODES, Euler‟s Method, Taylor Series Method, Runga-Kutta Method, Extrapolation Methods, Boundary Value Problems For ODES, Finite Difference Methods, Finite Element Method, Eigenvalue Problems, Partial Differential Equations, Time Dependent Problems, Time Independent Problems, Solution for Sparse Linear Systems, Iterative Methods, Fast Fourier Transform, FFT Algorithm, Limitations, DFT, Fast polynomial Multiplication, Wavelets, Random Numbers And Simulation, Stochastic Simulation, Random Number Generators, Quasi-Random Sequences

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the significance of computing methods, their strengths and application areas. Perform the computations on various data using appropriate computation tools.

103

Text/ Reference Books:

1. Heath Michael T., “Scientific Computing: An Introductory Survey” , McGraw-Hill, 2nd Ed., 2002.

2. Press William H., Saul A. Teukolsky, Vetterling William T and Brian P. Flannery, “Numerical Recipes: The Art of Scientific Computing”, Cambridge University Press, 3rd Ed., 2007.

3. Xin-she Yang (Ed.)., “Introduction To Computational Mathematics”, World Scientific Publishing Co., 2nd Ed., 2008.

4. Kiryanov D. and Kiryanova E., “Computational Science”, Infinity Science Press, 1st Ed., 2006.

5. Quarteroni, Alfio, Saleri, Fausto, Gervasio and Paola, “Scientific Computing With MATLAB And Octave”, Springer, 3rd Ed., 2010.

104

OE603 Soft Computing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

UNIT 1: Neural Networks: History, overview of biological Neuro-system, Mathematical

Models of Neurons, ANN architecture, Learning rules, Learning Paradigms- Supervised, Unsupervised and reinforcement Learning, ANN training Algorithmsperceptions, Training rules, Delta, Back Propagation Algorithm, Multilayer Perception Model, Hopfield Networks, Associative Memories, Applications of Artificial Neural Networks.

UNIT 2: Fuzzy Logic: Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical and Fuzzy Sets: Overview of

Classical Sets, Membership Function, Fuzzy rule generation. UNIT 3: Operations on Fuzzy Sets: Compliment, Intersections, Unions, Combinations of

Operations, Aggregation Operations. UNIT 4: Fuzzy Arithmetic: Fuzzy Numbers, Linguistic Variables, Arithmetic Operations on

Intervals & Numbers, Lattice of Fuzzy Numbers, Fuzzy Equations. UNIT 5: Fuzzy Logic: Classical Logic, Multivalued Logics, Fuzzy Propositions, Fuzzy

Qualifiers, Linguistic Hedges. Uncertainty based Information: Information & Uncertainty, Nonspecificity of Fuzzy & Crisp Sets, Fuzziness of Fuzzy Sets. Genetic Algorithms, Scope & application areas, solution of 0-1Knapsack problem using GA

References: 1. Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic: Theory and applications‖,G.J. Klir,B.Yuan, PHI 2. Introduction to Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic‖, M.Ganesh , PHI 3. An Introduction to Fuzzy Control‖, D Driankov, H Hellendoorn, M Reinfrank, Narosa

Publishing Company 4. Neural Networks: A classroom approach‖, Satish Kumar , Tata McGraw Hill 5. Haykin S., ―Neural Networks-A Comprehensive Foundations‖, Prentice-Hall

International, New Jersey, 1999.

105

OE604 Industrial Economics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objects: The candidates are expected to understand the process of industrialization as a part of

rapid economic development. Excepting a few references to the theoretical background the study aims at the analysis

of the performance of the industrial economy of India on the backdrop of the contemporary development.

Syllabus Unit 1: Industrial economics - Meaning, scope, need and significance of the study, Industrial

Structure - private sector, large, medium and small scale industries, cottage industries, role, problems and future of public sector industries, Industrial Combinations- causes, mergers and amalgamations, industrial monopoly control of monopolies

Unit 2: Factors influencing location of industries, Theories of Industrial location, Weber,

Sargent Florence, Need for balanced regional development of industries.- role of SIDC‟s

Unit 3: Industrial Productivity- norms and measurement, Factors affecting productivity and

capacity utilization, Importance of productivity in the competitive environment Measures required for improving productivity and efficiency, Trends in India‟s industrial employment- Measures of generating industrial employment.

Unit 4: Meaning, scope, importance of industrial finance, Sources of industrial finance-

private, public and cooperative sector, shares, debentures, bonds, deposits, loans etc., Foreign capital- need, government‟s policy, direct investment, foreign institutional investment, form of foreign Capital : Euro issues, GDR, ADR, External commercial borrowings

Unit 5: Industrial policy: Trends in industrial growth since 1991, Performance and problems of

Micro, Small, Medium Enterprises, Role of MNC‟s in India, Problems of regional imbalance and industrial growth in India

106

EIEL701 Embedded System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Syllabus

Course Objectives:

To learn design concept and approach of embedded systems using advanced controllers. To learn hardware design features and memories of embedded systems. To learn software design features of embedded systems. To learn processor peripherals and their interfacing with microprocessors.

UNIT 1: Concept of Embedded Systems Design: Embedded system overview, design

challenges, processor technology, design technology, and Examples of Embedded System.

UNIT 2: Custom single-purpose processors: Hardware, Basic combinational logic design,

Sequential logic design, custom single purpose processor design. UNIT 3: General purpose processors: Software, Basic architecture, operation, programmer‟s

view, development environment, ASIC processors. UNIT 4: Microprocessors memories: Memory write ability and storage permanence,

common memory types, memory hierarchy and cache, Advanced RAM. UNIT 5: Standard single: purpose processors, peripherals, Timers, counters, watchdog timers,

UART, PWM, RTC, LCD controllers, keypad controllers, ADCs, Stepper motor controllers.

UNIT 6: Microprocessor Interfacing: Communication basics, I/O addressing, Interrupts,

DMA, arbitration. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand design concept and approach of embedded systems using advanced controllers. Understand hardware design features and memories of embedded systems. Understand software design features of embedded systems. Understand processor peripherals and their interfacing with microprocessors.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Frank Vahid , “Embedded System Design” Wiley India Edition, 2001. 2. J.W. Valvano, "Embedded Microcomputer System: Real Time Interfacing", Brooks/Cole, 3. 2000. 4. Jack Ganssle, "The Art of Designing Embedded Systems", Newness, 1999. 5. V.K. Madisetti, "VLSI Digital Signal Processing", IEEE Press (NY, USA), 1995. 6. David Simon, "An Embedded Software Primer", Addison Wesley, 2000. 7. K.J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming, and Applications",

Penram Intl, 1996.

107

EIEL702 PLCs and SCADA L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To learn Programmable Logic Controller basics. To learn Fundamentals of logic. To learn Types of Timers To learn PLC And Electrical Safety To learn Need, Concept and Basic Features of SCADA

PLC and I/O processing: Programmable Logic Controller basics, overview of PLC systems – Architecture of PLC, Principle of Operation, input/output Units – power supplies and isolators, current sinking and current sourcing, types of PLC memory, fundamental PLC wiring diagram, relays ,switches, transducers, sensors –seal-in circuits.Input/output units Signal conditioning Remote connections Networks Processing inputs I/O addresses Programming of PLC: Fundamentals of logic, program scan, PLC programming languages, Ladder and functional block programming: Ladder diagrams,Ladder Diagram Instruction,Logic functions, Latching, Multiple outputs, Entering programs, Functional Blocks,Boolean Mnemonics,English like statements: relay logic Operations, latch and unlatch outputs, branch function, timers and counter operations– Arithmetic operations – Data Transfer and Manipulation Operations, flow control Operations – requirement of communication networks for PLC – connecting PLC to computer, Applications. IL, SFC AND ST Programming Methods: Instruction Lists:Instructions, Operators, Functions and function blocks, Sequential Function Charts: Introduction, Elements of sequential function chart, Transitions, Steps Structured Text: Expressions, Statements, Selection statements,Iteration statements. Jump and Call, Timer and Counter Jump, Subroutines Problems, Types of timers, Programming timers, Off-delay timers, Pulse timers, Forms of counter Programming, Up and down counting, Timers with counters, Sequencer Programming examples. PLC And Electrical Safety: Need and Considerations Associated With PLC Safety, Electrical Shock, Electrical Properties Associated With PLCs, Grounding of PLCS and PLC Systems, Static Electrical Discharges, Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

SCADA – Need, Concept and Basic Features of SCADA, Hardware and Software ( Specification & Configuration), requirements for SCADA, Basics of Power & Control circuits, Identification of Control Inputs & Outputs for a System, Elements of SCADA system, applications: channel scanning, polling, Interrupt scanning, Distributed SCADA, Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) – discrete control – analog control – master terminal unit – (MTU) – operator interface, Networked Computing Issues,Telecommunications Services and Link Protocols, Types of SCADA Networks Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand Programmable Logic Controller basics. Understand Fundamentals of logic. Understand Types of Timers Understand PLC And Electrical Safety Understand Need, Concept and Basic Features of SCADA

108

Text Books: 1. W. Bolton, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Fourth Edition,ELSEVIER, 2006. 2. FestoDidactic , “Programmable Logic Controllers Basic Level”Festo Text Book, 2002. 3. SCADA overview

109

EIEL703 Instrumentation & System Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective: To learn the requirement of Instrument and systems. To learn Design various electronic circuits ,noises identification and appropriate

elimination methods related to instrument and system. To learn and Select, design appropriate enclosure, cables, PCB. To learn the Estimate, analyze, improve the reliability of instrument and system.

Unit 1: Basic Concept of Instrumentation Design, Needs Analysis: with respect to systems

deployed in; Medical, Industrial, Test and Measurement, Home Appliances, Military Functional requirements & Specifications, Impact on the design due to adverse Electrical, Thermal and Mechanical Operational Environments

Unit 2: Noise Sources, Electrical, Magnetic, RF, Static, Ground Loops, Shielding, near and far

field, shielding effectiveness, absorption and reflection loss, shielding with magnetic material, contact protection, glow and arc discharges, loads with high inrush current, Inductive and resistive load contact protection networks for inductive loads, intrinsic noise sources

Unit 3: ESD, inductive charging human body model, ESD protection in equipment, software in

ESD protection ,Sensitive devices, input filters, clamping suppressors Unit 4: Electronic design guideline Noise in electronic circuits. Capacitive and inductive

coupling IE - 09012 Instrument and System Design and effect of shield, shielding to prevent magnetic radiation, co-axial and twisted pair cable, grounding, safety ground, signal ground, single and multi point ground, Hybrid ground, grounding of cables shields, Ground loops and low frequency and high frequency analysis of common mode signals, guard shields

Unit 5: Enclosure Design Guidelines. NEMA, DIN, BSI, ANSI standards Index protection

(IP), cable design guidelines; Printed circuit board design guideline, layout scheme, grid systems, PCB size, Design rules for digital circuits, and Design rules for analog circuits, single and multilayer PCB, CE / Underwrites Laboratories (UL) Compliance

Unit 6: Reliability, bath tub curve, Reliability for series parallel system, MTTF, MTTR,

MTBF, availability, Redundancy and stand by systems. Course Outcomes:

Analyze the requirement of Instrument and systems. Design various electronic circuits ,noises identification and appropriate elimination

methods related to instrument and system. Select, design appropriate enclosure, cables, PCB. Estimate, analyze, improve the reliability of instrument and system.

110

Text Books:

1. Henry OTT, “Noise reduction Techniques in Electronics Circuit”, Wiley International, Second ed., 2009.

Reference Book:

1. Balguruswamy, “Reliability Engineering”, TATA McGraw-hill Publication, Third ed., 2005

2. Walter C. Bosshart, “Printed Circuit Board”, Tata McGraw-Hill publication, Third ed., 2009.

111

EIEL704 Introduction to MEMS L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce about MEMS & Micro fabrications. To give exposure about essential material properties. To introduce about various transducers techniques To introduce about various fabrication & maching process of MEMS.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction and Historical Background, Scaling Effects. Micro/Nano Sensors,

Actuators and Systems overview, Case studies, Review of Basic MEMS fabrication Units, Oxidation, Deposition Techniques, Lithography (LIGA), and Etching. Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, sacrificial layer processes, Stiction, Bulk Micromachining, Isotropic Etching and Anisotropic Etching, Wafer Bonding, Mechanics of solids in MEMS/NEMS, Stresses, Strain, Hookes‟s law, Poisson effect, Linear Thermal Expansion, Bending, Energy methods, Overview of Finite Element Method, Modeling of Coupled Electromechanical Systems.

Unit 2: MEMS types and their applications: Mechanical MEMS, Strain and pressure sensors,

Accelerometers etc., Electromagnetic MEMS, Micromotors, Wireless and GPS MEMS etc Magnetic MEMS, all effect sensors, SQUID magnetometers, Optical MEMS, Micromachined fiber optic component, Optical sensors, Thermal MEMS, thermo-mechanical and thermo-electrical actuators, Peltier heat pumps.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Appreciate the underlying working principles of MEMS and NEMS devices. Be comfortable with the design, analysis & testing of MEMS. . Apply the MEMS for different applications. Understand about the different MEMS process used in MEMS/NEMS devices.

Text/Reference Book:

1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalkrishnan K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, Micro and Smart Systems, Wiley India, 2012.

2. S. E.Lyshevski, Nano-and Micro-Electromechanical systems: Fundamentals of Nano-and Microengineering (Vol. 8). CRC press, (2005).

3. S. D. Senturia, Microsystem Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001. 4. M. Madou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, 1997. 5. G. Kovacs, Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook, McGraw-Hill, Boston, 1998. 6. M.H. Bao, Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, and

Gyroscopes, Elsevier, New York, 2000. 7. R.C Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronics Fabrication”, 2nd edition, Addison

Wesley, 2000.

112

EIEL705 Fuzzy Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: i. To provide basic knowledge of the Fuzzy control. ii. To give the mathematical operations of fuzzy sets &fuzzy relations iii. To explain FKBC architecture.

UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION: Fuzzy control from an industrial perspective, knowledge based

controllers, knowledge representation in KBC„s. UNIT 2: THE MATHEMATICS OF FUZZY CONTROL:Vagueness, fuzzy logic v/s

probability theory, fuzzy sets, their properties and operations on fuzzy sets, fuzzy relations and operations on fuzzy relations, the Extension principle, fuzzy propositions, the compositional rule of inference, different implications, representing a set of rules

UNIT 3: FKBC DESIGN PARAMETERS: The PKBC architecture, choice of variables and

content of rules, derivation of rules, choice of membership functions, choice of scaling factors, choice of fuzzification procedure, choice of defuzzification procedure, comparison and evaluation of defuzzification methods.

UNIT 4: NON LINEAR FUZZY CONTROL: The control problem, the FKBC as a non-linear

transfer element, types of FKBC such as PID-like FKBC, sliding mode FKBC, SUGENO FKBC.

UNIT 5: ADAPTIVE FUZZY CONTROL : Design and performance evaluation, approaches

to design such as membership function tuning using gradient descent, membership function tuning using performance criteria, the self organizing controller, model based controller.

UNIT 6: STABILITY OF FUZZY CONTROL SYSTEMS: The state approach, stability and

robustness indices, input output stability, circle criterion, the iconicity criterion. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:-

i. Understand the basic knowledge of the Fuzzy control and its advantages ii. Understand the mathematical operations of fuzzy sets &fuzzy relations iii. Understand FKBC architecture, iv. Understand various approaches for adaptive fuzzy control design & performance

evaluation. TEXTBOOK

1. An Introduction to Fuzzy Control: D.Driankov, H. Hellendoorn and M. Reinfrank; Narosa

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Fuzzy Control Systems; Abraham Kandel and Gideon Imngholz; Narosa

113

EIEL706 Artificial Intelligence and Expert System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:- 1. To make the students familiar with Expert system and their features 2. To introduce the Problem areas addressed by Expert System 3. To introduce the organization of Expert Systems. 4. To introduce the design and architectures of Expert Systems Unit I: Introduction to Expert System: What are Expert Systems, Features of Expert

System, features of good Expert System, Types of applications of Expert Systems; relationship of Expert Systems to Artificial Intelligence and to Knowledge-Based Systems. Problem areas addressed by ES, ES success factors. Role of human in Expert System, Expert System organization.

Unit II: Expert system development life: cycle Difference between expert system and

conventional program, Basic activities of expert system and the areas in which they solve problems. Expert system development life cycle: Problem selection, Prototype construction, Formalization, Implementation, Evaluation.

Unit III: Expert System Tools: Knowledge representation in expert systems-using rules

semantic nets, frames, Types of tools available for expert system building and how they are used, Stages in the development of expert system tools, Examples of knowledge engineering.

Unit IV: Building an Expert Systems: Necessary requirements for expert systems

development, Task in building expert systems, Stages of expert system development, Examples of the expert system building process, Examples of expert system used in different areas, Architecture of Rule based Expert system, Non Rule based Expert system.

Unit V: Types of Expert System : An analysis of some classic expert systems, Limitations of

first generation expert systems, Deep expert systems, Co-operating expert system, Neural Expert System, Fuzzy Expert System, Real Time Expert Systems, Applications of Expert System.

Course Outcomes: Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to understand: 1. The applications of Expert Systems and their relation with AI. 2. Expert system development life. 3. Necessary requirements for expert systems development 4. Types of Expert System. Text/References Books

1. David W. Rolston: Principles of Artificial Intelligence and Expert System Development, McGraw Hill Book Company.

2. Peter Jackson: Introduction To Expert Systems, Addison WesleyElaine Rich and Kevin Knight: Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems, McGraw Hill Book Company.

3. Elias M. Awad : Building Expert Systems, principles, procedures, and applications, west publishing co.1996.

4. Dan W. Patterson: Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems, Prentice Hall (April 1, 1990)

114

EIEL707 Micro/Nano Devices and Sensors L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective:- To learn Nanotechnology and MEMS To learn MEMS types and their applications To learn Magnetic MEMS and Bio MEMS To learn Nanosensors and Nanotechnology enabled devices

MEMS Technology: Introduction Nanotechnology and MEMS, MEMS design and fabrication technology, Lithography, Etching, MEMS material, Bulk micromachining, Surface micromachining, Microactuator, Electrostatic actuation , Microfluidics. MEMS types and their applications: Mechanical MEMS: Strain and pressure sensors, Accelerometers etc., Electromagnetic MEMS – Micromotors, Wireless and GPS MEMS etc. Magnetic MEMS: Hall effect sensors, SQUID magnetometers, Optical MEMS: Micromachined fiber optic component, Optical sensors, Thermal MEMS: Thermomechanical and thermo−electrical actuators, Peltier heat pumps. Bio MEMS: Introduction to Bio-MEMS, Introduction to Cell Electrophysiology, Silicon Microfabrication, Microfluidics and Bio-MEMS applications. MEMS for Drug delivery. Nano Sensors: Introduction to sensors. Characteristics and terminology - static and dynamic characteristics.Micro and nano-sensors, Fundamentals of sensors, biosensor, micro fluids, Packaging and characterization of sensors, Sensors for aerospace and defense. Organic and inorganic nanosensors. Nano-Technology enabled devices: Nanomaterials and nanostructured films, Nanoscale electronic and ionic transport. Sensor for bio-medical applications. Bioelectronics, Nanoparticle-biomaterial hybrid systems for sensing applications. Gas sensor. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand Nanotechnology and MEMS Understand MEMS types and their applications Understand Magnetic MEMS and Bio MEMS Understand Nanosensors and Nanotechnology enabled devices

Recommended Books 1. Gardner, J. W., Microsensors, Principles and Applications, John Wiley (2008). 2. Gregory T. Korvacs, Micromachined Transducer sourcebook, McGraw Hill (1998). 3. Turner, A.P.F., and Wilson, G.S., Biosensors−Fundamentals and applications, Oxford University Press (2005). 4. William T., Micromechanics and MEMS, IEEE Press (1997).

115

EIEL708 Digital Image & Video Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students with the fundamentals of digital image processing techniques as well as image enhancement & filtering.

To give exposure to students regarding color image processing & image segmentation. To introduce the concept of Multi-resolution image processing tech, as well as image

compression techniques and standards. To impart knowledge regarding video coding & video segmentation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Digital Image Fundamentals: Elements of visual perception, image sensing and

acquisition, image sampling and quantization, basic relationships between pixels–neighbourhood, adjacency, connectivity, distance measures.

Unit 2: Image Enhancements and Filtering: Gray level transformations, histogram equalization

and specifications, pixel-domain smoothing filters, linear and order-statistics, pixel-domain sharpening filters, first and second derivative, two-dimensional DFT and its inverse, frequency domain filters, low-pass and high-pass.

Unit 3: Color Image Processing: Color models–RGB, YUV, HSI; Color transformations–

formulation, color complements, color slicing, tone and color corrections; Color image smoothing and sharpening; Color Segmentation.

Unit 4: Image Segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, edge linking and boundary detection,

thresholding – global and adaptive, region-based segmentation. Unit 5: Wavelets and Multi-resolution image processing: Uncertainty principles of Fourier

Transform, Time-frequency localization, continuous wavelet transforms, wavelet bases and multi-resolution analysis, wavelets and Subband filter banks, wavelet packets.

Unit 6: Image Compression: Redundancy, inter-pixel and psycho-visual, Lossless compression

predictive, entropy, Lossy compression, predictive and transform coding, Discrete Cosine Transform, Still image compression standards, JPEG and JPEG-2000.

Unit 7: Fundamentals of Video Coding: Inter-frame redundancy, motion estimation techniques

fullsearch, fast search strategies, forward and backward motion prediction, frame classification-I, P and B, Video sequence hierarchy, Group of pictures, frames, slices, macro-blocks and blocks; Elements of a video encoder and decoder; Video coding standards, MPEG and H.26X.

Unit 8: Video Segmentation: Temporal segmentation–shot boundary detection, hard-cutsand soft-

cuts, spatial segmentation – motion-based, Video object detection and tracking. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Mathematically represent the various types of images and analyze them. Process these images for the enhancement of certain properties or for optimized use of the

resources.

116

Develop algorithms for image compression and coding. Understand the various types of video segmentation.

Text/Reference Books:

1. R.C. Gonzalez and R.E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Second Edition, Pearson Education 3rd edition 2008.

2. Anil Kumar Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall of India.2nd edition 2004.

3. Murat Tekalp , Digital Video Processing" Prentice Hall, 2nd edition 2015.

117

EIEL709 Non Linear Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:- i. To introduce the students regarding Non linear components . ii. To introduce the describing function analysis of non linear control system. iii. To introduce the students regarding phase plane analysis of linear control system &

non linear control system. iv. To introduce the students about the methods of stability of linear systems & non

linear systems UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION:

Non linear components such as dead band, backlash, relay, saturation. Difficulties in non-linear modeling and control.

UNIT 2: PHASE LINE ANALYSIS:

Phase portraits of second order systems, method of isoclines, phase portrait of second order system with non linearities, limit cycles, singular points.

UNIT 3: DESCRIBING FUNCTION ANALYSIS:

Definition, limitations, use of DF for stability analysis, DF of ideal relay, relay with hysteresis, dead zone, saturation, Coulomb friction, backlash etc.

UNIT 4: LYAPUNOV STABILITY ANALYSIS:

Introduction, basic concepts, stability definitions, stability theorems, Lyapunov function for non-linear systems and linear systems. Model reference adaptive system, discrete time system.

UNIT 5: Non Linear Control Structures: Introduction to feedback linearization, MRAC, Self

Tuning control and Sliding Mode Control. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

i. Differentiate between Linear and Nonlinear system ii. Various methods for analyzing the structure and behaviour of nonlinear feedback

systems. iii. Model and analyse a system in state space. iv. Analyse the stability using Lyapunov design methods and feedback

TEXTBOOKS: 1. Control System Engg. (Third edition): I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal; New Age International REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Control Systems Principles and Designs (second edition): M. Gopal; TMH 2. Digital Control and State Variable Methods: M. Gopal ; TMH

118

EIEL710 Batch Process Control L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce with standards used for Batch process control. To learn the Development of control schemes for different batch process P&IDs.

Unit 1: Introduction: Introduction to batch control system, batch control system terminology, characteristics of batch processes, hierarchical batch model, control structure for batch systems.

Unit 2: S88 standard: Role of standards in batch control systems, study of international

standards and practices such as S88, S 95, USA FDA regulation, 21CFR 11, etc. Unit 3: Control of batch Process: General control requirements, safety interlocking,

regulatory & discrete controls, sequential control of batch processes, control activities and process management, information handling for a batch process.

Unit 4: Design of batch control systems: Batch management, recipe management, and

production scheduling & information management. batch control system design, system requirements, system hardware/reliability requirement.

Unit 5: Specifications and data management: Batch control system specifications and

implementation, Information/display requirements, cost justification and benefits, data management.

Unit 6: Implementation & case studies: Generic implementation of batch processes, case

study of batch control system implementation for applications in food and beverages, pharmaceuticals etc.

Course Outcomes:

Acquired knowledge of standards used for Batch process control. Development of control schemes for different batch process P&IDs.

Text Books:

1 Thomas .G. Fisher William M. Hawkins, ―Batch Control Systems‖, ISA series, 1 st ed., 2008

2 Thomas .G. Fisher William M. Hawkins, ―Batch Control Systems‖, ISA series, 2nd ed., 2012.

119

EIEL711 Stochastic Control L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

i. To introduce the students to Stochastic Processes & limitation of deterministic control and processes.

ii. To introduce the students for various types of probabilities. iii. To introduce the students for various types of random variables. iv. To introduce the students to mean, variance, moments & conditional statistics.

UNIT 1: Probability : Set definitions and set operations, Axioms of probability Joint and

conditional probability , Independent events Combined experiments Bernoulli trials , total probability and Bayes Theorem

UNIT 2: Random Variables The random variable ,concept CDF, PDF Some Important r.v.„s, Conditional distribution and density functions, Expectation ,Moments, Characteristic function, random process of one random variable Properties of joint distribution and joint density, Conditional distribution , Expected value of a function of r. v.„s , Joint characteristic functions

UNIT3: Random Processes – Concept of a random process, Stationarity and independence, Correlation functions and their properties Gaussian random process Poisson random process, Power Spectral Density and its properties ,Relationship between PSD and autocorrelation function

UNIT4: Estimation: Introduction, development of parameter estimators, estimation of stochastic processes, applications. Least –square estimation. Linear least squares problem, generalized least square problem. Sequential least squares, non-linear least squares theory.

UNIT 5: Characteristics of estimators: Sufficient statistics, Good estimators. Analysis of estimation errors. Mean square and minimum variance estimators.

UNIT 6: Maximum a posteriori and maximum likelihood estimators. Numerical solution of least –Maximum a posteriori and maximum likelihood estimators. Numerical solution of least – squares and maximum likelihood estimation problems. Sequential estimators

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: • Understand the stochastic processes & limitation of deterministic control & processes. • Understand and solve the problems related to various types of probability. • Understand and solve the problems by applying Asymptotic theorems, poison theorems & Bay‟s theorems • Understand the random variables & solve the problems of mean, variance, moments and stationary process. • Understand Bay‟s theorem, correlation & spectra. TEXT BOOKS: 1. Childers, Probability and random processes, The McGraw-Hill companies Inc., 1997. 2. Harold W. Sorenson, Parameter Estimation, Principles and Problems, Marcel Dekker Inc., 1980.

120

EIEL712 Electromagnetic compatibility for Instruments L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: i. To learn the electromagnetic compatibility phenomena ii. To know the electromagnetic compatibility in an installation iii. To know various (EMC) standards, facilities and tests

Unit 1: Understanding electromagnetic compatibility phenomena: Electromagnetic compatibility of a system: Electromagnetic compatibility: (EMC), Field of application Types of electromagnetic interference: Definition of an electromagnetic disturbance, Origin of emitted electromagnetic interference , Low-frequency (LF) interference, High-frequency (HF) interference Harmonics , Transients , Electrostatic discharges (ESD) , LV mains interference Sources of electromagnetic interference : Switching of inductive loads by dry contacts, Switching of inductive loads by semiconductors, Electric motors Fluorescent lighting , Spot welding, Spectral distribution of interference Transmission modes of electromagnetic interference: Coupling - General information, Conductive coupling Coupling by radiation , Decoupling of interference Earth: General definition, Roles of earth connection in electrical installations,Electrical earth connections, Typical earthing arrangement for an installation,Earth and electromagnetic compatibility. Frame connections: General definition,Specific definition for electrical installations, Exposed conductive parts and safety of persons and property, Exposed conductive parts and electromagnetic compatibility, Loops between exposed conductive parts, Frame connection loops,, Avoid earthing exposed conductive parts in a star configuration) Cables : Frequency behaviour of a conductor, Length and cross-sectional area of a conductor, Antenna effect of a conductor, Green/yellow PE/PEN conductor, Interconnection of exposed conductive parts. Filters: Function of a filter, Various filter types Ferrite cores Unit 2: Obtaining electromagnetic compatibility in an installation: The (EMC) procedure : Designing a new installation or extending an installation, Maintaining or upgrading an installation - Updating installed equipment, Improving an existing installation Earthing system: Introduction, Building, Equipment/machine, Cabinet, Electrical connections, Daisychained interconnection of exposed conductive parts Power supply: Analysis, Technical specifications, Isolation by transformer, Earthing arrangements, Earthing arrangements: (EMC) performance, Distribution in the installation, Earthing of transformer screens Cabinet: Analysis,Earth reference plane, Cable entrances , Routing of cables, Lighting, Layout of components Cables :Classes of signals, Choice of cables, Performance of cables in terms of (EMC)) Cable runs:Cable troughs, Connection to cabinets, Positioning of cables, Connection of ends, Methods of cable laying not recommended ,Recommended methods of cable laying. Connections: Type and length of connections, Making a connection, Pitfalls to avoid, Connection of shielding) Filters : Layout in cabinet, Mounting of filters, Connection of filters Surge arresters: Surge arresters or coil interference suppression Units: choice Ferrite cores

121

Unit 3: (EMC) standards, facilities and tests Standards: Introduction, There are 3 types of (EMC) standards, Standardising bodies, EMC facilities and tests Course Outcome: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

i. Understand the electromagnetic compatibility phenomena ii. Understand the electromagnetic compatibility in an installation iii. Understand various (EMC) standards, facilities and tests

Text Book: 1. Electromagnetic Compatibility by Merlin Gerin , Square D , Telemecanique Publication:

Gropu Shneider

122

OE701 Computer Network L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To give exposure to student that how data is transferred in computers. To study the performance of a network. To study the basics of different layers of TCP/ & how information is transferred between

them. To solve issues occurring at different layers.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to computer networks and the Internet: Application layer: Principles of

network applications, The Web and Hyper Text Transfer Protocol, File transfer, Electronic ail, Domain name system, Peer-to-Peer file sharing, Socket programming, Layering concepts.

Unit 2: Switching in networks: Classification and requirements of switches, a generic switch,

Circuit Switching, Time-division switching, Space-division switching, Crossbar switch and evaluation of blocking probability, 2-stage, 3-stage and n-stage networks, Packet switching, Blocking in packet switches, Three generations of packet switches, switch fabric, Buffering, Multicasting, Statistical

Unit 3: Multiplexing. Transport layer: Connectionless transport, User Datagram Protocol,

Connectionoriented transport – Transmission Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call. Unit 4: Transport layer: Connectionless transport, User Datagram Protocol, Connection-oriented

transport, Transmission Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call. Unit 5: Congestion Control and Resource Allocation: Issues in Resource Allocation, Queuing

Disciplines, TCP congestion Control, Congestion Avoidance Mechanisms and Quality of Service.

Unit 6: Network layer: Virtual circuit and Datagram networks, Router, Internet Protocol, Routing

algorithms, Broadcast and Multicast routing. Unit 7: Link layer: ALOHA, Multiple access protocols, IEEE 802 standards, Local Area

Networks, addressing, Ethernet, Hubs, Switches. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the concepts of networking thoroughly. Design a network for a particular application. Analyze the performance of the network. Understand various issues at different layers.

Text Reference books:

1. J.F. Kurose and K. W. Ross, “Computer Networking – A top down approach featuring the Internet”, Pearson Education, 5th Edition

2. L. Peterson and B. Davie, “Computer Networks – A Systems Approach” Elsevier Morgan Kaufmann Publisher, 5th Edition.

3. T. Viswanathan, “Telecommunication Switching System and Networks”, Prentice Hall 4. S. Keshav, “An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking” , Pearson Education 5. B. A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition

123

6. Andrew Tanenbaum, “Computer networks”, Prentice Hall 7. D. Comer, “Computer Networks and Internet/TCP-IP”, Prentice Hall 8. William Stallings, “Data and computer communications”, Prentice Hall

OE702 Banking System and Taxation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Objective: To impart the knowledge about the banks and its role, financial inclusion and contemporary issues in banking, It will also provide an overview of taxation, it will to acquaint the participant with the implications of tax structure and corporate tax planning in operational as well as strategic terms. Unit I : Banking industry: Meaning, evolution, types, role, and overview ; Priority sector

lending: targets, issues problems; Financial inclusion: Agriculture/SMEs/SHGs/SSI .; new products and services, credit cards/Home loans/Personal loans ancillary Services, Remittances safe deposit lockers

Unit II: Contemporary issues in banking: NPA, E banking, universal banking, Electronic products, Electronic payment system, Electronic fund transfer system: RTGS,NEFT, SWIFT etc. current trends and global developments.

Unit-III: Basic Concepts of Income Tax; Computation of Income under Different Heads of Income, Set off and Carry forward of Losses, Deductions and Exemptions; Additional Tax on Undistributed Profits.

Unit-IV: Meaning and Scope of Tax Planning, Difference between Tax planning Tax Evasion and Tax Avoidance. Filling of Returns and Assessments, Penalities and Porsecutions, Appeals and Revisions.

Course Outcome:

The course creates understanding among the students regarding the concept of taxation, different heads of income.

The students will understand the difference between tax evasion and avoidance. The students will be able to have a clear view of current scenario of banking Industry. The beneficiaries will have a view about contemporary issues in banking.

Reference Books: 1. Principles and practices of banking by Indian institute if Banking and finance, Macmillan Publication 2. Singhania, V K. and Singhania, Monica, Students‟ Guide to Income Tax, Taxmann. 3. Shekhar, K.C. and Shekhar, Lekshmy, Banking Theories and practices, Vikas Publication 4. Money, Banking and international Trade, KPM Sundram, Sultan Chand and sons 5. Financial Intermediation, Indian Institute of Banking and Finance 6. Insurance and Banking , Gupta P.K. Himalaya Publications 7. Iyengar, A C. Sampat, Law of Income Tax, Bharat House. 8. Ahuja, G & Gupta, Ravi, Simplified Approach to Corporate Tax Planning and Management, Bharat Law House private limited

124

OE703 Operational Research L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about Different types of o.r. models. To introduce the students about Linear Programming problem-Formulation and

graphical solution. To introduce the students about Dual simplex method. Sensitivity analysis. To introduce the students about Network minimisation, shortest route problem,

Maximum flow problem and project of scheduling by PERT, CPM. To introduce the students about Critical path calculations. To introduce the students about Dynamic Programmingand examples of D.P.models.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Different types of o.r. models, their construction and general methods of solution.

Linear Programming problem-Formulation and graphical solution. The standard form of the L.P.model. The simplex method, The dual of L.P.P, Primal-dual relationship, Dual simplex method, Sensitivity analysis, Transportation problem, its solution and applications, The assignment model, Travelling salesman problem.

Unit 2: Network minimization, Shortest route problem, Maximum flow problem, Project of

scheduling by PERT, CPM. Unit 3: Critical path calculations, Construction of the time chart and resource leveling, Integer

programming-examples, method of and algorithms, cutting plane algorithm only. Unit 4: Dynamic Programming, Examples of D.P.models, Bellman„s Principle of optimality

and method of recursive optimization, simple problems only involving upto one constraint.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand about Different types of o.r. models, LP model and Dual Simplex Method Understand about Network minimization, shortest route problem, Maximum flow

problem and project of scheduling by PERT, CPM Understand about Critical path calculations Understand about Dynamic Programmingand examples of D.P.models

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Taha H.A Operations Research-An Introduction, PHI 2. Wanger H.M, Principles of Operation Research, PHI

125

OE704 Human Resource Management L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective: The primary concern of this course is to sensitize students to the various facts of managing people and to create an understanding of the various policies and practices of human resource management. Detailed contents: Unit 1: Human Resource Management: concept, evolution and scope; Strategic objectives of

HR management; Roles, responsibilities and competencies of HR manager; Challenges to HR professionals;Human Resource Planning & Forecasting: significance and process; Human Resource Information System.

Unit 2: Sourcing and Recruitment; Selection: process, Placement; Induction and

Socialization.Job Analysis: job Description and job Specification; Job Design: approaches and methods;Job Evaluation-concept &methods;Performance Management System: appraisal and counselling.

Unit 3: Training process, training need analysis (TNA): training methods and techniques;

Designing Training programs; Training evaluation; Career planning and Development; Potential Appraisal and Succession planning; Employee Compensation: basic concepts & determinants; New trends in compensation management.

Unit 4: Industrial Relations and Grievance Handling: Employee welfare; Dispute

Resolution; International Human Resource Management; Contemporary Issues in HRM: knowledge Management, HR Audit &Accounting, HR in virtual organizations, ethics &corporate social responsibility. Course Outcome: a. The course will help to understand the basics of HRM with roles and responsibilities of a HR manager. b. This course enables the students to meet HR challenges in present scenario c. It will facilitate them in employing, maintaining and promoting a motivated force in an organization. d. Students will be aware about contemporary issues of human resource management.

TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS

1. K. Aswathapa, “Human resource Management: Text and cases”, 6th edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

2. Uday Kumar Haldar & Juthika Sarkar, “Human resource Management”, New Delhi, Oxford University Press.

3. De Cenvo, Da & Robbins S.P., “Fundamentals of Human Resource Management”, 9th edition, New York, John Wiley & Sons.

4. Gary Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, 11th edition New Delhi: Pearson Prentice Hall.

5. TanujaAgarwala, “Strategic Human resource Management”, Oxford University Press

126

OE705 Mobile Communication and Networks L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce working principles of mobile communication system. To introduce various technologies of mobile communication. To introduce various analysis techniques of communication systems. To introduce various multiple access techniques for mobile communication.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Cellular concepts: Cell structure, frequency reuse, cell splitting, channel assignment,

handoff, interference, capacity, power control, Wireless Standards, Overview of 2G and 3G cellular standards.

Unit 2: Signal propagation: Propagation mechanism, reflection, refraction, diffraction and

scattering, large scale signal propagation and lognormal shadowing. Fading channels-Multipath and small scale fading, Doppler shift, statistical multipath channel models, narrowband and wideband fading models, power delay profile, average and rms delay spread, coherence bandwidth and coherence time, flat and frequency selective fading, slow and fast fading, average fade duration and level crossing rate.

Unit 3: Capacity of flat and frequency selective channels. Antennas: Antennas for mobile

terminal monopole antennas, PIFA, base station antennas and arrays. Unit 4: Multiple access schemes: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and SDMA, Modulation schemes,

BPSK, QPSK and variants, QAM, MSK and GMSK, multicarrier modulation, OFDM. Unit 5: Receiver structure: Diversity receivers, selection and MRC receivers, RAKE receiver,

equalization, linear-ZFE and adaptive, DFE, Transmit diversity-Altamonte scheme. Unit 6: MIMO and space time signal processing, spatial multiplexing, diversity/multiplexing

tradeoff, Performance measures, Outage, average snr, average symbol/bit error rate. System examples, GSM, EDGE, GPRS, IS-95, CDMA 2000 and WCDMA.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the working principles of the mobile communication systems. Understand the relation between the user features and underlying technology. Analyze mobile communication systems for improved performance. Understand various multiple access techniques.

Text/Reference Books:

1. WCY Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Systems, McGraw Hill, 1990. 2. WCY Lee, Mobile Communications Design Fundamentals, Prentice Hall, 1993. 3. Raymond Steele, Mobile Radio Communications, IEEE Press, New York, 1992. 4. AJ Viterbi, CDMA: Principles of Spread Spectrum Communications, Addison Wesley,

1995. 5. VK Garg &JE Wilkes, Wireless & Personal Communication Systems, Prentice Hall, 1996.

127

OE706 Wireless Sensor Networks L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce designing of wireless sensor network applications. To introduce various research areas in wireless sensor networks. To introduce various MAC protocol used in WSN. To teach students how to explore new protocols for WSN.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Sensor Networks, unique constraints and challenges, Advantage of Sensor

Networks, Applications of Sensor Networks, Types of wireless sensor networks. Unit 2: Mobile Ad-hoc Networks (MANETs) and Wireless Sensor Networks, Enabling

technologies for Wireless Sensor Networks. Issues and challenges in wireless sensor networks.

Unit 3: Routing protocols, MAC protocols: Classification of MAC Protocols, S-MAC Protocol, B-

MAC protocol, IEEE 802.15.4 standard and ZigBee. Unit 4: Dissemination protocol for large sensor network, Data dissemination, data gathering, and

data fusion; Quality of a sensor network; Real-time traffic support and security protocols. Unit 5: Design Principles for WSNs, Gateway Concepts Need for gateway, WSN to Internet

Communication, and Internet to WSN Communication. Unit 6: Single-node architecture, Hardware components & design constraints, Unit 7: Operating systems and execution environments, introduction to TinyOS and nesC. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Design wireless sensor networks for a given application Understand emerging research areas in the field of sensor networks Understand MAC protocols used for different communication standards used in WSN Explore new protocols for WSN

Text/Reference Books:

1. Waltenegus Dargie , Christian Poellabauer, “Fundamentals Of Wireless Sensor Networks Theory And Practice”, By John Wiley & Sons Publications ,2011

2. Sabrie Soloman, “Sensors Handbook" by McGraw Hill publication. 2009 3. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks”, Elsevier Publications,2004 4. Kazem Sohrby, Daniel Minoli, “Wireless Sensor Networks”: Technology, Protocols and

Applications, Wiley-Inter science 5. Philip Levis, And David Gay "TinyOS Programming” by Cambridge University Press 2009

128

OE707 Industrial Safety L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective: i. This course will provide effective use of chemical industries utilities. ii. This course also emphasis on the knowledge of loss prevention, personal safety,

industrial safety, hazard analysis, toxicology and personal proactive equipments. Unit-I: Industrial safety: Accident, causes, types, results and control, mechanical and electrical

hazards, types, causes and preventive steps/procedure, describe salient points of factories act 1948 for health and safety, wash rooms, drinking water layouts, light, cleanliness, fire, guarding, pressure vessels, etc, Safety color codes. Fire prevention and firefighting, equipment and methods.

Unit-II: Fundamentals of maintenance engineering: Definition and aim of maintenance

engineering, Primary and secondary functions and responsibility of maintenance department, Types of maintenance, Types and applications of tools used for maintenance, Maintenance cost & its relation with replacement economy, Service life of equipment.

Unit-III: Wear and Corrosion and their prevention: Wear- types, causes, effects, wear

reduction methods, lubricants-types and applications, Lubrication methods, general sketch, working and applications, i. Screw down grease cup, ii. Pressure grease gun, iii. Splash lubrication, iv. Gravity lubrication, v. Wick feed lubrication vi. Side feed lubrication, vii. Ring lubrication, Definition, principle and factors affecting the corrosion. Types of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods.

Unit-IV: Fault tracing: Fault tracing-concept and importance, decision treeconcept, need and

applications, sequence of fault finding activities, show as decision tree, draw decision tree for problems in machine tools, hydraulic, pneumatic,automotive, thermal and electrical equipment‟s like, I. Any one machine tool, ii. Pump iii. Air compressor, iv. Internal combustion engine, v. Boiler, vi. Electrical motors, Types of faults in machine tools and their general causes.

Unit-V: Periodic and preventive maintenance: Periodic inspection-concept and need,

degreasing, cleaning and repairing schemes, overhauling of mechanical components, overhauling of electrical motor, common troubles and remedies of electric motor, repair complexities and its use, definition, need, steps and advantages of preventive maintenance. Steps/procedure for periodic and preventive maintenance of: I. Machine tools, ii. Pumps, iii. Air compressors, iv. Diesel generating (DG) sets, Program and schedule of preventive maintenance of mechanical and electrical equipment, advantages of preventive maintenance. Repair cycle concept and importance.

Course Outcomes:- i. Understanding of Safety principles. ii. Ability to do Hazard analysis. iii. Ability to do event tree and fault tree analysis.

Reference: 1. Maintenance Engineering Handbook, Higgins & Morrow, Da Information Services. 2. Maintenance Engineering, H. P. Garg, S. Chand and Company. 3. Pump-hydraulic Compressors, Audels, Mcgrew Hill Publication. 4. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Winterkorn, Hans, Chapman & Hall London.

129

OE708 Cyber Laws and Security L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Unit 1: History of Information Systems and its Importance, basics, Changing Nature of

Information Systems, Need of Distributed Information Systems, Role of Internet and Web Services, Information System Threats and attacks, Classification of Threats and Assessing Damages Security in Mobile and Wireless Computing- Security Challenges in Mobile Devices, authentication Service Security, Security Implication for organizations, Laptops Security Basic Principles of Information Security, Confidentiality, Integrity Availability and other terms in Information Security, Information Classification and their Roles.

Unit 2: Security Threats to E Commerce, Virtual Organization, Business Transactions on Web,

E Governance and EDI, Concepts in Electronics payment systems, E Cash, Credit/Debit Cards. Physical Security- Needs, Disaster and Controls, Basic Tenets of Physical Security and Physical Entry Controls, Access Control- Biometrics, Factors in Biometrics Systems, Benefits, Criteria for selection of biometrics, Design Issues in Biometric Systems, Interoperability Issues, Economic and Social Aspects, Legal Challenges.

Unit 3: Model of Cryptographic Systems, Issues in Documents Security, System of Keys,

Public Key Cryptography, Digital Signature, Requirement of Digital Signature System, Finger Prints, Firewalls, Design and Implementation Issues, Policies Network Security- Basic Concepts, Dimensions, Perimeter for Network Protection, Network Attacks, Need of Intrusion Monitoring and Detection, Intrusion Detection Virtual Private Networks- Need, Use of Tunneling with VPN, Authentication Mechanisms, Types of VPNs and their Usage, Security Concerns in VPN.

Unit 4: Security metrics- Classification and their benefits Information Security & Law, IPR,

Patent Law, Copyright Law, Legal Issues in Data mIning Security, Building Security into Software Life Cycle Ethics- Ethical Issues, Issues in Data and Software Privacy Cyber Crime Types & overview of Cyber Crimes.

References: 1. Godbole,― Information Systems Security‖, Willey 2. Merkov, Breithaupt, ― Information Security‖, Pearson Education 3. Yadav, ―Foundations of Information Technology‖, New Age, Delhi 4. Schou, Shoemaker, ― Information Assurance for the Enterprise‖, Tata McGraw Hill

Sood,―Cyber Laws Simplified‖, Mc Graw Hill 5. Furnell, ―Computer Insecurity‖, Springer 7. IT Act 2000

130

HSMC01 Effective Technical Communication

L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Unit 1: Module 1: Information Design and Development- Different kinds of technical documents, Information development life cycle, Organization structures, factors affecting information and document design, Strategies for organization, Information design and writing for print and for online media.

Unit 2: Module 2: Technical Writing, Grammar and Editing, Technical writing process, forms

of discourse, Writing drafts and revising, Collaborative writing, creating indexes, technical writing style and language. Basics of grammar, study of advanced grammar, editing strategies to achieve appropriate technical style. Introduction to advanced technical communication, Usability, Hunan factors, Managing technical communication projects, time estimation, Single sourcing, Localization.

Unit 3: Module 3: Self Development and Assessment: Self assessment, Awareness, Perception

and Attitudes, Values and belief, Personal goal setting, career planning, Self-esteem, Managing Time, Personal memory, Rapid reading, Taking notes, Complex problem solving, Creativity

Unit 4: Module 4: Communication and Technical Writing- Public speaking, Group discussion,

Oral; presentation, Interviews, Graphic presentation, Presentation aids, Personality Development. Writing reports, project proposals, brochures, newsletters, technical articles, manuals, official notes, business letters, memos, progress reports, minutes of meetings, event report.

Unit 5: Module 5: Ethics- Business ethics, Etiquettes in social and office settings, Email

etiquettes, Telephone Etiquettes, Engineering ethics, Managing time, Role and responsibility of engineer, Work culture in jobs, Personal memory, Rapid reading, Taking notes, Complex problem solving, Creativity.

Text/Reference Books:

1. David F. Beer and David McMurrey, Guide to writing as an Engineer, John Willey. New York, 2004.

2. Diane Hacker, Pocket Style Manual, Bedford Publication, New York, 2003. (ISBN 0312406843).

3. Shiv Khera, You Can Win, Macmillan Books, New York, 2003. 4. Raman Sharma, Technical Communications, Oxford Publication, London, 2004. 5. Dale Jungk, Applied Writing for Technicians, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004. (ISBN:

07828357-4). 6. Sharma, R. and Mohan, K. Business Correspondence and Report Writing, TMH New

Delhi 2002. 7. Xebec, Presentation Book, TMH New Delhi, 2000. (ISBN 0402213).

131

Implementation of Credit Transfer/Mobility Policy of online courses

Reference: Gazette of India (Extraordinary) Part-III, Section-4 No. 295, UGC (Credit Framework for Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM) Regulation, 2016, dated 19/07/2016.

With reference to 12th Academic Council Meeting dated 03/05/2017 (Agenda Item No. AC/11/12), wherein MOOCs were adopted in the CBCS scheme, In continuation to that, following modalities are proposed to introduce the credit transfer policy in academic curriculum for the Massive Open Online Courses (MOOC‟s) offered through SWAYAM (Study Webs of Active-Learning for Young Aspiring Minds) Portal.

A. General Guidelines 1. The SWAYAM shall notify in June and November every year, the list of the online

learning Courses going to be offered in the forthcoming Semester on its website https://swayam.gov.in.

2. All the UTDs/Affiliated Colleges shall, within 4 weeks from the date of notification by SWAYAM, consider through their Chairperson/Principal the online learning courses being offered through the SWAYAM platform; and keeping in view their academic requirements, decide upon the courses which it shall permit for credit transfer and keeping in view the following points:

a) There is non-availability of suitable teaching staff for running a course in the

Department. b) The facilities for offering the elective papers (courses), sought for by the

students are not on offer/scheme in the Institution, but are available on the SWAYAM platform.

c) The courses offered on SWAYAM would supplement the teaching-learning process in the Institution.

d) Online courses through SWAYAM should not be more than 20% of total courses offered in a particular semester of a programme.

3. The courses offered in a particular semester will be compiled by Digital India Cell as decided and forwarded by concerned UTDs and affiliated colleges in the prescribed format to digitalindia.ymca@gmail.com and compiled set will be put up in Academic Council for approval.

4. Student can opt for 12-16 weeks course equivalent to 3-6 credits under mentorship of faculty (MHRD MOOC‟s guidelines 11.1(J) issued by the MHRD vide its orders dated 11/03/2016).

Annexure-A

Approved in 17th Academic Council Dated 11.06.2019

132

5. Every student being offered a particular paper (course) would be required to register for the MOOCs for that course/paper on SWAYAM through University‟s/Affiliated College‟s SWAYAM-NPTEL Local Chapter.

6. The UTD/College may designate a faculty member as course coordinator/mentor to guide the students (at least 20 students) throughout the course with 2 hours per week contribution and with mentor addition on the Local Chapter. The mentor Chairperson/Principal will ensure the provision of facilities for smooth running of the course viz. Internet facility and proper venue in the department/college.

7. Digital India Cell of the University will be the Nodal point for keeping track of MOOCs enrolments in the University and the concerned chairpersons/principals are expected to aware their students/faculty about the online courses.

8. Importance of online learning and credit transfer policy must be shared with the students at entry level by the concerned department/college. Same may be incorporated during induction program for newly admitted students.

9. The departmental/college MOOC coordinators appointed by chairpersons of concerned departments/Principals of affiliated colleges will be responsible for identification of relevant MOOCs in the UTDs/Colleges and smooth conduction during the course.

B. Credit Transfer/Mobility of MOOCs

1. The parent Institution (offering the Course) shall give the equivalent credit weightage to the students for the credits earned through online learning courses through SWAYAM platform in the credit plan of the program.

2. Following pattern will be followed for distribution of credits and will be applicable to all students from Jan 2018 onwards:

Program Duration Minimum Credits to be

earned* B.Tech Semester I to VIII 3 M.Tech/MBA/M.Sc./MA Semester I to IV 3 BBA/BCA/B.Sc./BA Semester I to VI 3

*All students of UTDs/Affiliated colleges of all courses have to mandatorily earn minimum prescribed credits. Note: From session 2019-20 onwards, for B.Tech program, a student has to earn at least 12 credits during the duration of the Degree subject to the passing of at least one MOOC course (carrying minimum 3 credits per year).

3. A student will be eligible to get Under-Graduate/Post-Graduate degree

(B.Tech/M.Tech) with Honours if he/she completes additional credits through MOOC‟s. (AICTE Model Curriculum, Chapter1(B)). Following pattern will be followed for earning additional credits for the award of Honours degree:

133

Program Duration Credits to be

earned* Minimum CGPA

B.Tech Semester I to VIII 12 8.0 M.Tech Semester I to IV 6 8.0 *Inclusive of Minimum credits to be earned mentioned in clause B(2) above.

4. The earned credits shall be accepted and transferred to the total credits of the

concerned students by the University for Completion of his/her degree. Credits earned through MOOCs will be incorporated in the mark sheet issued to the student by Controller of Examination.

5. Credits for MOOC‟s will be verified by the concerned department/college and will be forwarded to Controller of Examination for further processing.

6. The courses where model curriculum of AICTE is not applicable, pattern laid down as in B(2) will be followed.

NOTE: These guidelines will be applicable to all Affiliating institutions under University along

with all UTDs. Affiliating colleges will establish their own Local Chapter on SWAYAM and follow the same process.

1. For further clarifications, Notifications “Credit Framework for Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM” (UGC Regulations dated 19/07/2016) and “MHRD MOOC‟s guidelines” (MHRD guidelines dated 11/03/2016) may be referred.

SCHEME & SYLLABUS

for

M.TECH. COURSE

in

Electronics & Communication Engineering

(w.e.f. Session 2018-2019)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

J.C. BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, YMCA,

FARIDABAD

J.C.BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY,

YMCA, FARIDABAD

VISION

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, YMCA, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA

University of Science and Technology) aspires to be a nationally and internationally

acclaimed leader in technical and higher education in all spheres which transforms

the life of students through integration of teaching, research and character building.

MISSION

To contribute to the development of science and technology by synthesizing

teaching, research and creative activities.

To provide an enviable research environment and state-of-the-art technological

exposure to its scholars.

To develop human potential to its fullest extent and make them emerge as world

class leaders in their professions and enthuse them towards their social

responsibilities.

Department of Electronics Engineering

VISION

To be a Centre of Excellence for producing high quality engineers and scientists

capable of providing sustainable solutions to complex problems and promoting cost

effective indigenous technology in the area of Electronics, Communication & Control

Engineering for Industry, Research Organizations, Academia and all sections of society.

MISSION

To frame a well-balanced curriculum with an emphasis on basic theoretical knowledge

as well the requirements of the industry.

To motivate students to develop innovative solutions to the existing problems for

betterment of the society.

Collaboration with the industry, research establishments and other academic

institutions to bolster the research and development activities.

To provide infrastructure and financial support for culmination of novel ideas into

useful prototypes.

To promote research in emerging and interdisciplinary areas and act as a facilitator for

knowledge generation and dissemination through Research, Institute - Industry and

Institute-Institute interaction.

About Electronics Engineering Department

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA University of

Science & Technology, Faridabad) established in 2009, formerly known as YMCA Institute of

Engineering, Faridabad, established in year 1969 as a Joint Venture of Govt. of Haryana and

National Council of YMCA of India with active assistance from overseas agencies of West

Germany to produce highly practical oriented personnel in specialized field of engineering

to meet specific technical manpower requirement of industries. Electronics Engineering

Department started in 1969 and has been conducting B.Tech. Courses in Electronics

Instrumentation and Control and Electronics and Communication Engineering of 4-Years

duration since 1997. Students are admitted through centralized counseling nominated by

state govt. in 1st Year and 2nd year through lateral entry entrance test. Besides under

graduate degree courses, it is also running M.Tech. Courses in VLSI, Instrumentation and

Electronics & Communication. Department of Electronics Engineering is also running Ph.D.

Programme. All courses are duly approved by AICTE/ UGC. The Electronics Engineering

Department has been well known for its track record of employment of the pass out

students since its inception.

The Department has good infrastructure consisting of 11 laboratories, 10 Lecture Halls and

1 Conference Room beside 6 workshops. It has excellent faculty with 2 Professors, 2

Associate Professors and 21 Assistant Professors. At present, 6 faculty members are PhD in

various specializations. The various syllabi of UG/PG courses have been prepared with

active participation from Industry. The Department is organizing number of expert lectures

from industry experts for students in every semester. During the project/dissertation work

emphasis has been given on skill enhancement of students. Choice based system allows

students to study the subjects of his/her choice from a number of elective courses /audit

courses.

Program Educational Objectives (PEO): Students of the Master of Technology programs in Electronics & Communication

Engineering will demonstrate

1. Employability in the diversified sectors of the core industry, public sector or

multinational corporations in the domain of semiconductor, microelectronics,

wireless communication, optical and satellite communication, networking etc.

and/or pursue higher education in technologies related to communication and

networking platforms at institutes of high repute.

2. To provide technical skills in software and hardware tools related to the design and

implementation of Communication and Embedded Systems

3. To inculcate research culture in the learners of the program with abilities to publish

at national/international level and develop prototype technologies in the related

domain.

4. Attitude of lifelong learning and skills of effective inter-person communication

resulting in leading diverse teams, with ethical and social behavior.

Program Outcomes (PO):

1. Ability to acquire and apply in-depth knowledge in the area of Electronics and

Communication Engineering and contribute to the state-of-art.

2. An ability to independently carry out research /investigation and development work to

solve practical problems

3. An ability to write and present a substantial technical report/document

4. An Ability to engage in life-long learning and learning through mistakes with / without

external feedback.

5. An ability to understand the role of a leader, leadership principles and attitude conducive

to effective professional practice of Electronics and Communication Engineering

6. An ability to understand the impact of research and responsibility in order to contribute

to the society.

GRADING SCHEME

Marks % Grade Grade points Category

90-100 O 10 Outstanding 80 ≤ marks <90 A+ 9 Excellent 70 ≤ marks < 80 A 8 Very good 60 ≤ marks < 70 B+ 7 Good 50 ≤ marks < 60 B 6 Above average 45 ≤ marks < 50 C 5 Average 40 ≤ marks < 45 P 4 Pass <40 F 0 Fail

Ab 0 Absent Percentage calculation= CGPA * 9.5

M. TECH. (Electronics & Communication Engineering)

Total Credits 68

Total Theory Subjects 11+2 Audits

Total Labs (including Projects) 5

Total Dissertation 2

SEMESTER WISE SUMMARY OF THE PROGRAMME: M.TECH. (ECE)

S.No. Semester No. of Contact Hours Marks Credits

1 I 24 700 18

2 II 26 650 18

3 III 26 500 16

4 IV 32 500 16

Total 108 2350 68*

NOTE:

*It is mandatory to pass the MOOC course(s) by all the students as per

implementation of credit transfer/ mobility policy of on line courses of the

University-as mentioned in Annexure-A at the end of the syllabus.

Semester I M. Tech. (Electronics & Communication Engineering)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P

1 PCC MEC101 Advanced Communication Networks

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC MEC102 Wireless and Mobile Communication

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

3 PEC Program Specific Elective-I 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 PEC Program Specific Elective-

II 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

5 PCC RMI101 Research Methodology and IPR

2 0 0 2 25 75 100

6 AUD Audit course 1 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 7 PCC MEC151 Advanced Communication

Networks Lab 0 0 4 2 15 35 50

8 PCC MEC152 Wireless and Mobile Communication Lab

0 0 4 2 15 35 50

Total Credits 18 180 520 700

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-I MECE101 Wireless Sensor Networks MECE102 Optical Communication and Network System MECE103 Statistical Information Processing

Program Elective-II

MECE104 Cognitive Radio MECE105 RF and Microwave Circuit Design MECE106 DSP Architecture MECE107 Advanced Microprocessor and

Microcontroller

AUD 1

AUD01A English for Research Paper Writing AUD02A Disaster Management AUD03A Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD04A Value Education AUD05A Constitution of India AUD06A Pedagogy Studies AUD07A Stress Management by Yoga AUD08A Personality Development through Life Enlightenment Skills. AUD09A Swami Vivekananda‟s thoughts

Semester II

M. Tech. (Electronics & Communication Engineering) Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P

1 PCC MEC201 Antennas and Radiating Systems

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC MEC202 Advanced Digital Signal Processing

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

3 PEC Program Specific Elective-III

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

4 PEC Program Specific Elective-IV

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

5 AUD Audit course 2 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 6 PCC MEC251 Antennas and Radiating

Systems Lab 0 0 4 2 15 35 50

7 PCC MEC252 Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab

0 0 4 2 15 35 50

8 PCC MEC253 Minor Project 0 0 4 2 15 35 50 Total Credits 18 170 480 650

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-III MECE201 Satellite Communication MECE202 Internet of Things MECE203 Voice and data networks MECE204 Digital Image Processing

Program Elective-IV

MECE205 Markov Chain and Queuing System MECE206 MIMO System MECE207 Programmable Networks – SDN, NFV MECE208 Advanced Digital Communication

AUD 2 (Audit 2 should be different

from audit 1)

AUD01A English for Research Paper Writing AUD02A Disaster Management AUD03A Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD04A Value Education AUD05A Constitution of India AUD06A Pedagogy Studies AUD07A Stress Management by Yoga AUD08A Personality Development through Life

Enlightenment Skills. AUD09A Swami Vivekananda‟s thoughts

Semester III

M. Tech. (Electronics & Communication Engineering) Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P

1 PEC Program Specific Elective-V

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 OEC Open Elective 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC MEC351 Dissertation Phase – I 0 0 20 10 100 200 300 Total Credits 16 150 350 500

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-V

MECE301 High Performance Networks MECE302 Pattern Recognition and Machine

Learning MECE303 Remote Sensing MECE304 Electronic System Design

Open Elective

MECO-301 Business Analytics MECO-302 Industrial Safety MECO-303 Operations Research MECO-304 Cost Management of Engineering Projects MECO-305 Composite Materials MECO-306 Waste to Energy

Semester IV M. Tech. (Electronics & Communication Engineering)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P

1 PCC MEC401 Dissertation Phase – II 0 0 32 16 200 300 500 Total Credits 16 200 300 500

MEC-101 Advanced Communication Network L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the advanced concepts in Communication Networking. To introduce about the designing of protocols for Communication Networks. To introduce the mechanisms in Quality of Service in networking. To introduce about Network Design

Syllabus Unit 1: Overview of Internet-Concepts, challenges and history, Overview of –ATM, TCP/IP

Congestion and Flow Control in Internet-Throughput analysis of TCP congestion control. TCP for high bandwidth delay networks. Fairness issues in TCP.

Unit 2: Real Time Communications over Internet, Adaptive applications. Latency and

throughput issues. Integrated Services Model (intServ). Resource reservation in Internet. RSVP, Characterization of Traffic by Linearly Bounded Arrival Processes (LBAP). Leaky bucket algorithm and its properties.

Unit 3: Packet Scheduling Algorithms-requirements and choices, Scheduling guaranteed

service connections, GPS, WFQ and Rate proportional algorithms, High speed scheduler design, Theory of Latency Rate servers and delay bounds in packet switched networks for LBAP traffic.; Active Queue Management, RED, WRED and Virtual clock, Control theoretic analysis of active queue management.

Unit 4: IP address lookup-challenges, Packet classification algorithms and Flow

Identification- Grid of Tries, Cross producting and controlled prefix expansion algorithms.

Unit 5: Admission control in Internet. Concept of Effective bandwidth. Measurement based

admission control, Differentiated Services in Internet (DiffServ), DiffServ architecture and framework.

Unit 6 : IPV4, IPV6, IP tunnelling, IPswitching and MPLS, Overview of IP over ATM and

its evolution to IP switching, MPLS architecture and framework, MPLS Protocols, Traffic engineering issues in MPLS.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand advanced concepts in Communication Networking. Design and develop protocols for Communication Networks. Understand the mechanisms in Quality of Service in networking. Optimise the Network Design

References:

1. Jean Wairand and Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communications Networks”, 2nd edition, 2000.

2. Jean Le Boudec and Patrick Thiran, “Network Calculus A Theory of Deterministic Queueing Systems for the Internet”, Springer Veriag, 2001.

3. Zhang Wang, “Internet QoS”, Morgan Kaufman, 2001. 4. Anurag Kumar, D. Manjunath and Joy Kuri, “Communication Networking: An

Analytical Approach” , Morgan Kaufman Publishers, 2004. 5. George Kesidis, “ATM Network Performance”, Kluwer Academic, Research Papers,

2005

MEC-102 Wireless and Mobile Communication L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To study the concepts fundaments of cellular system design and evolution of mobile communication generations.

To study the concept of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA. To study the concept of large sale propagation small scale propagation, fading &

multipath propagation. To study the concept of Equalization & diversity. To study the concept of 4G & 5G.

Syllabus

Unit 1:Cellular Communication Fundamentals, Cellular system design, Frequency reuse, cell

splitting, handover concepts, Co channel and adjacent channel interference, interference reduction techniques and methods to improve cell coverage, Frequency management and channelassignment.GSM architecture and interfaces, GSM architecture details, GSM subsystems, GSML ogical Channels, Data Encryption in GSM, Mobility Management, Call Flows in GSM.2.5 G Standards: High speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS),2.75 G Standards: EDGE,

Unit 2: Spectral efficiency analysis based on calculations for Multiple access technologies,

TDMA, FDMA and CDMA, Comparison of these technologies based on their signal separation techniques, advantages, disadvantages and application areas, Wireless network planning (Link budget and power spectrum calculations)

Unit 3: Mobile Radio Propagation: Large Scale Path Loss, Free Space Propagation Model,

Reflection, Ground Reflection (Two-Ray) Model, Diffraction, Scattering, Practical Link Budget Design using Path Loss Models, Outdoor Propagation Models, Indoor Propagation Models, Signal Penetration into Buildings. Small Scale Fading and Multipath Propagation, Impulse Response Model, Multipath Measurements, Parameters of Multipath channels, Types of Small Scale Fading: Time Delay Spread; Flat, Frequency selective, Doppler Spread; Fast and Slow fading.

Unit 4:Equalization, Diversity, Equalizers in a communications receiver, Algorithms for

adaptive equalization, diversity techniques, space, polarization, frequency diversity, Interleaving.

Unit 5:Code Division Multiple Access, Introduction to CDMA technology, IS 95 system

Architecture, Air Interface, Physical and logical channels of IS 95, Forward Link and Reverse link operation, Physical and Logical channels of IS 95 CDMA, IS 95 CDMA Call Processing, soft Handoff, Evolution of IS 95 (CDMA One) to CDMA 2000, CDMA 2000 layering structure and channels.

Unit 6: Higher Generation Cellular Standards:3G Standards: evolved EDGE, enhancements in 4G standard, Architecture and representative protocols, call flow for LTE, VoLTE, UMTS, introduction to 5G

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Design appropriate mobile communication systems. Apply frequency-reuse concept in mobile communications, and to analyze its effects

on interference, system capacity, handoff techniques Distinguish various multiple-access techniques for mobile communications e.g.

FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, and their advantages and disadvantages. Analyze path loss and interference for wireless telephony and their influences on a

mobile communication system‟s performance. Analyze and design CDMA system functioning with knowledge of forward and

reverse channel details, advantages and disadvantages of using the technology Understanding upcoming technologies like 3G, 4G etc.

References:

1. V.K.Garg, J.E.Wilkes, “Principle and Application of GSM”, Pearson Education, 5th edition, 2008.

2. V.K.Garg, “IS-95 CDMA & CDMA 2000”, Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2009. 3. T.S.Rappaport, “Wireless Communications Principles and Practice”, 2nd edition,

PHI,2002. 4. William C.Y.Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Analog and Digital

Systems”, 2nd edition, TMH, 1995. 5. Asha Mehrotra, “A GSM system Engineering” Artech House Publishers Bosten,

London,1997.

Program Elective –I MECE-101 Wireless Sensor Networks L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To study the concept of different wireless networks. To introduce basic tools used for simulation of wireless network. To introduce basic concept of security in WSM. To study the hardware of various wireless networks with brief over new of protocols

for sensor networks.

Syllabus Unit 1: Introduction and overview of sensor network architecture and its applications, sensor

network comparison with Ad Hoc Networks, Sensor node architecture with hardware and software details.

Unit 2: Hardware, Examples like mica2, micaZ, telosB, cricket, Imote2, tmote, btnode, and

Sun SPOT, Software (Operating Systems): tinyOS, MANTIS, Contiki, and RetOS. Unit 3:Programming tools, C, nesC. Performance comparison of wireless sensor networks

simulation and experimental platforms like open source (ns-2) and commercial (QualNet, Opnet)

Unit 4:Overview of sensor network protocols (details of atleast 2 important protocol per

layer), Physical, MAC and routing/ Network layer protocols, node discovery protocols, multi hop and cluster based protocols, Fundamentals of 802.15.4, Bluetooth, BLE (Bluetooth low energy), UWB.

Unit 5: Data dissemination and processing, differences compared with other database

management systems, data storage; query processing. Unit 6: Specialized features, Energy preservation and efficiency, security challenges; fault

tolerance, Issues related to Localization, connectivity and topology, Sensor deployment mechanisms, coverage issues, sensor Web; sensor Grid, Open issues for future research, and Enabling technologies in wireless sensor network.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Design wireless sensor network system for different applications under consideration. Understand the hardware details of different types of sensors and select right type of

sensor for various applications. Understand radio standards and communication protocols to be used for wireless

sensor network based systems and application. Use operating systems and programming languages for wireless sensor nodes,

performance of wireless sensor networks systems and platforms.

Handle special issues related to sensors like energy conservation and security challenges.

References:

1. H. Karl and A. Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley & Sons, India, 2012.

2. C. S. Raghavendra, K. M. Sivalingam, and T. Znati, Editors, “Wireless Sensor Networks”, Springer Verlag, 1st Indian reprint, 2010.

3. F. Zhao and L. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks: An Information Processing Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1st Indian reprint, 2013.

4. YingshuLi, MyT. Thai, Weili Wu, “Wireless sensor Network and Applications”, Springer series on signals and communication technology, 2008.

MECE-102 Optical Communication and Network System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: 1. To introduce the students about Basic of optical communication system and elements of fibre communication link 2. To introduce the students about basic theory of optics, ray theory and electromagnetic mode theory for optical propagation 3. To introduce the students about transmission characteristics of optical fibres, attenuation and their types, Dispersion and mathematical expressions 4. To introduce the students about basic principles of optical sources like LED and LASER and their characteristics and applications. 5. To introduce the students about basic principles of optical detector, characteristics of p-n photodiode and p-i-n photodiode & APD. 6. To introduce the students about Driver circuits for LED and LASER operation, Optical receiver, Link power budget, Rise time budget. Syllabus: Unit 1 – Overview of Optical Fibre Communication

Electromagnetic Spectrum, Optical spectral bands, Elements of an optical fibre transmission link, Transmission windows, Advantage of optical fibre link over conventional copper system, Applications of fibre optic transmission systems

Unit 2 – Optical Fibre Structure, Waveguide and Fabrications Optical laws and definitions, Total internal reflection, Acceptance angle, Numerical aperture, Ray optics, Optical fibre modes and configurations, Mode theory, Step index and graded index fibres, Single mode and multimode fibres, V number, Modes supported by step index and graded index fibre, Fibre materials, Fibre fabrication techniques

Unit 3 – Signal Degradation in Optical Fibres Attenuation – Absorption losses, Scattering losses, Bending losses, Core and Cladding losses ; Dispersion – Intermodal and Intra modal dispersion, Overall fibre dispersion, Dispersion optimization of single mode fibre, dispersion shifted fibres, dispersion flattened fibres.

Unit 4 – Optical Sources and Coupling Direct and indirect band gap semiconductor, LED structures, Light source materials, Quantum efficiency, LED power, Spectral width, Modulation band width, LED to fibre coupling, LASER diode, Modes and threshold condition, External quantum efficiency, Temperature effects, Light source linearity, LASER to fibre coupling

Unit 5 – Photo Detectors Principle for optical detection, Photocurrent and absorption coefficient, Quantum efficiency, Responsivity, Long wavelength cut-off, P-N photodiode, P-I-N photodiode, Avalanche photodiode (APD), APD noise, Comparison of photodetectors

Unit 6 – Optical Transmitter & Receiver Systems Consideration for optical transmitter circuits, Drive circuits for LED operation, Drive circuits for LASER operation, Point to point link system considerations, Link power

budget and rise time budget, Methods for design of optical link, Optical receiver, Pre-amplifier, Coherent detection, Heterodyne detection, Homodyne detection .

Unit 7 – Optical Networks Basic Networks - SONET/SDH- Broadcast, WDM networks elements, Optical line terminals and connectors, Operation principle of WDM , Performance of WDM, Nonlinear effects on network performance, Optical time division multiplexing, Synchronization.

TEXTBOOKS: 1. John Gowar, "Optical Communication Systems", PHI. 2.Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication", TMH REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Franz JH & Jain VK, "Optical Communication", Narosa Pub Ins 2. John M. Senior, "Optical Communication", PHI COURSE OUTCOMES: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Understand basic of optical communication system and their advantages over conventional communication systems. Application and limitation of optical communication. 2. Understand basic theory of optics and different types of optical fibres. 3. Understand basic transmission characteristics of optical fibre like attenuation and dispersion. 4. Understand basic principal of optical sources like LED and LASER, their characteristics. 5. Understand principal of optical detectors like p-n photodiode p-i-n photodiode and APD. 6. Understand basic driver circuits for LED and LASER operation, concept of Optical receiver, Link power budget and rise time budget calculation,

MECE-103 Statistical Information Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the random variable and random process. To study the random signal modelling. To introduce the statistical decision theory. To study the spectral analysis. To introduce the information theory and source coding and their application.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Review of random variables: Probability Concepts, distribution and density

functions, moments, independent, uncorrelated and orthogonal random variables; Vector-space representation of Random variables, Vector quantization, Tchebaychef inequality theorem, Central Limit theorem, Discrete &Continuous Random Variables. Random process: Expectations, Moments,Ergodicity, Discrete-Time Random Processes Stationary process, autocorrelation and auto covariance functions, Spectral representation of random signals, Properties of power spectral density, Gaussian Process and White noise process.

Unit 2: Random signal modelling: MA(q), AR(p), ARMA(p,q) models, Hidden Markov

Model & its applications ,Linear System with random input , Forward and Backward Predictions, Levinson Durbin Algorithm.

Unit 3: Statistical Decision Theory: Bayes‟ Criterion, Binary Hypothesis Testing, M-ary

Hypothesis Testing, Minimax Criterion, Neyman-Pearson Criterion, Composite Hypothesis Testing. Parameter Estimation Theory: Maximum Likelihood Estimation, Generalized Likelihood Ratio Test ,Some Criteria for Good Estimators, Bayes‟ Estimation Minimum Mean-Square Error Estimate, Minimum, Mean Absolute Value of Error Estimate Maximum A Posteriori Estimate , Multiple Parameter Estimation Best Linear Unbiased Estimator ,Least-Square Estimation Recursive Least-Square Estimator.

Unit 4: Spectral analysis: Estimated autocorrelation function, Periodogram, Averaging the

periodogram (Bartlett Method), Welch modification, Parametric method, AR(p) spectral estimation and detection of Harmonic signals.

Unit 5:Information Theory and Source Coding: Introduction, Uncertainty, Information

and Entropy, Source coding theorem, Huffman, Shanon Fano, Arithmetic , Adaptive coding , RLE, LZW Data compaction, LZ-77, LZ-78. Discrete Memory less channels, Mutual information, channel capacity, Channel coding theorem, Differential entropy and mutual information for continuous ensembles.

Unit 6:Application of Information Theory: Group, Ring & Field, Vector, GF addition,

multiplication rules. Introduction to BCH codes, Primitive elements ,Minimal polynomials, Generator polynomials in terms of Minimal polynomials, Some

examples of BCH codes,& Decoder, Reed- Solomon codes & Decoder, Implementation of Reed Solomon encoders and decoders

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to: Characterize and apply probabilistic techniques in modern decision systems, such as

information systems, receivers, filtering and statistical operations. Demonstrate mathematical modelling and problem solving using such models. Comparatively evolve key results developed in this course for applications to signal

processing, communications systems. Develop frameworks based in probabilistic and stochastic themes for modelling and

analysis of various systems involving functionalities in decision making, statistical inference, estimation and detection.

References:

1. Papoulis and S.U. Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes”,4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

2. D.G. Manolakis, V.K. Ingle and S.M. Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2000.

3. Mourad Barkat , “Signal Detection and Estimation”, Artech House, 2nd Edition, 2005.

4. R G. Gallager, “Information theory and reliable communication”, Wiley, 1st edition, 1968.

5. F. J. MacWilliams and N. J. A. Sloane, “The Theory of Error-Correcting Codes”, New York, North-Holland, 1977.

6. Rosen K.H, “Elementary Number Theory”, Addison-Wesley, 6th edition, 2010.

Program Elective –II MECE-104 Cognitive Radio L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective:

To introduce the student about fundament concepts & application of cognitive radio networks.

To design made the students understand technologies to allow an efficient use of TVWS for radio communication based on two spectrum sharing business models/ policies.

To introduce the students about designing of cognitive radio techniques as well as a number of optimisation techniques

To introduce the students about fundamentals of dynamic spectrum access radio resource management & trading issues.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Cognitive Radios: Digital dividend, cognitive radio (CR)

architecture, functions of cognitive radio, dynamic spectrum access (DSA), components of cognitive radio, spectrum sensing, spectrum analysis and decision, potential applications of cognitive radio.

Unit 2: Spectrum Sensing: Spectrum sensing, detection of spectrum holes (TVWS),

collaborative sensing, geo-location database and spectrum sharing business models (spectrum of commons, real time secondary spectrum market).

Unit 3: Optimization Techniques of Dynamic Spectrum Allocation: Linear programming,

convex programming, non-linear programming, integer programming, dynamic programming, stochastic programming.

Unit 4: Dynamic Spectrum Access and Management: Spectrum broker, cognitive radio

architectures, centralized dynamic spectrum access, distributed dynamic spectrum access, learning algorithms and protocols.

Unit 5: Spectrum Trading: Introduction to spectrum trading, classification to spectrum

trading, radio resource pricing, brief discussion on economics theories in DSA (utility, auction theory), classification of auctions (single auctions, double auctions, concurrent, sequential).

Unit 6: Research Challenges in Cognitive Radio: Network layer and transport layer issues,

cross layer design for cognitive radio networks.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to: Understand the fundamental concepts of cognitive radio networks. Develop the cognitive radio, as well as techniques for spectrum holes detection that

cognitive radio takes advantages in order to exploit it. Understand technologies to allow an efficient use of TVWS for radio communications

based on two spectrum sharing business models/policies. Understand fundamental issues regarding dynamic spectrum access, the radio-

resource management and trading, as well as a number of optimisation techniques for better spectrum exploitation.

References:

1. Ekram Hossain, Dusit Niyato, Zhu Han, “Dynamic Spectrum Access and Management in Cognitive Radio Networks”, Cambridge University Press, 2009.

2. Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive radio networks”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2009.

3. Bruce Fette, “Cognitive radio technology”, Elsevier, 2nd edition, 2009. 4. Huseyin Arslan, “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive Wireless

Systems”, Springer, 2007. 5. Francisco Rodrigo Porto Cavalcanti, Soren Andersson, “Optimizing Wireless

Communication Systems” Springer, 2009. 6. Linda Doyle, “Essentials of Cognitive Radio”, Cambridge University Press, 2009.

MECE-105 RF and Microwave Circuit Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Outcomes:

To study the concept of transmission line theory. To familiarize with microware network analysis. To study the microware component and semiconductor devices. To study the concept of amplifier design.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Transmission Line Theory: Lumped element circuit model for transmission line, field analysis, Smith chart, quarter wave transformer, generator and load mismatch, impedance matching and tuning.

Unit 2:Microwave Network Analysis: Impedance and equivalent voltage and current,

Impedance and admittance matrix, The scattering matrix, transmission matrix, Signal flow graph.

Unit 3:Microwave Components: Microwave resonators, Microwave filters, power dividers

and directional couplers, Ferromagnetic devices and components. Unit 4:Nonlinearity And Time VarianceInter: symbol interference, random process &

noise, definition of sensitivity and dynamic range, conversion gain and distortion. Unit 5:Microwave Semiconductor Devices And Modeling: PIN diode, Tunnel diodes,

Varactor diode, Schottky diode, IMPATT and TRAPATT devices, transferred electron devices, Microwave BJTs, GaAs FETs, low noise and power GaAs FETs, MESFET, MOSFET, HEMT.

Unit 6:Amplifiers Design: Power gain equations, stability, impedance matching, constant

gain and noise figure circles, small signal, low noise, high power and broadband amplifier, oscillators, Mixers design.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the behaviour of RF passive components and model active components and Perform transmission line analysis.

Demonstrate use of Smith Chart for high frequency circuit design. Justify the choice/selection of components from the design aspects. Contribute in the areas of RF circuit design.

References: 1. Matthew M. Radmanesh, “Advanced RF & Microwave Circuit Design: The Ultimate

Guide to Superior Design”, AuthorHouse, 2009. 2. D.M.Pozar, “ Microwave engineering” ,Wiley, 4th edition, 2011. 3. R.Ludwig and P.Bretchko, “R. F. Circuit Design”, Pearson Education Inc, 2009. 4. G.D. Vendelin, A.M. Pavoi, U. L. Rohde, “Microwave Circuit Design Using Linear

And Non Linear Techniques”, John Wiley 1990. 5. S.Y. Liao, “Microwave circuit Analysis and Amplifier Design”, Prentice Hall 1987. 6. Radmanesh, “RF and Microwave Electronics Illustrated” , Pearson Education, 2004.

MECE-106 DSP Architecture L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Outcomes:

To introduce programmable DSP Hardware & special architecture modules. To familiarize with DSP processors, structural & architectural considerations. To study Multicourse DSPs, HPC, MPI, Multicourse DSP as HPC. To familiarize with FPGA based DSP systems & VLIW Architecture.

Syllabus

Unit 1 : Programmable DSP Hardware: Processing Architectures (von Neumann, Harvard),

DSP core algorithms (FIR, IIR, Convolution, Correlation, FFT), IEEE standard for Fixed and Floating Point Computations, Special Architectures Modules used in Digital Signal Processors (like MAC unit, Barrel shifters), On-Chip peripherals, DSP benchmarking.

Unit 2: Structural and Architectural Considerations: Parallelism in DSP processing, Texas

Instruments TMS320 Digital Signal Processor Families, Fixed Point TI DSP Processors: TMS320C1X and TMS320C2X Family,TMS320C25 –Internal Architecture, Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Auxiliary Registers, Addressing Modes (Immediate, Direct and Indirect, Bit reverse Addressing), Basics of TMS320C54x and C55x Families in respect of Architecture improvements and new applications fields, TMS320C5416 DSP Architecture, Memory Map, Interrupt System, Peripheral Devices, Illustrative Examples for assembly coding.

Unit 3: VLIW Architecture: Current DSP Architectures, GPUs as an alternative to DSP

Processors, TMS320C6X Family, Addressing Modes, Replacement of MAC unit by ILP, Detailed study of ISA, Assembly Language Programming, Code Composer Studio, Mixed Cand Assembly Language programming, On-chip peripherals, Simple applications developments as an embedded environment.

Unit 4: Multi-core DSPs: Introduction to Multi-core computing and applicability for DSP

hardware, Concept of threads, introduction to P-thread, mutex and similar concepts, heterogeneous and homogenous multi-core systems, Shared Memory parallel programming OpenMP approach of parallel programming, PRAGMA directives, OpenMP Constructs for work sharing like for loop, sections, TI TMS320C6678 (Eight Core subsystem).

Unit 5: FPGA based DSP Systems: Limitations of P-DSPs, Requirements of Signal

processing for Cognitive Radio (SDR), FPGA based signal processing design-case study of a complete design of DSP processor.

Unit 6: High Performance Computing using P-DSP: Preliminaries of HPC, MPI, Open MP,

multicore DSP as HPC infrastructure. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Identify and formalize architectural level characterization of P-DSP hardware Ability to design, programming (assembly and C), and testing code using Code

Composer Studio environment Deployment of DSP hardware for Control, Audio and Video Signal processing

applications Understanding of major areas and challenges in DSP based embedded systems

References:

1. M. Sasikumar, D. Shikhare, Ravi Prakash, “Introduction to Parallel Processing”, 1st

Edition, PHI, 2006. 2. Fayez Gebali, “Algorithms and Parallel Computing”,1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons,

2011 3. Rohit Chandra, Ramesh Menon, Leo Dagum, David Kohr, DrorMaydan, Jeff

McDonald,“Parallel Programming in OpenMP”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman,2000. 4. Ann Melnichuk,Long Talk, “Multicore Embedded systems”, 1st Edition, CRC

Press,2010. 5. Wayne Wolf, “High Performance Embedded Computing: Architectures, Applications

and Methodologies”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2006. 6. E.S.Gopi, “Algorithmic Collections for Digital Signal Processing Applications Using

MATLAB”, 1st Edition, Springer Netherlands,2007.

MECE-107 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLERS L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective:

To introduce students to design of basic microprocessor architectural concepts, memory addressing architectural & ALU.

To introduce the students to various types of instruction interrupts and I/O devices. To introduce the students to 8051architectural, programming model & instructions. To introduce the students regarding architectural of advanced microprocessor,

addressing models, instruction set & interrupts. To introduce the students regarding interfacing I/O devices, A/D converter & D/A

convertors to microprocessor. To introduce the students for developing microprocessor based products.

Syllabus

Unit 1 Design of basic microprocessor architectural Concepts: Microprocessor

architecture, word Lengths, addressable memory, Microprocessor's speed architectural characteristics, registers, instruction, memory addressing architecture, ALU, GPR's Control logic & internal data bus.

Unit 2 Microprocessor Instructions &Communication: Instruction Set ,Mnemonics, Basic

Instruction Types, Addressing modes, Microprocessor I/O connecting I/O put to Microprocessor, Polling and Interrupts, Interrupt and OM. Controllers.

Unit 3 Microcontroller: Introduction 8051 architecture and programming model. Internal

RAM and registers, I/O ports, Interrupt system &Instruction sets. Unit 4 Advanced Micro processors: lntel X86 family of advanced Microprocessor,

programming model for 86 family. X86 addressing modes, instruction set, hardware of 186, 286, 386, 486 & Pentium processors. Motorola 68 XXX family of microprocessor, 68 XXX addressing modes, instruction set, hardware.

Unit 5 Microprocessor 110: Data Communication, parallel I/O serial communication, Serial

interface and UART, modems, I/O devices, D/A, A/D interface, special I/O devices. Unit 6 Developing Microprocessor Based Products: Introduction to the Design Process,

Preparing the specifications, Developing a design, Implementing and Testing and design, Regulatory Compliance Testing, design tool for Microprocessor Development.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the microprocessor architecture, programming and instructions. Understand the concepts of 8051, instructions, addressing models and programs. To interface I/O devices, A/D & D/A converters with microprocessor &

microcontroller.

Understand the advanced microprocessors along with their architecture, programming model & addressing models.

Understand the testing & design tolls for microprocessor development and its based product.

Text Books:

1. C.M. Gilmore, "Microprocessors Principals and Application", MGH 2. Rajkamal, "Embedded System, Architecture &Programming",TMH

Reference Books:

1. Berry B. Berry, "Inter Series of microprocessors", PHI 2. D. V. Hall, "Microprocessor &Interfacing", TMH 3. Peatman, "Microprocessor Based System Design", Pearson

RMI101 Research Methodology and IPR L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 2 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 2 Hrs.

Syllabus

Unit 1:Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics of a good research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and objectives of research problem. Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, analysis, interpretation, Necessary instrumentations

Unit 2:Effective literature studies approaches, analysis Plagiarism , Research ethics, Unit 3:Effective technical writing, how to write report, Paper Developing a Research

Proposal, Format of research proposal, a presentation and assessment by a review committee

Unit 4: Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trade and Copyright. Process of

Patenting and Development, technological research, innovation, patenting, development. International Scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property, Procedure for grants of patents, Patenting under PCT.

Unit 5:Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights, Licensing and transfer of technology, Patent

information and databases, Geographical Indications. Unit 6:New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System, New developments in

IPR, IPR of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc. Traditional knowledge Case, Studies, IPR and IITs.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand research problem formulation. Analyze research related information Follow research ethics Understand that today‟s world is controlled by Computer, Information Technology,

but tomorrow world will be ruled by ideas, concept, and creativity. Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of

individuals & nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about Intellectual Property Right to be promoted among students in general & engineering in particular.

Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research work and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and in turn brings about, economic growth and social benefits.

References:

1. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research methodology: an introduction for science & engineering students‟”

2. Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, “Research Methodology: An Introduction”

3. Ranjit Kumar, 2 nd Edition , “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for beginners”

4. Halbert, “Resisting Intellectual Property”, Taylor & Francis Ltd ,2007. 5. Mayall , “Industrial Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992. 6. Niebel , “Product Design”, McGraw Hill, 1974. 7. Asimov , “Introduction to Design”, Prentice Hall, 1962. 8. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley, “ Intellectual Property in New

Technological Age”, 2016. 9. T. Ramappa, “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S. Chand, 2008

MEC151 Advanced Communication Networks Laboratory L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 4 2 Class Work : 15 Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 2 Hrs.

List of Assignments: 1. Study of Networking Commands (Ping, Tracert, TELNET, nslookup, netstat, ARP,

RARP) and Network Configuration Files. 2. Linux Network Configuration.

a. Configuring NIC‟s IP Address. b. Determining IP Address and MAC Address using if-config command. c. Changing IP Address using if-config. d. Static IP Address and Configuration by Editing. e. Determining IP Address using DHCP. f. Configuring Hostname in /etc/hosts file.

3. Design TCP iterative Client and Server application to reverse the given input sentence.

4. Design a TCP concurrent Server to convert a given text into upper case using multiplexing system call “select”.

5. Design UDP Client Server to transfer a file. 6. Configure a DHCP Server to serve contiguous IP addresses to a pool of four IP

devices with a default gateway and a default DNS address. Integrate the DHCP server with a BOOTP demon to automatically serve Windows and Linux OS Binaries based on client MAC address.

a. Configure DNS: Make a caching DNS client, and a DNS Proxy; implement reverse DNS and forward DNS, using TCP dump/Wireshark characterise traffic when the DNS server is up and when it is down.

7. Configure a mail server for IMAP/POP protocols and write a simple SMTP client in C/C++/Java client to send and receive mails.

8. Configure FTP Server on a Linux/Windows machine using a FTP client/SFTP client characterise file transfer rate for a cluster of small files 100k each and a video file of 700MB.Use a TFTP client and repeat the experiment.

9. Signaling and QoS of labeled paths using RSVP in MPLS. 10. Find shortest paths through provider network for RSVP and BGP. 11. Understand configuration, forwarding tables, and debugging of MPLS

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Identify the different types of network devices and their functions within a network. Understand and build the skills of sub-netting and routing mechanisms. Understand basic protocols of computer networks, and how they can be used to assist

in network design and implementation.

MEC152 Wireless and Mobile Communication Laboratory L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 4 2 Class Work : 15 Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 2 Hrs.

List of Assignments:

1. Understanding Cellular Fundamentals like Frequency Reuse, Interference, cell splitting, multi path environment, Coverage and Capacity issues using communication software.

2. Knowing GSM and CDMA architecture, network concepts, call management, call setup, call release,Security and Power Control, Handoff Process and types, Rake Receiver etc.

3. Study of GSM handset for various signalling and fault insertion techniques (Major GSM handset sections: clock, SIM card, charging, LCD module, Keyboard, User interface).

4. To study transmitters and receiver section in mobile handset and measure frequency band signal and GMSK modulating signal.

5. To study various GSM AT Commands their use and developing new application using it. Understating of 3G Communication System with features like; transmission of voice and videocalls, SMS, MMS, TCP/IP, HTTP, GPS and File system by AT Commands in 3G network.

6. Study of DSSS technique for CDMA, observe effect of variation of types of PN codes, chip rate, spreading factor, processing gain on performance.

7. To learn and develop concepts of Software Radio in real time environment by studying the building blocks like Base band and RF section, convolution encoder, Interleaver and De- Interleaver.

8. To study and analyze different modulation techniques in time and frequency domain using SDR kit.

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Understanding Cellular concepts, GSM and CDMA networks To study GSM handset by experimentation and fault insertion techniques Understating of 3G communication system by means of various AT commands

usage in GSM Understanding CDMA concept using DSSS kit To learn, understand and develop concepts of Software Radio in real time

environment

MEC-201 Antennas and Radiating Systems L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To familiarize with concept of antenna parameters and radiation mechanism. To study the design and analysis of linear wire antennas. To understand the concept of antenna arrays. To study the design of Aperture antenna, Micro strip antenna and reflector antenna.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Types of Antennas: Wire antennas, Aperture antennas, Micro strip antennas, Array antennas Reflector antennas, Lens antennas, Radiation Mechanism, Current distribution on thin wire antenna. Fundamental Parameters of Antennas: Radiation Pattern, Radiation Power Density, Radiation Intensity, Directivity, Gain, Antenna efficiency, Beam efficiency, Bandwidth, Polarization, Input Impedance, radiation efficiency, Antenna Vector effective length, Friis Transmission equation, Antenna Temperature.

Unit 2: Linear Wire Antennas: Infinitesimal dipole, Small dipole, Region separation, Finite

length dipole, half wave dipole, Ground effects. Loop Antennas, Small Circular loop, Circular Loop of constant current, Circular loop with non uniform current.

Unit 3: LinearArrays: Two element array, N Element array, Uniform Amplitude and spacing,

Broadside and End fire array, Super directivity, Planar array, Design consideration. Unit 4: Aperture Antennas: Huygen‟s Field Equivalence principle, radiation equations,

Rectangular Aperture, Circular Aperture. Horn Antennas: E-Plane, H-plane Sectoral horns, Pyramidal and Conical horns.

Unit 5: Micro strip Antennas: Basic Characteristics, Feeding mechanisms, Method of

analysis, Rectangular Patch, Circular Patch. Unit 6: Reflector Antennas: Plane reflector, parabolic reflector, Cassegrain reflectors,

Introduction to MIMO. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Compute the far field distance, radiation pattern and gain of an antenna for given current distribution.

Estimate the input impedance, efficiency and ease of match for antennas. Compute the array factor for an array of identical antennas. Design antennas and antenna arrays for various desired radiation pattern

characteristics. References:

1. Constantine A. Balanis, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 4th edition, 2016.

2. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for All Applications”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.

3. R.C.Johnson and H.Jasik, “Antenna Engineering hand book”, Mc-Graw Hill, 1984. 4. I.J.Bhal and P.Bhartia, “Micro-strip antennas”, Artech house, 1980.

MEC-202 Advanced Digital Signal Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To give overview of DSP, FET alogwith, FIR & IIR filters. To introduce the multi rate DSP. To study prediction filters, wiener filter. To introduce adaptive filter, LMS algorithm, minimum mean square criterion. To introduce structures estimation To study the applications of DSP.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Overview of DSP, Characterization in time and frequency, FFT Algorithms, Digital

filter design and structures, Basic FIR/IIR filter design &structures, design techniques of linear phase FIR filters, IIR filters by impulse invariance, bilinear transformation, FIR/IIR Cascaded lattice structures, parallel realization of IIR.

Unit 2 : Multi rate DSP, Decimators and Interpolators, Sampling rate conversion, multistage

decimator & interpolator, poly phase filters, QMF, digital filter banks, Applications in subband coding.

Unit 3: Linear prediction & optimum linear filters, stationary random process, forward-

backward linear prediction filters, solution of normal equations, AR Lattice and ARMA Lattice-Ladder Filters, Wiener Filters for Filtering and Prediction.

Unit 4: Adaptive Filters, Applications, Gradient Adaptive Lattice, Minimum mean square

criterion, LMS algorithm, Recursive Least Square algorithm Unit 5: Estimation of Spectra from Finite, Duration Observations of Signals. Nonparametric

Methods for Power Spectrum Estimation, Parametric Methods for Power Spectrum Estimation, Minimum-Variance Spectral Estimation, Eigen analysis Algorithms for Spectrum Estimation.

Unit 6: Application of DSP & Multi rate DSP, Application to Radar, introduction to

wavelets, application to image processing, design of phase shifters, DSP in speech processing & other applications

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

To understand theory of different filters and algorithms To understand theory of multirate DSP, solve numerical problems and write

algorithms To understand theory of prediction and solution of normal equations To know applications of DSP at block level.

References: 1. J.G.Proakis and D.G.Manolakis“Digital signal processing: Principles, Algorithm and 2. Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007. 3. N. J. Fliege, “Multirate Digital Signal Processing: Multirate Systems -Filter Banks –

Wavelets”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 1999. 4. Bruce W. Suter, “Multirate and Wavelet Signal Processing”,1st Edition, Academic

Press, 1997. 5. M. H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley &

Sons Inc., 2002. 6. S.Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001. 7. D.G.Manolakis, V.K. Ingle and S.M.Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal

Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2000

MECE-201 Satellite Communication L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective:

To study basics of satellite communication & laws governing the satellite motion. To familiarize various satellite subsystem satellite structure & equation To introduce various satellite subsystems & their applications & effect of various

atmospheric. To study various multiple access schemes & special purposes satellite condition on

satellite working.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Architecture of Satellite Communication System: Principles and architecture of satellite Communication, Brief history of Satellite systems, advantages, disadvantages, applications, and frequency bands used for satellite communication and their advantages/drawbacks.

Unit 2:Orbital Analysis: Orbital equations, Kepler‟s laws of planetary motion, Apogee and

Perigee for an elliptical orbit, evaluation of velocity, orbital period, angular velocity etc of a satellite, concepts of Solar day and Sidereal day.

Unit 3:Satellite sub-systems: Architecture and Roles of various sub-systems of a satellite

system such as Telemetry, tracking, command and monitoring (TTC & M), Attitude and orbit control system (AOCS), Communication sub-system, power sub-systems, antenna sub system.

Unit 4:Typical Phenomena in Satellite Communication: Solar Eclipse on satellite, its effects,

remedies for Eclipse, Sun Transit Outage phenomena, its effects and remedies, Doppler frequency shift phenomena and expression for Doppler shift.

Unit 5:Satellite link budget: Flux density and received signal power equations, Calculation of

System noise temperature for satellite receiver, noise power calculation, Drafting of satellite link budget and C/N ratio calculations in clear air and rainy conditions, Case study of Personal Communication system (satellite telephony) using LEO.

Unit 6: Modulation and Multiple Access Schemes used in satellite communication. Typical

case studies of VSAT, DBS-TV satellites and few recent communication satellites launched by NASA/ ISRO. GPS.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Visualize the architecture of satellite systems as a means of high speed, high range communication system.

State various aspects related to satellite systems such as orbital equations, sub-systems in a satellite, link budget, modulation and multiple access schemes.

Solve numerical problems related to orbital motion and design of link budget for the given parameters and conditions.

To understand multiple access schemes used in satellite communication & applications of various antenna.

References:

1. Timothy Pratt and Others, “Satellite Communications”, Wiley India, 2nd edition,2010. 2. S. K. Raman, “Fundamentals of Satellite Communication”, Pearson Education India,

2011. 3. Tri T. Ha, “Digital Satellite Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 4. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communication”, McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2008.

MECE-202 Internet of things L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce various internet protocols & its application in designing systems. To understand network challenge & key scientific problems involved in IOT

development. To describe core concept of IOT, role & scope of smart sensors for technology

convergence. To outline various research application & scope for IOT legislation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Smart cities and IoT revolution, Fractal cities, From IT to IoT, M2M and peer

networking concepts, Ipv4 and IPV6. Unit 2: Software Defined Networks SDN, From Cloud to Fog and MIST networking for IoT

communications, Principles of Edge/P2P networking, Protocols to support IoT communications, modular design and abstraction, security and privacy in fog.

Unit 3: Wireless sensor networks: introduction, IOT networks (PAN, LAN and WAN), Edge

resource pooling and caching, client side control and configuration. Unit 4:Smart objects as building blocks for IoT, Open source hardware and Embedded

systems platforms for IoT, Edge/gateway, IO drivers, C Programming, multithreading concepts.

Unit 5:Operating systems requirement of IoT environment, study of mbed, RIoT, and Contiki

operating systems, Introductory concepts of big data for IoT applications. Unit 6:Applications of IoT, Connected cars IoT Transportation, Smart Grid and Healthcare

sectors using IoT, Security and legal considerations, IT Act 2000 and scope for IoT legislation.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand what IoT technologies are used for today, and what is required in certain scenarios.

Understand the types of technologies that are available and in use today and can be utilized to implement IoT solutions.

Apply these technologies to tackle scenarios in teams of using an experimental platform for implementing prototypes and testing them as running applications.

References: 1. A Bahaga, V. Madisetti, “Internet of Things- Hands on approach”, VPT publisher,

2014. 2. McEwen, H. Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley, 2013. 3. CunoPfister, “Getting started with Internet of Things”, Maker Media, 1st edition,

2011.

4. Samuel Greenguard, “Internet of things”, MIT Press, 2015. Web resources:

1. http://www.datamation.com/open-source/35-open-source-tools-for-the-internet-of things- 1.html

2. https://developer.mbed.org/handbook/AnalogIn 3. http://www.libelium.com/50_sensor_applications/ 4. M2MLabs Mainspring http://www.m2mlabs.com/framework 5. Node-RED http://nodered.org/

MECE-203 Voice and Data Networks L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about Data network designing & communication on designed networks.

To introduce the student about network design issues. To provide the students information about various models of networks and protocols

used for flow control on data link layer. To introduce the students about congestions & congestion control algorithms.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Network Design Issues, Network Performance Issues, Network Terminology,

centralized and distributed approaches for networks design, Issues in design of voice and data networks.

Unit 2: Layered and Layer less Communication, Cross layer design of Networks, Voice

Networks (wired and wireless) and Switching, Circuit Switching and Packet Switching, Statistical Multiplexing.

Unit 3: Data Networks and their Design, Link layer design- Link adaptation, Link Layer

Protocols, Retransmission. Mechanisms (ARQ), Hybrid ARQ (HARQ), Go Back N, Selective Repeat protocols and their analysis.

Unit 4: Queuing Models of Networks , Traffic Models , Little's Theorem, Markov chains,

M/M/1 and other Markov systems, Multiple Access Protocols , Aloha System , Carrier Sensing , Examples of Local area networks,

Unit 5: Inter-networking, Bridging, Global Internet, IP protocol and addressing, Sub netting,

Classless Inter domain Routing (CIDR), IP address lookup, Routing in Internet. End to End Protocols, TCP and UDP, Congestion Control, Additive Increase/Multiplicative Decrease, Slow Start, Fast Retransmit/ Fast Recovery,

Unit 6: Congestion avoidance, RED TCP Throughput Analysis, Quality of Service in Packet

Networks. Network Calculus, Packet Scheduling Algorithms. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand protocol, algorithms, trade-offs rationale Understand routing, transport, DNS resolutions Understand queuing model and network congestion avoidance Understand network extensions and next generation architectures

References:

1. D. Bertsekas and R. Gallager, “Data Networks”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1992. 2. L. Peterson and B. S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”,5th Edition,

Morgan Kaufman, 2011.

3. Kumar, D. Manjunath and J. Kuri, “Communication Networking: An analytical approach”, 1st Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2004.

4. Walrand, “Communications Network: A First Course”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2002.

5. Leonard Kleinrock, “Queuing Systems, Volume I: Theory”, 1st Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1975.

6. Aaron Kershenbaum, “Telecommunication Network Design Algorithms”, McGraw Hill, 1993.

7. Vijay Ahuja, “Design and Analysis of Computer Communication Networks”, McGraw Hill, 1987

MECE-204 Digital Image Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Unit 1: Digital Image Fundamentals: Visual Perception, concept of uniform and non-uniform

sampling & quantization, Relationships between pixels-neighbours of pixel, connectivity labelling of connected components. Relations, equivalence and Transitive closure (Warshall‟s Algorithm), Distance measures, Arithmetic/ Logic operation, Basic transformation.

Unit 2: Image Transforms: Discrete Fourier transform, Properties of DFT, Fast Fourier transform, Discrete Cosine transform, Hadmard transform.

Unit 3:Image Enhancement: Spatial and frequency domain methods, intensity transformation, Histogram processing and Averaging spatial filtering, Low pass and high pass filters, Homomorphic filters, Colour image processing.

Unit 4:Image Restoration: Degradation model, digitalization of circulate and block circulate metrics, Algebraic approved inverse filtering, wiener filter, constrained least square restoration, Interactive restoration in spatial domain.

Unit 5:Image Segmentation: Detection of Discontinuities, Point detection, Line detection, Edge detection, Edge linking and boundary detection, Thresholding, Global thresholding, Adaptive Thresholding, Optimum thresholding, Regional oriented segmentation.

Unit 6:Morphological Image Processing: Preliminaries, Erosion and Dilation, Opening and closing, Hit or Miss transform, Some Basic Morphological Algorithms- Boundary Extraction, Region Filling.

Unit 7:Compression: Lossy and Lossless Compression, Basic Compression Methods-

Huffman Coding, Golomb Coding, Arithmetic Coding, LZW Coding, Run-Length Coding, JPEG Compression.

TextBooks: I. Anil K Jain, "Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing", PHI Edition 1997. II. Keenneth R Castleman, " Digital Image Processing", Pearson Reference Books: III. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, "Digital Image Processing" IV. Pearson Chanda & Majumder “Digital image processing and analysis”.

MECE-205 Markov Chains and Queuing Systems L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about the basics of probability theory & randomness of numbers.

To introduce the students about markov chain in discrete & continuous time domain and also regenerative processes used in mathematical modelling.

To introduce students about modelling a system as uening system as aranom proce in markov chains.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction: Review of basic probability, properties of nonnegative random

variables, laws of large numbers and the Central Limit Theorem. Unit 2: Renewal Processes: Basic definitions, recurrence times, rewards and renewal reward

theorem, point processes, Poisson process, Walds equation, Blackwell's theorem. Unit 3: Discrete time Markov chains: definitions and properties, matrix representation,

Perron- Frobenius theory. Unit 4: Continuous time Markov chains: basic definitions, Q-matrix, birth-death processes,

quasi birth death Processes; Embedded Markov processes, semi Markov processes, reversible Markov chains, Random walks.

Unit 5: Fundamental queuing results: Little's theorem, invariance of the mean delay,

Conservation law. Markovian queues: Jackson and BCMP networks, numerical Algorithms. M/G/1 & G/M/1 queues and G/G/1 queues.

Unit 6: Advanced queuing models: priority, vacation and retrials in queues. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand Markov Chains and regenerative processes used in modelling a wide variety of systems and phenomena.

Model a system as queuing system with some aspect of the queue governed by a random process.

Understand telecommunication systems modelling using Markov chains with special emphasis on developing queuing models.

References:

1. Cliffs, “Stochastic Modelling and the Theory Queues”, Prentice Hall, 1989. 2. P.Bremaud, “Markov Chains”, Springer-Verlag, 1999. 3. E.Seneta, “Non Negative Matrices and Markov Chains”, Springer Series in Statistics,

Springer,1981. 4. R.Gallager, “Discrete Stochastic Processes”, Kluwer Academic Press, 1996. 5. L.Kleinrock, “Queuing Systems”, vols I and II, John Wiley and Sons 1976.

MECE-206 MIMO System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To study multi antenna system and diversity. To study channel modelling and propagation. To study the concept of MIMO receiver & multi antenna system. To study the mathematical modelling and analysis of MIMO system

Syllabus Unit 1: Introduction to Multi-antenna Systems, Motivation, Types of multi-antenna systems,

MIMO vs. multi-antenna systems. Unit 2: Diversity, Exploiting multipath diversity, Transmit diversity, Space-time codes, The

Alamouti scheme, Delay diversity, Cyclic delay diversity, Space-frequency codes, Receive diversity, The rake receiver, Combining techniques, Spatial Multiplexing, Spectral efficiency an capacity, Transmitting independent streams in parallel, Mathematical notation

Unit 3: The generic MIMO problem, Singular Value Decomposition, Eigen values and

eigenvectors, Equalising MIMO systems, Disadvantages of equalising MIMO systems, Pre distortion in MIMO systems, Disadvantages of pre-distortion in MIMO systems, Pre-coding and combining in MIMO systems, Advantages of pre-coding and combining, Disadvantages of precoding and combining, Channel state information.

Unit 4: Codebooks for MIMO, Beam forming, Beam forming principles, increased spectrum

efficiency, Interference cancellation, Switched beam former, Adaptive beam former, Narrowband beam former, Wideband beam former

Unit 5: Case study: MIMO in LTE, Code words to layers mapping, Pre-coding for spatial

multiplexing, Pre-coding for transmit diversity, Beam forming in LTE, Cyclic delay diversity based pre-coding, Pre-coding codebooks, Propagation Channels, Time & frequency channel dispersion, AWGN and multipath propagation channels, Delay spread values and time variations, Fast and slow fading environments, Complex baseband multipath channels, Narrowband and wideband channels, MIMO channel models

Unit 6: Channel Estimation, Channel estimation techniques, Estimation and tracking,

Training based channel estimation, Blind channel estimation, Channel estimation architectures, Iterative channel estimation, MMSE channel estimation, Correlative channel sounding, Channel estimation in single carrier systems, Channel estimation for CDMA, Channel estimation for OFDM.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to: Understand channel modelling and propagation, MIMO Capacity, space-time coding, MIMO receivers, MIMO for multi-carrier systems (e.g. MIMO-OFDM), multi-user

communications, multi-user MIMO. Understand cooperative and coordinated multi-cell MIMO, introduction to MIMO in

4G (LTE, LTE-Advanced, WiMAX). Perform Mathematical modelling and analysis of MIMO systems.

References:

1. Claude Oestges, Bruno Clerckx, "MIMO Wireless Communications : From Real-world Propagation to Space-time Code Design",Academic Press, 1st edition, 2010.

2. Mohinder Janakiraman, “Space - Time Codes and MIMO Systems”, Artech House Publishers, 2004.

MECE-207 Programmable Networks - SDN, NFV L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students programmable networks. To make the students aware of concept & protocols control & data plane separation. To introduce the students about the concept of network virtualization & control plane

on SDN. To give the students brief knowledge on programming SDNs, Architecture &

topologies of SDN. Syllabus

Unit 1 :Introduction to Programmable Networks, History and Evolution of Software Defined

Networking (SDN), Fundamental Characteristics of SDN, Separation of Control Plane and Data Plane, Active Networking.

Unit 2 :Control and Data Plane Separation: Concepts, Advantages and Disadvantages, the

basics of OpenFlow protocol. Unit 3 :Network Virtualization: Concepts, Applications, Existing Network Virtualization

Framework, Mininet A simulation environment for SDN. Unit 4 :Control Plane: Overview, Existing SDN Controllers including Floodlight and Open

Daylight projects, Customization of Control Plane, Switching and Firewall Implementation using SDN Concepts. Data Plane, Software-based and Hadrware-based, Programmable Network Hardware.

Unit 5 :Programming SDNs: Northbound Application Programming Interface, Current

Languages and Tools, Composition of SDNs, Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) and Software Defined Networks, Concepts, Implementation and Applications.

Unit 6 :Data Center Networks: Packet, Optical and Wireless Architectures, Networkn

Topologies, Use Cases of SDNs, Data Centers, Internet Exchange Points, Backbone Networks, Home Networks, Traffic Engineering.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand advanced concepts in Programmable Networks. Understand Software Defined Networking, an emerging Internet architectural

framework. Implement the main concepts, architectures, algorithms, protocols and applications in

SDN and NFV. References:

1. Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray, “SDN: Software Defined Networks, An Authoritative Review of Network Programmability Technologies”, O'Reilly Media, August 2013.

2. Paul Goransson, Chuck Black, Timothy Culver. “Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2016.

3. Fei Hu, “Network Innovation through OpenFlow and SDN: Principles and Design”, CRC Press, 2014.

4. Vivek Tiwari, “SDN and OpenFlow for Beginners”, Amazon Digital Services, Inc., ASIN: 2013.

5. Nick Feamster, Jennifer Rexford and Ellen Zegura, “The Road to SDN: An Intellectual History of Programmable Networks” ACM CCR April 2014.

6. Open Networking Foundation (ONF) Documents, https://www.opennetworking.org, 2015.

7. OpenFlow standards, http://www.openflow.org, 2015.

MECE-208 ADVANCE DIGITAL COMMUNICATION L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the concept of Complex baseband representation of signals Geometric representation of signals, Gram –Schmidt Orthogonalisation procedure .

To learn the differenent types of digital modulation schemes. To learn the concept of Additive White Gaussian Noise(AWGN) Channel, different

types of filters and detectors. To Learn the concept of different types of band-limited channels and their

performance. To learn the concept of Different synchronization techniques.

SYLLABUS

UNIT 1: Introduction:Digital communication system (description of different modules of the block diagram), Complex baseband representation of signals, Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization procedure. M-ary orthogonal signals, bi-orthogonal signals, simplex signal waveforms.

UNIT 2: Modulation:Pulse amplitude modulation (binary and M-ary, QAM), Pulse position

modulation (binary and M-ary), Carrier modulation (M-ary ASK, PSK, FSK, DPSK), Continuous phase modulation (QPSK and variants, MSK, GMSK).

UNIT 3: Receiver in additive white Gaussian noise channels:Coherent and noncoherent

demodulation: Matched filter, Correlator demodulator, square-law, and envelope detection; Detector: Optimum rule for ML and MAP detection Performance: Bit-error-rate, symbol error rate for coherent and noncoherent schemes.

UNIT 4: Band-limited channels:Pulse shape design for channels with ISI: Nyquist pulse,

Partial response signaling (duobinary and modified duobinary pulses), demodulation; Channel with distortion: Design of transmitting and receiving filters for a known channel and for time varying channel (equalization); Performance: Symbol by symbol detection and BER, symbol and sequence detection

UNIT5: Synchronization:Different synchronization techniques (Early-Late Gate, MMSE,

ML and spectral line methods. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the concept of Complex baseband representation of signals Geometric representation of signals, Gram –Schmidt Orthogonalisation procedure. .

Analyze of different types of digital modulation schemes. Deduce the Additive White Gaussian Noise(AWGN) Channel, different types of

filters and detectors. Describe the different types of band-limited channels and their performance and

Different synchronization techniques.

Text Books: 1. Taub and Schilling, “Principal of Communication System”,TMH 2. S.Haykin, “Digital communication”,Willey Pub. Reference Books: 1. WayenTomasi, “Electronic Communication System” ,Pearson pub. 2. J.Dass, S.K.Mullick& P.K. Chatterjee, “Principal of Digital Communication” , Willey Eastern Pub 3. John G. Proakis, "Digital Communication", McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2001. 4. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communication - Fundamental and applications", Pearson education (Asia), Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition, 2001.

MEC251 Antennas and Radiating Systems Laboratory L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 4 2 Class Work : 15 Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Assignments:

1. Simulation of half wave dipole antenna. 2. Simulation of change of the radius and length of dipole wire on frequency of

resonance of antenna. 3. Simulation of quarter wave, full wave antenna and comparison of their parameters. 4. Simulation of monopole antenna with and without ground plane. 5. Study the effect of the height of the monopole antenna on the radiation characteristics

of the antenna. 6. Simulation of a half wave dipole antenna array. 7. Study the effect of change in distance between elements of array on radiation pattern

of dipole array. 8. Study the effect of the variation of phase difference 'beta' between the elements of the

array on the radiation pattern of the dipole array. 9. Case study.

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Determine specifications, design, construct and test antenna. Explore and use tools for designing, analyzing and testing antennas. These tools

include Antenna design and analysis software, network analyzers, spectrum analyzers, and antenna pattern measurement techniques.

MEC252 Advanced Digital Signal Processing Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 4 2 Class Work : 15 Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Assignments:

1. Basic Signal Representation 2. Correlation Auto And Cross 3. Stability Using Hurwitz Routh Criteria 4. Sampling FFT of Input Sequence 5. Butterworth Lowpass and Highpass Filter Design 6. Chebychev Type I, II Filter 7. State Space Matrix from Differential Equation 8. Normal Equation Using Levinson Durbin 9. Decimation And Interpolation Using Rationale Factors 10. Maximally Decimated Analysis DFT Filter 11. Cascade Digital IIR Filter Realization 12. Convolution And M Fold Decimation &PSD Estimator 13. Estimation Of PSD 14. Inverse Z Transform 15. Group Delay Calculation 16. Separation of T/F 17. Parallel Realization of IIR filter

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Design different digital filters in software Apply various transforms in time and frequency Perform decimation and interpolation

MECE-301 High Performance Networks L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce with types of networks, network design issues, network design tools, protocols & architecture.

To introduce the students about VOIP system architecture and VPN remote Access. To introduce the students about traffic modelling. To familiarize the students about network security & management & infrastructure for

network management.

Syllabus Unit 1: Types of Networks, Network design issues, Data in support of network design,

Network design tools, protocols and architecture, Streaming stored Audio and Video, Best effort service, protocols for real time interactive applications, Beyond best effort, scheduling and policing mechanism, integrated services, and RSVP-differentiated services.

Unit 2: VoIP system architecture, protocol hierarchy, Structure of a voice endpoint, Protocols

for the transport of voice media over IP networks, Providing IP quality of service for voice, signalling protocols for VoIP, PSTN gateways, VoIP applications.

Unit 3: VPN-Remote-Access VPN, site-to-site VPN, Tunneling to PPP, Security in VPN,

MPLSoperation, Routing, Tunneling and use of FEC, Traffic Engineering, MPLS based VPN, overlay networks-P2P connections.

Unit 4:Traffic Modeling: Little‟s theorem, Need for modeling, Poisson modeling, Non-

poisson models, Network performance evaluation. Unit 5: Network Security and Management: Principles of cryptography, Authentication,

integrity, key distribution and certification, Access control and fire walls, attacks and counter measures, security in many layers.

Unit 6: Infrastructure for network management, The internet standard management

framework – SMI, MIB, SNMP, Security and administration, ASN.1. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Apply knowledge of mathematics, probability, and statistics to model and analyze some networking protocols.

Design, implement, and analyze computer networks. Identify, formulate, and solve network engineering problems. Show knowledge of contemporary issues in high performance computer networks.

Use techniques, skills, and modern networking tools necessary for engineering practice.

References:

1. Kershenbaum A., “Telecommunications Network Design Algorithms”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1993.

2. Larry Peterson & Bruce David, “Computer Networks: A System Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003.

3. Douskalis B., “IP Telephony: The Integration of Robust VoIP Services”, Pearson Ed. Asia, 2000.

4. Warland J., Varaiya P., “High-Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1996.

5. Stallings W., “High-Speed Networks: TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, 1998.

6. Leon Garcia, Widjaja, “Communication networks”, TMH 7threprint 2002. 7. William Stalling, “Network security, essentials”, Pearson education Asia publication,

4th Edition, 2011.

MECE-302 Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about basic theories of pattern recognition. To introduce the students about parametric linear models of regression. To introduce the students about neural network designing linear discriminant

functions. To introduce the students about machine independent & unsupervised learning

techniques.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to Pattern Recognition: Problems, applications, design cycle, learning and adaptation, examples, Probability Distributions, Parametric Learning, Maximum likelihood and Bayesian Decision Theory, Bayes rule, discriminant functions, loss functions and Bayesian error analysis

Unit 2: Linear models: Linear Models for Regression, linear regression, logistic regression

Linear Models for Classification. Unit 3: Neural Network: Perceptron, multi-layer perceptron, backpropagation algorithm,

error surfaces, practical techniques for improving backpropagation, additional networks and training methods, Adaboost, Deep Learning

Unit 4: Linear discriminant functions - decision surfaces, two-category, multi-category,

minimumsquared error procedures, the Ho-Kashyap procedures, linear programming algorithms, Support vector machine

Unit 5: Algorithm independent machine learning: lack of inherent superiority of any

classifier, bias and variance, re-sampling for classifier design, combining classifiers Unit 6: Unsupervised learning and clustering: k-means clustering, fuzzy k-means

clustering, hierarchical clustering Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Study the parametric and linear models for classification Design neural network and SVM for classification Develop machine independent and unsupervised learning techniques

References:

1. Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart, David G. Stork, “Pattern Classification”, 2nd Edition John Wiley & Sons, 2001.

2. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome H. Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning”, 2nd Edition, Springer, 2009.

3. C. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.

MECE-303 Remote Sensing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce physics of remote sensing via atmospheric conditions. To give exposure to students regarding various data acquisition techniques for remote

sensing application. To study myriad remote sensing platform , airborne, space borne, sensor. To learn enhancement protocols for efficient data analysis via remote sensing.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Physics Of Remote Sensing: Electro Magnetic Spectrum, Physics of Remote

Sensing, Effects of Atmosphere, Scattering, Different types Absorption, Atmospheric window, Energy interaction with surface features, Spectral reflectance of vegetation, soil and water atmospheric influence on spectral response patterns-multi concept in Remote sensing.

Unit 2: Data Acquisition: Types of Platforms different types of aircrafts, Manned and

Unmanned spacecrafts, sun synchronous and geo synchronous satellites, Types and characteristics of different platforms, LANDSAT, SPOT, IRS, INSAT, IKONOS, QUICKBIRD etc

Unit 3: Photographic products, B/W, color, color IR film and their characteristics:

resolving power of lens and film, Opto mechanical electro optical sensors, across track and along track, scanners-multispectral scanners and thermal scanners–geometric characteristics of scanner imagery-calibration of thermal scanners.

Unit 4: Scattering System: Microwave scatterometry, types of RADAR, SLAR, resolution

range and azimuth, real aperture and synthetic aperture RADAR, Characteristics of Microwave images topographic effect-different types of Remote Sensing platforms airborne and space borne, sensors ERS, JERS, RADARSAT, RISAT Scatterometer, Altimeter LiDAR remote sensing, principles, applications.

Unit 5: Thermal And Hyper Spectral Remote Sensing: Sensors characteristics principle of

spectroscopy-imaging spectroscopy field conditions, compound spectral curve, Spectral library, radiative models, processing procedures, derivative spectrometry, thermal remote sensing thermal sensors, principles, thermal data processing, applications.

Unit 6: Data Analysis: Resolution: Spatial, Spectral, Radiometric and temporal resolution-

signal to noise ratio data products and their characteristics-visual and digital interpretation, Basic principles of data processing, Radiometric correction, Image enhancement, Image classification, Principles of LiDAR, Aerial Laser Terrain Mapping.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to: Understand basic concepts, principles and applications of remote sensing, particularly

the geometric and radiometric principles. Understand various types of remote sensing techniques. Provide examples of applications of principles to a variety of topics in remote sensing,

particularly related to data collection, radiation, resolution, and sampling. Design various data processing techniques for radiometer correct & image

enhancement.

References: 1. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer,R.W. Remote Sensing and Image interpretation, John

Wiley & Sons-2000, 6thEdition 2. John R. Jensen, Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing

Perspective, 2nd Edition, 1995. 3. John A.Richards, Springer –Verlag, Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis,1999. 4. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing, ELBS; 1995. 5. Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl , Introduction To The Physics and Techniques of

Remote Sensing , Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006. 6. Sabins, F.F.Jr, Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation, W.H.Freeman&

Co, 1978

MECE-304 Electronics System Design L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about basics of Digital Electronics. To introduce the students about the design of Combinational Circuit To introduce the students about design of Sequential Circuit To introduce the students about Multi Input System Controller Design To introduce the students about Asynchronous Finite State Machines.

Syllabus

Unit 1 Review of Digital Electronics concept Unit 2 MSI and LSI Circuits And Their Applications: Arithmetic Circuits, Comparators,

Multiplexers, Code Converters, XOR And AND-OR INVERTER Gates, Wired Logic, Bus Oriented Structures, Tri-State Bus System, Propagation Delay.

Unit 3 Sequential Machines: The Concept Of Memory, The Binary Cell, The Cell And The

Bouncing Switch, Set I Reset, D, Clocked T, Clocked JK Flip Flop, Design Of Clock FIF, Conversion, Clocking Aspects, Clock Skew, State Diagram Synchronous Analysis Process, Design Steps For Traditional Synchronous Sequential Circuits, State Reduction, Design Steps For Next State Decoders, Design Of Out Put Decoders, Counters, Shift Registers and Memory.

Unit 4 Multi Input System Controller Design: System Controllers, Design Phases And

System Documentation, Defining The System, Timing And Frequency Considerations, Functional, Position And Detailed Flow Diagram Development, MDS Diagram, Generation, Synchronizing Two System And Choosing Controller, Architecture, State Assignment, Next State Decoders And Its Maps, Output Decoders, Clock And Power Supply Requirements, MSI Decoders, Multiplexers In System Controllers, Indirect Addressed Multiplexers Configurations, Programmable System Controllers, ROM, PLA And PAL Based Design. Introduction to the CPLD & FPGA.

Unit 5 Asynchronous Finite State Machines: Scope, Asynchronous Analysis, Design Of

Asynchronous Machines, Cycle And Races, Plotting And Reading The Excitation Map, Hazards, Essential Hazards Map Entered Variable, MEV Approaches To Asynchronous Design, Hazards In Circuit Developed By MEV Method.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand all the basic gates, number system and corresponding conversions, various binary codes and codes available for error detection and correction.

Understand the design and explain working of various types of combinational circuits. Understand the design and analysis of different sequential circuits. Understand the design and analysis of Multi input system controller.

Understand the design and analysis of Asynchronous finite state machines. Text Books:

1. Fletcher, "An Engineering Approach to Digital Design" PHI 1990 2. Z. Kohavi, "Switching and Finite Automata Theory", TMH

Reference Books

1. Markovitz, "Introduction to Logic Design", TMH 2. Mano, "Digital Design", PHI

OPEN ELECTIVES MECO-301 Business Analytics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

Understand the role of business analytics within an organization. Analyze data using statistical and data mining techniques and understand relationships

between the underlying business processes of an organization. To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and

solve business problems and to support managerial decision making. To become familiar with processes needed to develop, report, and analyze business

data. Use decision-making tools/Operations research techniques. Mange business process using analytical and management tools. Analyze and solve problems from different industries such as manufacturing, service,

retail, software, banking and finance, sports, pharmaceutical, aerospace etc. Syllabus Unit1: Business analytics: Overview of Business analytics, Scope of Business analytics,

Business Analytics Process, Relationship of Business Analytics Process and organisation, competitive advantages of Business Analytics. Statistical Tools, Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical methods, Review of probability distribution and data modelling, sampling and estimation methods overview.

Unit 2: Trendiness and Regression Analysis: Modelling Relationships and Trends in Data,

simple Linear Regression, Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, Business Analytics Technology.

Unit 3: Organization Structures of Business analytics, Team management, Management

Issues, Designing Information Policy, Outsourcing, Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business analytics, Managing Changes. Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive analytics analysis, Data Mining, Data Mining Methodologies, Prescriptive analytics and its step in the business analytics Process, Prescriptive Modelling, nonlinear Optimization.

Unit 4: Forecasting Techniques: Qualitative and Judgmental Forecasting, Statistical

Forecasting Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate Forecasting Models. Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis: Monte Carle Simulation Using Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor Model, Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.

Unit 5: Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision Strategies with the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The Value of Information, Utility and Decision Making.

Unit 6: Recent Trends in : Embedded and collaborative business intelligence, Visual data recovery, Data Storytelling and Data journalism.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

1. Students will demonstrate knowledge of data analytics. 2. Students will demonstrate the ability of think critically in making decisions based on

data and deep analytics. 3. Students will demonstrate the ability to use technical skills in predicative and

prescriptive modeling to support business decision-making. 4. Students will demonstrate the ability to translate data into clear, actionable insights.

MECO-302 Industrial Safety L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus Unit-I: Industrial safety: Accident, causes, types, results and control, mechanical and

electrical hazards, types, causes and preventive steps/procedure, describe salient points of factories act 1948 for health and safety, wash rooms, drinking water layouts, light, cleanliness, fire, guarding, pressure vessels, etc, Safety color codes. Fire prevention and firefighting, equipment and methods.

Unit-II: Fundamentals of maintenance engineering: Definition and aim of maintenance

engineering, Primary and secondary functions and responsibility of maintenance department, Types of maintenance, Types and applications of tools used for maintenance, Maintenance cost & its relation with replacement economy, Service life of equipment.

Unit-III: Wear and Corrosion and their prevention: Wear- types, causes, effects, wear

reduction methods, lubricants-types and applications, Lubrication methods, general sketch, working and applications, i. Screw down grease cup, ii. Pressure grease gun, iii. Splash lubrication, iv. Gravity lubrication, v, Wick feed lubrication vi. Side feed lubrication, vii. Ring lubrication, Definition, principle and factors affecting the corrosion. Types of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods.

Unit-IV: Fault tracing: Fault tracing-concept and importance, decision treeconcept, need and

applications, sequence of fault finding activities, show as decision tree, draw decision tree for problems in machine tools, hydraulic, pneumatic,automotive, thermal and electrical equipment‟s like, I. Any one machine tool, ii. Pump iii. Air compressor, iv. Internal combustion engine, v. Boiler, vi. Electrical motors, Types of faults in machine tools and their general causes.

Unit-V: Periodic and preventive maintenance: Periodic inspection-concept and need,

degreasing, cleaning and repairing schemes, overhauling of mechanical components, overhauling of electrical motor, common troubles and remedies of electric motor, repair complexities and its use, definition, need, steps and advantages of preventive maintenance. Steps/procedure for periodic and preventive maintenance of I. Machine tools, ii. Pumps, iii. Air compressors, iv. Diesel generating (DG) sets, Program and schedule of preventive maintenance of mechanical and electrical equipment, advantages of preventive maintenance. Repair cycle concept and importance

Reference:

1. Maintenance Engineering Handbook, Higgins & Morrow, Da Information Services. 2. Maintenance Engineering, H. P. Garg, S. Chand and Company. 3. Pump-hydraulic Compressors, Audels, Mcgrew Hill Publication. 4. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Winterkorn, Hans, Chapman & Hall London.

MECO-303 Operations Research L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus Unit 1: Optimization Techniques, Model Formulation, models, General L.R Formulation,

Simplex Techniques, Sensitivity Analysis, Inventory Control Models Unit 2 Formulation of a LPP, Graphical solution revised simplex method, duality theory, dual

simplex method - sensitivity analysis - parametric programming Unit 3: Nonlinear programming problem, Kuhn-Tucker conditions min cost flow problem,

max flow problem, CPM/PERT Unit 4: Scheduling and sequencing - single server and multiple server models, deterministic

inventory models, Probabilistic inventory control models, Geometric Programming. Unit 5: Competitive Models,Single and Multi-channel Problems, Sequencing Models,

Dynamic Programming, Flow in Networks, Elementary Graph Theory, Game Theory Simulation

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

Students should able to apply the dynamic programming to solve problems of discreet and continuous variables.

Students should able to apply the concept of non-linear programming Students should able to carry out sensitivity analysis Student should able to model the real world problem and simulate it.

References:

1. H.A. Taha, Operations Research, An Introduction, PHI, 2008 2. H.M. Wagner, Principles of Operations Research, PHI, Delhi, 1982. 3. J.C. Pant, Introduction to Optimisation: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, Delhi,

2008 4. Hitler Libermann Operations Research: McGraw Hill Pub. 2009 5. Pannerselvam, Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010 6. Harvey M Wagner, Principles of Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010

MECO-304 Cost Management of Engineering Projects L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus Unit 1: Introduction and Overview of the Strategic Cost Management Process Unit 2: Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential cost, Incremental cost

and Opportunity cost. Objectives of a Costing System; Inventory valuation; Creation of a Database for operational control; Provision of data for Decision-Making. Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and nontechnical activities. Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and documents Project team, Role of each member. Importance Project site, Data required with significance. Project contracts, Types and contents, Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning, mechanical and process.

Unit 3: Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing, Distinction between Marginal

Costing and Absorption Costing, Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis, Various decision-making problems, Standard Costing and Variance Analysis, Pricing strategies, Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle Costing, Costing of service sector, Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Total Quality Management and Theory of constraints, Activity-Based Cost Management, Bench Marking, Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis. Budgetary Control; Flexible Budgets, Performance budgets, Zero-based budgets, Measurement of Divisional profitability pricing decisions including transfer pricing.

Unit 4: Quantitative techniques for cost management, Linear Programming, PERT/CPM,

Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Simulation, Learning Curve Theory.

References:

1. Cost Accounting A Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting 3. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting 4. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler

publisher 5. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co.

Ltd.

MECO-305 Composite Materials L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus UNIT–I: INTRODUCTION: Definition, Classification and characteristics of Composite

materials, Advantages and application of composites, Functional requirements of reinforcement and matrix, Effect of reinforcement (size, shape, distribution, volume fraction) on overall composite performance.

UNIT – II: REINFORCEMENTS: Preparation-layup, curing, properties and applications of

glass fibers, carbon fibers, Kevlar fibers and Boron fibers. Properties and applications of whiskers, particle reinforcements, Mechanical Behavior of composites, Rule of mixtures, Inverse rule of mixtures, Isostrain and Isostress conditions.

UNIT – III: Manufacturing of Metal Matrix Composites: Casting, Solid State diffusion

technique, Cladding, Hot isostatic pressing, Properties and applications, Manufacturing of Ceramic Matrix Composites, Liquid Metal Infiltration, Liquid phase sintering, Manufacturing of Carbon, Carbon composites, Knitting, Braiding, Weaving, Properties and applications.

UNIT–IV: Manufacturing of Polymer Matrix Composites: Preparation of Moulding

compounds and prepregs hand layup method, Autoclave method, Filament winding method, Compression moulding, Reaction injection moulding. Properties and applications.

UNIT V: Strength: Laminar Failure Criteria-strength ratio, maximum stress criteria,

Maximum strain criteria, interacting failure criteria, hygrothermal failure, Laminate first play failure-insight strength, Laminate strength-ply discount truncated maximum strain criterion, strength design using caplet plots, stress concentrations.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Material Science and Technology, Vol 13, Composites by R.W.Cahn, VCH, West Germany.

2. Materials Science and Engineering, An introduction. WD Callister, Jr., Adapted by R. Balasubramaniam, John Wiley & Sons, NY, Indian edition, 2007.

References:

1. Hand Book of Composite Materials-ed-Lubin. 2. Composite Materials, K.K.Chawla. 3. Composite Materials Science and Application, Deborah D.L. Chung. 4. Composite Materials Design and Applications, Danial Gay, Suong V. Hoa, and

Stephen W. Tasi.

MECO-306 Waste to Energy L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Unit-I: Introduction to Energy from Waste: Classification of waste as fuel, Agro based,

Forest residue, Industrial waste, MSW, Conversion devices, Incinerators, gasifiers, digestors

Unit-II: Biomass Pyrolysis: Pyrolysis, Types, slow fast, Manufacture of charcoal, Methods,

Yields and application, Manufacture of pyrolytic oils and gases, yields and applications.

Unit-III: Biomass Gasification: Gasifiers, Fixed bed system, Downdraft and updraft

gasifiers, Fluidized bed gasifiers, Design, construction and operation, Gasifier burner arrangement for thermal heating, Gasifier engine arrangement and electrical power, Equilibrium and kinetic consideration in gasifier operation.

Unit-IV: Biomass Combustion: Biomass stoves, Improved chullahs, types, some exotic

designs, Fixed bed combustors, Types, inclined grate combustors, Fluidized bed combustors, Design, construction and operation, Operation of all the above biomass combustors.

Unit-V: Biogas: Properties of biogas (Calorific value and composition), Biogas plant

technology and status, Bio energy system, Design and constructional features, Biomass resources and their classification, Biomass conversion processes, Thermo chemical conversion, Direct combustion, biomass gasification, pyrolysis and liquefaction, biochemical conversion, anaerobic digestion, Types of biogas Plants, Applications, Alcohol production from biomass, Bio diesel production, Urban waste to energy conversion, Biomass energy programme in India.

References:

1. Non Conventional Energy, Desai, Ashok V., Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1990. 2. Biogas Technology - A Practical Hand Book - Khandelwal, K. C. and Mahdi, S. S.,

Vol. I & II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 1983. 3. Food, Feed and Fuel from Biomass, Challal, D. S., IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.,

1991. 4. Biomass Conversion and Technology, C. Y. WereKo-Brobby and E. B. Hagan, John

Wiley & Sons, 1996.

ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING (AUD01A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course objectives:

Understand that how to improve your writing skills and level of readability Learn about what to write in each section Understand the skills needed when writing a Title Ensure the good quality of paper at very first-time

submission Unit 1: Planning and Preparation, Word Order, Breaking up long sentences, Structuring

Paragraphs and Sentences, Being Concise and Removing Redundancy, Avoiding Ambiguity and Vagueness

Unit 2: Clarifying Who Did What, Highlighting Your Findings, Hedging and Criticising,

Paraphrasing and Plagiarism, Sections of a Paper, Abstracts. Introduction Unit 3: Review of the Literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, The Final

Check. Unit 4: key skills are needed when writing a Title, key skills are needed when writing an

Abstract, key skills are needed when writing an Introduction, skills needed when writing a Review of the Literature,

Unit 5: skills are needed when writing the Methods, skills needed when writing the Results,

skills are needed when writing the Discussion, skills are needed when writing the Conclusions

Unit 6: useful phrases, how to ensure paper is as good as it could possibly be the first- time

submission Suggested Studies:

1. Goldbort R (2006) Writing for Science, Yale University Press (available on Google Books) 2. Day R (2006) How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper, Cambridge University Press 3. Highman N (1998), Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences, SIAM. Highman‟s

Book .

1. Adrian Wallwork , English for Writing Research Papers, Springer New York Dordrecht Heidelberg London, 2011

DISASTER MANAGEMENT (AUD02A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

learn to demonstrate a critical understanding of key concepts in disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response.

critically evaluate disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response policy and practice from multiple perspectives.

develop an understanding of standards of humanitarian response and practical relevance in specific types of disasters and conflict situations.

critically understand the strengths and weaknesses of disaster management approaches, planning and programming in different countries, particularly their home country or the countries they work in

Syllabus Unit1: Introduction: Disaster: Definition, Factors And Significance; Difference Between

Hazard And Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference, Nature, Types And Magnitude.

Unit 2: Repercussions Of Disasters And Hazards: Economic Damage, Loss Of Human

And Animal Life, Destruction Of Ecosystem. Natural Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanisms, Cyclones, Tsunamis, Floods, Droughts And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-made disaster: Nuclear Reactor Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil Slicks And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And Epidemics, War And Conflicts.

Unit 3: Disaster Prone Areas In India: Study Of Seismic Zones, Areas Prone To Floods

And Droughts, Landslides And Avalanches, Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal Hazards With Special Reference To Tsunami, Post-Disaster Diseases And Epidemics.

Unit 4: Disaster Preparedness And Management: Preparedness, Monitoring Of

Phenomena Triggering A Disaster Or Hazard; Evaluation Of Risk, Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From Meteorological And Other Agencies, Media Reports, Governmental And Community Preparedness.

Unit 5: Risk Assessment: Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction,

Global And National Disaster Risk Situation, Techniques of Risk Assessment, Global Co-Operation In Risk Assessment And Warning, People‟s Participation In Risk Assessment. Strategies for Survival.

Unit 6: Disaster Mitigation: Meaning, Concept And Strategies Of Disaster Mitigation,

Emerging Trends in Mitigation, Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural Mitigation, Programs of Disaster Mitigation In India.

SUGGESTED READINGS: 1. R. Nishith, Singh AK, “Disaster Management in India: Perspectives, issues and strategies “‟New Royal

book Company. 2. Sahni, Pardeep Et.Al. (Eds.),” Disaster Mitigation Experiences And Reflections”, Prentice Hall Of

India, New Delhi. 3. Goel S. L. , Disaster Administration And Management Text And Case Studies” ,Deep &Deep

Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

SANSKRIT FOR TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE (AUD03A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives To get a working knowledge in illustrious Sanskrit, the scientific language in the world Learning of Sanskrit to improve brain functioning Learning of Sanskrit to develop the logic in mathematics, science & other subjects enhancing the

memory power The engineering scholars equipped with Sanskrit will be able to explore the huge knowledge from

ancient literature Syllabus Unit 1: Alphabets in Sanskrit, Past/Present/Future Tense, Simple Sentences Unit 2: Order, Introduction of roots, Technical information about Sanskrit Literature Unit 3: Technical concepts of Engineering-Electrical, Mechanical, Architecture, Mathematics Suggested reading

1. “Abhyaspustakam” – Dr.Vishwas, Samskrita-Bharti Publication, New Delhi 2. “Teach Yourself Sanskrit” Prathama Deeksha-Vempati Kutumbshastri, Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthanam,

New Delhi Publication 3. “India‟s Glorious Scientific Tradition” Suresh Soni, Ocean books (P) Ltd., New Delhi.

Course Output

1. Understanding basic Sanskrit language 2. Ancient Sanskrit literature about science & technology can be understood 3. Being a logical language will help to develop logic in students

VALUE EDUCATION (AUD04A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives

Understand value of education and self- development Imbibe good values in students Let the should know about the importance of character

Unit 1: Values and self-development, Social values and individual attitudes, Work ethics,

Indian vision of humanism, Moral and non, moral valuation. Standards and principles, Value judgements

Unit 2: Importance of cultivation of values, Sense of duty. Devotion, Self-reliance.

Confidence, Concentration, Truthfulness, Cleanliness, Honesty, Humanity. Power of faith, National Unity, Patriotism.Love for nature ,Discipline

Unit 3: Personality and Behavior Development, Soul and Scientific, attitude, positive

thinking, integrity and discipline, Punctuality, Love and Kindness, Avoid fault Thinking, Free from anger, Dignity of labour, Universal brotherhood and religious tolerance, True friendship, Happiness Vs suffering, love for truth, Aware of self-destructive habits, Association and Cooperation, Doing best for saving nature

Unit 4: Character and Competence, Holy books vs Blind faith, Self-management and Good

health, Science of reincarnation, Equality, Nonviolence ,Humility, Role of Women, All religions and same message, Mind your Mind, Self-control, Honesty, Studying effectively

Suggested reading

1. Chakroborty, S.K. “Values and Ethics for organizations Theory and practice”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi

Course outcomes

Knowledge of self-development Learn the importance of Human values Developing the overall personality

CONSTITUTION OF INDIA (AUD05A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

Understand the premises informing the twin themes of liberty and freedom from a civil rights perspective.

To address the growth of Indian opinion regarding modern Indian intellectuals‟ constitutional role and entitlement to civil and economic rights as well as the emergence of nationhood in the early years of Indian nationalism.

To address the role of socialism in India after the commencement of the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917 and its impact on the initial drafting of the Indian Constitution.

Syllabus Unit 1: History of Making of the Indian Constitution: History, Drafting Committee,

(Composition & Working) Unit 2: Philosophy of the Indian Constitution: Preamble, Salient Features. Unit 3: Contours of Constitutional Rights & Duties: Fundamental Rights, Right to quality,

Right to Freedom, Right against Exploitation, Right to Freedom of Religion, Cultural and Educational Rights, Right to Constitutional Remedies, Directive Principles of State Policy, Fundamental Duties.

Unit 4: Organs of Governance: Parliament, Composition, Qualifications and is

qualifications, Powers and Functions, Executive, President, Governor, Council of Minister, Judiciary, Appointment and Transfer of Judges, Qualifications, Powers and Functions

Unit 5: Local Administration: District‟s Administration head: Role and Importance,

Municipalities: Introduction, Mayor and role of Elected Representative, CEO of Municipal Corporation, Pachayati raj, Introduction, PRI: Zila Pachayat, Elected officials and their roles, CEO Zila Pachayat, Position and role, Block level, Organizational Hierarchy (Different departments), Village level, Role of Elected and Appointed officials, Importance of grass root democracy

Unit 6: Election Commission: Election Commission, Role and Functioning, Chief Election

Commissioner and Election Commissioners, State Election Commission, Role and Functioning, Institute and Bodies for the welfare of SC/ST/OBC and women.

Course Outcomes:

Discuss the growth of the demand for civil rights in India for the bulk of Indians before the arrival of Gandhi in Indian politics.

Discuss the intellectual origins of the framework of argument that informed the conceptualization of social reforms leading to revolution in India.

Discuss the circumstances surrounding the foundation of the Congress Socialist Party [CSP] under the leadership of Jawaharlal Nehru and the eventual failure of the proposal of direct elections through adult suffrage in the Indian Constitution.

Discuss the passage of the Hindu Code Bill of 1956. Suggested reading

1. The Constitution of India, 1950 (Bare Act), Government Publication. 2. Dr. S. N. Busi, Dr. B. R. Ambedkar framing of Indian Constitution, 1st Edition, 2015. 3. M. P. Jain, Indian Constitution Law, 7th Edn., Lexis Nexis, 2014. 4. D.D. Basu, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Lexis Nexis, 2015.

PEDAGOGY STUDIES (AUD06A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

1. Review existing evidence on the review topic to inform programme design and policy making undertaken by the DfID, other agencies and researchers.

2. Identify critical evidence gaps to guide the development. Unit 1: Introduction and Methodology: Aims and rationale, Policy background,

Conceptual, framework and terminology, Theories of learning, Curriculum, Teacher education, Conceptual framework, Research questions, Overview of methodology and Searching,

Unit 2: Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and

informal classrooms in developing countries, Curriculum, Teacher education. Unit 3: Evidence on the effectiveness of pedagogical practices, Methodology for the in depth

stage: quality assessment of included studies, How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy? Theory of change, Strength and nature of the body of evidence for effective pedagogical practices, Pedagogic theory and pedagogical approaches, Teachers‟ attitudes and beliefs and Pedagogic strategies.

Unit 4: Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and follow-up

support, Peer support, Support from the head teacher and the community, Curriculum and assessment, Barriers to learning: limited resources and large class sizes

Unit 5: Research gaps and future directions: Research design, Contexts, Pedagogy,

Teacher education, Curriculum and assessment, Dissemination and research impact. Course Outcomes: Students will be able to understand:

What pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and informal classrooms in developing countries?

What is the evidence on the effectiveness of these pedagogical practices, in what conditions, and with what population of learners?

How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy?

Suggested reading

1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare, 31 (2): 245-261.

2. Agrawal M (2004) Curricular reform in schools: The importance of evaluation, Journal of Curriculum Studies, 36 (3): 361-379.

3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana - does it count? Multi-site teacher education research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.

4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Pryor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning of basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International Journal, Educational Development, 33 (3): 272–282.

5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary education. Oxford and Boston: Blackwell.

6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, „learning to read‟ campaign. 7. www.pratham.org/images/resource%20working%20paper%202.pdf.

STRESS MANAGEMENT BY YOGA (AUD07A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives

To achieve overall health of body and mind To overcome stress

Syllabus Unit 1: Definitions of Eight parts of yog. ( Ashtanga ) Unit 2: Yam and Niyam, Do`s and Don‟t‟s in life., i) Ahinsa, satya, astheya, bramhacharya and aparigraha, ii) Shaucha, santosh, tapa, swadhyay, ishwarpranidhan Unit 3: Asan and Pranayam, i) Various yog poses and their benefits for mind & body, ii)Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-Types of pranayam Course Outcomes:

Develop healthy mind in a healthy body thus improving social health also Improve efficiency

Suggested reading

1. „Yogic Asanas for Group Tarining-Part-I” : Janardan Swami Yogabhyasi Mandal, Nagpur 2. “Rajayoga or conquering the Internal Nature” by Swami Vivekananda, Advaita Ashrama (Publication

Department), Kolkata

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT THROUGH LIFE ENLIGHTENMENT SKILLS (AUD08A)

L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To learn to achieve the highest goal happily To become a person with stable mind, pleasing personality and determination To awaken wisdom in students

Unit 1: Neetisatakam-Holistic development of personality, Verses 19,20,21,22 (wisdom),

Verses 29,31,32 (pride & heroism), Verses 26,28,63,65 (virtue), Verses 52,53,59 (dont‟s), Verses 71,73,75,78 (do‟s)

Unit 2: Approach to day to day work and duties, Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta, Chapter 2-Verses

41, 47,48, Chapter 3 Verses 13, 21, 27, 35, Chapter 6 Verses 5,13,17, 23, 35, Chapter 18 Verses 45, 46, 48.

Unit 3: Statements of basic knowledge, Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta: Chapter2 Verses 56, 62,

68, Chapter 12 Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18, Personality of Role model. Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta, Chapter2 Verses 17, Chapter3 Verses 36,37,42, Chapter4 Verses 18, 38,39, Chapter18 Verses 37,38,63

Course Outcomes:

Study of Shrimad-Bhagwad-Geeta will help the student in developing his personality and achieve the highest goal in life

The person who has studied Geeta will lead the nation and mankind to peace and prosperity Study of Neetishatakam will help in developing versatile personality of students.

Suggested reading

1. “Srimad Bhagavad Gita” by Swami Swarupananda Advaita Ashram (Publication Department), Kolkata 2. Bhartrihari‟s Three Satakam (Niti-sringar-vairagya) by P.Gopinath, Rashtriya Sanskrit, Sansthanam,

New Delhi.

SWAMI VIVEKANANDA’S THOUGHTS (AUD09A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce biography and philosophical thought of Swami Vivekananda

To present Swami Vivekananda’s views on major religions of the world and Universal Religion

To present Swami Vivekananda’ teaching and views on social issues.

Syllabus Unit 1: Swami Vivekananda a Brief biography, Influence of Ramakrishna on Vivekananda,

Parliament of Religions, Establishment of Ramakrishna mission. Unit 2: Philosophy of Swami Vivekananda, Nature of Reality, Nature of Self, Nature of the

universe, The doctrine of Maya, Identity of Self and God, Karma Yoga, Raj Yoga , Bhakti Yoga, Gyan Yoga.

Unit 3: Swami Vivekananda‟s observations on major religions of the world (a) Hinduism (b)

Christianity (c) Islam Unit 4: The concept of Universal Religion and its characteristic, Fundamental unity of all

religions, acceptance and not tolerance is the principle. Unit 5: Vivekananda and Nationalism, The message of patriotism, spirituality as the basis of

patriotism, Sociological views of Vivekananda, His views on caste and untouchability, status of women, His views on Education, Swami Vivekananda‟s concept of Vedantic Socialism

Books: The Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda Vol. 1 to 8 Relevant Chapters

Implementation of Credit Transfer/Mobility Policy of online courses

Reference: Gazette of India (Extraordinary) Part-III, Section-4 No. 295, UGC (Credit Framework for

Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM) Regulation, 2016, dated 19/07/2016.

With reference to 12th Academic Council Meeting dated 03/05/2017 (Agenda Item No. AC/11/12), wherein MOOCs were adopted in the CBCS scheme, In continuation to that, following modalities are proposed to introduce the credit transfer policy in academic curriculum for the Massive Open Online Courses (MOOC‟s) offered through SWAYAM (Study Webs of Active-Learning for Young Aspiring Minds) Portal.

A. General Guidelines 1. The SWAYAM shall notify in June and November every year, the list of the online

learning Courses going to be offered in the forthcoming Semester on its website https://swayam.gov.in.

2. All the UTDs/Affiliated Colleges shall, within 4 weeks from the date of notification by SWAYAM, consider through their Chairperson/Principal the online learning courses being offered through the SWAYAM platform; and keeping in view their academic requirements, decide upon the courses which it shall permit for credit transfer and keeping in view the following points:

a) There is non-availability of suitable teaching staff for running a course in the

Department. b) The facilities for offering the elective papers (courses), sought for by

the students are not on offer/scheme in the Institution, but are available on the SWAYAM platform.

c) The courses offered on SWAYAM would supplement the teaching-learning process in the Institution.

d) Online courses through SWAYAM should not be more than 20% of total courses offered in a particular semester of a programme.

3. The courses offered in a particular semester will be compiled by Digital India Cell as decided and forwarded by concerned UTDs and affiliated colleges in the prescribed format to digitalindia.ymca@gmail.com and compiled set will be put up in Academic Council for approval.

4. Student can opt for 12-16 weeks course equivalent to 3-6 credits under mentorship of faculty (MHRD MOOC‟s guidelines 11.1(J) issued by the MHRD vide its orders dated 11/03/2016).

Annexure-A

Approved in 17th

Academic Council Dated 11.06.2019

5. Every student being offered a particular paper (course) would be required to register for the MOOCs for that course/paper on SWAYAM through University‟s/Affiliated College‟s SWAYAM-NPTEL Local Chapter.

6. The UTD/College may designate a faculty member as course coordinator/mentor to guide the students (at least 20 students) throughout the course with 2 hours per week contribution and with mentor addition on the Local Chapter. The mentor Chairperson/Principal will ensure the provision of facilities for smooth running of the course viz. Internet facility and proper venue in the department/college.

7. Digital India Cell of the University will be the Nodal point for keeping track of MOOCs enrolments in the University and the concerned chairpersons/principals are expected to aware their students/faculty about the online courses.

8. Importance of online learning and credit transfer policy must be shared with the students at entry level by the concerned department/college. Same may be incorporated during induction program for newly admitted students.

9. The departmental/college MOOC coordinators appointed by chairpersons of concerned departments/Principals of affiliated colleges will be responsible for identification of relevant MOOCs in the UTDs/Colleges and smooth conduction during the course.

B. Credit Transfer/Mobility of MOOCs

1. The parent Institution (offering the Course) shall give the equivalent credit weightage to the students for the credits earned through online learning courses through SWAYAM platform in the credit plan of the program.

2. Following pattern will be followed for distribution of credits and will be applicable to all students from Jan 2018 onwards:

Program Duration Minimum Credits to be

earned* B.Tech Semester I to VIII 3 M.Tech/MBA/M.Sc./MA Semester I to IV 3 BBA/BCA/B.Sc./BA Semester I to VI 3

*All students of UTDs/Affiliated colleges of all courses have to mandatorily earn minimum prescribed credits. Note: From session 2019-20 onwards, for B.Tech program, a student has to earn at least 12 credits during the duration of the Degree subject to the passing of at least one MOOC course (carrying minimum 3 credits per year).

3. A student will be eligible to get Under-Graduate/Post-Graduate degree

(B.Tech/M.Tech) with Honours if he/she completes additional credits through

MOOC‟s. (AICTE Model Curriculum, Chapter1(B)). Following pattern will be followed for earning additional credits for the award of Honours degree: Program Duration Credits to be

earned* Minimum CGPA

B.Tech Semester I to VIII 12 8.0 M.Tech Semester I to IV 6 8.0 *Inclusive of Minimum credits to be earned mentioned in clause B(2) above.

4. The earned credits shall be accepted and transferred to the total credits of the

concerned students by the University for Completion of his/her degree. Credits earned through MOOCs will be incorporated in the mark sheet issued to the student by Controller of Examination.

5. Credits for MOOC‟s will be verified by the concerned department/college and will be forwarded to Controller of Examination for further processing.

6. The courses where model curriculum of AICTE is not applicable, pattern laid down as in B(2) will be followed.

NOTE:

These guidelines will be applicable to all Affiliating institutions under University along with all UTDs. Affiliating colleges will establish their own Local Chapter on SWAYAM and follow the same process.

1. For further clarifications, Notifications “Credit Framework for Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM” (UGC Regulations dated 19/07/2016) and “MHRD MOOC‟s guidelines” (MHRD guidelines dated 11/03/2016) may be referred.

SCHEME & SYLLABUS

for

M.TECH. COURSE

in

Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (w.e.f. Session 2018-2019)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

J.C. BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, YMCA,

FARIDABAD

J.C.BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY,

YMCA, FARIDABAD

VISION

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, YMCA, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA

University of Science and Technology) aspires to be a nationally and internationally

acclaimed leader in technical and higher education in all spheres which transforms

the life of students through integration of teaching, research and character building.

MISSION

To contribute to the development of science and technology by synthesizing

teaching, research and creative activities.

To provide an enviable research environment and state-of-the-art technological

exposure to its scholars.

To develop human potential to its fullest extent and make them emerge as world

class leaders in their professions and enthuse them towards their social

responsibilities.

Department of Electronics Engineering

VISION

To be a Centre of Excellence for producing high quality engineers and scientists

capable of providing sustainable solutions to complex problems and promoting cost

effective indigenous technology in the area of Electronics, Communication & Control

Engineering for Industry, Research Organizations, Academia and all sections of society.

MISSION

To frame a well-balanced curriculum with an emphasis on basic theoretical knowledge

as well the requirements of the industry.

To motivate students to develop innovative solutions to the existing problems for

betterment of the society.

Collaboration with the industry, research establishments and other academic

institutions to bolster the research and development activities.

To provide infrastructure and financial support for culmination of novel ideas into

useful prototypes.

To promote research in emerging and interdisciplinary areas and act as a facilitator for

knowledge generation and dissemination through Research, Institute - Industry and

Institute-Institute interaction.

About Electronics Engineering Department

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA University of

Science & Technology, Faridabad) established in 2009, formerly known as YMCA Institute

of Engineering, Faridabad, established in year 1969 as a Joint Venture of Govt. of Haryana

and National Council of YMCA of India with active assistance from overseas agencies of

West Germany to produce highly practical oriented personnel in specialized field of

engineering to meet specific technical manpower requirement of industries. Electronics

Engineering Department started in 1969 and has been conducting B.Tech. Courses in

Electronics Instrumentation and Control and Electronics and Communication Engineering of

4-Years duration since 1997. Students are admitted through centralized counseling nominated

by state govt. in 1st Year and 2nd year through lateral entry entrance test. Besides under

graduate degree courses, it is also running M.Tech. Courses in VLSI, Instrumentation and

Electronics & Communication. Department of Electronics Engineering is also running Ph.D.

Programme. All courses are duly approved by AICTE/ UGC. The Electronics Engineering

Department has been well known for its track record of employment of the pass out students

since its inception.

The Department has good infrastructure consisting of 11 laboratories, 10 Lecture Halls and

1 Conference Room beside 6 workshops. It has excellent faculty with 2 Professors, 2

Associate Professors and 21 Assistant Professors. At present, 6 faculty members are PhD in

various specializations. The various syllabi of UG/PG courses have been prepared with

active participation from Industry. The Department is organizing number of expert lectures

from industry experts for students in every semester. During the project/dissertation work

emphasis has been given on skill enhancement of students. Choice based system allows

students to study the subjects of his/her choice from a number of elective courses /audit

courses.

Program Educational Objectives:

Students of the Master of Technology programs in Electronics and Instrumentation will

demonstrate

1. To educate and train the graduates with knowledge and skills necessary to formulate,

design and solve problems in the field of Electronics instrumentation and Control.

2. To provide technical skills in software and hardware tools related to the design and

implementation of Instrumentation and Control systems for real time applications.

3. To provide scope for Applied Research and innovation in the various fields of

Instrumentation & Control and enabling the students to work in the emerging areas.

4. To enhance communication and soft skills of students to make them work effectively

as a team

Program Outcomes:

1. Ability to acquire and apply in-depth knowledge in the area of Instrumentation and Control Engineering and contribute to the state-of-art.

2. An ability to independently carry out research /investigation and development work to solve practical problems

3. An ability to write and present a substantial technical report/document

4. An Ability to engage in life-long learning and learning through mistakes with / without external feedback.

5. An ability to understand the role of a leader, leadership principles and attitude conducive to effective professional practice of Instrumentation and Control Engineering.

6. An ability to understand the impact of research and responsibility in order to contribute to the society.

GRADING SCHEME

Marks % Grade Grade points Category

90-100 O 10 Outstanding 80 ≤ marks <90 A+ 9 Excellent 70 ≤ marks < 80 A 8 Very good 60 ≤ marks < 70 B+ 7 Good 50 ≤ marks < 60 B 6 Above average 45 ≤ marks < 50 C 5 Average 40 ≤ marks < 45 P 4 Pass <40 F 0 Fail

Ab 0 Absent Percentage calculation= CGPA * 9.5

M. TECH. (Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering)

Total Credits 68

Total Theory Subjects 11+2 Audits

Total Labs (including Projects) 5

Total Dissertation 2

SEMESTER WISE SUMMARY OF THE PROGRAMME: M.TECH. (EI)

S.No. Semester No. of Contact Hours Marks Credits

1 I 24 700 18

2 II 26 650 18

3 III 26 500 16

4 IV 32 500 16

Total 108 2350 68*

NOTE:

*It is mandatory to pass the MOOC course(s) by all the students as per

implementation of credit transfer/ mobility policy of on line courses of the

University-as mentioned in Annexure-A at the end of the syllabus.

Semester I M. Tech. (Electronics and Instrumentation)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits

Sessional Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P

1 PCC MEI101 Modern Control System

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC MEI102 Industrial Process Control

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

3 PEC Program Specific Elective-I

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

4 PEC Program Specific Elective-II

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

5 PCC RMI101 Research Methodology and IPR

2 0 0 2 25 75 100

6 AUD 1 Audit course 1 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 7 PCC MEI151 Modeling &

Simulation Lab 0 0 4 2 15 35 50

8 PCC MEI152 Computer Control Lab

0 0 4 2 15 35 50

Total Credits 18 180 520 700

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-I MEIE101 Optimization Technique MEIE102 Advanced Mathematics MEIE103 Modeling and Simulation Techniques

Program Elective-II MEIE104 Industrial Electronics MEIE105 Industrial Instrumentation MEIE106 Embedded System

AUD 1

AUD01A English for Research Paper Writing AUD02A Disaster Management AUD03A Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD04A Value Education AUD05A Constitution of India AUD06A Pedagogy Studies AUD07A Stress Management by Yoga AUD08A Personality Development through Life Enlightenment Skills. AUD09A Swami Vivekananda‟s Thoughts

Semester II M. Tech. (Electronics and Instrumentation)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits

Sessional Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC MEI201 Non Linear Control

System 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC MEI202 Optimal Control Theory 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PEC Program Specific

Elective-III 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

4 PEC Program Specific Elective-IV

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

5 AUD Audit course 2 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 6 PCC MEI251 Industrial Electronics

Lab 0 0 4 2 15 35 50

7 PCC MEI252 Digital Signal Processing Lab

0 0 4 2 15 35 50

8 PCC MEI253 Mini Project 0 0 4 2 15 35 50 Total Credits 18 170 480 650

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-III MEIE201 Industrial Measurement MEIE202 Bio-Medical Instrumentation MEIE203 Intelligent Instrumentation

Program Elective-IV MEIE204 Advanced Digital Signal Processing MEIE205 Computer Network MEIE206 Digital Image Processing

AUD 2 (Audit 2 should be different from audit 1)

AUD01A English for Research Paper Writing AUD02A Disaster Management AUD03A Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD04A Value Education AUD05A Constitution of India AUD06A Pedagogy Studies AUD07A Stress Management by Yoga AUD08A Personality Development through Life Enlightenment Skills. AUD09A Swami Vivekananda‟s Thoughts

Semester III M. Tech. (Electronics and Instrumentation)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits

Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PEC Program Specific

Elective-V 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 OEC Open Elective 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC MEI351 Dissertation Phase – I 0 0 20 10 100 200 300

Total Credits 16 150 350 500

Course Name Course Title

Program Specific Elective-V

MEIE301 Digital Control System MEIE302 MEMS MEIE303 Process Instrumentation MEIE304 Stochastic Processes MEIE305 Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic MEIE306 Industrial Automation Control

Open Elective

MECO-301 Business Analytics MECO-302 Industrial Safety MECO-303 Operations Research MECO-304 Cost Management of Engineering Projects MECO-305 Composite Materials MECO-306 Waste to Energy

Semester IV M. Tech. (Electronics and Instrumentation)

Sr. No.

Category

Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P

1 PCC MEI401 Dissertation Phase – II 0 0 32 16 200 300 500 Total Credits 16 200 300 500

MEI101 Modern Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce students about the state variable analysis. To introduce the students for conversion of state variable model to transfer function

model. To give the exposure to students about discrete time system & Z-transform methods. To give the exposure to the students for stability analysis in Z-plane. To introduce the students to state analysis of linear discrete time system and

multivariable system. To introduce the students to various pole placement methods. To introduce the students to digital control system with digital feedback

Syllabus

State Variable Analysis Introduction, vectors and matrices, state variable representation, conversion of transfer function model to state variable model, conversion of state variable model to transfer function model, decomposition of transfer function into canonical state variable models, Eigen values and Eigen vectors, solution of state equations. Concept of controllability and observability, equivalence between transfer function and state variable representation. Discrete time system and Z transform methods Introduction to discrete time system, the Z transform, solution of difference equations, inverse Z transform, pulse transfer function, Stability analysis in Z plane. State variable analysis of discrete time system State space analysis of linear discrete time system, controllability and observability, multivariable system. Pole placement and state observers Introduction, stability improvement by state feedback, necessary and sufficient condition for arbitrary pole placement, state regulator design, design of state observers, state feedback with integral control, digital control system with state feedback. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand state space variable form, various canonical forms, state equation and its solutions.

Understand controllability & observability for continous time as well as discrete time systems.

Understand stability as well as stability improvement using pole placement, state observer for discrete as well as continous time systems.

Text Books

1. Control System by B. C. Kuo, TMH 2. Digital and non linear control by M. Gopal, TMH 3. Control System by Nagrath and Gopal, New Age Publications

MEI102 Industrial Process Control L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the basic principles & importance of process control in industrial process plants;

To analyse First order, second order, and integrating systems including dead time are treated with basic controller algorithms.

To introduce the dynamic behavior of processes in different situations To introduce about defining controller structure with respect to controlled process and

perform parameters tuning in order to assure required performance of the system. To introduce the concepts involved in multiple single loops in various applications. To introduce about theoretical and empirical mathematical models of different

processes To introduce about the design of different types of controllers To introduce about the key concepts in adaptive control system

Syllabus

Historical prospective, incentives of process control, synthesis of control system, classification and definition of variables. Need and application of mathematical modeling, lumped and distributed parameters, analogies, thermal, electrical and chemical systems, modeling of CSTR, heat exchanger, interacting and non interacting type of systems, dead time elements. Control modes, definition, characteristics and comparison of P, PI, PD, PID controllers. Dynamic behavior of feedback controlled process for different control modes, control system quality, IAE, ISE, IATE criterion, tuning of controllers, Ziegler-Nicholos and Cohen coon methods. Realization of different control modes in electric and electronic controllers. Control valves, types, function, hydraulic, pneumatic actuators, solenoid, stepper motors. Review and limitation of single loop control, need for multi loop systems. Principle, analysis and application of cascade, ratio, feed forward, feedback, override, split range, selective, auctioneering control. Introduction to adaptive and self tuning control. Interaction and decoupling of loops.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Understand the basic principles & importance of process control in industrial process

plants. Model and analyze first order and integrating systems including dead time and their

characteristics. Understand different types of controller, their tuning and their effect on

system performance. Describe different control values used in industrial applications. Understand concept of single loop, multiple loop, single variable and

multivariable controlled process. Understand adaptive, self tuning, interaction and decoupling of loops.

Text Books-

1. George Stephnopolous “Chemical Process Control” Prentice Hall 2. Peter Herriot, “ Process control” Tata McGraw Hill 3. Donald R caughanowr “ Process System Analysis and control” McGraw Hill

international edition. 4. D.P.Eckmen “ Industrial instrumentation” Wiley Eastern.

MEIE101 Optimization Technique L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about optimization concepts, formulation of engineering problems amenable to optimization.

To introduce the students about the concepts for determination of maxima minima for functions of several variables.

To introduce the students about the formulation of non linear optimization problems with equality & in equality constraints.

To introduce the students about Uni dimensional optimization. To introduce the students about multivariable optimization. To introduce the students about Dynamic programming & Geometric programming.

Syllabus

Introduction: –Optimization concepts, Euclidean space, convex functions, gradient vector, Hessian matrix, formulation of engineering problems amenable to optimization, direct approach and indirect methods. Classical optimization techniques: –maxima minima for functions of several variables, necessary and sufficient conditions, formulation of non linear optimization problems with equality and inequality constraints, solution techniques using Lagrange‟s multiplier and khun-tuckker conditions. Uni dimensional optimization: –Elimination methods, interpolation methods. Multivariable optimization: –Methods of steepest descent, Newton Raphson methods, Fletcher power method, constrained optimization. Other techniques; –Principle of optimality, solution for simple multistage problems, Dynamic Programming, Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the formulation of engineering problems ammable to optimization using direct approach & indirect approach methods.

Understand the non linear optimization problems along with their solution for various techniques.

Understand elimination methods & interpolation methods used in Uni dimensional methods used in optimization.

Understand the concepts of hill climbing, newton Raphson methods, Fletcher power method for multivariable optimization.

Understand the solution for simple multistage problems using Dynamic programming & Geometric programming.

Text Books: S. S. Rao, “Optimization Techniques” , TMH

MEIE102 Advanced Mathematics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objective: To learn importance of reliability theory, numerical methods used in research. Ability to understand the use of statistical quality control in engineering research.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Linear Algebra Unit 2: Curve Fitting, Bath tub curve, state dependent systems, series and parallel

connections, redundancy of systems. Unit 3: Theory of reliability, maintainability, availability, failure distribution, MTTF, MTBF,

Hazard rate, Unit 4: Solution of Non Linear differential equation

Course Outcomes: Knowledge of optimization techniques and importance of reliability theory, numerical

methods used in research. Ability to understand the use of statistical quality control in engineering research.

Text books: 1. Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, 9th Students edition, Wiley International 2. Reliability and Maintainability Engineering, Charles Ebeling, Tata McGraw Hills

Publication 3. Engineering Optimization, S. S. Rao, New Age Publication Reference books: 1. Numerical Mehods – S. S. Sastry 2. Statistical methods- S. P. Gupta 3. Higher Engineering Mathematics – B.V.Ramana 4. Operations Research- S. D. Sharma 5. Theory and Problems in Numerical Methods – T. Veerarajan, T.Ramachandran 6. Probability and Statistics in Engineering – W. W. Hines et al

MEIE103 Modeling and Simulation Techniques L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

Introduce computer simulation technologies and techniques, provides the foundations for the student to understand computer simulation needs, and to implement and test a variety of simulation and data analysis libraries and programs. This course focuses what is needed to build simulation software environments, and not just building simulations using preexisting packages.

Introduce concepts of modeling layers of society's critical infrastructure networks. Build tools to view and control simulations and their results.

Syllabus Unit 1: Simulation Basics: Handling Stepped and Event-based Time in Simulations,

Discrete versus Continuous Modelling, Numerical Techniques, Sources and Propagation of Error

Unit 2: Dynamical, Finite State, and Complex Model Simulations: Graph or Network

Transitions Based Simulations, Actor Based Simulations, Mesh Based Simulations, Hybrid Simulations

Unit 3: Converting to Parallel and Distributed Simulations: Partitioning the Data,

Partitioning the Algorithms, Handling Inter-partition Dependencies Unit 4: Probability and Statisics for Simulations and Analysis: Introduction to

Queues and Random Noise, Random Variates Generation, Sensitivity Analysis Unit 5: Simulations Results Analysis and Viewing Tools: Display Forms: Tables, Graphs,

and Multidimensional Visualization, Terminals, X and MS Windows, and Web Interfaces, Validation of Model Results

Course Outcome: On completion of course students will be able to understand

Basic Model Forms Basic Simulation Approaches Handling Stepped and Event-based Time in Simulations Discrete versus Continuous Modelling Numerical Techniques Sources and Propagation of Error

MEIE104 Industrial Electronics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce students to different power devices to study their construction, characteristics and turning on circuits.

To give an exposure to students of working & analysis of controlled rectifiers for different loads, inverters, DC choppers and AC voltage controllers

To introduce the students to various welding techniques To introduce the students to various heating techniques To introduce the students to various power electronics applications like UPS, SMPS,

etc. and some protection circuits.

Syllabus Unit I: Industrial Solid State Devices : SCR, ASCR, RCT, Triac, Diac, Unijunction

Transistor, SUS, SBS, Power MOSFETs, MCT, Static Induction Devices Unit II: Industrial Converter and Regulated Power Suppliers: Single phase, three phase

and six phase controlled rectifiers and their performance , dual converters, single phase and three phase ac regulators.

Unit III: Industrial Choppers: Chopper classification, chopper operation, control strategies,

chopper configuration, thyristor chopper circuits, Jones chopper, Morgan chopper, Multiphase chopper

Unit IV: Industrial Invertors : Requirement of practical inverters - Types of inverters -

Single phase inverters using Thyristers -Ability to operate into inductive load - Overcurrent protection - Output. Voltage control - waveform control Typical inverter circuits - Three phase inverters.

Unit V: Industrial Process Control and applications : Resistance welding controls -

Resistance Welding process - Basic circuit for A.C. resistance Welding - Types of resistance Welding - Electronic Welding Control. (b) Induction heating - basic Principle - Theory - Applications - High frequency Power Source for Induction heating. (c) Dielectric heating - basic Principle - Theory - Applications - Electrodes used in Dielectric heating - Method of Coupling of Electrodes to the R.F. Generator - Thermal losses in Dielectric heating. (d) UPS, SMPS

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the working, characteristics and applications of various power devices (SCR, Diac, Triac, UJT etc) and analyze the devices in different connection conditions.

Understand the converter, chopper, inverter and analyzes their characteristics. Understand the operational characteristics of various A.C. voltage controllers and

compare their performances.

Understand the various types of Industrial electronics control techniques and their applications.

Text Books:-

1. Industrial Electronics : G.K. Mittal , Khanna Publisher 2. Industrial Electronics : Noel Morris ,McGraw Hill 3. Power Electronics : Ned Mohan, Wiely Eastern Publication 4. Power Electronics : C.W.Lander, McGraw Hill

MEIE105 Industrial Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives: To introduce the students regarding methods of Error Analysis, Uncertainty Analysis,

Statistical Analysis & Gaussian Error Distribution, methods of least square, curve fitting & rejection of data.

To introduce the students for various static, dynamic characteristics of instruments,

classification & selection of various types of transducers. To introduces the students for different types of AC bridges used for measurement of

low resistance, high resistance, medium resistance, Radioactive Instrumentation and Refractometry.

To introduces the students for studying various types of Telemetry Techniques and to

give the exposure to various types of recorders.

Syllabus Unit1: Error Analysis: Types of errors, Methods of error analysis, Uncertainty analysis,

Statistical analysis, Gaussian error distribution, Chi-Square test, Correlation coefficient, Student‟s t-test, Method of least square, Curve fitting, Graphical analysis, rejection of data.

Unit II: Static and Dynamic characteristics: Dynamic analysis of instrumentation system,

Relative merits of analytical and experimental modeling of dynamic behavior, Response of zero, first and 2nd order system to step, Pulse, Harmonic and random test signals, Frequency spectra, Auto correlation spectral density, Loading effects under static and dynamic conditions, Simulation of dynamic response.

Unit III: Classification, selection of transducers, Resistance, inductance and capacitance type

of transducers, measurement of displacement, strain, force, liquid level, pressure, velocity and acceleration.

Unit IV: Measurement of low, medium, and high resistance, A.C. Bridges, Measurement of

inductance and capacitance, R.L.C. Measurement, DeSauty's, Maxwell's, Anderson's, Schering and Campbell‟s bridges, errors in bridge measurements.

Unit V: Radioactive instrumentation and Refractometry:

a. X-ray spectrometry: Instrumentation for X-ray spectrometry, X-ray diffractometer: Bragg‟s law, Auger emission spectroscopy, Electron spectroscopy for chemical analysis (ESCA).

b. Radiation detectors: Ionization chamber, Geiger-Muller counter, proportional counter,

scintillation counters c. Refractometry: Principle, Abbe and Differential refractometer

UNIT VI: Methods of Data transmission: General telemetry systems, DC and AC

telemetry system. Modulation, Pulse telemetry systems, Digital telemetry. UNIT VII: Graphic Recorders: Graphic analog recorder, magnetic tape analog recorders,

oscillograhic analog recorders, digital recorders Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Understand the methods of Error Analysis, Gaussian Error Distribution and Methods of

Least Square and to understand and implement the static & dynamic characteristics of instruments.

Understand the loading effects under static & dynamic conditions and to understand the

criteria for selection of transducers & working of various types of transducers. Understand and implement the methods used for measurement of low resistance,

medium resistance & high resistance using bridges and to understand about the use of the radioactive instrumentation & refractometry.

Understand about the use of Analog & Digital Telemetry systems and to understand the

working of various types of Analog & Digital recorders. Text Books:

1. Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Willard, Merritt, Dean, Settle, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, Seventh edition.

2. Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, Robert D. Braun, McGraw-Hill Book Company.

3. Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Skoog, Holler, Nieman, Thomsonbrooks-cole publications, 5th edition.

4. Electrical Measurement & Measuring Instruments E.W.Golding 5. Electrical Measurement A.K.Sawhney

MEIE106 Embedded System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To learn design concept and approach of embedded systems using advanced controllers. To learn hardware design features and memories of embedded systems. To learn software design features of embedded systems. To learn processor peripherals and their interfacing with microprocessors.

Syllabus

UNIT 1: Concept of Embedded Systems Design: Embedded system overview, design

challenges, processor technology, design technology, and Examples of Embedded System.

UNIT 2: Custom single-purpose processors: Hardware, Basic combinational logic design,

Sequential logic design, custom single purpose processor design. UNIT 3: General purpose processors: Software, Basic architecture, operation,

programmer‟s view, development environment, ASIC processors. UNIT 4: Microprocessors memories: Memory write ability and storage permanence,

common memory types, memory hierarchy and cache, Advanced RAM. UNIT 5: Standard single: purpose processors, peripherals, Timers, counters, watchdog

timers, UART, PWM, RTC, LCD controllers, keypad controllers, ADCs, Stepper motor controllers.

UNIT 6: Microprocessor Interfacing: Communication basics, I/O addressing, Interrupts,

DMA, arbitration. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand design concept and approach of embedded systems using advanced controllers.

Understand hardware design features and memories of embedded systems. Understand software design features of embedded systems. Understand processor peripherals and their interfacing with microprocessors.

Text/Reference Books:

1. Frank Vahid , “Embedded System Design” Wiley India Edition, 2001. 2. J.W. Valvano, "Embedded Microcomputer System: Real Time Interfacing", Brooks/Cole, 3. 2000. 4. Jack Ganssle, "The Art of Designing Embedded Systems", Newness, 1999. 5. V.K. Madisetti, "VLSI Digital Signal Processing", IEEE Press (NY, USA), 1995. 6. David Simon, "An Embedded Software Primer", Addison Wesley, 2000. 7. K.J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming, and Applications",

Penram Intl, 1996.

RMI101 Research Methodology and IPR L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 2 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 2 Hrs.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics of a good research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and objectives of research problem. Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, analysis, interpretation, Necessary instrumentations

Unit 2: Effective literature studies approaches, analysis Plagiarism , Research ethics, Unit 3: Effective technical writing, how to write report, Paper Developing a Research

Proposal, Format of research proposal, a presentation and assessment by a review committee

Unit 4: Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trade and Copyright. Process of

Patenting and Development, technological research, innovation, patenting, development. International Scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property, Procedure for grants of patents, Patenting under PCT.

Unit 5: Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights, Licensing and transfer of technology, Patent

information and databases, Geographical Indications. Unit 6: New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System, New developments in

IPR, IPR of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc. Traditional knowledge Case, Studies, IPR and IITs.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand research problem formulation. Analyze research related information Follow research ethics Understand that today‟s world is controlled by Computer, Information Technology,

but tomorrow world will be ruled by ideas, concept, and creativity. Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of

individuals & nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about Intellectual Property Right to be promoted among students in general & engineering in particular.

Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research work and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and in turn brings about, economic growth and social benefits.

References: 1. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research methodology: an introduction for

science & engineering students‟” 2. Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, “Research Methodology: An Introduction” 3. Ranjit Kumar, 2 nd Edition , “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for

beginners” 4. Halbert, “Resisting Intellectual Property”, Taylor & Francis Ltd ,2007. 5. Mayall , “Industrial Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992. 6. Niebel , “Product Design”, McGraw Hill, 1974. 7. Asimov , “Introduction to Design”, Prentice Hall, 1962. 8. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley, “ Intellectual Property in New

Technological Age”, 2016. 9. T. Ramappa, “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S. Chand, 2008

MEI151 Modeling & Simulation Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 4 2 Class Work : 15 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments 1. To convert various control system forms into state space form & vice versa using

MATLAB. 2. To check the controllability & observability of a continuous time system using

MATLAB. 3. To check the controllability & observability of a discrete time system using

MATLAB. 4. To convert a given state space form of a system into phase variable ,controllable

canonical & diagonal canonical form using MATLAB 5. To design a state feedback controller using pole placement with MATLAB& check

the stability of the system. 6. To design a state observer for a given control system using MATLAB. 7. To check the stability of a continuous time system using bode plot&Nyquist plot. 8. To calculate state transition matrix for a given state space system using various

methods in MATLAB.

Course outcome: After completion of the lab, the students will be able to Understand the various representations & canonical forms of a control system.

Understand the concept of stability for a control system.

Understand the concept of controllability & observability of continuous time& discrete time control systems.

Design a state feedback controller using pole placement & state observer.

MEI152 Computer Control Lab L T P CR Theory : 35 0 0 4 2 Class Work : 15 Total : 50 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. List of Experiments

1. To develop the state variables and state equation of the Continuous Stirred Tank

Reactor (CSTR).

2. A) To model and observe dynamic response of mass storage capacity system.

B) To observe effect of system parameters on its performance.

3. A) To model and observe dynamic response of two non-interacting mass storage

capacity system.

B) To observe effect of system parameters on its performance.

4. To model and observe dynamic response of two interacting mass storage capacity

system. To observe effect of system parameters on its performance.

5. To model single order mass storage capacity system with time delay. Also observe

effect of time delay on time response characteristics of the system.

6. Study and design P controller for a given transfer function of a system using Simulink

in MATLAB. Observe effect of different parameters of controller on the performance

characteristics of closed loop system.

7. Study and design PI controller for a given transfer function of a system using

Simulink in MATLAB. Observe effect of different parameters of controller on the

performance characteristics of closed loop system.

8. Study and design PID controller for a given transfer function of a system using

Simulink in MATLAB. Observe effect of different parameters of controller on the

performance characteristics of closed loop system.

9. To observe dynamic characteristics of feed forward controller.

10. To observe dynamic characteristics of feed backward controller. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

To model multicapacity systems and observe their characteristics using MATLAB.

To model multicapacity systems with time delay and observe their characteristics using MATLAB.

To understand effect of different controllers i.e. P, PI, PID on the dynamic

performance of closed loop system using MATLAB SIMULINK.

To observe dynamic characteristics of feed forward and feed backward controller

MEI201 Non Linear Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives: To introduce the students regarding describing function analysis of non linear control

system. To introduce the students regarding phase plane analysis of linear control system & non

linear control system. To introduce the students about the methods of stability of linear systems & non linear

systems using Liapunov Stability Analysis. To introduce the methods for estimating the time response behavior of dynamic

systems. To introduce the methods to formulate Liapunov Function.

Syllabus

Describing function analysis of non linear control systems – Introduction to non linear system, nonlinear control system, Describing functions, describing function analysis to non linear control systems. Phase plane analysis - Introduction, methods of constructing trajectories, obtaining time solutions from phase plane plots, singular points, phase plane analysis of linear control systems, phase plane analysis of nonlinear systems,estimating the time response behavior of dynamic system. Liapunov stability Analysis – Introductions, definitions, second method of liapunov, stability analysis of linear system, stability analysis of non linear systems, methods to formulate liapunov function. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Understand and Differentiate between linear and nonlinear system, characteristics of

non linear system, methods of analysis of non linear system for stability. Understand about the phase plane analysis and also about the methods of constructing

trajectories for stability analysis. Understand about the concept of Liapunov Stability criteria.

Text Books:

1. K Ogatta, “Control System Theory” , PHI

2. Gibson, “Non Linear Control System” , TMH

3. M. Gopal “ Discrete and non linear system”, TMH

MEI202 Optimal Control Theory L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives: To introduce the students about optimal control system and time optimal control system.

To introduce the students for formulation of optimization.

To introduce the students about the complete state problems controllability of

continuous system & discrete system. To introduce the students about the complete state of observability of continuous &

discrete system. To introduce the students about the time optimal control for continuous time system &

discrete time system. To introduce the applications of optimal control to dynamics systems.

To introduce Dynamic programming & optimal control of distributed parameter system.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction: – Introduction, optimal control system, performance indices,

Formulation of optimization problems, time optimal control systems. Unit 2: Calculus of variations :- Calculus of variations, applications of optimal control to

dynamic systems. Pontryagin minimum principle and its application to optimal control problems with constraints

Unit 3: Dynamic Programming: Dynamic Programming, Bellman- Jacobi equation and its

applications, introduction to optimal control of distributed parameter system. Solution algebraic Ricattii‟s equation for linear regulator problem.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Understand about the optimal control & performance indices.

Understand about the complete state controllability of continuous system & discrete

system. Understand about the time optimal control for continuous system & discrete time

system. Understand about the optimal control system based on quadratic performance induces

and applications of optimal control to dynamic systems.

Understand about Ricattii‟s equation for linear regulator problem Text Books:

1. A.J.Kirk, “Optimal Control Theory” ,TMH 2. M. Gopal, “introducing Optimal Control System” , TMH 3. M. Gopal, “Descrete and Non Linear system” , TMH 4. Nagrath And Gopal, “Control System” , TMH 5. K.Ogatta, Modern Control System, TMH

MEIE201 Industrial Measurement L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To learn measurement of Pressure, Flow and Temperature

Syllabus Unit 1: Measurement Techniques Pressure Unit 2: Measurement Techniques Flow Unit 3: Measurement Techniques Temperature Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand measurement of Pressure, Flow and Temperature

Text Books:

1. Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Willard, Merritt, Dean, Settle, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, Seventh edition.

2. Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, Robert D. Braun, McGraw-Hill Book Company.

3. Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Skoog, Holler, Nieman, Thomsonbrooks-cole publications, 5th edition.

4. Electrical Measurement & Measuring Instruments E.W.Golding 5. Electrical Measurement A.K. Sawhney

MEIE202 Bio Medical Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives: To introduce students to the origin of Bio-electric signals & sources of low recording

circuits. To introduce the students about the various types of recorders and transducers used. To introduce the students about Bio-medical recorders & display devices. To introduce the students about various BP measurement techniques. To introduce the students and about MRI and Ultrasonic imaging systems. To introduce the students about various types of cardiac pacemakers & defibrillators. To introduce the students about bio-telemetry & applications of bio-telemetry in patient

care. To introduce the students about various types of LASERs and their applications in Bio-

medical Fields. Syllabus

Unit I: Introduction, general block diagram of bio medical instrumentation system, origin of bio electric signals, recording systems, preamplifiers, main amplifiers and transducers used for medical instrumentation system, types of recorders

Unit II: Biomedical recorders and display systems-ECG, EEG,EMG, electrodes used for

ECG, EEG and EMG, oscilloscopes used for bio medical measurement, multi channel display

Unit III: Blood gas analyzer- blood pressure measurement, patient monitoring systems,

blood pH measurement, complete blood gas analyzer Unit IV: Special machines- X ray machine, MRI, ultrasonic imaging systems, A-scanner, B-

scanner, echo cardiograph Unit V: Cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators- external pace maker, implanted pace maker,

programmable pace maker, DC defibrillators, implantable defibrillators Unit VI: Laser applications in bio medical field- ruby laser, argon laser, helium neon laser,

CO2 laser, Na-yag laser Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to: Understand the various types of bio-electric signals, bio-medical recorders & display

systems. Understand the oscilloscopes bio-medical measurements. Understand the various types of BP measurement techniques. Understand the basic principles and applications of MRI and Ultrasonic imaging

techniques. Understand the various types of pacemakers & defibrillators.

Understand the components of bio-telemetry and its applications required for patient care.

Understand the various types of LASERs & their applications in Bio-medical field. Text Books

1. R.S.Khandpur, “ Introduction to bio medical Instrumentation”, TMH 2. Cromwell, “Bio medical Instrumentation” , TMH

MEIE203 Intelligent Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about intelligent instrumentation system and characteristics of intelligent instrumentation.

To introduce the students for various types of instrumentation/computer networks. To introduce students virtual instrumentation and programming in Labview. To introduce the students about various types of interfacing techniques. To introduce the students about various types of analysis techniques.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction: Definition of an intelligent instrumentation system, Static and Dynamic characteristics of intelligent instrumentation, feature of intelligent instrumentation, Block Diagram of an intelligent instrumentation.

Unit 2: Instrumentation/Computer Networks: Serial & parallel interfaces, serial

communication standards, parallel data bus, EEE 488bus, Local area networks (LANs), Star networks, Ring & bus networks, Fiber optic distributed networks.

Unit 3: Virtual Instrumentation: Introduction to graphical programming data flow &

graphical programming techniques, advantage of Virtual Instrumentation techniques, Virtual Instrumentations and sub Virtual Instrumentation loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structure, formula notes, string and file Input/Output.

Unit 3: Interfacing Instruments & Computers: Basic issues of interfacing, Address

decoding, Data transfer control, A/D converter, D/A converter, other interface consideration.

Unit 4: Analysis Technique: DSP software, Measurement filters and wavelets, windows,

curve fitting probability and statistics. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Define the meaning of intelligent instrumentation syatem and its static and dynamic characteristics.

Understand the various serial and parallel data transfer standards i.e. RS232 and IEEE488.

Write VI program in LABVIEW to implement various virtual instrumentation system. Do interfacing of ADC and DAC and other peripherals to microprocessor using

decoders. To implement various filters and wavelets using DSP software.

BOOKS: 1. Intelligent instrumentation :G.C. Barney: PHI. 2. Labview for everyone: Lisa, K. Wells and Jeffery Travis: PHI.

REFRENCES:

1. Principles of measurement & instrumentation: Alan S. Moris; PHI. 2. Labview graphical programming 2nd edition: Gray Johanson; TMH.

MEIE204 Advanced Digital Signal Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To analyze of different type of signals and systems. To analyze the DTFT AND DFT and their properties, fast fourier transform (FFT),

decimation in time algorithm, decimation in frequency algorithm. To understand the use of sampling and reconstruction and to understand the use of z-

transform in discrete time systems. To analyze the different types of structures of FIR and IIR systems and to design IIR

filters, design of FIR using windows, properties of FIR filters. To describe the effects of finite word lengths and truncation and rounding in digital

signal processing for IIR and FIR filters.

Syllabus Unit 1: Introduction of DSP: Introduction to Signal Processing, Discrete Linear Systems,

superposition Principle, Unit-Sample response, stability &causality Criterion. Unit 2: Fourier Transform &inverse Fourier transform: Frequency domain design of digital

filters, Fourier transform, use of Fourier transform in Signal processing. The inverse fourier transform, Sampling continuous function to generate a sequence, Reconstruction of continuous –time signals from Discrete-time sequences.

Unit 3: DFT &FFT &Z transform with Applications: Discrete Fourier transform, properties

of DFT, Circular Convolution, Fast Fourier Transform, Realizations of OFT. The Z transform, the system function of a digital filter, Digital Filter implementation from the system function, the inverse Z- transform, properties &applications, Special computation of finite sequences, sequence of infinite length &continuous time signals, computation of fourier series &time sequences from spectra.

Unit 4: Digital Filter Structure &Implementation: Linearity, time- invariance &causality, the

discrete convolution, the transfer function, stability tests, steady state response, Amplitude &Phase characteristics, stabilization procedure, Ideal LP Filter, Physical reliability &specifications.FIR Filters, Truncation windowing &Delays, design example, IIR Filters: Review of design of analog filters &analog frequency transformation. Digital frequency transformation. Design of LP filters using impulse invariance method, Bilinear transformation, Phase equalizer, digital all pass filters.

Unit 5: Implementation of Filters: Realization block diagrams, Cascade &parallel realization,

effect of infinite-word length, transfer function of degree 1&2, Sensitivity comparisons, effects of finite precision arithmetic on Digital filters.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Analyze of different type of signals and systems. Analyze the DTFT AND DFT and their properties, fast fourier transform (FFT),

decimation in time algorithm, decimation in frequency algorithm. Understand the use of sampling and reconstruction and to understand the use of z-

transform in discrete time systems. Analyze the different types of structures of FIR and IIR systems and to design IIR

filters, design of FIR using windows, properties of FIR filters. Describe the effects of finite word lengths and truncation and rounding in digital

signal processing for IIR and FIR filters. Text Books 1. Alam V. Oppenheim & Ronald W. Schafer, "Digital Signal Processing" PHI. 2. J G Proakis, "Digital Signal Processing", (PHI) 3rd Edition. Reference Books 1. Rabiner & Gold, "Theory & application of digital Signal Processing", PHI 1992. 2. Roman kuc, "Introduction to Digital Signal Processing," McGraw hill Edition.

MEIE205 Computer Network L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To give exposure to student that how data is transferred in computers. To study the performance of a network. To study the basics of different layers of TCP/ & how information is transferred between

them. To solve issues occurring at different layers.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction to computer networks and the Internet: Application layer: Principles of

network applications, The Web and Hyper Text Transfer Protocol, File transfer, Electronic ail, Domain name system, Peer-to-Peer file sharing, Socket programming, Layering concepts.

Unit 2: Switching in networks: Classification and requirements of switches, a generic switch,

Circuit Switching, Time-division switching, Space-division switching, Crossbar switch and evaluation of blocking probability, 2-stage, 3-stage and n-stage networks, Packet switching, Blocking in packet switches, Three generations of packet switches, switch fabric, Buffering, Multicasting, Statistical

Unit 3: Multiplexing. Transport layer: Connectionless transport, User Datagram Protocol,

Connectionoriented transport – Transmission Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call. Unit 4: Transport layer: Connectionless transport, User Datagram Protocol, Connection-

oriented transport, Transmission Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call. Unit 5: Congestion Control and Resource Allocation: Issues in Resource Allocation, Queuing

Disciplines, TCP congestion Control, Congestion Avoidance Mechanisms and Quality of Service.

Unit 6: Network layer: Virtual circuit and Datagram networks, Router, Internet Protocol,

Routing algorithms, Broadcast and Multicast routing. Unit 7: Link layer: ALOHA, Multiple access protocols, IEEE 802 standards, Local Area

Networks, addressing, Ethernet, Hubs, Switches. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand the concepts of networking thoroughly. Design a network for a particular application. Analyze the performance of the network. Understand various issues at different layers.

Text/ Reference books: 1. J.F. Kurose and K. W. Ross, “Computer Networking – A top down approach featuring

the Internet”, Pearson Education, 5th Edition 2. L. Peterson and B. Davie, “Computer Networks – A Systems Approach” Elsevier Morgan

Kaufmann Publisher, 5th Edition. 3. T. Viswanathan, “Telecommunication Switching System and Networks”, Prentice Hall 4. S. Keshav, “An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking” , Pearson Education 5. B. A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition 6. Andrew Tanenbaum, “Computer networks”, Prentice Hall 7. D. Comer, “Computer Networks and Internet/TCP-IP”, Prentice Hall 8. William Stallings, “Data and computer communications”, Prentice Hall

MEIE206 Digital Image Processing L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students with the fundamentals of digital image processing techniques as well as image enhancement & filtering.

To give exposure to students regarding color image processing & image segmentation. To introduce the concept of Multi-resolution image processing tech, as well as image

compression techniques and standards. To impart knowledge regarding video coding & video segmentation.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Digital Image Fundamentals: Elements of visual perception, image sensing and

acquisition, image sampling and quantization, basic relationships between pixels–neighbourhood, adjacency, connectivity, distance measures.

Unit 2: Image Enhancements and Filtering: Gray level transformations, histogram equalization

and specifications, pixel-domain smoothing filters, linear and order-statistics, pixel-domain sharpening filters, first and second derivative, two-dimensional DFT and its inverse, frequency domain filters, low-pass and high-pass.

Unit 3: Color Image Processing: Color models–RGB, YUV, HSI; Color transformations–

formulation, color complements, color slicing, tone and color corrections; Color image smoothing and sharpening; Color Segmentation.

Unit 4: Image Segmentation: Detection of discontinuities, edge linking and boundary detection,

thresholding – global and adaptive, region-based segmentation. Unit 5: Wavelets and Multi-resolution image processing: Uncertainty principles of Fourier

Transform, Time-frequency localization, continuous wavelet transforms, wavelet bases and multi-resolution analysis, wavelets and Subband filter banks, wavelet packets.

Unit 6: Image Compression: Redundancy, inter-pixel and psycho-visual, Lossless compression

predictive, entropy, Lossy compression, predictive and transform coding, Discrete Cosine Transform, Still image compression standards, JPEG and JPEG-2000.

Unit 7: Fundamentals of Video Coding: Inter-frame redundancy, motion estimation techniques

fullsearch, fast search strategies, forward and backward motion prediction, frame classification-I, P and B, Video sequence hierarchy, Group of pictures, frames, slices, macro-blocks and blocks; Elements of a video encoder and decoder; Video coding standards, MPEG and H.26X.

Unit 8: Video Segmentation: Temporal segmentation–shot boundary detection, hard-cutsand

soft-cuts, spatial segmentation – motion-based, Video object detection and tracking. Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Mathematically represent the various types of images and analyze them.

Process these images for the enhancement of certain properties or for optimized use of the resources.

Develop algorithms for image compression and coding. Understand the various types of video segmentation.

Text/Reference Books:

1. R.C. Gonzalez and R.E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Second Edition, Pearson Education 3rd edition 2008.

2. Anil Kumar Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall of India.2nd edition 2004.

3. Murat Tekalp , Digital Video Processing" Prentice Hall, 2nd edition 2015.

MEIE301 Digital Control System L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

Study of different transform techniques for digital control Design of discrete controller for continuous system Stability analysis of discrete system

Unit 1: Introduction to digital control, Configuration of basic digital control system, discrete

transfer function, discrete model sampled data systems using z- transform, transfer function model, signal analysis and dynamic response, zero-order hold equivalent, introduction to first-order-hold equivalent, transformation between s, z, w plane, z-Domain description of sampled continuous time systems.

Unit 2: Controller design, Controller Design using transform techniques: Root locus and

frequency domain analysis compensator design. Unit 3 : State space theory, Control system analysis using state variable method, vector and

matrices, state variable representation, conversion of state variable to transfer function and vice versa, conversion of transfer function to canonical state variable models, system realization, solution of state equations.

Unit 4: State space design, Design using state-space methods: controllability and

observability, control law design, pole placement, pole placement design using computer aided control system design (CACSD).

Unit 5: Observer design: Observer design, Deadbeat controller design, Delayed system,

controller design for delayed systems. Unit 6: Stability analysis: Stability analysis and Jury„s stability criterion, Lyapunov stability

analysis to linear systems and discrete systems, Stability improvement by state feedback.

Course Outcomes:

Ability to design discrete controllers for system in time domain. Ability to design discrete controllers for system in frequency domain. Ability to analyze stability of a discrete system.

Text Books

1. K. Ogata,―Discrete Control Systems‖, PHI,2nded., 1995 2. M. Gopal, ―Digital Control and state variable methods‖, TMH, 2nd ed., 2006

Reference Books 1. Isermann, ―Digital Control Systems‖, Springer-Verlag, 1989 2. B. C. Kuo, ―Digital Control System‖, 2nded., 1995

MEIE302 MEMS L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce about MEMS & Micro fabrications. To give exposure about essential material properties. To introduce about various transducers techniques To introduce about various fabrication & maching process of MEMS.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction and Historical Background, Scaling Effects. Micro/Nano Sensors,

Actuators and Systems overview, Case studies, Review of Basic MEMS fabrication Units2:Oxidation, Deposition Techniques, Lithography (LIGA), and Etching.

Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, sacrificial layer processes, Stiction, Bulk Micromachining, Isotropic Etching and Anisotropic Etching, Wafer Bonding, Mechanics of solids in MEMS/NEMS, Stresses, Strain, Hookes‟s law, Poisson effect, Linear Thermal Expansion, Bending, Energy methods, Overview of Finite Element Method, Modeling of Coupled Electromechanical Systems.

Unit 3: MEMS types and their applications: Mechanical MEMS, Strain and pressure sensors,

Accelerometers etc., Electromagnetic MEMS, Micromotors, Wireless and GPS MEMS etc Magnetic MEMS, all effect sensors, SQUID magnetometers, Optical MEMS, Micromachined fiber optic component, Optical sensors, Thermal MEMS, thermo-mechanical and thermo-electrical actuators, Peltier heat pumps.

Course Outcomes: On successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:

Appreciate the underlying working principles of MEMS and NEMS devices. Be comfortable with the design, analysis & testing of MEMS. . Apply the MEMS for different applications. Understand about the different MEMS process used in MEMS/NEMS devices.

Text/Reference Book:

1. G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalkrishnan K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, Micro and Smart Systems, Wiley India, 2012.

2. S. E.Lyshevski, Nano-and Micro-Electromechanical systems: Fundamentals of Nano-and Microengineering (Vol. 8). CRC press, (2005).

3. S. D. Senturia, Microsystem Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001. 4. M. Madou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, 1997. 5. G. Kovacs, Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook, McGraw-Hill, Boston, 1998. 6. M.H. Bao, Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, and

Gyroscopes, Elsevier, New York, 2000. 7. R.C Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronics Fabrication”, 2nd edition, Addison

Wesley, 2000.

MEIE303 Process Instrumentation L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Outcomes:

To learn process identification techniques. To learn Implementation of control schemes for different processes

Syllabus

Process identification using various techniques, Analysis of some common processes like Distillation column, Boilers, Heat Exchangers, Dryers, Continuous Stirred Tank Reactor, Compressors. Modeling of some common processes & Utilities like Boiler, Refrigeration unit, Chiller plant, D. M. water plant, Instrument air supply. Application of Advanced process Instrumentation Tools to various processes. Course Outcomes:

Utilization of various process identification techniques. Implementation of control schemes for different processes

Reference Books:

1. Andrews and Williams, “Principles of Applied instrumentation”, Vol. I, II, III, IV, Gulf Publications company

2. F. G. Shinsky, “Process Control System,” Mc Graw Hills, 1996. 3. B.G. Liptak , “Process Control”, Chilton Publications, Fourth edition, 2009. 4. Design and Application of Process Control Systems, ISA

MEIE304 Stochastic Processes L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives: To introduce the students to Stochastic Processes & limitation of deterministic control

and processes. To introduce the students for various types of probabilities. To introduce students for various theorems comes under repeated trails. To introduce the students about various types of random variables. To introduce the students to mean, variance, moments & conditional statistics. To introduce the students for various types of stationary processes, correlation &

spectra. Syllabus

Unit I: Introduction: Overview of stochastic process, limitation of deterministic control and processes.

Unit II: Probability and axioms: Definitions, axioms and probability, conditional

probability. Unit III: Repeated Trails: Combined experiments, Bernoulli trails, asymptotic theorems,

poison theorem, Bay‟s theorem and statistics. Unit IV:Random Variables: Distribution and density function, conditional distributions,

total probability and Bay‟s theorem, mean and variance, moments characteristics functions, two random variables, moments and conditional statistics.

Unit V: Stationary processes, system with stochastic inputs, Periodicity, correlation and

spectra. Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

i. Understand the stochastic processes & limitation of deterministic control & processes.

ii. Understand and solve the problems related to various types of probability. iii. Solve the problems by applying Asymptotic theorems, poison theorems & Bay‟s

theorems iv. Know about the basic concept of the random variables & solve the problems of

mean, variance & moments. v. Apply Bay‟s theorem for solving the complex problems. vi. Know about stationary processes & solve the problems related to stationery

processes. vii. Understand the basics of correlation & spectra.

Text Books : Populis, “Probability, Random Variables and stochastic process” McGraw Hill

MEIE305 Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To introduce the students regarding Neural network characteristics and history of development of neural network principles.

To introduce the students regarding Learning methods and neural network models, types of learning, supervised, unsupervised, reinforced learning etc

To give the exposure to the students regarding Recurrent back propagation, introduction to counter propagation networks, CMAC networks and ART networks

To introduce the students regarding applications of neural network To introduce the students regarding the concepts of Fuzzy logic, Fuzzification and

Defuzzification

Syllabus Unit I: Introduction, Neural network characteristics, history of development of neural

network principles, artificial neural net terminology, models of neuron, topology. Unit II: Learning methods and neural network models, types of learning, supervised,

unsupervised, reinforced learning, knowledge, representation and acquisition, Basic Hopfield model, basic learning laws, unsupervised learning, competitive learning, Kmeans clustering algorithm. Kohnen‟s feature maps.

Unit III: Artificial neural networks – Radial basis function neural networks, Basic learning

laws in REF nets, Recurrent back propagation, introduction to counter propagation networks, CMAC networks and ART networks.

Unit IV: Applications of neural nets, applications such as pattern recognition, pattern

mapping, Associative memories, speech and decision making. Unit V: Fuzzy logic Basic concepts of fuzzy logic, fuzzy Vs crisp set, linguistic variables,

membership functions, fuzzy sets and operations on fuzzy sets, IF-Then rules, variable inference techniques, De-fuzzyfication. Basic fuzzy inference algorithm, Fuzzy system design, antilock breaking system, industrial applications.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

Understand Neural network characteristics and history of development of neural network principles.

Understand Learning methods and neural network models, types of learning, supervised, unsupervised, reinforced learning etc

Understand Recurrent back propagation, introduction to counter propagation networks, CMAC networks and ART networks

Understand applications of neural network Understand the concepts of Fuzzy logic, Fuzzification and Defuzzification

Text Books:

1. B. Yagnanarayana, “Artificial neural networks” PHI 2. Z. M. Zurada, “Introduction to artificial neural systems” Jaico Publications 3. Ross J.T.”fuzzy logic with engineering applications”

MEIE306 Industrial Automation Control L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objective:

To learn selection of DCS & network protocol based on applications. To learn Implementation of DCS for various process/plant

Syllabus

Evolution of instrumentation and control, Role of automation in industries, Benefits of automation. Different types of processes. Typical examples of continuous, batch, discrete and hybrid processes. Study of Process flow , detailed P&ID, Critical loops, Safety and Alarms, Reliability and Fail safe operation requirements, Efficient running and adhering to standards. Different standard for programming the control system Different types of control system. Controlling advance applications with DCS, SCADA and PLCs. Discussion of available and suitable feature in hybrid control system. HART, Foundation fieldbus, Profibus protocol introduction, frame structure, programming, implementation examples, Benefits, Advantages and Limitations Comparison with other fieldbus standards including Device net, Profibus, Controlnet, CAN, Industrial Ethernet etc. Distributed Control Systems Engineering and Design DCS detail engineering, specifications, configuration and programming, functions including database management, reporting, Sequential event recording alarm management, communication, third party interface, control, display etc. Enhanced functions viz. Advance Process Control, Batch application, Historical Data Management, OPC support, Security and Access Control etc. Performance Criteria for DCS and other automation tools. Course Outcomes:

Selection of DCS & network protocol based on applications. Implementation of DCS for various process/plant

Reference Books:

1. Popovic and Bhatkar , “ Distributed Computer Control For Industrial Automation”, Marcel Dekker,INC, 2005.

2. Webb and Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications”, PHI,2009.

3. S.K.Singh, “Computer Aided Process Control”, PHI, 2007.

OPEN ELECTIVES MECO-301 Business Analytics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

Understand the role of business analytics within an organization. Analyze data using statistical and data mining techniques and understand relationships

between the underlying business processes of an organization. To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and

solve business problems and to support managerial decision making. To become familiar with processes needed to develop, report, and analyze business

data. Use decision-making tools/Operations research techniques. Mange business process using analytical and management tools. Analyze and solve problems from different industries such as manufacturing, service,

retail, software, banking and finance, sports, pharmaceutical, aerospace etc. Syllabus Unit1: Business analytics: Overview of Business analytics, Scope of Business analytics,

Business Analytics Process, Relationship of Business Analytics Process and organisation, competitive advantages of Business Analytics. Statistical Tools, Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical methods, Review of probability distribution and data modelling, sampling and estimation methods overview.

Unit 2: Trendiness and Regression Analysis: Modelling Relationships and Trends in Data,

simple Linear Regression, Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, Business Analytics Technology.

Unit 3: Organization Structures of Business analytics, Team management, Management

Issues, Designing Information Policy, Outsourcing, Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business analytics, Managing Changes. Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive analytics analysis, Data Mining, Data Mining Methodologies, Prescriptive analytics and its step in the business analytics Process, Prescriptive Modelling, nonlinear Optimization.

Unit 4: Forecasting Techniques: Qualitative and Judgmental Forecasting, Statistical

Forecasting Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate Forecasting Models. Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis: Monte Carle Simulation Using Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor Model, Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.

Unit 5: Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision Strategies with the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The Value of Information, Utility and Decision Making.

Unit 6: Recent Trends in : Embedded and collaborative business intelligence, Visual data recovery, Data Storytelling and Data journalism.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

1. Students will demonstrate knowledge of data analytics. 2. Students will demonstrate the ability of think critically in making decisions based on

data and deep analytics. 3. Students will demonstrate the ability to use technical skills in predicative and

prescriptive modeling to support business decision-making. 4. Students will demonstrate the ability to translate data into clear, actionable insights.

MECO-302 Industrial Safety L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus Unit-I: Industrial safety: Accident, causes, types, results and control, mechanical and

electrical hazards, types, causes and preventive steps/procedure, describe salient points of factories act 1948 for health and safety, wash rooms, drinking water layouts, light, cleanliness, fire, guarding, pressure vessels, etc, Safety color codes. Fire prevention and firefighting, equipment and methods.

Unit-II: Fundamentals of maintenance engineering: Definition and aim of maintenance

engineering, Primary and secondary functions and responsibility of maintenance department, Types of maintenance, Types and applications of tools used for maintenance, Maintenance cost & its relation with replacement economy, Service life of equipment.

Unit-III: Wear and Corrosion and their prevention: Wear- types, causes, effects, wear

reduction methods, lubricants-types and applications, Lubrication methods, general sketch, working and applications, i. Screw down grease cup, ii. Pressure grease gun, iii. Splash lubrication, iv. Gravity lubrication, v, Wick feed lubrication vi. Side feed lubrication, vii. Ring lubrication, Definition, principle and factors affecting the corrosion. Types of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods.

Unit-IV: Fault tracing: Fault tracing-concept and importance, decision treeconcept, need and

applications, sequence of fault finding activities, show as decision tree, draw decision tree for problems in machine tools, hydraulic, pneumatic,automotive, thermal and electrical equipment‟s like, I. Any one machine tool, ii. Pump iii. Air compressor, iv. Internal combustion engine, v. Boiler, vi. Electrical motors, Types of faults in machine tools and their general causes.

Unit-V: Periodic and preventive maintenance: Periodic inspection-concept and need,

degreasing, cleaning and repairing schemes, overhauling of mechanical components, overhauling of electrical motor, common troubles and remedies of electric motor, repair complexities and its use, definition, need, steps and advantages of preventive maintenance. Steps/procedure for periodic and preventive maintenance of I. Machine tools, ii. Pumps, iii. Air compressors, iv. Diesel generating (DG) sets, Program and schedule of preventive maintenance of mechanical and electrical equipment, advantages of preventive maintenance. Repair cycle concept and importance

Reference:

1. Maintenance Engineering Handbook, Higgins & Morrow, Da Information Services. 2. Maintenance Engineering, H. P. Garg, S. Chand and Company. 3. Pump-hydraulic Compressors, Audels, Mcgrew Hill Publication. 4. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Winterkorn, Hans, Chapman & Hall London.

MECO-303 Operations Research L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus Unit 1: Optimization Techniques, Model Formulation, models, General L.R Formulation,

Simplex Techniques, Sensitivity Analysis, Inventory Control Models Unit 2 Formulation of a LPP, Graphical solution revised simplex method, duality theory, dual

simplex method - sensitivity analysis - parametric programming Unit 3: Nonlinear programming problem, Kuhn-Tucker conditions min cost flow problem,

max flow problem, CPM/PERT Unit 4: Scheduling and sequencing - single server and multiple server models, deterministic

inventory models, Probabilistic inventory control models, Geometric Programming. Unit 5: Competitive Models,Single and Multi-channel Problems, Sequencing Models,

Dynamic Programming, Flow in Networks, Elementary Graph Theory, Game Theory Simulation

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

Students should able to apply the dynamic programming to solve problems of discreet and continuous variables.

Students should able to apply the concept of non-linear programming Students should able to carry out sensitivity analysis Student should able to model the real world problem and simulate it.

References:

1. H.A. Taha, Operations Research, An Introduction, PHI, 2008 2. H.M. Wagner, Principles of Operations Research, PHI, Delhi, 1982. 3. J.C. Pant, Introduction to Optimisation: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, Delhi,

2008 4. Hitler Libermann Operations Research: McGraw Hill Pub. 2009 5. Pannerselvam, Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010 6. Harvey M Wagner, Principles of Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010

MECO-304 Cost Management of Engineering Projects L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus Unit 1: Introduction and Overview of the Strategic Cost Management Process Unit 2: Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential cost, Incremental cost

and Opportunity cost. Objectives of a Costing System; Inventory valuation; Creation of a Database for operational control; Provision of data for Decision-Making. Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and nontechnical activities. Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and documents Project team, Role of each member. Importance Project site, Data required with significance. Project contracts, Types and contents, Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning, mechanical and process.

Unit 3: Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing, Distinction between Marginal

Costing and Absorption Costing, Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis, Various decision-making problems, Standard Costing and Variance Analysis, Pricing strategies, Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle Costing, Costing of service sector, Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Total Quality Management and Theory of constraints, Activity-Based Cost Management, Bench Marking, Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis. Budgetary Control; Flexible Budgets, Performance budgets, Zero-based budgets, Measurement of Divisional profitability pricing decisions including transfer pricing.

Unit 4: Quantitative techniques for cost management, Linear Programming, PERT/CPM,

Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Simulation, Learning Curve Theory.

References:

1. Cost Accounting A Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting 3. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting 4. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler

publisher 5. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co.

Ltd.

MECO-305 Composite Materials L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Syllabus UNIT–I: INTRODUCTION: Definition, Classification and characteristics of Composite

materials, Advantages and application of composites, Functional requirements of reinforcement and matrix, Effect of reinforcement (size, shape, distribution, volume fraction) on overall composite performance.

UNIT – II: REINFORCEMENTS: Preparation-layup, curing, properties and applications of

glass fibers, carbon fibers, Kevlar fibers and Boron fibers. Properties and applications of whiskers, particle reinforcements, Mechanical Behavior of composites, Rule of mixtures, Inverse rule of mixtures, Isostrain and Isostress conditions.

UNIT – III: Manufacturing of Metal Matrix Composites: Casting, Solid State diffusion

technique, Cladding, Hot isostatic pressing, Properties and applications, Manufacturing of Ceramic Matrix Composites, Liquid Metal Infiltration, Liquid phase sintering, Manufacturing of Carbon, Carbon composites, Knitting, Braiding, Weaving, Properties and applications.

UNIT–IV: Manufacturing of Polymer Matrix Composites: Preparation of Moulding

compounds and prepregs hand layup method, Autoclave method, Filament winding method, Compression moulding, Reaction injection moulding. Properties and applications.

UNIT V: Strength: Laminar Failure Criteria-strength ratio, maximum stress criteria,

Maximum strain criteria, interacting failure criteria, hygrothermal failure, Laminate first play failure-insight strength, Laminate strength-ply discount truncated maximum strain criterion, strength design using caplet plots, stress concentrations.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Material Science and Technology, Vol 13, Composites by R.W.Cahn, VCH, West Germany.

2. Materials Science and Engineering, An introduction. WD Callister, Jr., Adapted by R. Balasubramaniam, John Wiley & Sons, NY, Indian edition, 2007.

References:

1. Hand Book of Composite Materials-ed-Lubin. 2. Composite Materials, K.K.Chawla. 3. Composite Materials Science and Application, Deborah D.L. Chung. 4. Composite Materials Design and Applications, Danial Gay, Suong V. Hoa, and

Stephen W. Tasi.

MECO-306 Waste to Energy L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Unit-I: Introduction to Energy from Waste: Classification of waste as fuel, Agro based,

Forest residue, Industrial waste, MSW, Conversion devices, Incinerators, gasifiers, digestors

Unit-II: Biomass Pyrolysis: Pyrolysis, Types, slow fast, Manufacture of charcoal, Methods,

Yields and application, Manufacture of pyrolytic oils and gases, yields and applications.

Unit-III: Biomass Gasification: Gasifiers, Fixed bed system, Downdraft and updraft

gasifiers, Fluidized bed gasifiers, Design, construction and operation, Gasifier burner arrangement for thermal heating, Gasifier engine arrangement and electrical power, Equilibrium and kinetic consideration in gasifier operation.

Unit-IV: Biomass Combustion: Biomass stoves, Improved chullahs, types, some exotic

designs, Fixed bed combustors, Types, inclined grate combustors, Fluidized bed combustors, Design, construction and operation, Operation of all the above biomass combustors.

Unit-V: Biogas: Properties of biogas (Calorific value and composition), Biogas plant

technology and status, Bio energy system, Design and constructional features, Biomass resources and their classification, Biomass conversion processes, Thermo chemical conversion, Direct combustion, biomass gasification, pyrolysis and liquefaction, biochemical conversion, anaerobic digestion, Types of biogas Plants, Applications, Alcohol production from biomass, Bio diesel production, Urban waste to energy conversion, Biomass energy programme in India.

References:

1. Non Conventional Energy, Desai, Ashok V., Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1990. 2. Biogas Technology - A Practical Hand Book - Khandelwal, K. C. and Mahdi, S. S.,

Vol. I & II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 1983. 3. Food, Feed and Fuel from Biomass, Challal, D. S., IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.,

1991. 4. Biomass Conversion and Technology, C. Y. WereKo-Brobby and E. B. Hagan, John

Wiley & Sons, 1996.

ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING (AUD01A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course objectives:

Understand that how to improve your writing skills and level of readability Learn about what to write in each section Understand the skills needed when writing a Title Ensure the good quality of paper at

very first-time submission Unit 1: Planning and Preparation, Word Order, Breaking up long sentences, Structuring

Paragraphs and Sentences, Being Concise and Removing Redundancy, Avoiding Ambiguity and Vagueness

Unit 2: Clarifying Who Did What, Highlighting Your Findings, Hedging and Criticising,

Paraphrasing and Plagiarism, Sections of a Paper, Abstracts. Introduction Unit 3: Review of the Literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, The Final

Check. Unit 4: key skills are needed when writing a Title, key skills are needed when writing an

Abstract, key skills are needed when writing an Introduction, skills needed when writing a Review of the Literature,

Unit 5: skills are needed when writing the Methods, skills needed when writing the Results,

skills are needed when writing the Discussion, skills are needed when writing the Conclusions

Unit 6: useful phrases, how to ensure paper is as good as it could possibly be the first- time

submission Suggested Studies:

1. Goldbort R (2006) Writing for Science, Yale University Press (available on Google Books)

2. Day R (2006) How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper, Cambridge University Press

3. Highman N (1998), Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences, SIAM. Highman‟s

Book .

1. Adrian Wallwork , English for Writing Research Papers, Springer New York Dordrecht Heidelberg London, 2011

DISASTER MANAGEMENT (AUD02A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

learn to demonstrate a critical understanding of key concepts in disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response.

critically evaluate disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response policy and practice from multiple perspectives.

develop an understanding of standards of humanitarian response and practical relevance in specific types of disasters and conflict situations.

critically understand the strengths and weaknesses of disaster management approaches, planning and programming in different countries, particularly their home country or the countries they work in

Syllabus Unit1: Introduction: Disaster: Definition, Factors And Significance; Difference Between

Hazard And Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference, Nature, Types And Magnitude.

Unit 2: Repercussions Of Disasters And Hazards: Economic Damage, Loss Of Human

And Animal Life, Destruction Of Ecosystem. Natural Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanisms, Cyclones, Tsunamis, Floods, Droughts And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-made disaster: Nuclear Reactor Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil Slicks And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And Epidemics, War And Conflicts.

Unit 3: Disaster Prone Areas In India: Study Of Seismic Zones, Areas Prone To Floods

And Droughts, Landslides And Avalanches, Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal Hazards With Special Reference To Tsunami, Post-Disaster Diseases And Epidemics.

Unit 4: Disaster Preparedness And Management: Preparedness, Monitoring Of

Phenomena Triggering A Disaster Or Hazard; Evaluation Of Risk, Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From Meteorological And Other Agencies, Media Reports, Governmental And Community Preparedness.

Unit 5: Risk Assessment: Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction,

Global And National Disaster Risk Situation, Techniques of Risk Assessment, Global Co-Operation In Risk Assessment And Warning, People‟s Participation In Risk Assessment. Strategies for Survival.

Unit 6: Disaster Mitigation: Meaning, Concept And Strategies Of Disaster Mitigation,

Emerging Trends in Mitigation, Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural Mitigation, Programs of Disaster Mitigation In India.

SUGGESTED READINGS:

1. R. Nishith, Singh AK, “Disaster Management in India: Perspectives, issues and strategies “‟New Royal book Company.

2. Sahni, Pardeep Et.Al. (Eds.),” Disaster Mitigation Experiences And Reflections”, Prentice Hall Of India, New Delhi.

3. Goel S. L. , Disaster Administration And Management Text And Case Studies” ,Deep &Deep Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

SANSKRIT FOR TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE (AUD03A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives To get a working knowledge in illustrious Sanskrit, the scientific language in the

world Learning of Sanskrit to improve brain functioning Learning of Sanskrit to develop the logic in mathematics, science & other subjects

enhancing the memory power The engineering scholars equipped with Sanskrit will be able to explore the huge

knowledge from ancient literature Syllabus Unit 1: Alphabets in Sanskrit, Past/Present/Future Tense, Simple Sentences Unit 2: Order, Introduction of roots, Technical information about Sanskrit Literature Unit 3: Technical concepts of Engineering-Electrical, Mechanical, Architecture, Mathematics Suggested reading

1. “Abhyaspustakam” – Dr.Vishwas, Samskrita-Bharti Publication, New Delhi 2. “Teach Yourself Sanskrit” Prathama Deeksha-Vempati Kutumbshastri, Rashtriya

Sanskrit Sansthanam, New Delhi Publication 3. “India‟s Glorious Scientific Tradition” Suresh Soni, Ocean books (P) Ltd., New

Delhi. Course Output

1. Understanding basic Sanskrit language 2. Ancient Sanskrit literature about science & technology can be understood 3. Being a logical language will help to develop logic in students

VALUE EDUCATION (AUD04A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives

Understand value of education and self- development Imbibe good values in students Let the should know about the importance of character

Unit 1: Values and self-development, Social values and individual attitudes, Work ethics,

Indian vision of humanism, Moral and non, moral valuation. Standards and principles, Value judgements

Unit 2: Importance of cultivation of values, Sense of duty. Devotion, Self-reliance.

Confidence, Concentration, Truthfulness, Cleanliness, Honesty, Humanity. Power of faith, National Unity, Patriotism.Love for nature ,Discipline

Unit 3: Personality and Behavior Development, Soul and Scientific, attitude, positive

thinking, integrity and discipline, Punctuality, Love and Kindness, Avoid fault Thinking, Free from anger, Dignity of labour, Universal brotherhood and religious tolerance, True friendship, Happiness Vs suffering, love for truth, Aware of self-destructive habits, Association and Cooperation, Doing best for saving nature

Unit 4: Character and Competence, Holy books vs Blind faith, Self-management and Good

health, Science of reincarnation, Equality, Nonviolence ,Humility, Role of Women, All religions and same message, Mind your Mind, Self-control, Honesty, Studying effectively

Suggested reading

1. Chakroborty, S.K. “Values and Ethics for organizations Theory and practice”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi

Course outcomes

Knowledge of self-development Learn the importance of Human values Developing the overall personality

CONSTITUTION OF INDIA (AUD05A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

Understand the premises informing the twin themes of liberty and freedom from a civil rights perspective.

To address the growth of Indian opinion regarding modern Indian intellectuals‟ constitutional role and entitlement to civil and economic rights as well as the emergence of nationhood in the early years of Indian nationalism.

To address the role of socialism in India after the commencement of the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917 and its impact on the initial drafting of the Indian Constitution.

Syllabus Unit 1: History of Making of the Indian Constitution: History, Drafting Committee,

(Composition & Working) Unit 2: Philosophy of the Indian Constitution: Preamble, Salient Features. Unit 3: Contours of Constitutional Rights & Duties: Fundamental Rights, Right to quality,

Right to Freedom, Right against Exploitation, Right to Freedom of Religion, Cultural and Educational Rights, Right to Constitutional Remedies, Directive Principles of State Policy, Fundamental Duties.

Unit 4: Organs of Governance: Parliament, Composition, Qualifications and is

qualifications, Powers and Functions, Executive, President, Governor, Council of Minister, Judiciary, Appointment and Transfer of Judges, Qualifications, Powers and Functions

Unit 5: Local Administration: District‟s Administration head: Role and Importance,

Municipalities: Introduction, Mayor and role of Elected Representative, CEO of Municipal Corporation, Pachayati raj, Introduction, PRI: Zila Pachayat, Elected officials and their roles, CEO Zila Pachayat, Position and role, Block level, Organizational Hierarchy (Different departments), Village level, Role of Elected and Appointed officials, Importance of grass root democracy

Unit 6: Election Commission: Election Commission, Role and Functioning, Chief Election

Commissioner and Election Commissioners, State Election Commission, Role and Functioning, Institute and Bodies for the welfare of SC/ST/OBC and women.

Course Outcomes:

Discuss the growth of the demand for civil rights in India for the bulk of Indians before the arrival of Gandhi in Indian politics.

Discuss the intellectual origins of the framework of argument that informed the conceptualization of social reforms leading to revolution in India.

Discuss the circumstances surrounding the foundation of the Congress Socialist Party [CSP] under the leadership of Jawaharlal Nehru and the eventual failure of the proposal of direct elections through adult suffrage in the Indian Constitution.

Discuss the passage of the Hindu Code Bill of 1956. Suggested reading

1. The Constitution of India, 1950 (Bare Act), Government Publication. 2. Dr. S. N. Busi, Dr. B. R. Ambedkar framing of Indian Constitution, 1st Edition, 2015. 3. M. P. Jain, Indian Constitution Law, 7th Edn., Lexis Nexis, 2014. 4. D.D. Basu, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Lexis Nexis, 2015.

PEDAGOGY STUDIES (AUD06A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

1. Review existing evidence on the review topic to inform programme design and policy making undertaken by the DfID, other agencies and researchers.

2. Identify critical evidence gaps to guide the development. Unit 1: Introduction and Methodology: Aims and rationale, Policy background,

Conceptual, framework and terminology, Theories of learning, Curriculum, Teacher education, Conceptual framework, Research questions, Overview of methodology and Searching,

Unit 2: Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and

informal classrooms in developing countries, Curriculum, Teacher education. Unit 3: Evidence on the effectiveness of pedagogical practices, Methodology for the in depth

stage: quality assessment of included studies, How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy? Theory of change, Strength and nature of the body of evidence for effective pedagogical practices, Pedagogic theory and pedagogical approaches, Teachers‟ attitudes and beliefs and Pedagogic strategies.

Unit 4: Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and follow-up

support, Peer support, Support from the head teacher and the community, Curriculum and assessment, Barriers to learning: limited resources and large class sizes

Unit 5: Research gaps and future directions: Research design, Contexts, Pedagogy,

Teacher education, Curriculum and assessment, Dissemination and research impact. Course Outcomes: Students will be able to understand:

What pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and informal classrooms in developing countries?

What is the evidence on the effectiveness of these pedagogical practices, in what conditions, and with what population of learners?

How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy?

Suggested reading

1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare, 31 (2): 245-261.

2. Agrawal M (2004) Curricular reform in schools: The importance of evaluation, Journal of Curriculum Studies, 36 (3): 361-379.

3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana - does it count? Multi-site teacher education research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.

4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Pryor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning of basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International Journal, Educational Development, 33 (3): 272–282.

5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary education. Oxford and Boston: Blackwell.

6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, „learning to read‟ campaign. 7. www.pratham.org/images/resource%20working%20paper%202.pdf.

STRESS MANAGEMENT BY YOGA (AUD07A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives

To achieve overall health of body and mind To overcome stress

Syllabus Unit 1: Definitions of Eight parts of yog. ( Ashtanga ) Unit 2: Yam and Niyam, Do`s and Don‟t‟s in life., i) Ahinsa, satya, astheya, bramhacharya and aparigraha, ii) Shaucha, santosh, tapa, swadhyay, ishwarpranidhan Unit 3: Asan and Pranayam, i) Various yog poses and their benefits for mind & body, ii)Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-Types of pranayam Course Outcomes:

Develop healthy mind in a healthy body thus improving social health also Improve efficiency

Suggested reading

1. „Yogic Asanas for Group Tarining-Part-I” : Janardan Swami Yogabhyasi Mandal, Nagpur

2. “Rajayoga or conquering the Internal Nature” by Swami Vivekananda, Advaita Ashrama (Publication Department), Kolkata

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT THROUGH LIFE ENLIGHTENMENT SKILLS (AUD08A)

L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs. Course Objectives:

To learn to achieve the highest goal happily To become a person with stable mind, pleasing personality and determination To awaken wisdom in students

Unit 1: Neetisatakam-Holistic development of personality, Verses 19,20,21,22 (wisdom),

Verses 29,31,32 (pride & heroism), Verses 26,28,63,65 (virtue), Verses 52,53,59 (dont‟s), Verses 71,73,75,78 (do‟s)

Unit 2: Approach to day to day work and duties, Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta, Chapter 2-Verses

41, 47,48, Chapter 3 Verses 13, 21, 27, 35, Chapter 6 Verses 5,13,17, 23, 35, Chapter 18 Verses 45, 46, 48.

Unit 3: Statements of basic knowledge, Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta: Chapter2 Verses 56, 62,

68, Chapter 12 Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18, Personality of Role model. Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta, Chapter2 Verses 17, Chapter3 Verses 36,37,42, Chapter4 Verses 18, 38,39, Chapter18 Verses 37,38,63

Course Outcomes:

Study of Shrimad-Bhagwad-Geeta will help the student in developing his personality and achieve the highest goal in life

The person who has studied Geeta will lead the nation and mankind to peace and prosperity

Study of Neetishatakam will help in developing versatile personality of students. Suggested reading

1. “Srimad Bhagavad Gita” by Swami Swarupananda Advaita Ashram (Publication Department), Kolkata

2. Bhartrihari‟s Three Satakam (Niti-sringar-vairagya) by P.Gopinath, Rashtriya Sanskrit, Sansthanam, New Delhi.

SWAMI VIVEKANANDA’S THOUGHTS (AUD09A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce biography and philosophical thought of Swami Vivekananda To present Swami Vivekananda‟s views on major religions of the world and

Universal Religion To present Swami Vivekananda‟ teaching and views on social issues.

Syllabus Unit 1: Swami Vivekananda a Brief biography, Influence of Ramakrishna on Vivekananda,

Parliament of Religions, Establishment of Ramakrishna mission. Unit 2: Philosophy of Swami Vivekananda, Nature of Reality, Nature of Self, Nature of the

universe, The doctrine of Maya, Identity of Self and God, Karma Yoga, Raj Yoga , Bhakti Yoga, Gyan Yoga.

Unit 3: Swami Vivekananda‟s observations on major religions of the world (a) Hinduism (b)

Christianity (c) Islam Unit 4: The concept of Universal Religion and its characteristic, Fundamental unity of all

religions, acceptance and not tolerance is the principle. Unit 5: Vivekananda and Nationalism, The message of patriotism, spirituality as the basis of

patriotism, Sociological views of Vivekananda, His views on caste and untouchability, status of women, His views on Education, Swami Vivekananda‟s concept of Vedantic Socialism

Books: The Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda Vol. 1 to 8 Relevant Chapters

Implementation of Credit Transfer/Mobility Policy of online courses

Reference: Gazette of India (Extraordinary) Part-III, Section-4 No. 295, UGC (Credit Framework for

Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM) Regulation, 2016, dated 19/07/2016.

With reference to 12th Academic Council Meeting dated 03/05/2017 (Agenda Item No. AC/11/12), wherein MOOCs were adopted in the CBCS scheme, In continuation to that, following modalities are proposed to introduce the credit transfer policy in academic curriculum for the Massive Open Online Courses (MOOC‟s) offered through SWAYAM (Study Webs of Active-Learning for Young Aspiring Minds) Portal.

A. General Guidelines 1. The SWAYAM shall notify in June and November every year, the list of the online

learning Courses going to be offered in the forthcoming Semester on its website https://swayam.gov.in.

2. All the UTDs/Affiliated Colleges shall, within 4 weeks from the date of notification by SWAYAM, consider through their Chairperson/Principal the online learning courses being offered through the SWAYAM platform; and keeping in view their academic requirements, decide upon the courses which it shall permit for credit transfer and keeping in view the following points:

a) There is non-availability of suitable teaching staff for running a course in the

Department. b) The facilities for offering the elective papers (courses), sought for by

the students are not on offer/scheme in the Institution, but are available on the SWAYAM platform.

c) The courses offered on SWAYAM would supplement the teaching-learning process in the Institution.

d) Online courses through SWAYAM should not be more than 20% of total courses offered in a particular semester of a programme.

3. The courses offered in a particular semester will be compiled by Digital India Cell as decided and forwarded by concerned UTDs and affiliated colleges in the prescribed format to digitalindia.ymca@gmail.com and compiled set will be put up in Academic Council for approval.

4. Student can opt for 12-16 weeks course equivalent to 3-6 credits under mentorship of faculty (MHRD MOOC‟s guidelines 11.1(J) issued by the MHRD vide its orders dated 11/03/2016).

Annexure-A

Approved in 17th

Academic Council Dated 11.06.2019

5. Every student being offered a particular paper (course) would be required to register for the MOOCs for that course/paper on SWAYAM through University‟s/Affiliated College‟s SWAYAM-NPTEL Local Chapter.

6. The UTD/College may designate a faculty member as course coordinator/mentor to guide the students (at least 20 students) throughout the course with 2 hours per week contribution and with mentor addition on the Local Chapter. The mentor Chairperson/Principal will ensure the provision of facilities for smooth running of the course viz. Internet facility and proper venue in the department/college.

7. Digital India Cell of the University will be the Nodal point for keeping track of MOOCs enrolments in the University and the concerned chairpersons/principals are expected to aware their students/faculty about the online courses.

8. Importance of online learning and credit transfer policy must be shared with the students at entry level by the concerned department/college. Same may be incorporated during induction program for newly admitted students.

9. The departmental/college MOOC coordinators appointed by chairpersons of concerned departments/Principals of affiliated colleges will be responsible for identification of relevant MOOCs in the UTDs/Colleges and smooth conduction during the course.

B. Credit Transfer/Mobility of MOOCs

1. The parent Institution (offering the Course) shall give the equivalent credit weightage to the students for the credits earned through online learning courses through SWAYAM platform in the credit plan of the program.

2. Following pattern will be followed for distribution of credits and will be applicable to all students from Jan 2018 onwards:

Program Duration Minimum Credits to be

earned* B.Tech Semester I to VIII 3 M.Tech/MBA/M.Sc./MA Semester I to IV 3 BBA/BCA/B.Sc./BA Semester I to VI 3

*All students of UTDs/Affiliated colleges of all courses have to mandatorily earn minimum prescribed credits. Note: From session 2019-20 onwards, for B.Tech program, a student has to earn at least 12 credits during the duration of the Degree subject to the passing of at least one MOOC course (carrying minimum 3 credits per year).

3. A student will be eligible to get Under-Graduate/Post-Graduate degree

(B.Tech/M.Tech) with Honours if he/she completes additional credits through MOOC‟s. (AICTE Model Curriculum, Chapter1(B)). Following pattern will be followed for earning additional credits for the award of Honours degree:

Program Duration Credits to be earned*

Minimum CGPA

B.Tech Semester I to VIII 12 8.0 M.Tech Semester I to IV 6 8.0 *Inclusive of Minimum credits to be earned mentioned in clause B(2) above.

4. The earned credits shall be accepted and transferred to the total credits of the

concerned students by the University for Completion of his/her degree. Credits earned through MOOCs will be incorporated in the mark sheet issued to the student by Controller of Examination.

5. Credits for MOOC‟s will be verified by the concerned department/college and will be forwarded to Controller of Examination for further processing.

6. The courses where model curriculum of AICTE is not applicable, pattern laid down as in B(2) will be followed.

NOTE: These guidelines will be applicable to all Affiliating institutions under University along with all UTDs. Affiliating colleges will establish their own Local Chapter on SWAYAM and follow the same process.

1. For further clarifications, Notifications “Credit Framework for Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM” (UGC Regulations dated 19/07/2016) and “MHRD MOOC‟s guidelines” (MHRD guidelines dated 11/03/2016) may be referred.

SCHEME & SYLLABUS

for

M.TECH. COURSE

in

VLSI DESIGN

(w.e.f. Session 2018-2019)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

J.C. BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, YMCA,

FARIDABAD

J.C.BOSE UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY,

YMCA, FARIDABAD

VISION

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, YMCA, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA University of

Science and Technology) aspires to be a nationally and internationally acclaimed leader in technical

and higher education in all spheres which transforms the life of students through integration of

teaching, research and character building.

MISSION

To contribute to the development of science and technology by synthesizing teaching, research

and creative activities.

To provide an enviable research environment and state-of-the-art technological exposure to its

scholars.

To develop human potential to its fullest extent and make them emerge as world class leaders in

their professions and enthuse them towards their social responsibilities.

Department of Electronics Engineering

VISION

To be a Centre of Excellence for producing high quality engineers and scientists capable of

providing sustainable solutions to complex problems and promoting cost effective indigenous

technology in the area of Electronics, Communication & Control Engineering for Industry,

Research Organizations, Academia and all sections of society.

MISSION

To frame a well-balanced curriculum with an emphasis on basic theoretical knowledge as well

the requirements of the industry.

To motivate students to develop innovative solutions to the existing problems for betterment

of the society.

Collaboration with the industry, research establishments and other academic institutions to

bolster the research and development activities.

To provide infrastructure and financial support for culmination of novel ideas into useful

prototypes.

To promote research in emerging and interdisciplinary areas and act as a facilitator for

knowledge generation and dissemination through Research, Institute - Industry and Institute-

Institute interaction.

About Electronics Engineering Department

J. C. Bose University of Science & Technology, Faridabad (erstwhile YMCA University of Science &

Technology, Faridabad) established in 2009, formerly known as YMCA Institute of Engineering,

Faridabad, established in year 1969 as a Joint Venture of Govt. of Haryana and National Council of

YMCA of India with active assistance from overseas agencies of West Germany to produce highly

practical oriented personnel in specialized field of engineering to meet specific technical manpower

requirement of industries. Electronics Engineering Department started in 1969 and has been

conducting B.Tech. Courses in Electronics Instrumentation and Control and Electronics and

Communication Engineering of 4-Years duration since 1997. Students are admitted through

centralized counseling nominated by state govt. in 1st Year and 2nd year through lateral entry

entrance test. Besides under graduate degree courses, it is also running M.Tech. Courses in VLSI,

Instrumentation and Electronics & Communication. Department of Electronics Engineering is also

running Ph.D. Programme. All courses are duly approved by AICTE/ UGC. The Electronics

Engineering Department has been well known for its track record of employment of the pass out

students since its inception.

The Department has good infrastructure consisting of 11 laboratories, 10 Lecture Halls and 1

Conference Room beside 6 workshops. It has excellent faculty with 2 Professors, 2 Associate

Professors and 21 Assistant Professors. At present, 6 faculty members are PhD in various

specializations. The various syllabi of UG/PG courses have been prepared with active participation

from Industry. The Department is organizing number of expert lectures from industry experts for

students in every semester. During the project/dissertation work emphasis has been given on skill

enhancement of students. Choice based system allows students to study the subjects of his/her

choice from a number of elective courses /audit courses.

Program Educational Objectives (PEO): Students of the Master of Technology programs in VLSI Design will demonstrate

1. To educate and train the graduates with knowledge and skills necessary to formulate, design

and solve problems in Analog, Digital & Mixed Signal VLSI system design, VLSI Signal

Processing, Real Time Embedded System design and Hardware Software Co-Design.

2. To provide technical skills in software and hardware tools related to the design and

implementation of integrated Circuits, System on Chip for real time applications.

3. To provide scope for Applied Research and innovation in the various fields of VLSI and

Embedded Systems, and enabling the students to work in the emerging areas.

4. To enhance communication and soft skills of students to make them work effectively as a

team

Program Outcomes (PO):

1. Ability to acquire and apply in-depth knowledge in the area of Electronics and

Communication Engineering and contribute to the state-of-art.

2. An ability to independently carry out research /investigation and development work to

solve practical problems

3. An ability to write and present a substantial technical report/document

4. An Ability to engage in life-long learning and learning through mistakes with / without

external feedback.

5. An ability to understand the role of a leader, leadership principles and attitude conducive to

effective professional practice of Electronics and Communication Engineering

6. An ability to understand the impact of research and responsibility in order to contribute to

the society.

GRADING SCHEME

Marks % Grade Grade points Category

90-100 O 10 Outstanding 80 ≤ marks <90 A+ 9 Excellent 70 ≤ marks < 80 A 8 Very good 60 ≤ marks < 70 B+ 7 Good 50 ≤ marks < 60 B 6 Above average 45 ≤ marks < 50 C 5 Average 40 ≤ marks < 45 P 4 Pass <40 F 0 Fail

Ab 0 Absent

Percentage calculation= CGPA * 9.5

M. TECH. (VLSI Design)

Total Credits 68

Total Theory Subjects 11+2 Audits

Total Labs (including Projects) 5

Total Dissertation 2

SEMESTER WISE SUMMARY OF THE PROGRAMME: M.TECH. (VLSI Design)

S.No. Semester No. of Contact Hours Marks Credits

1 I 24 700 18

2 II 26 650 18

3 III 26 500 16

4 IV 32 500 16

Total 108 2350 68*

NOTE:

*It is mandatory to pass the MOOC course(s) by all the students as per

implementation of credit transfer/ mobility policy of on line courses of the

University-as mentioned in Annexure-A at the end of the syllabus.

Semester I M. Tech. (VLSI Design)

Sr. No.

Category

Course Code

Course Title Hours per

week

Credits

Sessional Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC MVL101 RTL Simulation and

Synthesis with PLDs 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC MVL102 Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital

Signal Processors

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

3 PEC Elective I 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 PEC Elective II 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 PCC RMI101 Research Methodology

and IPR 2 0 0 2 25 75 100

6 AUD Audit Course 1 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 7 PCC MVL151 RTL Simulation and

Synthesis with PLDs Lab 0 0 4 2 15 35 50

8 PCC MVL152 Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital Signal Processors Lab

0 0 4 2 15 35 50

Total 18 180 520 700

Course Course Title

Program Elective-I

MVLE103 Physical Design Automation MVLE104 Programming Languages for Embedded Software MVLE105 Digital Signal and Image Processing MVLE106 VLSI Technology with MEMS Applications

Program Elective-II

MVLE107 Parallel Processing MVLE108 System Design with Embedded Linux MVLE109 CAD of Digital System MVLE110 Device Modeling for Circuit Simulation

AUD

AUD01A English for Research Paper Writing AUD02A Disaster Management AUD03A Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD04A Value Education AUD05A Constitution of India AUD06A Pedagogy Studies AUD07A Stress Management by Yoga AUD08A Personality Development through Life

Enlightenment Skills. AUD09A Swami Vivekananda‘s thoughts

Semester II M. Tech. (VLSI Design)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC MVL201 Analog and Digital

CMOS VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 PCC MVL202 VLSI Design Verification and Testing

3 0 0 3 25 75 100

3 PEC Elective III 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 4 PEC Elective IV 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 5 AUD2 Audit Course 2 2 0 0 0 25 75 100 6 PCC MVL251 Analog and Digital

CMOS VLSI Design Lab

0 0 4 2 15 35 50

7 PCC MVL252 VLSI Design Verification and Testing Lab

0 0 4 2 15 35 50

8 PCC MVL253 Minor Project 0 0 4 2 15 35 50 Total Credits 18 170 480 650

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-III

MVLE203 Memory Technologies MVLE204 SoC Design MVLE205 Low power VLSI Design MVLE206 CMOS RF Circuit Design

Program Elective-IV

MVLE207 Communication Buses and Interfaces MVLE208 Network Security and Cryptography MVLE209 VLSI signal Processing MVLE210 ASIC‘s & FPGA

AUD 2 (Audit 2 should be

different from audit 1)

AUD01A English for Research Paper Writing AUD02A Disaster Management AUD03A Sanskrit for Technical Knowledge AUD04A Value Education AUD05A Constitution of India AUD06A Pedagogy Studies AUD07A Stress Management by Yoga AUD08A Personality Development through Life

Enlightenment Skills. AUD09A Swami Vivekananda‘s thoughts

Semester III

M. Tech. (VLSI Design)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PEC Program Specific

Elective-V 3 0 0 3 25 75 100

2 OEC Open Elective 3 0 0 3 25 75 100 3 PCC MVL351 Dissertation Phase – I 0 0 20 10 100 200 300 Total Credits 16 150 350 500

Course Name Course Title

Program Elective-V

MVLE301 Communication Networks MVLE302 Selected Topics in Mathematics MVLE303 Nano materials and nano technology MVLE304 VLSI Interconnect MVLE305 IOT and Applications

Open Elective

MECO-301 Business Analytics MECO-302 Industrial Safety MECO-303 Operations Research MECO-304 Cost Management of Engineering Projects MECO-305 Composite Materials MECO-306 Waste to Energy

Semester IV M. Tech. (VLSI Design)

Sr. No.

Category Course Code

Course Title Hours per week

Credits Sessional

Marks

Final Marks

Total

L T P 1 PCC MVL401 Dissertation Phase – II 0 0 32 16 200 300 500 Total Credits 16 200 300 500

MVL 101 RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To learn the basis of RTL programming. To learn the design entry by verilog & VHDL. To learn the basis of ASIC, FPGA and SOC.

To introduce the different design techniques of low power, RTL source code and soft IP.

Syllabus Contents Unit1: Introduction to HDLs, Top down approach to design, Design of FSMs (Synchronous

and asynchronous), Static Timing analysis, Meta-stability, Clock issues, Need and design strategies for multi-clock domain designs.

Unit 2: Design entry by Verilog/ VHDL/ FSM, Introduction to Verilog AMS. Unit 3: Programmable Logic Devices, Introduction to ASIC Design Flow, FPGA, SoC, Floor

planning, Placement, Clock tree synthesis, Routing, Physical verification, Power analysis, ESD protection.

Unit 4: Design for performance, Low power VLSI design techniques. Design for testability. Unit 5: IP and Prototyping: IP in various forms: RTL Source code, Encrypted Source code,

Soft IP, Netlist, Physical IP, Use of external hard IP during prototyping Unit 6: Case studies and Speed issues. Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will demonstrate the ability to:

Understand the basics of RTL programming. Design entries by using VHDL/ Verilog. Understand basics of ASIC, FPGA & SOL.

Understand different design techniques for law power RTL codes and soft IP. References:

Richard S. Sandige, ―Modern Digital Design‖, MGH, International Editions. Donald D Givone, ―Digital principles and Design‖, TMH Charles Roth, Jr. and Lizy K John, ―Digital System Design using VHDL‖, Cengage

Learning. Samir Palnitkar, ―Verilog HDL, a guide to digital design and synthesis‖, Prentice

Hall. Doug Amos, Austin Lesea, Rene Richter, ―FPGA based prototyping methodology manual‖, Xilinx Bob Zeidman, ―Designing with FPGAs & CPLDs‖, CMP Books

MVL102 Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital Signal Processors L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To know programming model of ARM and learn instructions of ARM. To learn about interrupt, timer, memory and peripherals of ARM. To know about DSP architecture and learn programming. To learn application development of DSP.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1: ARM Cortex-M3 processor: Applications, Programming model – Registers, Operation modes,

Exceptions and Interrupts, Reset Sequence Instruction Set, Unified Assembler Language, Memory Maps, Memory Access Attributes, Permissions, Bit-Band Operations, Unaligned and Exclusive Transfers. Pipeline, Bus Interfaces

Unit 2:Exceptions, Types, Priority, Vector Tables, Interrupt Inputs and Pending behaviour, Fault Exceptions, Supervisor and Pendable Service Call, Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller, Basic Configuration, SYSTICK Timer, Interrupt Sequences, Exits, Tail Chaining, Interrupt Latency.

Unit 3:LPC 17xx microcontroller- Internal memory, GPIOs, Timers, ADC, UART and other serial interfaces, PWM, RTC, WDT

Unit 4: Programmable DSP (P-DSP) Processors: Harvard architecture, Multi port memory, architectural structure of P-DSP- MAC unit, Barrel shifters, Introduction to TI DSP processor family

Unit 5:VLIW architecture and TMS320C6000 series, architecture study, data paths, cross paths, Introduction to Instruction level architecture of C6000 family, Assembly Instructions memory addressing, for arithmetic, logical operations

Unit 6:Code Composer Studio for application development for digital signal processing, On chip peripherals , Processor benchmarking

References: 1. Joseph Yiu, ―The definitive guide to ARM Cortex-M3‖, Elsevier, 2nd Edition 2. Venkatramani B. and Bhaskar M. ―Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming and Applications‖ , TMH , 2nd Edition 3. Sloss Andrew N, Symes Dominic, Wright Chris, ―ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing‖, Morgan Kaufman Publication 4. Steve furber, ―ARM System-on-Chip Architecture‖, Pearson Education 5. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis, ―Embedded System Design‖, Wiley 6. Technical references and user manuals on www.arm.com, NXP Semiconductor www.nxp.com and Texas Instruments www.ti.com Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Compare and select ARM processor core based SoC with several features/peripherals based on requirements of embedded applications.

Identify and characterize architecture of Programmable DSP Processors Develop small applications by utilizing the ARM processor core and DSP processor based

platform.

MVLE103 Physical Design Automation L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the physical design issues for VLSI automation. To familiarize performance issues of VLSI circuits, various delay models & its estimation. To introduce the placement & routing algorithms.

To familiarize the concept of field programmable gate arrays, its design flow & its applications in various areas. Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Introduction to VLSI Physical Design Automation. Unit 2:Standard cell, Performance issues in circuit layout, delay models Layout styles. Unit 3:Discrete methods in global placement. Unit 4: Timing-driven placement. Global Routing Via Minimization. Unit 5:Over the Cell Routing - Single layer and two-layer routing, Clock and Power Routing. Unit 6: Compaction, algorithms, Physical Design Automation of FPGAs. References:

William Stallings, ―Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practices‖, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition.

Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman and Mike Speciner, ―Network Security, Private Communication in a Public World‖, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition

Christopher M. King, ErtemOsmanoglu, Curtis Dalton, ―Security Architecture, Design Deployment and Operations‖, RSA Pres,

Stephen Northcutt, LenyZeltser, Scott Winters, Karen Kent, and Ronald W. Ritchey, ―Inside Network Perimeter Security‖, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition

Richard Bejtlich, ―The Practice of Network Security Monitoring: Understanding Incident Detection and Response‖, William Pollock Publisher, 2013.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Study automation process for VLSI System design. Understanding of fundamentals for various physical design CAD tools. Develop and enhance the existing algorithms and computational techniques for physical

design process of VLSI systems.

MVLE104 Programming Languages for Embedded Software L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce about the ‗C‘ programming language for handling different hardwares. 2. To introduce about the OOP language. 3. To introduce about the CPP programming language for controlling hardware. 4. To introduce about the language scripting for handling data pattern.

Syllabus Contents Unit 1:Embedded ‗C‘ Programming

- Bitwise operations, Dynamic memory allocation, OS services - Linked stack and queue, Sparse matrices, Binary tree - Interrupt handling in C, Code optimization issues - Writing LCD drives, LED drivers, Drivers for serial port communication - Embedded Software Development Cycle and Methods (Waterfall, Agile)

Unit 2:Object Oriented Programming Introduction to procedural, modular, object-oriented and

generic programming techniques, Limitations of procedural programming, objects, classes, data members, methods, data encapsulation, data abstraction and information hiding, inheritance, polymorphism

Unit 3: CPP Programming: ‗cin‘, ‗cout‘, formatting and I/O manipulators, new and delete operators,

Defining a class, data members and methods, ‗this‘ pointer, constructors, destructors, friend function, dynamic memory allocation

Unit 4:Overloading and Inheritance: Need of operator overloading, overloading the assignment,

overloading using friends, type conversions, single inheritance, base and derived classes, friend classes, types of inheritance, hybrid inheritance, multiple inheritance, virtual base class, polymorphism, virtual functions,

Unit 5:Templates: Function template and class template, member function templates and template

arguments, Exception Handling: syntax for exception handling code: try-catch- throw, Multiple Exceptions.

Unit 6:Scripting Languages Overview of Scripting Languages – PERL, CGI, VB Script, Java Script.

PERL: Operators, Statements Pattern Matching etc. Data Structures, Modules, Objects, Tied Variables, Inter process Communication Threads, Compilation & Line Interfacing.

References:

Michael J. Pont , ―Embedded C‖, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2008 Randal L. Schwartz, ―Learning Perl‖, O‘Reilly Publications, 6th Edition 2011 A. Michael Berman, ―Data structures via C++‖, Oxford University Press, 2002 Robert Sedgewick, ―Algorithms in C++‖, Addison Wesley Publishing Company, 1999 Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B, Greg Gagne, ―Operating System Concepts‖, John Willey

& Sons, 2005 Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Write an embedded C application of moderate complexity. Develop and analyze algorithms in C++. Differentiate interpreted languages from compiled languages.

MVLE105 Digital Signal and Image Processing L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce/review discrete time signals & systems. To explain FIR & IIR with design of structure. To introduce the design & implement filters using fixed point arithmetic. To introduce the image acquisition.

To introduce color image processing Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Review of Discrete Time signals and systems, Characterization in time and Z and Fourier

domain, Fast Fourier Transform algorithms – In-place computations, Butterfly computations, bit reversal‘s.

Unit 2:Digital Filter design: FIR - Windowing and Frequency Sampling, IIR – Impulse invariance, bilinear Transformation.

Unit 3: Fixed point implementation of filters – challenges and techniques. Unit 4:Digital Image Acquisition, Enhancement, Restoration. Digital Image Coding and Compression

– JPEG and JPEG 2000. Unit 5:Color Image processing – Handling multiple planes, computational challenges. Unit 6:VLSI architectures for implementation of Image Processing algorithms, Pipelining References:

J.G. Proakis, Manolakis ―Digital Signal Processing‖, Pearson, 4th Edition Gonzalez and Woods, ―Digital Image Processing‖, PHI, 3rd Edition S. K. Mitra. ―Digital Signal Processing – A Computer based Approach‖, TMH, 3rd Edition,

2006 A. K. Jain, ―Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‖, Prentice Hall KeshabParhi, ―VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems – Design and Implementation‖,

Wiley India Course Outcomes:

At the end of this course, students will be able to

Analyze discrete-time signals and systems in various domains Design and implement filters using fixed point arithmetic targeted for embedded platforms Compare algorithmic and computational complexities in processing and coding digital

images.

MVLE106 VLSI Technology with MEMS Application L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the students about the concept of molecular reorganization, fundamentals of surfaces and interfaces

2. To introduce the students about the principles of different types of materials 3. To introduce the students about the concept of MEMS design, and fabrication technology

To introduce the students about the different types of MEMS and its applications Syllabus Contents: Unit 1: Crystal growth: Wafer preparation, Processing considerations, Chemical cleaning, Getting

the thermal stress factors etc. Epitaxy: Vapors phase epitaxy basic transport processes & reaction kinetics, Doping & Auto doping, equipments, & Safety considerations, Buried layers, Epitaxial defects, Molecular beam epitaxy, Equipment used, Film characteristics, SOI structure.

Unit 2: Oxidation: Growth mechanism & kinetics, Silicon oxidation model, Interface considerations, Orientation dependence of oxidation rates thin oxides, Oxides, Oxidation technique & systems dry & wet oxidation., Masking properties of SiO2.

Unit 3: Diffusion: Diffusion from a chemical source in vapor form at high temperature, Diffusion from doped oxide source, Diffusion from an ion implanted layer.

Unit 4: Lithography:Optical lithography, Optical resists, Contact & proximity printing, Projection printing, Electron lithography, resists, Mask generation, Electron optics, Roster scans & vector scans, Variable beam shape, X-ray lithography, Resists & printing, X-ray sources &masks, Ion lithography. Unit 5: Etching: Reactive plasma etching, AC & DC plasma excitation, Plasma properties, Chemistry & surface interactions, Feature size control & apostrophic etching, Ion enhanced & induced etching, Properties of etch processing. Reactive ion beam etching, Specific etches processes, poly/polycide, Trench etching.

Unit 6: Simulation & Analytical Techniques: Introduction to process modelling, SUPREM. Reliability issues in VLSI technology, Geometrical manipulations, A novel measurement technique for 2D implanted ion distributions, Introduction to partial differential equation solver, The merged multi grid method, Modeling & simulation of isothermal, Non isothermal and hydrodynamic devices.

Unit 7: MEMS Introduction and Historical Background, Scaling Effects. Micro/Nano Sensors, Actuators and Systems overview: Case studies. Review of Basic MEMS fabrication modules: Oxidation, Deposition Techniques, Lithography (LIGA), and Etching. Micromachining: Surface Micromachining, sacrificial layer processes, Stiction; Bulk Micromachining, Isotropic Etching and Anisotropic Etching, Wafer Bonding. Mechanics of solids in MEMS/NEMS: Stresses, Strain, Hookes‘s law, Poisson effect, Linear Thermal Expansion, Bending; Energy methods, Overview of Finite Element Method, Modeling of Coupled Electromechanical Systems.

Unit 8: MEMS types and their applications: Mechanical MEMS – Strain and pressure sensors, Accelerometers etc., Electromagnetic MEMS – Micromotors, Wireless and GPS MEMS etc Magnetic MEMS – all effect sensors, SQUID magnetometers, Optical MEMS – Micromachined fiber optic component, Optical sensors, Thermal MEMS – thermo-mechanical and thermo-electrical actuators, Peltier heat pumps.

Text/Reference Book: G. K. Ananthasuresh, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalkrishnan K. N. Bhat, V. K. Aatre, Micro and

Smart Systems, Wiley India, 2012. S. E.Lyshevski, Nano-and Micro-Electromechanical systems: Fundamentals of Nano-and

Microengineering (Vol. 8). CRC press, (2005).

S. D. Senturia, Microsystem Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001. M. Madou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, 1997. G. Kovacs, Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook, McGraw-Hill, Boston, 1998. M.H. Bao, Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, and Gyroscopes,

Elsevier, New York, 2000 Course Outcomes: At the end of the course the students will be able to 1. Appreciate the underlying working principles of MEMS and NEMS devices. 2. Design and model MEM devices. 3. Explain the concept of molecular reorganization, fundamentals of surfaces and interfaces 4. Explain the different types of MEMS and its applications

MVLE107 Parallel Processing L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To learn the concept of parallel processing and implementation of pipelining. To introduce upcoming VLIW processor with case study of protocol applications. To introduce multithreaded architecture and discuss various issues & performance protocols. To familiarize with operating systems for multiprocessor system

Syllabus Contents:

Unit 1:Overview of Parallel Processing and Pipelining, Performance analysis, Scalability Unit 2:Principles and implementation of Pipelining, Classification of pipelining processors,

Advanced pipelining techniques, Software pipelining Unit 3: VLIW processors Case study: Superscalar Architecture- Pentium, Intel Itanium Processor,

Ultra SPARC MIPS on FPGA, Vector and Array Processor, FFT Multiprocessor Architecture Unit 4:Multithreaded Architecture, Multithreaded processors, Latency hiding techniques, Principles

of multithreading, Issues and solutions Unit 5:Parallel Programming Techniques: Message passing program development, Synchronous and

asynchronous message passing, Shared Memory Programming, Data Parallel Programming, Parallel Software Issues

Unit 6:Operating systems for multiprocessors systems Customizing applications on parallel processing platforms

References:

Kai Hwang, Faye A. Briggs, ―Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing‖, MGH International Edition

Kai Hwang, ―Advanced Computer Architecture‖, TMH V. Rajaraman, L. Sivaram Murthy, ―Parallel Computers‖, PHI. William Stallings, ―Computer Organization and Architecture, Designing for performance‖

Prentice Hall, Sixth edition Kai Hwang, Zhiwei Xu, ―Scalable Parallel Computing‖, MGH David Harris and Sarah Harris, ―Digital Design and Computer Architecture‖, Morgan

Kaufmann. Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Identify limitations of different architectures of computer Analysis quantitatively the performance parameters for different architectures Investigate issues related to compilers and instruction set based on type of architectures. Understand processing issues of operating systems for multiprocessor system.

MVLE108 System Design with Embedded Linux L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the students about Embedded Linux and Embedded Linux architecture. To introduce the students about embedded storage & devices. To introduce the students about real time Linux. To introduce the students about Embedded graphics

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1: Embedded Linux Vs Desktop Linux, Embedded Linux Distributions Unit 2: Embedded Linux Architecture, Kernel Architecture – HAL, Memory manager,

Scheduler, File System, I/O and Networking subsystem, IPC, User space, Start-up sequence

Unit 3: Board Support Package Embedded Storage: MTD, Architecture, Drivers, Embedded File System Embedded Drivers: Serial, Ethernet, I2C, USB, Timer, Kernel Modules

Unit 4: Porting Applications Real-Time Linux: Linux and Real time, Programming, Hard Real-time Linux

Unit 5: Building and Debugging: Kernel, Root file system, Embedded Graphics Unit 6: Case study of uC linux References: Karim Yaghmour, ―Building Embededd Linux Systems‖, O'Reilly & Associates P Raghvan, Amol Lad, SriramNeelakandan, ―Embedded Linux System Design and

Development‖, Auerbach Publications Christopher Hallinan, ―Embedded Linux Primer: A Practical Real World Approach‖, Prentice

Hall, 2nd Edition, 2010. Derek Molloy, ―Exploring BeagleBone: Tools and Techniques for Building with Embedded

Linux‖, Wiley, 1st Edition, 2014. Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Familiarity of the embedded Linux development model. Write, debug, and profile applications and drivers in embedded Linux. Understand and create Linux BSP for a hardware platform

MVLE109 CAD of Digital System L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce different VLSI design methodologies. To introduce VLSI automation tools. To learn the basics of general purpose methods for optimization. To learn the concept of simulation & synthesis and implementation of simple circuits using

RTL. Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Introduction to VLSI Methodologies – Design and Fabrication of VLSI Devices, Fabrication

Process and its impact on Design. Unit 2: VLSI design automation tools – Data structures and basic algorithms, graph theory and

computational complexity, tractable and intractable problems. Unit 3:General purpose methods for combinational optimization – partitioning, floor planning and pin

assignment, placement , routing. Unit 4:Simulation – logic synthesis, verification, high level Synthesis. Unit 5 :MCMS-VHDL-Verilog-implementation of simple circuits using VHDL References:

N.A. Sherwani, ―Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation‖. S.H. Gerez, ―Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation.

Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Understand the different VLSI design methodologies. Understand different VLSI automation tools. Understand the basics of general method of alternation. Understand the concept of simulation and synthesis and implementation of simple circuit

using RTL.

MVLE110 Device Modeling for Circuit Simulation L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce about the basics of spice. To introduce about the modeling fundamental of semiconductor devices and circuits. To introduce about the various MOS models 1,2, Higher BSIM version. To Introduce about the advanced MOS Fabrication technologies.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1. Introduction to SPICE & MOS Fundamentals: Principle of circuit simulation and its

objectives, AC, DC, Transient, Noise, Temperature etc analysis. MOS Threshold, transconductance with or without body bias Modeling & simulation, CMOS Inverters DC & AC Analysis, Pseudo-NMOS Inverters, Sizing inverters

Unit 2. Fabrication Simulation & Static Characterization: Introduction, IC Fabrication Technology: Overview of IC Fabrication Process, IC Photolithographic Process, Modeling the MOS Transistor for Circuit Simulations: MOS Models in SPICE, SPICE MOS LEVEL I Device Model with extraction of Parameters, Power Dissipation in CMOS Gates: Dynamic Power, Static Power, and Complete Power equation.

Unit 3. MOSFETS Modeling in Deep Sub-Micron: Introduction, Voltage Transfer Characteristics, Noise Margin Definitions for Single and Multiple source, NMOS transistors as Load Device: Saturated Enhancement Load, Linear Enhancement Load, BSIM3 Model: Binning Process in BSIM3, Short Channel Threshold Voltage, Mobility Model, Linear and saturation regions, sub-threshold current, Capacitance Model, Modeling Using Pass Transistor, CMOS Transmission Gate Logic.

Unit 4. Modeling of High Speed CMOS Design: Introduction, Switching time Analysis: Gate Sizing- Velocity saturation effects, Fanout Gate capacitance, Self- Capacitance calculations, Wire capacitance, Improving Delay Calculation with input slope, Gate sizing for Optimal Path Delay: Optimal Delay Problem, Inverter Chain Delay Optimization-FO4 Delay, Optimizing Paths with NANDs and NORs, Optimizing Paths with Logical Efforts: Derivation of Logical Effort, Understanding Logical Efforts, Branching Effort and Sideloads

Unit 5. Advanced MOS Technologies: Design and Manufacturing of Printed Electronics on Flexible substrate.

References: 1. Sedra and Smith, SPICE. 2. H.M. Rashid, Introduction to PSPICE, PHI. 3. B.G. Streetman & S. Baneerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, PHI. 4. R. Raghuram, Computer Simulation of Electronic Circuits, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 5. Bar Lev, Basic Electronics Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Understand the basics of spice modeling. Understand the modeling & simulation of different MOS devices & circuits. Understand the analytical & simulation of different MOS performance parameter at DSM

nodes. Understand the design challenges & fabrication issues in semiconductor technology.

MVL151 RTL Simulation and Synthesis with PLDs Lab L T P CR INT. 15 0 0 4 2 EXT. 35 Total 50 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments: 1. Verilog implementation of basic digital gates. 2. Verilog implementation of 8:1 Mux/Demux. 3. Verilog implementation of Full Adder. 4. Verilog implementation of 8-bit Magnitude comparator. 5. Verilog implementation of Encoder/decoder. 6. Verilog implementation of Priority encoder. 7. Verilog implementation of Flip Flops. 8. Verilog implementation of 4-bit Shift registers (SISO, SIPO, PISO, bidirectional). 9. Verilog implementation of 3-bit Synchronous Counters. 10. Verilog implementation of Binary to Gray converter. 11. Verilog implementation of Parity generator. 12. Sequence generator/detectors, Synchronous FSM – Mealy and Moore machines. 13. Vending machines - Traffic Light controller, ATM, elevator control. 14. PCI Bus & arbiter and downloading on FPGA. 15. UART/ USART implementation in Verilog. 16. Realization of single port SRAM in Verilog. 17. Verilog implementation of Arithmetic circuits like serial adder/ subtractor, parallel

adder/subtractor, serial/parallel multiplier. 18. Discrete Fourier transform/Fast Fourier Transform algorithm in Verilog.

Course outcome: At the end of the laboratory work, students will be able to:

Identify, formulate, solve and implement problems in signal processing, communication systems etc using RTL design tools.

Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics and Xilinx.

MVL152 Microcontrollers and Programmable Digital Signal Processors Lab L T P CR INT. 15 0 0 4 2 EXT. 35 Total 50 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

List of Assignments: Part A) Experiments to be carried out on Cortex-M3 development boards and using GNU tool chain

1. Blink an LED with software delay, delay generated using the SysTick timer. 2. System clock real time alteration using the PLL modules. 3. Control intensity of an LED using PWM implemented in software and hardware. 4. Control an LED using switch by polling method, by interrupt method and flash the

LED once every five switch presses. 5. UART Echo Test. 6. Take analog readings on rotation of rotary potentiometer connected to an ADC

channel. 7. Temperature indication on an RGB LED. 8. Mimic light intensity sensed by the light sensor by varying the blinking rate of an

LED. 9. Evaluate the various sleep modes by putting core in sleep and deep sleep modes. 10. System reset using watchdog timer in case something goes wrong. 11. Sample sound using a microphone and display sound levels on LEDs.

Part B) Experiments to be carried out on DSP C6713 evaluation kits and using Code Composer Studio (CCS)

1. To develop an assembly code and C code to compute Euclidian distance between any two points

2. To develop assembly code and study the impact of parallel, serial and mixed execution

3. To develop assembly and C code for implementation of convolution operation 4. To design and implement filters in C to enhance the features of given input

sequence/signal Course Outcomes: At the end of the laboratory work, students will be able to:

Install, configure and utilize tool sets for developing applications based on ARM processor core SoC and DSP processor.

Develop prototype codes using commonly available on and off chip peripherals on the Cortex M3 and DSP development boards.

RMI101 Research Methodology and IPR L T P CR Theory 75 2 0 0 2 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To formulate research problem and identify errors in research problem. To learn approaches for effective literature survey. To prepare presentation and research proposal. To learn about IPR, software, case studies regarding patent

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1: Meaning of research problem, Sources of research problem, Criteria Characteristics of a good

research problem, Errors in selecting a research problem, Scope and objectives of research problem. Approaches of investigation of solutions for research problem, data collection, analysis, interpretation, Necessary instrumentations

Unit 2: Effective literature studies approaches, analysis Plagiarism, Research ethics, Unit 3: Effective technical writing, how to write report, Paper Developing a Research Proposal,

Format of research proposal, a presentation and assessment by a review committee Unit 4: Nature of Intellectual Property: Patents, Designs, Trade and Copyright. Process of Patenting

and Development: technological research, innovation, patenting, development. International Scenario: International cooperation on Intellectual Property. Procedure for grants of patents, Patenting under PCT.

Unit 5: Patent Rights: Scope of Patent Rights. Licensing and transfer of technology. Patent information and databases. Geographical Indications.

Unit 6: New Developments in IPR: Administration of Patent System. New developments in IPR; IPR of Biological Systems, Computer Software etc. Traditional knowledge Case Studies, IPR and IITs.

References: Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, ―Research methodology: an introduction for science

& engineering students‘‖ Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, ―Research Methodology: An Introduction‖ Ranjit Kumar, 2nd Edition , ―Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for beginners‖ Halbert, ―Resisting Intellectual Property‖, Taylor & Francis Ltd ,2007. Mayall , ―Industrial Design‖, McGraw Hill, 1992. Niebel , ―Product Design‖, McGraw Hill, 1974. Asimov , ―Introduction to Design‖, Prentice Hall, 1962. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley, ― Intellectual Property in New

Technological Age‖, 2016. T. Ramappa, ―Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO‖, S. Chand, 2008

Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to Understand research problem formulation. Analyze research related information Follow research ethics Understand that today‘s world is controlled by Computer, Information Technology, but

tomorrow world will be ruled by ideas, concept, and creativity. Understanding that when IPR would take such important place in growth of individuals &

nation, it is needless to emphasis the need of information about Intellectual Property Right

to be promoted among students in general & engineering in particular. Understand that IPR protection provides an incentive to inventors for further research work

and investment in R & D, which leads to creation of new and better products, and in turn brings about, economic growth and social benefits.

MVL201 Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the basic concepts of digital CMOS design & optimization of various design parameters.

To familiarize the physical design algorithms for VLSI design. To introduce short channel effects, FINEET and metal gate technology. To familiarize differential amplifiers with various MOS loads & use of operational amplifiers

in analog design. Syllabus Contents: Technology Scaling and Road map, Scaling issues, Standard 4 mask NMOS Fabrication process Digital CMOS Design: Unit 1:Review: Basic MOS structure and its static behavior, Quality metrics of a digital design: Cost,

Functionality, Robustness, Power, and Delay, Stick diagram and Layout, Wire delay models. Inverter: Static CMOS inverter, Switching threshold and noise margin concepts and their evaluation, Dynamic behavior, Power consumption.

Unit 2:Physical design flow: Floor planning, Placement, Routing, CTS, Power analysis and IR drop estimation-static and dynamic, ESD protection-human body model, Machine model. Combinational logic: Static CMOS design, Dynamic logic, Speed and power dissipation in dynamic logic, Cascading dynamic gates,

Unit 3:Sequential logic: Static latches and registers, Bi-stability principle, MUX based latches,Static SR flip-flops, Master-slave edge-triggered register, Dynamic latches and registers, Concept of pipelining, Pulse registers, Non-bistable sequential circuit. Advanced technologies: Giga-scale dilemma, Short channel effects, High–k, Metal Gate technology, FinFET, TFET etc.

Analog CMOS Design: Unit 4:Single Stage Amplifier: CS stage with resistance load, Divide connected load, Current source

load, Triode load, CS stage with source degeneration, Source follower, Common gate stage, Cascade stage, Choice of device models. Differential Amplifiers: Basic difference pair, Common mode response, Differential pair with MOS loads, Gilbert cell.

Unit 5:Passive and active current mirrors: Basic current mirrors, Cascade mirrors, Active current mirrors. Frequency response of CS stage: Source follower, Common gate stage, Cascade stage and difference pair, Noise

Unit 6:Operational amplifiers: One stage OPAMP, Two stage OPAMP, Gain boosting, Common mode feedback, Slew rate, PSRR, Compensation of 2 stage OPAMP, Other compensation techniques.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Analyze, design, optimize and simulate analog and digital circuits using CMOS constrained by the design metrics.

Connect the individual gates to form the building blocks of a system. Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics and other open source software tools like

Ngspice.

References: J P Rabaey, A P Chandrakasan, B Nikolic, ―Digital Integrated circuits: A design

perspective‖, Prentice Hall electronics and VLSI series, 2nd Edition. Baker, Li, Boyce, ―CMOS Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation‖, Wiley, 2nd Edition. Behzad Razavi , ―Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits‖, TMH, 2007. Phillip E. Allen and Douglas R. Holberg, ―CMOS Analog Circuit Design‖, Oxford, 3rd

Edition. R J Baker, ―CMOS circuit Design, Layout and Simulation‖, IEEE Inc., 2008. Kang, S. and Leblebici, Y., ―CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits, Analysis and Design‖,

TMH, 3rdEdition. Pucknell, D.A. and Eshraghian, K., ―Basic VLSI Design‖, PHI, 3rd Edition..

MVL202 VLSI Design Verification and Testing L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the concept of testbench functionality & various types of testbench. To familiarize the various data types & use of data types in hardware description languages to

develop digital system. To introduce the subprograms: functions & procedures, use of subprograms in VLSI Testing. To familiarize the system verilog, basic OOP, object creation & utilization and randomization

in system verilog. Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Verification guidelines: Verification Process, Basic Testbench functionality, directed testing,

Methodology basics, Constrained-Random stimulus, Functional coverage, Testbench components, Layered testbench, Building layered testbench, Simulation environment phases, Maximum code reuse, Testbench performance.

Unit 2:Data types: Built-in data types, Fixed-size arrays, Dynamic arrays, Queues, Associative arrays, Linked lists, Array methods, Choosing a storage type, Creating new types with typedef , Creating user-defined structures, Type conversion, Enumerated types, Constants strings, Expression width.

Unit 3:Procedural statements and routines: Procedural statements, tasks, functions and void functions, Routine arguments, Returning from a routine, Local data storage, Time values Connecting the testbench and design: Separating the testbench and design, Interface constructs, Stimulus timing, Interface driving and sampling, Connecting it all together, Top-level scope Program – Module interactions.

Unit 4: SystemVerilog Assertions: Basic OOP: Introduction, think of nouns, Not verbs, your first class, where to define a class, OOP terminology, Creating new objects, Object de-allocation, Using objects, Static variables vs. Global variables, Class methods, Defining methods outside of the class, Scoping rules, Using one class inside another, Understanding dynamic objects, Copying objects, Public vs. Local, Straying off course building a testbench.

Unit 5:Randomization: Introduction, What to randomize, Randomization in SystemVerilog, Constraint details solution probabilities, Controlling multiple constraint blocks, Valid constraints, In-line constraints, The pre_randomize and post_randomize functions,

Unit 6:Random number functions, Constraints tips and techniques, Common randomization problems, Iterative and array constraints, Atomic stimulus generation vs. Scenario generation, Random control, Random number generators, Random device configuration.

References: Chris Spears, ― System Verilog for Verification‖, Springer, 2nd Edition M. Bushnell and V. D. Agrawal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and

Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers IEEE 1800-2009 standard (IEEE Standard for SystemVerilog— Unified Hardware

Design,Specification, and Verification Language). System Verilog website – www.systemverilog.org

http://www.sunburstdesign.com/papers/CummingsSNUG2006Boston_SystemVerilog Events.pdf

General reuse information and resources www.design-reuse.com OVM, UVM(on top of SV) www.verificationacademy.com Verification IP resources

http://www.cadence.com/products/fv/verification_ip/pages/default.aspx http://www.synopsys.com/Tools/Verification/FunctionalVerification/VerificationIP/Pages/def

ault.aspx Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Familiarity of Front end design and verification techniques and create reusable test environments.

Verify increasingly complex designs more efficiently and effectively. Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics

MVLE203 Memory Technologies L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce about various type of memory Architectures. To introduce about various performance parameter of memory Architectures. To introduce about various memory packing technologies. To introduce about various 2D & 3D memory Architectures

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Random Access Memory Technologies: Static Random Access Memories (SRAMs), SRAM

Cell Structures, MOS SRAM Architecture, MOS SRAM Cell and Peripheral Circuit, Bipolar SRAM, Advanced SRAM Architectures, Application Specific SRAMs.

Unit 2:DRAMs, MOS DRAM Cell, BiCMOS DRAM, Error Failures in DRAM, Advanced DRAM Design and Architecture, Application Specific DRAMs.SRAM and DRAM Memory controllers.

Unit 3: Non-Volatile Memories: Masked ROMs, PROMs, Bipolar & CMOS PROM, EEPROMs, Floating Gate EPROM Cell, OTP EPROM, EEPROMs, Non-volatile SRAM, Flash Memories.

Unit 4:Semiconductor Memory Reliability and Radiation Effects: General Reliability Issues, RAM Failure Modes and Mechanism, Nonvolatile Memory, Radiation Effects, SEP, Radiation Hardening Techniques. Process and Design Issues, Radiation Hardened Memory Characteristics, Radiation Hardness Assurance and Testing.

Unit 5 :Advanced Memory Technologies and High-density Memory Packing Technologies: Ferroelectric Random Access Memories (FRAMs), Gallium Arsenide (GaAs) FRAMs, Analog Memories, Magneto Resistive Random Access Memories (MRAMs), Experimental Memory Devices.

Unit 6: Memory Hybrids (2D & 3D), Memory Stacks, Memory Testing and Reliability Issues, Memory Cards High Density Memory Packaging

References:

Ashok K Sharma, ―Advanced Semiconductor Memories: Architectures, Designs and Applications‖, Wiley Interscience

Kiyoo Itoh, ―VLSI memory chip design‖, Springer International Edition Ashok K Sharma,‖ Semiconductor Memories: Technology, Testing and Reliability , PHI

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Select architecture and design semiconductor memory circuits and subsystems. Identify various fault models, modes and mechanisms in semiconductor memories and their

testing procedures. Knowhow of the state-of-the-art memory chip design. Modeling & simulation of memory structure at different technology mode.

MVLE204 SoC Design L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To familiarize the basis of SOC design and its architectural issues. To familiarize the design flow and verification of ASIP‘s and NISC‘s along with various

design methodologies. To introduce the functional simulation, synthesis, layout and timing analysis of single and

multi core systems. To adapt the concept of voltage scaling & optimization of various design parameters oon the

basis of case studies. Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:ASIC

- Overview of ASIC types, design strategies, CISC, RISC and NISC approaches for SOC architectural issues and its impact on SoC design methodologies, Application Specific Instruction Processor (ASIP) concepts.

Unit 2: NISC - NISC Control Words methodology, NISC Applications and Advantages, Architecture Description Languages (ADL) for design and verification of Application Specific Instruction set Processors (ASIP), No-Instruction-Set-computer (NISC)- design flow, modeling NISC architectures and systems, use of Generic Netlist Representation - A formal language for specification, compilation and synthesis of embedded processors.

Unit 3:Simulation - Different simulation modes, behavioural, functional, static timing, gate level, switch level, transistor/circuit simulation, design of verification vectors, Low power FPGA, Reconfigurable systems, SoC related modeling of data path design and control logic, Minimization of interconnects impact, clock tree design issues.

Unit 4:Low power SoC design / Digital system, - Design synergy, Low power system perspective- power gating, clock gating, adaptive voltage scaling (AVS), Static voltage scaling, Dynamic clock frequency and voltage scaling (DCFS), building block optimization, building block memory, power down techniques, power consumption verification.

Unit 5 :Synthesis - Role and Concept of graph theory and its relevance to synthesizable constructs, Walks, trails paths, connectivity, components, mapping/visualization, nodal and admittance graph. Technology independent and technology dependent approaches for synthesis, optimization constraints, Synthesis report analysisSingle core and Multi core systems, dark silicon issues, HDL coding techniques for minimization of power consumption, Fault tolerant designs

Unit 6:Case study for overview of cellular phone design with emphasis on area optimization, speed improvement and power minimization.

Note: Students will prepare and present a term paper on relevant identified current topics (in batches of three students per topic) as a part of theory course. References:

Hubert Kaeslin, ―Digital Integrated Circuit Design: From VLSI Architectures to CMOS Fabrication‖, Cambridge University Press, 2008.

B. Al Hashimi, ―System on chip-Next generation electronics‖, The IET, 2006

RochitRajsuman, ―System-on- a-chip: Design and test‖, Advantest America R & D Center, 2000

P Mishra and N Dutt, ―Processor Description Languages‖, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008 Michael J. Flynn and Wayne Luk, ―Computer System Design: System-on-Chip‖.

Wiley, 2011 Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to: Identify and formulate a given problem in the framework of SoC based design approaches Design SoC based system for engineering applications Realize impact of SoC on electronic design philosophy and Macro-electronics thereby incline towards entrepreneurship & skill development.

MVLE205 Low Power VLSI Design L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce about the need of low power designing To learn about SPICE simulation To learn about the leakage control at circuit & architecture level To learn about the clock distribution networks

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1: Technology & Circuit Design Levels: Sources of power dissipation in digital ICs, degree Of

freedom, recurring themes in low-power, emerging low power approaches, dynamic dissipation in CMOS, effects of Vdd & Vt on speed, constraints on Vt reduction, transistor sizing & optimal gate oxide thickness, impact of technology scaling, technology innovations.

Unit 2:Low Power Circuit Techniques: Power consumption in circuits, flip-flops & latches, high capacitance nodes, energy recovery, reversible pipelines, high performance approaches.

Unit 3: Low Power Clock Distribution: Power dissipation in clock distribution, single driver Versus distributed buffers, buffers & device sizing under process variations, zero skew Vs. tolerable skew, chip & package co-design of clock network.

Unit 4:Logic Synthesis for Low Power estimation techniques: Power minimization techniques, Low power arithmetic components- circuit design styles, adders, multipliers.

Unit 5: Low Power Memory Design: Sources & reduction of power dissipation in memory subsystem, sources of power dissipation in DRAM & SRAM, low power DRAM circuits, low power SRAM circuits.

Unit 6:Low Power Microprocessor Design System: power management support, architectural trade offs for power, choosing the supply voltage, low-power clocking, implementation problem for low power, comparison of microprocessors for power & performance.

References:

P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, ―Low Power Design Methodologies‖, Kluwer Academic, 2002

Kaushik Roy, Sharat Prasad, ―Low power CMOS VLSI circuit design‖, John Wiley sons Inc.,2000.

J.B.Kulo and J.H Lou, ―Low voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits‖, Wiley, 1999. A.P.Chandrasekaran and R.W.Broadersen, ―Low power digital CMOS design‖,

Kluwer,1995 Gary Yeap, ―Practical low power digital VLSI design‖, Kluwer, 1998.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to: CO1: Identify the sources of power dissipation in digital IC systems & understand the impact of power on system performance and reliability. CO2: Characterize and model power consumption & understand the basic analysis methods. CO3: Understand leakage sources and reduction techniques.

MVLE206 CMOS RF Circuit Design L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce the concept of RF design and wireless technology. To learn the basics of RF modulation and RF testing. To introduce the behaviors of BJT & MUSFET at RF Frequencies. To familiarize the RF circuit design concept.

1. Introduction to RF design and Wireless Technology Design and applications, Complexity and choice of Technology, Basic concepts in RF design, Nonlinearly and time Variance, Intersymbol interference, Random processes and noise. Sensitivity and dynamic range, Conversion of gains and distortion. 2. RF Modulation Analog and digital modulation of RF circuits, Comparison of various techniques for power efficiency, Coherent and non-coherent detection, Mobile RF communication and basics of Multiple Access techniques. Receiver and Transmitter architectures, Direct conversion and two-step transmitters. 3. RF Testing RF testing for heterodyne, Homodyne, Image reject, Direct IF and sub sampled receivers. 4. BJT and MOSFET Behavior at RF Frequencies BJT and MOSFET behavior at RF frequencies, Modeling of the transistors and SPICE model, Noise performance and limitations of devices, Integrated parasitic elements at high frequencies and their monolithic implementation 5. RF Circuits Design Overview of RF Filter design, Active RF components & modeling, Matching and Biasing Networks. Basic blocks in RF systems and their VLSI implementation, Low noise Amplifier design in various technologies, Design of Mixers at GHz frequency range, Various mixersworking and implementation. Oscillators- Basic topologies VCO and definition of phase noise, Noise power and trade off. Resonator VCO designs, Quadrature and single sideband generators. Radio frequency Synthesizers- PLLS, Various RF synthesizer architectures and frequency dividers, Power Amplifier design, Liberalization techniques, Design issues in integrated RF filters. References: Thomas H. Lee, Design of CMOS RF Integrated Circuits, Cambridge University press 1998. B. Razavi, RF Microelectronics, PHI 1998 R. Jacob Baker, H.W. Li, D.E. Boyce, CMOS Circuit Design, layout and Simulation, PHI,

1998. Y.P. Tsividis, Mixed Analog and Digital Devices and Technology, TMH, 1996 Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Understand the concept of RF circuit design. Understand the basis of RF modulation and RF testing. Understand the behaviors of BTT & MOSFET at RF frequency. Design the simple RF circuit design.

MVLE207 Communication Buses and Interfaces L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce various serial inter falls and design applications. To introduce CAN and PCI protocols. To introduce developing of API for data transfer on serial bus. To teach students design and development of peripherals to do data transfer.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Serial Busses Physical interface, Data and Control signals, features, Unit 2: limitations and applications of RS232, RS485, I2C, SPI Unit 3: CAN - Architecture, Data transmission, Layers, Frame formats, applications Unit 4:PCIe - Revisions, Configuration space, Hardware protocols, applications Unit 5:USB - Transfer types, enumeration, Descriptor types and contents, Device driver Unit 6:Data Streaming Serial Communication Protocol, Serial Front Panel Data Port (SFPDP) using

fibre optic and copper cable References

Jan Axelson, ―Serial Port Complete - COM Ports, USB Virtual Com Ports, and Ports for Embedded Systems ‖, Lakeview Research, 2nd Edition

Jan Axelson, ―USB Complete‖, Penram Publications Mike Jackson, Ravi Budruk, ―PCI Express Technology‖, Mindshare Press Wilfried Voss, ―A Comprehensible Guide to Controller Area Network‖, Copperhill Media

Corporation, 2nd Edition, 2005. Serial Front Panel Draft Standard VITA 17.1 – 200x Technical references on www.can-cia.org, www.pcisig.com, www.usb.org

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Select a particular serial bus suitable for a particular application. Develop APIs for configuration, reading and writing data onto serial bus. Design and develop peripherals that can be interfaced to desired serial bus.

MVLE208 Network Security and Cryptography L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce basic and advanced concepts of security. To introduce various cryptography techniques. To teach students various authentication techniques. To introduce various threats.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Security Need, security services, Attacks, OSI Security Architecture, one time passwords,

Model for Network security, Classical Encryption Techniques like substitution ciphers, Transposition ciphers, Cryptanalysis of Classical Encryption Techniques.

Unit 2:Number Theory - Introduction, Fermat‘s and Euler‘s Theorem, The Chinese Remainder Theorem, Euclidean Algorithm, Extended Euclidean Algorithm, and Modular Arithmetic.

Unit 3: Private-Key (Symmetric) Cryptography - Block Ciphers, Stream Ciphers, RC4 Stream cipher, Data Encryption Standard (DES), Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Triple DES, RC5, IDEA, Linear and Differential Cryptanalysis.

Unit 4:Public-Key (Asymmetric) Cryptography - RSA, Key Distribution and Management,Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange, Elliptic Curve Cryptography, Message Authentication Code, hash functions, message digest algorithms: MD4 MD5, Secure Hash algorithm, RIPEMD-160, HMAC.

Unit 5:Authentication - IP and Web Security Digital Signatures, Digital Signature Standards, Authentication Protocols, Kerberos, IP security Architecture, Encapsulating Security Payload, Key Management, Web Security Considerations, Secure Socket Layer and Transport Layer Security, Secure Electronic Transaction.

Unit 6:System Security - Intruders, Intrusion Detection, Password Management, Worms, viruses, Trojans, Virus Countermeasures, Firewalls, Firewall Design Principles, Trusted Systems.

References:

William Stallings, ―Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practices‖, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition.

Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman and Mike Speciner, ―Network Security, Private Communication in a Public World‖, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition

Christopher M. King, ErtemOsmanoglu, Curtis Dalton, ―Security Architecture, Design Deployment and Operations‖, RSA Pres,

Stephen Northcutt, LenyZeltser, Scott Winters, Karen Kent, and Ronald W. Ritchey, Inside Network Perimeter Security‖, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition

Richard Bejtlich, ―The Practice of Network Security Monitoring: Understanding Incident Detection and Response‖, William Pollock Publisher, 2013.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Identify and utilize different forms of cryptography techniques. Incorporate authentication and security in the network applications. Distinguish among different types of threats to the system and handle the same.

MVLE209 VLSI signal Processing L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To give knowledge about DSP algorithm. To explain about retiming techniques, folding and register minimization path problem. To introduce abut algorithm strength reduction techniques & parallel processing of FIR and

IIR filters. To explain about finite word length effects and round off noise computation in DSP.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Introduction to DSP systems, Pipelined and parallel processing. Unit 2:Iteration Bound, Retiming, unfolding, algorithmic strength reduction in filters and Transforms. Unit 3:Systolic architecture design, fast convolution, pipelined and parallel recursive and adaptive

filters, Scaling and round off noise. Unit 4: Digital lattice filter structures, bit level arithmetic, architecture, redundant arithmetic. Unit 5:Numerical strength reduction, synchronous, wave and asynchronous pipe lines, low power

design. Unit 6:Programmable digit signal processors. References: Keshab K. Parthi[A1] , VLSI Digital signal processing systems, design and implementation[A2] ,

Wiley, Inter Science, 1999. Mohammad Isamail and Terri Fiez, Analog VLSI signal and information processing, McGraw

Hill, 1994 S.Y. Kung, H.J. White House, T. Kailath, VLSI and Modern Signal Processing, Prentice Hall,

1985. Course outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to Acquired knowledge about DSP algorithms, its DFG representation, pipelining and parallel

processing approaches. Ability to acquire knowledge about retiming techniques, folding and register minimization path

problems. Ability to have knowledge about algorithmic strength reduction techniques and parallel Ability to have knowledge about algorithmic strength reduction techniques and parallel

Processing of FIR and IIR digital filters. Acquired knowledge about finite word-length effects and round off noise computation in DSP

systems.

MVLE210 ASIC’s & FPGA L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To familiarize the use of hardware description language in ASIC‘s & FPGA. To introduce the various types of ASICs its design how & various programmable logic

device. To familiarize the FPGA & implementation of digital logic on programmable logic devices. To introduce the physical design algorithms and role of testing in VLSI design.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1: Introduction to hardware description languages: Introduction to VHDL, types of

modeling, dataflow modeling, behavioral modeling, structural modeling, use of package for structural modeling, finite state machine modeling.

Unit 2: Introduction to ASICs: Introduction to ASICs, ASIC design flow, types of ASICs, full custom ASIC‘s, standard cell based ASIC‘s, Gate array based ASIC‘s, channeled gate array, structured gate arrays, programmable logic devices, introduction to programmable logic, fixed versus programmable logic, programmable logic devices, types of programmable logic devices, PROMs, PLA, PAL, CPLD & FPGA.

Unit 3: Introduction to FPGA Introduction to FPGA, evolution of programmable devices conceptual diagram of a typical FPGA, Logic blocks, interconnection resources, FPGA versus ASIC, applications of FPGA, FPGA design flow, and implementation process.

Unit 4: FPGA Architecture Various classes of FPGAs, symmetrical array, row-based, hierarchical PLD, sea-of-gates. Programming technologies, static RAM programming technology, anti-fuse programming technology, EPROM and EEPROM programming technology, commercially available FPGAs, general architecture of Xilinx FPGAS, CLB Interconnect.

Unit 5: Physical Design Circuit partitioning algorithm, K-L algorithm, floor planning algorithm, cluster growth roof planning, introduction to placement & routing.

Unit 6: VLSI Testing Basic concepts to testing, yield and reject rate, ATPG, ATPG design flow, various stuck at faults BIST.

Course Outcomes: At the end of this course, students will be able to

To understand the VHDL language & its programming. To understand the ASICs & FPGAS & the implementation of digital logic these devices. To understand the concept of FPGA, various types of FPGAS & its architecture. To understand physical design algorithms & various testing techniques.

MVL251 Analog and Digital CMOS VLSI Design Lab L T P CR INT. 15 0 0 4 2 EXT. 35 Total 50 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

List of Experiments: 1. Use VDD=1.8V for 0.18um CMOS process, VDD=1.3V for 0.13um CMOS Process

and VDD=1V for 0.09um CMOS Process.

a) Plot ID vs. VGS at different drain voltages for NMOS, PMOS. b) Plot ID vs. VGS at particular drain voltage (low) for NMOS, PMOS and

determine Vt. c) Plot ID vs. VGS at particular gate voltage (high) for NMOS, PMOS and

determine IOFF and sub-threshold slope. d) Plot ID vs. VDS at different gate voltages for NMOS, PMOS and determine

Channel length modulation factor. e) Extract Vth of NMOS/PMOS transistors (short channel and long channel). Use

VDS =30mV To extract Vth use the following procedure.

i. Plot gm vs VGS using NGSPICE and obtain peak gm point. ii. Plot y=ID/(gm)1/2 as a function of VGS using Ngspice. iii. Use Ngspice to plot tangent line passing through peak gm point

in y (VGS) plane and determine Vth. f) Plot ID vs. VDS at different drain voltages for NMOS, PMOS, plot DC load

line and calculate gm, gds, gm/gds, and unity gain frequency. Tabulate your result according to technologies and comment on it.

2. Use VDD=1.8V for 0.18um CMOS process, VDD=1.2V for 0.13um CMOS Process and VDD=1V for 0.09um CMOS Process.

a) Perform the following i. Plot VTC curve for CMOS inverter and thereon plot dVout vs.

dVin and determine transition voltage and gain g. Calculate VIL, VIH, NMH, NML for the inverter.

ii. Plot VTC for CMOS inverter with varying VDD. iii. Plot VTC for CMOS inverter with varying device ratio.

b) Perform transient analysis of CMOS inverter with no load and with load and determine tpHL, tpLH, 20%-to-80% tr and 80%-to-20% tf. (use VPULSE = 2V, Cload = 50fF) Perform AC analysis of CMOS inverter with fanout 0 and fanout 1. (Use Cin= 0.012pF, Cload = 4pF, Rload = k)

3. Use Ngspice to build a three stage and five stage ring oscillator circuit in 0.18um and 0.13um technology and compare its frequencies and time period.

4. Perform the following a) Draw small signal voltage gain of the minimum-size inverter in 0.18um and

0.13um technology as a function of input DC voltage. Determine the small signal voltage gain at the switching point using Ngspice and compare the values for 0.18um and 0.13um process.

b) Consider a simple CS amplifier with active load, as explained in the lecture, with NMOS transistor MN as driver and PMOS transistor MP as load, in 0.18um technology. (W/L)MN=5, (W/L)MP=10 and L=0.5um for both transistors. i. Establish a test bench, as explained in the lecture, to achieve VDSQ=VDD/2. ii. Calculate input bias voltage if bias current=50uA. iii. Use Ngspice and obtain the bias current. Compare its value with 50uA. iv. Determine small signal voltage gain, -3dB BW and GBW of the amplifier using small signal analysis in Ngspice (consider 30fF load capacitance). v. Plot step response of the amplifier for input pulse amplitude of 0.1V. Derive time constant of the output and compare it with the time constant resulted from -3dB BW vi. Use Ngspice to determine input voltage range of the amplifier

5. Three OPAMP INA. Vdd=1.8V Vss=0V, CAD tool: Mentor Graphics DA. Note: Adjust accuracy options of the simulator (setup->options in GUI). Use proper values of resistors to get a three OPAMP INA with differential-mode voltage gain=10. Consider voltage gain=2 for the first stage and voltage gain=5 for the second stage.

i. Draw the schematic of op-amp macro model. ii. Draw the schematic of INA. iii. Obtain parameters of the op-amp macro model such that

a. low-frequency voltage gain = 5x104, b. unity gain BW (fu) = 500KHz, c. input capacitance=0.2pF, d. output resistance =_, e. CMRR=120dB

iv. Draw schematic diagram of CMRR simulation setup. v. Simulate CMRR of INA using AC analysis (it's expected to be around 6dB below CMRR of OPAMP). vi. Plot CMRR of the INA versus resistor mismatches (for resistors of second stage only) changing from -5% to +5% (use AC analysis). Generate a separate plot for mismatch in each resistor pair. Explain how CMRR of OPAMP changes with resistor mismatches. vii. Repeat (iii) to (vi) by considering CMRR of all OPAMPs to be 90dB.

6. Technology: UMC 0.18um, VDD=1.8V. Use MAGIC or Microwind. a) Draw layout of a minimum size inverter in UMC 0.18um technology using MAGIC Station layout editor. Use that inverter as a cell and lay out three cascaded minimum-sized inverters. Use M1 as interconnect line between inverters. b) Run DRC, LVS and RC extraction. Make sure there is no DRC error. Extract the netlist. c) Use extracted netlist and obtain tPHLtPLH for the middle inverter using Eldo. d) Use interconnect length obtained and connect the second and third inverter. Extract the new netlist and obtain tPHL and tPLH of the middle inverter. Compare new values of delay times with corresponding values obtained in part ‗c‘.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the laboratory work, students will be able to:

Design digital and analog Circuit using CMOS. Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics and other open source software tools

like Ngspice

MVL 252 VLSI Design Verification and Testing Lab L T P CR INT. 15 0 0 4 2 EXT. 35 Total 50 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

List of Assignments: 1. Sparse memory 2. Semaphore 3. Mail box 4. Classes 5. Polymorphism 6. Coverage 7. Assertions

Course Outcomes: At the end of the laboratory work, students will be able to:

Verify increasingly complex designs more efficiently and effectively. Use EDA tools like Cadence, Mentor Graphics.

MVLE301 Communication Network L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

Teach students various communication protocols and do analysis of protocols. To teach various routine protocols and design application. Give introduction on congestion management and queuing disciplines. Prepare student to design amplification based on various communication protocols.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Introduction: - Network Architecture, Performance Unit 2:Connecting nodes: - Connecting links, Encoding, framing, Reliable transmission, Ethernet and

Multiple access networks, Wireless networks Unit 3:Queuing models - For a) one or more servers b) with infinite and finite queue size c) Infinite

population Internetworking: - Switching and bridging, IPv4, Addressing, Routing Protocols, Scale issues, Routers - Architecture, IPv6

Unit 4:End-to-End Protocols: - Services, Multiplexing, De-multiplexing, UDP, TCP, RPC, RTP Unit 5:Congestion control and Resource Allocation - Issues, Queuing disciplines, TCP congestion

control, Congestion Avoidance, QoS Applications: - Domain Name Resolution, File Transfer, Electronic Mail, WWW, Multimedia Applications

Unit 6:Network monitoring – Packet sniffing tools such as Wireshark Simulations using NS2/OPNET References:

Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S, Devie, ―Computer Networks‖ , MK, 5th Edition Aaron Kershenbaum, ―Telecommunication Network Design Algorithms‖, MGH,

International Edition 1993. Vijay Ahuja, ―Communications Network Design and Analysis of Computer

Communication Networks‖, MGH, International Editions. Douglas E. Comer, ―Internetworking with TCP/IP‖, Pearson Education, 6th Edition

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Analyze protocols and algorithms, acknowledge tradeoffs and rationale Use routing, transport protocols for the given networking scenario and application Evaluate and develop small network applications

MVLE302 Selected Topics in Mathematics L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Probability and Statistics: Definitions, conditional probability, Bayes Theorem and

independence. - Random Variables: Discrete, continuous and mixed random variables, probability mass, probability density and cumulative distribution functions, mathematical expectation, moments, moment generating function, Chebyshev inequality.

Unit 2:Special Distributions: Discrete uniform, Binomial, Geometric, Poisson, Exponential, Gamma,

Normal distributions. Pseudo random sequence generation with given distribution, Functions of a Random Variable

Unit 3:Joint Distributions: Joint, marginal and conditional distributions, product moments,

correlation, independence of random variables, bi-variate normal distribution. Stochastic Processes: Definition and classification of stochastic processes, Poisson process Norms, Statistical methods for ranking data

Unit 4:Multivariate Data Analysis - Linear and non-linear models, Regression, Prediction and

Estimation - Design of Experiments – factorial method - Response surface method Unit 5:Graphs and Trees: - Graphs: Basic terminology, multi graphs and weighted graphs, paths and

circuits, shortest path Problems, Euler and Hamiltonian paths and circuits, factors of a graph, planar graph and Kuratowski‘s graph and theorem, independent sets, graph colouring

Unit 6:Trees: Rooted trees, path length in rooted trees, binary search trees, spanning trees and cut set,

theorems on spanning trees, cut sets , circuits, minimal spanning trees, Kruskal‘s and Prim‘s algorithms for minimal spanning tree.

References:

Henry Stark, John W. Woods, ―Probability and Random Process with Applications to Signal Processing‖, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition

C. L. Liu, ―Elements of Discrete Mathematics‖, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition Douglas C. Montgomery, E.A. Peck and G. G. Vining, ―Introduction to Linear Regression

Analysis‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2001. Douglas C. Montgomery, ―Design and Analysis of Experiments‖, John Wiley and Sons,

2001. B. A. Ogunnaike, ―Random Phenomena: Fundamentals of Probability and Statistics for

Engineers‖, CRC Press, 2010 Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Characterize and represent data collected from experiments using statistical methods. Model physical process/systems with multiple variables towards parameter estimation and

prediction Represent systems/architectures using graphs and trees towards optimizing desired

objective.

MVLE303 Nano materials and Nanotechnology L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To learn the basic science behind the fabrication of nanomaterials. To study the new solutions for current problems and competing technologies for future

applications. To study the inter disciplinary projects applicable to wide areas. To study the operation fo fabrication and characterization devices to achieve precisely

designed systems. Syllabus Contents: Unit 1:Nanomaterials in one and higher dimensions: Basic concept of Nano science and

technology, Quantum wire, Quantum wel, Quantum dot, properties and technological advantages of Nano materials, carbon nanotubes and application, material processing by Sol, Gel method, Chemical vapour deposition and physical vapour deposition, principles of SEM,TEM and AFM.

Unit 2:Applications of one and higher dimension nano-materials: Application of Fullerene, CNT, Graphene and other carbon nanomaterials, Mechanical, Thermal application, Electronic applications and biological applications.

Unit 3:Nano-lithography, micro electro-mechanical system (MEMS) and nano-phonics: Necessity for a clean room, different types of clean rooms, Lithography, Printing, Chemical process, Etching techniques, the modern process, optical micro, nanolithography, Applications of nanolithography. Introduction to Micro sensors and MEMS, Evolution of Micro sensors & MEMS, MEMS types, MEMS sensors, Applications and Advantages of MEMS technology. Photons and electrons, similarities and differences, free space propagation, confinement of photons and electrons, nanoscale optical interaction, axial and lateral nanoscopic lacalization, nanoscale confinement of electronics interactions.

Unit 4:carbon nanotubes, synthesis and applications: History, types of CNTs, synthesis methods, CVD method, Laser ablation and electric arc processes growth machanisms, purification methods, applications Lithiumion battery, fuel cell sensor applications, applications to nanoelectronics, nanocomposites.

Unit 5: Evolution of Nanoelectronics: Moore‘s Law, Silicon Electronics, limitations, Discussionof the Internationsl Technology Roadmap characteristics, need for new concepts in electronics, silicon MOS Transistor from Micro to nano, Future opportunities.

Unit 6: Interdisciplinary arena of nanotechnology: Energy chanllenge in the 21st Century and nanotechnology, conventional and unconventional fissile fuels, nanotechnology in fuel production, renewable energy sources, photovoltaics, hydrogen production, fuel cells, thermoelectricity, implementation of renewable energy technologies.

References:

Nanoscale Materials in Chemistry edited by Kenneth J. Klabunde and Ryan M. Richards, 2ndedn, John Wiley and Sons, 2009.

Nanocrystalline Materials by A I Gusev and A ARempel, Cambridge International Science Publishing, 1st Indian edition by Viva Books Pvt. Ltd. 2008.

Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology by Bharat Bhushan, Springer, 3rdedn, 2010. Carbon Nanotubes: Synthesis, Characterization and Applications by Kamal K. Kar,

Research Publishing Services; 1stedn, 2011, ISBN-13: 978-9810863975. Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, students will be able to: CO1: To understand the basic science behind the design and fabrication of nano scale systems. CO2: To understand and formulate new engineering solutions for current problems and competing technologies for future applications. CO3:To be able make inter disciplinary projects applicable to wide areas by clearing and fixing the boundaries in system development. CO4: To gather detailed knowledge of the operation of fabrication and characterisation devices to achieve precisely designed systems.

MVLE304 VLSI Interconnects L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To introduce about various type of interconnects & their sizing. To introduce about speed enhancing techniques for interconnects. To learn about various signaling techniques. To learn about crosstalk & energy analysis of various interconnects.

Syllabus Contents: 1. Interconnects: Interconnect Parameters: Resistance, Inductance, and Capacitance, Interconnect RC

Delays: Elmore Delay Calculation. Interconnect Models: The lumped RC Model, the distributed RC Model, the transmission line model. SPICE Wire Models: Distributed RC lines in SPICE, Transmission line models in SPICE.

2. Scaling issues in interconnects: Gate and Interconnect Delay 3. CMOS Repeater: The Static Behavior- Switching Threshold, Noise Margins, The Dynamic

Behavior- Computing the capacitances, Propagation Delay: First order Analysis, Propagation Delay from a Design perspective, Power, energy and Energy-Delay- Dynamic Power Consumption, Static Consumption, Analyzing Power Consumption using SPICE

4. Repeater Design: Driving Interconnects for Optimum speed and power: Short channel model

of CMOS Repeater - Transient Analysis of an RC loaded CMOS repeater, Delay Analysis, Analytical power expressions: Dynamic power, Short circuit Power, Resistive Power Dissipation, CMOS Repeater insertion: Analytical expressions for delay and power of a repeater chain driving an RC load.

5. Advanced Interconnect Techniques: Reduced-swing Circuits, Current-mode Transmission

Techniques 6. Crosstalk: Theoretical basis and circuit level modeling of crosstalk, Energy dissipation due to

crosstalk: Model for energy calculation of two coupled lines. Contribution of driver and interconnect to dissipated energy, Crosstalk effects in logic VLSI circuits: Static circuits, Dynamic circuits and various remedies.

References: 1. Jan M. Rabaey, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits– A design Perspective, TMH, 2nd Edition 2003. 2. F.Moll, M.Roca, Interconnection Noise in VLSI Circuits, Kluwer Academic Publishers. 3. John P. Uymera, Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems, Wiley Student Edition. 4. S.M. Kang, L. Yusuf, CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits-Analysis and Design TMH, 3rd Edition. Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:

Design various types of interconnects using RC & Transmission line model. Design of high speed & low power interconnects. To understand modelling of crosstalk, delay & power for various interconnects. Understand the concept of repeats & advanced interconnects techniques.

MVLE305 IOT and Applications L T P CR Theory 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work 25 Total 100 Duration of Exam 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

To learn IOT technology, security, standardization. To learn IOT radiation, design principle. To learn and design IOT application for industrial use. To learn about private implementation security issues in platform.

Syllabus Content: Unit 1; IoT& Web Technology The Internet of Things Today, Time for Convergence, Towards the

IoT Universe, Internet of Things Vision, IoT Strategic Research and Innovation Directions, IoT Applications, Future Internet Technologies, Infrastructure, Networks and Communication, Processes, Data Management, Security, Privacy & Trust, Device Level Energy Issues, IoT Related Standardization, Recommendations on Research Topics.

Unit 2: M2M to IoT – A Basic Perspective– Introduction, Some Definitions, M2M Value Chains, IoT Value Chains, An emerging industrial structure for IoT, The international driven global value chain and global information monopolies. M2M to IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and needed capabilities, An IoT architecture outline, standards considerations.

Unit 3: IoT Architecture -State of the Art – Introduction, State of the art, Architecture Reference Model- Introduction, Reference Model and architecture, IoT reference Model, IoT Reference Architecture- Introduction, Functional View, Information View, Deployment and Operational View, Other Relevant architectural views.

Unit 4: IoT Applications for Value Creations Introduction, IoT applications for industry: Future Factory Concepts, Brownfield IoT, Smart Objects, Smart Applications, Four Aspects in your Business to Master IoT, Value Creation from Big Data and Serialization, IoT for Retailing Industry, IoT For Oil and Gas Industry, Opinions on IoT Application and Value for Industry, Home Management, eHealth.

Unit 5: Internet of Things Privacy, Security and Governance Introduction, Overview of Governance, Privacy and Security Issues,

Unit 6: Contribution from FP7 Projects, Security, Privacy and Trust in IoT-Data-Platforms for Smart Cities, First Steps Towards a Secure Platform, Smartie Approach. Data Aggregation for the IoT in Smart Cities, Security

References:

Vijay Madisetti and ArshdeepBahga, ―Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach)‖, 1st Edition, VPT, 2014.

Francis daCosta, ―Rethinking the Internet of Things: A Scalable Approach to Connecting Everything‖, 1stEdition, Apress Publications, 2013.

CunoPfister, ―Getting Started with the Internet of Things‖, O_Reilly Media, 2011. Course Outcome: At the end of this course, students will be able to

Understand the concept of IOT and M2M Study IOT architecture and applications in various fields Study the security and privacy issues in IOT.

MVL351/401 (Dissertation) Dissertation Phase – I and Phase - II Teaching Scheme Lab work : 20(I) and 32(II) hrs/week

Credits:10 At the end of this course, students will be able to

Ability to synthesize knowledge and skills previously gained and applied to an in-depth

Study and execution of new technical problem. Capable to select from different methodologies, methods and forms of analysis to

produce a suitable research design, and justify their design. Ability to present the findings of their technical solution in a written report. Presenting the work in International/ National conference or reputed journals.

Syllabus Contents: The dissertation / project topic should be selected / chosen to ensure the satisfaction of the urgent need to establish a direct link between education, national development and productivity and thus reduce the gap between the world of work and the world of study. The dissertation should have the following Relevance to social needs of society Relevance to value addition to existing facilities in the institute Relevance to industry need Problems of national importance Research and development in various domain The student should complete the following: Literature survey Problem Definition Motivation for study and Objectives Preliminary design / feasibility / modular approaches Implementation and Verification Report and presentation The dissertation stage II is based on a report prepared by the students on dissertation allotted to them. It may be based on: Experimental verification / Proof of concept. Design, fabrication, testing of Communication System. The viva-voce examination will be based on the above report and work. Guidelines for Dissertation Phase – I and II at M. Tech. (Electronics): As per the AICTE directives, the dissertation is a year long activity, to be carried out and evaluated in two phases i.e. Phase – I: July to December and Phase – II: January to June. The dissertation may be carried out preferably in-house i.e. department_s laboratories and centers OR in industry allotted through department_s T & P coordinator. After multiple interactions with guide and based on comprehensive literature survey, the student shall identify the domain and define dissertation objectives. The referred literature should preferably include IEEE/IET/IETE/Springer/Science Direct/ACM journals in the areas of Computing and Processing (Hardware and Software), Circuits-Devices and Systems, Communication-Networking and Security, Robotics and Control Systems, Signal Processing and Analysis and any other related domain. In case of Industry sponsored

projects, the relevant application notes, while papers, product catalogues should be referred and reported. Student is expected to detail out specifications, methodology, resources required, critical issues involved in design and implementation and phase wise work distribution, and submit the proposal within a month from the date of registration. Phase – I deliverables: A document report comprising of summary of literature survey, detailed objectives, project specifications, paper and/or computer aided design, proof of concept/functionality, part results, A record of continuous progress. Phase – I evaluation: A committee comprising of guides of respective specialization shall assess the progress/performance of the student based on report, presentation and Q & A. In case of unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend repeating the Phase-I work. During phase – II, student is expected to exert on design, development and testing of the proposed work as per the schedule. Accomplished results/contributions/innovations should be published in terms of research papers in reputed journals and reviewed focused conferences OR IP/Patents. Phase – II deliverables: A dissertation report as per the specified format, developed system in the form of hardware and/or software, A record of continuous progress. Phase – II evaluation: Guide along with appointed external examiner shall assess the progress/performance of the student based on report, presentation and Q & A. In case of unsatisfactory performance, committee may recommend for extension or repeating the work.

OPEN ELECTIVES MECO-301 Business Analytics L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

Understand the role of business analytics within an organization. Analyze data using statistical and data mining techniques and understand relationships

between the underlying business processes of an organization. To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and

solve business problems and to support managerial decision making. To become familiar with processes needed to develop, report, and analyze business

data. Use decision-making tools/Operations research techniques. Mange business process using analytical and management tools. Analyze and solve problems from different industries such as manufacturing, service,

retail, software, banking and finance, sports, pharmaceutical, aerospace etc.

Syllabus

Unit1: Business analytics: Overview of Business analytics, Scope of Business analytics, Business Analytics Process, Relationship of Business Analytics Process and organisation, competitive advantages of Business Analytics. Statistical Tools, Statistical Notation, Descriptive Statistical methods, Review of probability distribution and data modelling, sampling and estimation methods overview.

Unit 2: Trendiness and Regression Analysis: Modelling Relationships and Trends in Data,

simple Linear Regression, Important Resources, Business Analytics Personnel, Data and models for Business analytics, problem solving, Visualizing and Exploring Data, Business Analytics Technology.

Unit 3: Organization Structures of Business analytics, Team management, Management

Issues, Designing Information Policy, Outsourcing, Ensuring Data Quality, Measuring contribution of Business analytics, Managing Changes. Descriptive Analytics, predictive analytics, predicative Modelling, Predictive analytics analysis, Data Mining, Data Mining Methodologies, Prescriptive analytics and its step in the business analytics Process, Prescriptive Modelling, nonlinear Optimization.

Unit 4: Forecasting Techniques: Qualitative and Judgmental Forecasting, Statistical

Forecasting Models, Forecasting Models for Stationary Time Series, Forecasting Models for Time Series with a Linear Trend, Forecasting Time Series with Seasonality, Regression Forecasting with Casual Variables, Selecting Appropriate Forecasting Models. Monte Carlo Simulation and Risk Analysis: Monte Carle Simulation Using Analytic Solver Platform, New-Product Development Model, Newsvendor Model, Overbooking Model, Cash Budget Model.

Unit 5: Decision Analysis: Formulating Decision Problems, Decision Strategies with the without Outcome Probabilities, Decision Trees, The Value of Information, Utility and Decision Making.

Unit 6: Recent Trends in : Embedded and collaborative business intelligence, Visual data recovery, Data Storytelling and Data journalism.

Course Outcomes: On successful complete of this course, the students should be able to:

1. Students will demonstrate knowledge of data analytics. 2. Students will demonstrate the ability of think critically in making decisions based on

data and deep analytics. 3. Students will demonstrate the ability to use technical skills in predicative and

prescriptive modeling to support business decision-making. 4. Students will demonstrate the ability to translate data into clear, actionable insights.

MECO-302 Industrial Safety L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Syllabus

Unit-I: Industrial safety: Accident, causes, types, results and control, mechanical and

electrical hazards, types, causes and preventive steps/procedure, describe salient points of factories act 1948 for health and safety, wash rooms, drinking water layouts, light, cleanliness, fire, guarding, pressure vessels, etc, Safety color codes. Fire prevention and firefighting, equipment and methods.

Unit-II: Fundamentals of maintenance engineering: Definition and aim of maintenance

engineering, Primary and secondary functions and responsibility of maintenance department, Types of maintenance, Types and applications of tools used for maintenance, Maintenance cost & its relation with replacement economy, Service life of equipment.

Unit-III: Wear and Corrosion and their prevention: Wear- types, causes, effects, wear

reduction methods, lubricants-types and applications, Lubrication methods, general sketch, working and applications, i. Screw down grease cup, ii. Pressure grease gun, iii. Splash lubrication, iv. Gravity lubrication, v, Wick feed lubrication vi. Side feed lubrication, vii. Ring lubrication, Definition, principle and factors affecting the corrosion. Types of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods.

Unit-IV: Fault tracing: Fault tracing-concept and importance, decision treeconcept, need and

applications, sequence of fault finding activities, show as decision tree, draw decision tree for problems in machine tools, hydraulic, pneumatic,automotive, thermal and electrical equipment‘s like, I. Any one machine tool, ii. Pump iii. Air compressor, iv. Internal combustion engine, v. Boiler, vi. Electrical motors, Types of faults in machine tools and their general causes.

Unit-V: Periodic and preventive maintenance: Periodic inspection-concept and need,

degreasing, cleaning and repairing schemes, overhauling of mechanical components, overhauling of electrical motor, common troubles and remedies of electric motor, repair complexities and its use, definition, need, steps and advantages of preventive maintenance. Steps/procedure for periodic and preventive maintenance of I. Machine tools, ii. Pumps, iii. Air compressors, iv. Diesel generating (DG) sets, Program and schedule of preventive maintenance of mechanical and electrical equipment, advantages of preventive maintenance. Repair cycle concept and importance

Reference:

1. Maintenance Engineering Handbook, Higgins & Morrow, Da Information Services. 2. Maintenance Engineering, H. P. Garg, S. Chand and Company. 3. Pump-hydraulic Compressors, Audels, Mcgrew Hill Publication. 4. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Winterkorn, Hans, Chapman & Hall London.

MECO-303 Operations Research L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Optimization Techniques, Model Formulation, models, General L.R Formulation,

Simplex Techniques, Sensitivity Analysis, Inventory Control Models Unit 2 Formulation of a LPP, Graphical solution revised simplex method, duality theory, dual

simplex method - sensitivity analysis - parametric programming Unit 3: Nonlinear programming problem, Kuhn-Tucker conditions min cost flow problem,

max flow problem, CPM/PERT Unit 4: Scheduling and sequencing - single server and multiple server models, deterministic

inventory models, Probabilistic inventory control models, Geometric Programming. Unit 5: Competitive Models,Single and Multi-channel Problems, Sequencing Models,

Dynamic Programming, Flow in Networks, Elementary Graph Theory, Game Theory Simulation

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

Students should able to apply the dynamic programming to solve problems of discreet and continuous variables.

Students should able to apply the concept of non-linear programming Students should able to carry out sensitivity analysis Student should able to model the real world problem and simulate it.

References:

1. H.A. Taha, Operations Research, An Introduction, PHI, 2008 2. H.M. Wagner, Principles of Operations Research, PHI, Delhi, 1982. 3. J.C. Pant, Introduction to Optimisation: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, Delhi,

2008 4. Hitler Libermann Operations Research: McGraw Hill Pub. 2009 5. Pannerselvam, Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010 6. Harvey M Wagner, Principles of Operations Research: Prentice Hall of India 2010

MECO-304 Cost Management of Engineering Projects L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Syllabus

Unit 1: Introduction and Overview of the Strategic Cost Management Process Unit 2: Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential cost, Incremental cost

and Opportunity cost. Objectives of a Costing System; Inventory valuation; Creation of a Database for operational control; Provision of data for Decision-Making. Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and nontechnical activities. Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and documents Project team, Role of each member. Importance Project site, Data required with significance. Project contracts, Types and contents, Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning, mechanical and process.

Unit 3: Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing, Distinction between Marginal

Costing and Absorption Costing, Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis, Various decision-making problems, Standard Costing and Variance Analysis, Pricing strategies, Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle Costing, Costing of service sector, Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Total Quality Management and Theory of constraints, Activity-Based Cost Management, Bench Marking, Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis. Budgetary Control; Flexible Budgets, Performance budgets, Zero-based budgets, Measurement of Divisional profitability pricing decisions including transfer pricing.

Unit 4: Quantitative techniques for cost management, Linear Programming, PERT/CPM,

Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Simulation, Learning Curve Theory.

References:

1. Cost Accounting A Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting 3. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting 4. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler

publisher 5. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co.

Ltd.

MECO-305 Composite Materials L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Syllabus

UNIT–I: INTRODUCTION: Definition, Classification and characteristics of Composite

materials, Advantages and application of composites, Functional requirements of reinforcement and matrix, Effect of reinforcement (size, shape, distribution, volume fraction) on overall composite performance.

UNIT – II: REINFORCEMENTS: Preparation-layup, curing, properties and applications of

glass fibers, carbon fibers, Kevlar fibers and Boron fibers. Properties and applications of whiskers, particle reinforcements, Mechanical Behavior of composites, Rule of mixtures, Inverse rule of mixtures, Isostrain and Isostress conditions.

UNIT – III: Manufacturing of Metal Matrix Composites: Casting, Solid State diffusion

technique, Cladding, Hot isostatic pressing, Properties and applications, Manufacturing of Ceramic Matrix Composites, Liquid Metal Infiltration, Liquid phase sintering, Manufacturing of Carbon, Carbon composites, Knitting, Braiding, Weaving, Properties and applications.

UNIT–IV: Manufacturing of Polymer Matrix Composites: Preparation of Moulding

compounds and prepregs hand layup method, Autoclave method, Filament winding method, Compression moulding, Reaction injection moulding. Properties and applications.

UNIT V: Strength: Laminar Failure Criteria-strength ratio, maximum stress criteria,

Maximum strain criteria, interacting failure criteria, hygrothermal failure, Laminate first play failure-insight strength, Laminate strength-ply discount truncated maximum strain criterion, strength design using caplet plots, stress concentrations.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Material Science and Technology, Vol 13, Composites by R.W.Cahn, VCH, West Germany.

2. Materials Science and Engineering, An introduction. WD Callister, Jr., Adapted by R. Balasubramaniam, John Wiley & Sons, NY, Indian edition, 2007.

References:

1. Hand Book of Composite Materials-ed-Lubin. 2. Composite Materials, K.K.Chawla. 3. Composite Materials Science and Application, Deborah D.L. Chung. 4. Composite Materials Design and Applications, Danial Gay, Suong V. Hoa, and

Stephen W. Tasi.

MECO-306 Waste to Energy L T P CR Theory : 75 3 0 0 3 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Unit-I: Introduction to Energy from Waste: Classification of waste as fuel, Agro based,

Forest residue, Industrial waste, MSW, Conversion devices, Incinerators, gasifiers, digestors

Unit-II: Biomass Pyrolysis: Pyrolysis, Types, slow fast, Manufacture of charcoal, Methods,

Yields and application, Manufacture of pyrolytic oils and gases, yields and applications.

Unit-III: Biomass Gasification: Gasifiers, Fixed bed system, Downdraft and updraft

gasifiers, Fluidized bed gasifiers, Design, construction and operation, Gasifier burner arrangement for thermal heating, Gasifier engine arrangement and electrical power, Equilibrium and kinetic consideration in gasifier operation.

Unit-IV: Biomass Combustion: Biomass stoves, Improved chullahs, types, some exotic

designs, Fixed bed combustors, Types, inclined grate combustors, Fluidized bed combustors, Design, construction and operation, Operation of all the above biomass combustors.

Unit-V: Biogas: Properties of biogas (Calorific value and composition), Biogas plant

technology and status, Bio energy system, Design and constructional features, Biomass resources and their classification, Biomass conversion processes, Thermo chemical conversion, Direct combustion, biomass gasification, pyrolysis and liquefaction, biochemical conversion, anaerobic digestion, Types of biogas Plants, Applications, Alcohol production from biomass, Bio diesel production, Urban waste to energy conversion, Biomass energy programme in India.

References:

1. Non Conventional Energy, Desai, Ashok V., Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1990. 2. Biogas Technology - A Practical Hand Book - Khandelwal, K. C. and Mahdi, S. S.,

Vol. I & II, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 1983. 3. Food, Feed and Fuel from Biomass, Challal, D. S., IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.,

1991. 4. Biomass Conversion and Technology, C. Y. WereKo-Brobby and E. B. Hagan, John

Wiley & Sons, 1996.

ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING (AUD01A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course objectives: Understand that how to improve your writing skills and level of readability Learn about what to write in each section Understand the skills needed when writing a Title Ensure the good quality of paper at very

first-time submission

Unit 1: Planning and Preparation, Word Order, Breaking up long sentences, Structuring Paragraphs and Sentences, Being Concise and Removing Redundancy, Avoiding Ambiguity and Vagueness

Unit 2: Clarifying Who Did What, Highlighting Your Findings, Hedging and Criticising,

Paraphrasing and Plagiarism, Sections of a Paper, Abstracts. Introduction Unit 3: Review of the Literature, Methods, Results, Discussion, Conclusions, The Final

Check. Unit 4: key skills are needed when writing a Title, key skills are needed when writing an

Abstract, key skills are needed when writing an Introduction, skills needed when writing a Review of the Literature,

Unit 5: skills are needed when writing the Methods, skills needed when writing the Results,

skills are needed when writing the Discussion, skills are needed when writing the Conclusions

Unit 6: useful phrases, how to ensure paper is as good as it could possibly be the first- time

submission

Suggested Studies: 1. Goldbort R (2006) Writing for Science, Yale University Press (available on Google Books) 2. Day R (2006) How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper, Cambridge University Press 3. Highman N (1998), Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences, SIAM. Highman‘s

Book .

1. Adrian Wallwork , English for Writing Research Papers, Springer New York Dordrecht Heidelberg London, 2011

DISASTER MANAGEMENT (AUD02A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

learn to demonstrate a critical understanding of key concepts in disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response.

critically evaluate disaster risk reduction and humanitarian response policy and practice from multiple perspectives.

develop an understanding of standards of humanitarian response and practical relevance in specific types of disasters and conflict situations.

critically understand the strengths and weaknesses of disaster management approaches, planning and programming in different countries, particularly their home country or the countries they work in

Syllabus

Unit1: Introduction: Disaster: Definition, Factors And Significance; Difference Between

Hazard And Disaster; Natural And Manmade Disasters: Difference, Nature, Types And Magnitude.

Unit 2: Repercussions Of Disasters And Hazards: Economic Damage, Loss Of Human

And Animal Life, Destruction Of Ecosystem. Natural Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanisms, Cyclones, Tsunamis, Floods, Droughts And Famines, Landslides And Avalanches, Man-made disaster: Nuclear Reactor Meltdown, Industrial Accidents, Oil Slicks And Spills, Outbreaks Of Disease And Epidemics, War And Conflicts.

Unit 3: Disaster Prone Areas In India: Study Of Seismic Zones, Areas Prone To Floods

And Droughts, Landslides And Avalanches, Areas Prone To Cyclonic And Coastal Hazards With Special Reference To Tsunami, Post-Disaster Diseases And Epidemics.

Unit 4: Disaster Preparedness And Management: Preparedness, Monitoring Of

Phenomena Triggering A Disaster Or Hazard; Evaluation Of Risk, Application Of Remote Sensing, Data From Meteorological And Other Agencies, Media Reports, Governmental And Community Preparedness.

Unit 5: Risk Assessment: Disaster Risk: Concept And Elements, Disaster Risk Reduction,

Global And National Disaster Risk Situation, Techniques of Risk Assessment, Global Co-Operation In Risk Assessment And Warning, People‘s Participation In Risk Assessment. Strategies for Survival.

Unit 6: Disaster Mitigation: Meaning, Concept And Strategies Of Disaster Mitigation,

Emerging Trends in Mitigation, Structural Mitigation And Non-Structural Mitigation, Programs of Disaster Mitigation In India.

SUGGESTED READINGS:

1. R. Nishith, Singh AK, ―Disaster Management in India: Perspectives, issues and strategies ―‘New Royal book Company.

2. Sahni, Pardeep Et.Al. (Eds.),‖ Disaster Mitigation Experiences And Reflections‖, Prentice Hall Of India, New Delhi.

3. Goel S. L. , Disaster Administration And Management Text And Case Studies‖ ,Deep &Deep Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

SANSKRIT FOR TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE (AUD03A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives To get a working knowledge in illustrious Sanskrit, the scientific language in the world Learning of Sanskrit to improve brain functioning Learning of Sanskrit to develop the logic in mathematics, science & other subjects enhancing

the memory power The engineering scholars equipped with Sanskrit will be able to explore the huge knowledge

from ancient literature

Syllabus Unit 1: Alphabets in Sanskrit, Past/Present/Future Tense, Simple Sentences Unit 2: Order, Introduction of roots, Technical information about Sanskrit Literature Unit 3: Technical concepts of Engineering-Electrical, Mechanical, Architecture, Mathematics Suggested reading

1. ―Abhyaspustakam‖ – Dr.Vishwas, Samskrita-Bharti Publication, New Delhi 2. ―Teach Yourself Sanskrit‖ Prathama Deeksha-Vempati Kutumbshastri, Rashtriya Sanskrit

Sansthanam, New Delhi Publication 3. ―India‘s Glorious Scientific Tradition‖ Suresh Soni, Ocean books (P) Ltd., New Delhi.

Course Output

1. Understanding basic Sanskrit language 2. Ancient Sanskrit literature about science & technology can be understood 3. Being a logical language will help to develop logic in students

VALUE EDUCATION (AUD04A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives Understand value of education and self- development Imbibe good values in students Let the should know about the importance of character

Unit 1: Values and self-development, Social values and individual attitudes, Work ethics,

Indian vision of humanism, Moral and non, moral valuation. Standards and principles, Value judgements

Unit 2: Importance of cultivation of values, Sense of duty. Devotion, Self-reliance.

Confidence, Concentration, Truthfulness, Cleanliness, Honesty, Humanity. Power of faith, National Unity, Patriotism.Love for nature ,Discipline

Unit 3: Personality and Behavior Development, Soul and Scientific, attitude, positive

thinking, integrity and discipline, Punctuality, Love and Kindness, Avoid fault Thinking, Free from anger, Dignity of labour, Universal brotherhood and religious tolerance, True friendship, Happiness Vs suffering, love for truth, Aware of self-destructive habits, Association and Cooperation, Doing best for saving nature

Unit 4: Character and Competence, Holy books vs Blind faith, Self-management and Good

health, Science of reincarnation, Equality, Nonviolence ,Humility, Role of Women, All religions and same message, Mind your Mind, Self-control, Honesty, Studying effectively

Suggested reading

1. Chakroborty, S.K. ―Values and Ethics for organizations Theory and practice‖, Oxford University Press, New Delhi

Course outcomes

Knowledge of self-development Learn the importance of Human values Developing the overall personality

CONSTITUTION OF INDIA (AUD05A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives:

Understand the premises informing the twin themes of liberty and freedom from a civil rights perspective.

To address the growth of Indian opinion regarding modern Indian intellectuals‘ constitutional role and entitlement to civil and economic rights as well as the emergence of nationhood in the early years of Indian nationalism.

To address the role of socialism in India after the commencement of the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917 and its impact on the initial drafting of the Indian Constitution.

Syllabus

Unit 1: History of Making of the Indian Constitution: History, Drafting Committee,

(Composition & Working) Unit 2: Philosophy of the Indian Constitution: Preamble, Salient Features. Unit 3: Contours of Constitutional Rights & Duties: Fundamental Rights, Right to quality,

Right to Freedom, Right against Exploitation, Right to Freedom of Religion, Cultural and Educational Rights, Right to Constitutional Remedies, Directive Principles of State Policy, Fundamental Duties.

Unit 4: Organs of Governance: Parliament, Composition, Qualifications and is

qualifications, Powers and Functions, Executive, President, Governor, Council of Minister, Judiciary, Appointment and Transfer of Judges, Qualifications, Powers and Functions

Unit 5: Local Administration: District‘s Administration head: Role and Importance,

Municipalities: Introduction, Mayor and role of Elected Representative, CEO of Municipal Corporation, Pachayati raj, Introduction, PRI: Zila Pachayat, Elected officials and their roles, CEO Zila Pachayat, Position and role, Block level, Organizational Hierarchy (Different departments), Village level, Role of Elected and Appointed officials, Importance of grass root democracy

Unit 6: Election Commission: Election Commission, Role and Functioning, Chief Election

Commissioner and Election Commissioners, State Election Commission, Role and Functioning, Institute and Bodies for the welfare of SC/ST/OBC and women.

Course Outcomes: Discuss the growth of the demand for civil rights in India for the bulk of Indians before

the arrival of Gandhi in Indian politics. Discuss the intellectual origins of the framework of argument that informed the

conceptualization of social reforms leading to revolution in India.

Discuss the circumstances surrounding the foundation of the Congress Socialist Party [CSP] under the leadership of Jawaharlal Nehru and the eventual failure of the proposal of direct elections through adult suffrage in the Indian Constitution.

Discuss the passage of the Hindu Code Bill of 1956.

Suggested reading 1. The Constitution of India, 1950 (Bare Act), Government Publication. 2. Dr. S. N. Busi, Dr. B. R. Ambedkar framing of Indian Constitution, 1st Edition, 2015. 3. M. P. Jain, Indian Constitution Law, 7th Edn., Lexis Nexis, 2014. 4. D.D. Basu, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Lexis Nexis, 2015.

PEDAGOGY STUDIES (AUD06A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: 1. Review existing evidence on the review topic to inform programme design and policy making

undertaken by the DfID, other agencies and researchers. 2. Identify critical evidence gaps to guide the development.

Unit 1: Introduction and Methodology: Aims and rationale, Policy background,

Conceptual, framework and terminology, Theories of learning, Curriculum, Teacher education, Conceptual framework, Research questions, Overview of methodology and Searching,

Unit 2: Thematic overview: Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and

informal classrooms in developing countries, Curriculum, Teacher education. Unit 3: Evidence on the effectiveness of pedagogical practices, Methodology for the in depth

stage: quality assessment of included studies, How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy? Theory of change, Strength and nature of the body of evidence for effective pedagogical practices, Pedagogic theory and pedagogical approaches, Teachers‘ attitudes and beliefs and Pedagogic strategies.

Unit 4: Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and follow-up

support, Peer support, Support from the head teacher and the community, Curriculum and assessment, Barriers to learning: limited resources and large class sizes

Unit 5: Research gaps and future directions: Research design, Contexts, Pedagogy,

Teacher education, Curriculum and assessment, Dissemination and research impact. Course Outcomes: Students will be able to understand:

What pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and informal classrooms in developing countries?

What is the evidence on the effectiveness of these pedagogical practices, in what conditions, and with what population of learners?

How can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance materials best support effective pedagogy?

Suggested reading

1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare, 31 (2): 245-261.

2. Agrawal M (2004) Curricular reform in schools: The importance of evaluation, Journal of Curriculum Studies, 36 (3): 361-379.

3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana - does it count? Multi-site teacher education research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.

4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Pryor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning of basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International Journal, Educational Development, 33 (3): 272–282.

5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary education. Oxford and Boston: Blackwell.

6. Chavan M (2003) Read India: A mass scale, rapid, ‗learning to read‘ campaign. 7. www.pratham.org/images/resource%20working%20paper%202.pdf.

STRESS MANAGEMENT BY YOGA (AUD07A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives

To achieve overall health of body and mind To overcome stress

Syllabus

Unit 1: Definitions of Eight parts of yog. ( Ashtanga ) Unit 2: Yam and Niyam, Do`s and Don‘t‘s in life., i) Ahinsa, satya, astheya, bramhacharya and aparigraha, ii) Shaucha, santosh, tapa, swadhyay, ishwarpranidhan Unit 3: Asan and Pranayam, i) Various yog poses and their benefits for mind & body, ii)Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-Types of pranayam Course Outcomes:

Develop healthy mind in a healthy body thus improving social health also Improve efficiency

Suggested reading

1. ‗Yogic Asanas for Group Tarining-Part-I‖ : Janardan Swami Yogabhyasi Mandal, Nagpur 2. ―Rajayoga or conquering the Internal Nature‖ by Swami Vivekananda, Advaita Ashrama

(Publication Department), Kolkata

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT THROUGH LIFE ENLIGHTENMENT SKILLS (AUD08A)

L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To learn to achieve the highest goal happily To become a person with stable mind, pleasing personality and determination To awaken wisdom in students

Unit 1: Neetisatakam-Holistic development of personality, Verses 19,20,21,22 (wisdom),

Verses 29,31,32 (pride & heroism), Verses 26,28,63,65 (virtue), Verses 52,53,59 (dont‘s), Verses 71,73,75,78 (do‘s)

Unit 2: Approach to day to day work and duties, Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta, Chapter 2-Verses

41, 47,48, Chapter 3 Verses 13, 21, 27, 35, Chapter 6 Verses 5,13,17, 23, 35, Chapter 18 Verses 45, 46, 48.

Unit 3: Statements of basic knowledge, Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta: Chapter2 Verses 56, 62,

68, Chapter 12 Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18, Personality of Role model. Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta, Chapter2 Verses 17, Chapter3 Verses 36,37,42, Chapter4 Verses 18, 38,39, Chapter18 Verses 37,38,63

Course Outcomes:

Study of Shrimad-Bhagwad-Geeta will help the student in developing his personality and achieve the highest goal in life

The person who has studied Geeta will lead the nation and mankind to peace and prosperity Study of Neetishatakam will help in developing versatile personality of students.

Suggested reading

1. ―Srimad Bhagavad Gita‖ by Swami Swarupananda Advaita Ashram (Publication Department), Kolkata

2. Bhartrihari‘s Three Satakam (Niti-sringar-vairagya) by P.Gopinath, Rashtriya Sanskrit, Sansthanam, New Delhi.

SWAMI VIVEKANANDA’S THOUGHTS (AUD09A) L T P CR Theory : 75 2 0 0 0 Class Work : 25 Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce biography and philosophical thought of Swami Vivekananda

To present Swami Vivekananda’s views on major religions of the world and Universal Religion

To present Swami Vivekananda’ teaching and views on social issues.

Syllabus Unit 1: Swami Vivekananda a Brief biography, Influence of Ramakrishna on Vivekananda,

Parliament of Religions, Establishment of Ramakrishna mission. Unit 2: Philosophy of Swami Vivekananda, Nature of Reality, Nature of Self, Nature of the

universe, The doctrine of Maya, Identity of Self and God, Karma Yoga, Raj Yoga , Bhakti Yoga, Gyan Yoga.

Unit 3: Swami Vivekananda‘s observations on major religions of the world (a) Hinduism (b)

Christianity (c) Islam Unit 4: The concept of Universal Religion and its characteristic, Fundamental unity of all

religions, acceptance and not tolerance is the principle. Unit 5: Vivekananda and Nationalism, The message of patriotism, spirituality as the basis of

patriotism, Sociological views of Vivekananda, His views on caste and untouchability, status of women, His views on Education, Swami Vivekananda‘s concept of Vedantic Socialism

Books: The Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda Vol. 1 to 8 Relevant Chapters

Implementation of Credit Transfer/Mobility Policy of online courses

Reference: Gazette of India (Extraordinary) Part-III, Section-4 No. 295, UGC (Credit Framework

for Online Learning Courses through SWAYAM) Regulation, 2016, dated 19/07/2016.

With reference to 12th Academic Council Meeting dated 03/05/2017 (Agenda Item No. AC/11/12), wherein MOOCs were adopted in the CBCS scheme, In continuation to that, following modalities are proposed to introduce the credit transfer policy in academic curriculum for the Massive Open Online Courses (MOOC‘s) offered through SWAYAM (Study Webs of Active-Learning for Young Aspiring Minds) Portal.

A. General Guidelines 1. The SWAYAM shall notify in June and November every year, the list of the online

learning Courses going to be offered in the forthcoming Semester on its website https://swayam.gov.in.

2. All the UTDs/Affiliated Colleges shall, within 4 weeks from the date of notification by SWAYAM, consider through their Chairperson/Principal the online learning courses being offered through the SWAYAM platform; and keeping in view their academic requirements, decide upon the courses which it shall permit for credit transfer and keeping in view the following points:

a) There is non-availability of suitable teaching staff for running a course in the

Department. b) The facilities for offering the elective papers (courses), sought for by

the students are not on offer/scheme in the Institution, but are available on the SWAYAM platform.

c) The courses offered on SWAYAM would supplement the teaching-learning process in the Institution.

d) Online courses through SWAYAM should not be more than 20% of total courses offered in a particular semester of a programme.

3. The courses offered in a particular semester will be compiled by Digital India Cell as decided and forwarded by concerned UTDs and affiliated colleges in the prescribed format to digitalindia.ymca@gmail.com and compiled set will be put up in Academic Council for approval.

4. Student can opt for 12-16 weeks course equivalent to 3-6 credits under mentorship of faculty (MHRD MOOC‘s guidelines 11.1(J) issued by the MHRD vide its orders dated 11/03/2016).

Annexure-A

Approved in 17th Academic Council Dated 11.06.2019

5. Every student being offered a particular paper (course) would be required to register for the MOOCs for that course/paper on SWAYAM through University‘s/Affiliated College‘s SWAYAM-NPTEL Local Chapter.

6. The UTD/College may designate a faculty member as course coordinator/mentor to guide the students (at least 20 students) throughout the course with 2 hours per week contribution and with mentor addition on the Local Chapter. The mentor Chairperson/Principal will ensure the provision of facilities for smooth running of the course viz. Internet facility and proper venue in the department/college.

7. Digital India Cell of the University will be the Nodal point for keeping track of MOOCs enrolments in the University and the concerned chairpersons/principals are expected to aware their students/faculty about the online courses.

8. Importance of online learning and credit transfer policy must be shared with the students at entry level by the concerned department/college. Same may be incorporated during induction program for newly admitted students.

9. The departmental/college MOOC coordinators appointed by chairpersons of concerned departments/Principals of affiliated colleges will be responsible for identification of relevant MOOCs in the UTDs/Colleges and smooth conduction during the course.

B. Credit Transfer/Mobility of MOOCs

1. The parent Institution (offering the Course) shall give the equivalent credit weightage to the students for the credits earned through online learning courses through SWAYAM platform in the credit plan of the program.

2. Following pattern will be followed for distribution of credits and will be applicable to all students from Jan 2018 onwards:

Program Duration Minimum Credits to be

earned* B.Tech Semester I to VIII 3 M.Tech/MBA/M.Sc./MA Semester I to IV 3 BBA/BCA/B.Sc./BA Semester I to VI 3

*All students of UTDs/Affiliated colleges of all courses have to mandatorily earn minimum prescribed credits. Note: From session 2019-20 onwards, for B.Tech program, a student has to earn at least 12 credits during the duration of the Degree subject to the passing of at least one MOOC course (carrying minimum 3 credits per year).

3. A student will be eligible to get Under-Graduate/Post-Graduate degree

(B.Tech/M.Tech) with Honours if he/she completes additional credits through

MOOC‘s. (AICTE Model Curriculum, Chapter1(B)). Following pattern will be followed for earning additional credits for the award of Honours degree: Program Duration Credits to be

earned* Minimum CGPA

B.Tech Semester I to VIII 12 8.0 M.Tech Semester I to IV 6 8.0

*Inclusive of Minimum credits to be earned mentioned in clause B(2) above.

4. The earned credits shall be accepted and transferred to the total credits of the

concerned students by the University for Completion of his/her degree. Credits earned through MOOCs will be incorporated in the mark sheet issued to the student by Controller of Examination.

5. Credits for MOOC‘s will be verified by the concerned department/college and will be forwarded to Controller of Examination for further processing.

6. The courses where model curriculum of AICTE is not applicable, pattern laid down as in B(2) will be followed.

NOTE:

These guidelines will be applicable to all Affiliating institutions under University along with all UTDs. Affiliating colleges will establish their own Local Chapter on SWAYAM and follow the same process.

1. For further clarifications, Notifications ―Credit Framework for Online Learning

Courses through SWAYAM‖ (UGC Regulations dated 19/07/2016) and ―MHRD MOOC‘s guidelines‖ (MHRD guidelines dated 11/03/2016) may be referred.

SCHEME & SYLLABUS

for

Ph.D.

in

Electronics Engineering

(For Session 2017- 18)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING YMCA UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

FARIDABAD

Ph.D. (Electronics Engineering)

Scheme & Syllabus

Internals

Course

No.

Course Title Teaching Schedule

Marks for End Term Examination

TOTAL MARK S

CREDITS

L P TOTA

L THEOR

Y PRACTI

CAL

PHD-100A Research Methodology

4 - 4 25 75 - 100 4

CBCS/Elective-I 4 - 4 25 75 - 100 4

TOTAL 8 8 50 150 200 8

Elective -1

Sr.No. Course Code Name

1 PhEE-17O-01 Computational Control of Industrial Process

2 PhEE-17O-02 VLSI Design Circuits and Systems

3 PhEE-17O-03 Solar Photovoltaic Technology and Applications

4 PhEE-17O-04 MEMS Sensor Design and Fabrication

5 PhEE-17O-05 Embedded System & Internet of Things

6 PhEE-18E-01 Digital Image Processing

7 PhEE-18E-02 Securities in Communication Networks

Note: Exam duration will be as under

(a)Theory exams will be of 3 hours duration

Code: PHD – 100A RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

PhD (Common Subject)

No. of Credits: 4 Sessional: 25 Marks L | T | P | Total Theory: 75 Marks 4 | 0 | 0 | 4 Total: 100 Marks

Duration of Exam: 3 Hours

Course Objectives: Understand research process in order to plan a research proposal Learn methods to devise and design a research set-up Plan and perform data collection methods and its analysis Conclude research in report writing

Course Outcomes: The research scholar shall be able to CO1 Plan a research proposal and design the research. CO2 Collect data through experiments or surveys as per research requirement. CO3 Understand and apply sampling and sampling distributions. CO4 Understand and perform quantitative and qualitative data analysis. CO5 Write research report with proper citations.

Unit 1 Introduction to Research: Definition, need and purpose of research, types of research,

research process, approaches to research, planning a research proposal, literature review. Unit 2 Measurement Scales: Indexes vs. Scales, Types of Scale, construction of Scale, Bogardus

social distance scale, Thurstone Scale, Likert Scale, Semantic Differential Scale, Guttmann Scale.

Unit 3 Data Collection Methods: Experiments and Surveys, Experiments: Classical Experiments, Independent & Dependent Variables, Pre Testing & Post Testing, Double Blind Experiment, Subject Selection, Variation on Experiment Design. Survey Research: Topics appropriate for survey research, Guidelines for asking questions, Questionnaire Construction, Strengths & Weakness of Survey Research, Types of Surveys.

Unit 4 Sampling: Types of sampling methods: Non Probability Sampling, Probability Sampling, Theory & Logic of Probability Sampling, Sampling Distributions & Estimates of Sampling Error.

Unit 5 Data Analysis: Qualitative v/s Quantitative data analysis, Qualitative Data Analysis: Discovering Patterns, Grounded Theory Method, Semiotics, Conversation Analysis, Qualitative Data Processing. Quantitative Data Analysis: Quantification of Data, Univariate Analysis, Bivariate Analysis, Multivariate Analysis, Regression Analysis, Description Analysis. Hypothesis. Multiple Attribute Decision Making.

Unit 6 Report Writing, Ethical Issues and Outcomes: Report Preparation, Structure of Report, Report Writing Skills, Citations, Research Papers, Intellectual Property Rights, Plagiarism, Patent, Commercialization, Ethical Issues.

References: 1. Research Methodology by R. Panneerselvam, 2nd Ed. PHI 2. Research Methodology by C.R. Kothari & Gaurav Garg, 3rd Ed. New Age Publishers 3. Research Methodology and Scientific Writing by C. George Thomas, Ane Books 4. The practice of social research by Earl Babbie, 14th Ed. Cengage 5. Multiple Attribute Decision Making, Gwo-Hshiung Tzeng and Jih-Jeng Huang, CRC Press

Computational Control of industrial Process (PhEE-17O-01) L T P CR Theory : 75 4 0 0 4 Class Work : 25

Total : 100 Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

Course Objectives: To introduce the basic principles & importance of process control in industrial process plants To analyse First order, second order, and integrating systems including dead time are treated with basic

controller algorithms. To introduce the dynamic behaviour of processes in different situations To introduce about defining controller structure with respect to controlled process and perform parameters

tuning in order to assure required performance of the system. To introduce the concepts involved in multiple single loops in various applications. To introduce about theoretical and empirical mathematical models of different processes To introduce about the design of different types of controllers To introduce about the key concepts in adaptive control system To introduce about the Review of z transform, modified Z transform and Delta transform Relation

between discrete and continuous transfer function To introduce about the Open loop and closed loop response of SDS design and implementation of

different digital control algorithm Stability analysis of Discrete systems

Course Outcomes: The research scholar shall be able to CO1 Understand the basic principles & importance of process control in

industrial process plants. CO2 Model and analyze first order and integrating systems including dead time and

their characteristics. CO3 Understand different types of controller, their tuning and their effect on system

performance. CO4 Describe different control values used in industrial applications.

CO5 Understand concept of single loop, multiple loop, single variable and multivariable controlled process.

CO6 Understand adaptive, self tuning, interaction and decoupling of loops.

Unit 1 Historical prospective: Incentives of process control, synthesis of control system,

classification and definition of variables. Need and application of mathematical

Modeling, lumped and distributed parameters, analogies, thermal, electrical and chemical

systems, Modeling of CSTR, heat exchanger.

Unit 2 Multicapacity Systems: Interacting and non-interacting type of systems, dead time

elements.

Unit 3 Control modes: Definition, characteristics and comparison of P, PI, PD, PID controllers.

Dynamic behaviour of feedback-controlled process for different control modes, control

system quality, IAE, ISE, IATE criterion, tuning of controllers, Ziegler-Nicholas, and

Cohen coon methods. Realization of different control modes in electric and electronic

controllers.

Unit 4 Multi-loop and Multi-variables Systems: Review and limitation of single loop control,

need for multi loop systems. Principle, analysis and application of cascade, ratio, feed

forward, feedback, override, split range, selective, auctioneering control.

Unit 5 Introduction to adaptive and self-tuning control: Interaction and decoupling of loops.

Unit 6 Stability Analysis in Z domain: Jury’s criterion and Bilinear transformation, mapping

between Z plane and S plane.

Text Books-

1. George Stephnopolous “Chemical Process Control” Prentice Hall

2. Peter Herriot, “ Process control” Tata McGraw Hill

3. Donald R caughanowr “ Process System Analysis and control” McGraw Hill international edition.

4. D.P.Eckmen “ Industrial instrumentation” Wiley Eastern.

5. Katsuhiko Ogata , Discrete Time Control Systems, 2nd edition, printice hall international edition.

6. P. Deshponde and ash, computer controlled system ISA Press, USA

7. Richard H. Middieton Graham Goowin„ Digital control and estimation A unified Approach;

prentice Hall NJ, 1999

8. Astrom A.J,Bjorn Witten mark ,Adaptive Control, Second Edition ,Prentice Hall of India , New Delhi,

1994

VLSI DESIGN CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS (PhEE-17O-02) L T P CR Theory : 75

4 0 0 4 Class Work : 25

Total : 100

Duration of Exam : 3 Hrs.

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To study the evolution of VLSI technology, VLSI Design Flow, Basic MOS Transistor, Multiple transistor

amplifier stage, Enhancement and depletion mode, MOS structure, NMOS, PMOS and CMOS fabrication.

To study the electrical properties of MOS Threshold voltage, MOSFET current voltage characteristics, second

order effects, MOS inverters: VTC characteristics of NMOS inverter, CMOS inverter and Bi-CMOS inverter.

Noise margins, Latch-up in CMOS circuits.

To study the design process of Physical design of simple and complex logic gates using NMOS and CMOS

technology, Stick diagrams, NMOS Design Style. CMOS Design Style, Lambda based Design Rules.

To study the MOS transistor switching characteristics, Sheet resistance, area capacitance, inverter delay.

Switching power dissipation of CMOS inverters.

To study the dynamic logic circuits CMOS Logic Structure, Complementary CMOS Logic, Pseudo

NMOS Logic, Dynamic CMOS Logic, CMOS Domino Logic, Clocked CMOS Logic, Pass Transistor Logic,

CMOS transmission gate Logic

To study the scaling of MOS circuits,scaling models, scaling factor for device parameters, Advantages and

Limitations of scaling.

To study of subsystem design, Architectural issues in VLSI, Design of CMOS parity generator, Multiplexer,

n-Bit Comparator, Incrementer/Decrementer, ALU subsystem

Course Outcomes: The research scholar shall be able to CO1 Understand the VLSI design flow, enhancement & depletion type transistors and fabrication of

NMOS, PMOS & CMOS.. CO2 Understand the electrical properties of MOS, VTC characteristics of NMOS inverter, CMOS

inverter &BiCMOS inverter, Latch-up concept CO3 Design & working of logic circuits using NMOS & CMOS technology & also understanding the

concept of stick diagram & layout. Understand the concept & derivations of MOS switching characteristics i.e sheet resistance, capacitance & power dissipation.

CO4 Design of various dynamic circuits i.e Pseudo NMOS logic ,CMOS dynamic Logic etc & design of other complex structures using pass transistors & transmission gates. Understand the concept of scaling of MOS, Scaling factors & parameters.

CO5 Understand the architectural issues to design any subsystem & design of multiplexer, comparator, ALU & other complex circuits.

Unit 1 REVIEW OF MOS TECHNOLOGY: Evolution of VLSI technology, VLSI

Design Flow, Basic MOS Transistor: Enhancement and depletion mode, MOS

structure, NMOS, PMOS and CMOS fabrication.

Unit 2 SMALL SIGNAL & LARGE SIGNAL MODELS : Small Signal & large signal

Models of MOS & BJT transistor. Analog MOS Process, MOS & BJT Transistor

Amplifiers: Single transistor Amplifiers stages: Common Emitter, Common base,

Common Collector, Common Drain, Common Gate & Common Source

Amplifiers

Unit 3 ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MOS: Threshold voltage, MOSFET current

voltage characteristics, second order effects, MOS inverters: VTC characteristics

of NMOS inverter, CMOS inverter and Bi-CMOS inverter. Noise margins, Latch-

up in CMOS circuits.

Unit 4 DESIGN PROCESS: Physical design of simple and complex logic gates using

NMOS and CMOS technology, Stick diagrams, NMOS Design Style. CMOS

Design Style, Lambda based Design Rules.

Unit 5 MOS TRANSISTOR SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS: Sheet resistance,

area capacitance, inverter delay. Switching power dissipation of CMOS inverters.

Unit 6 SCALING OF MOS CIRCUITS: Scaling models, scaling factor for device

parameters, Advantages and Limitations of scaling.

Unit 7 SUBSYSTEM DESIGN: Architectural issues in VLSI, Design of CMOS parity

generator, Multiplexer, n-Bit Comparator, Incrementer/Decrementer, ALU

subsystem.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kang and Leblebici “CMOS Digital integrated circuits” TMH 2003.

2. Pucknell D.A and Eshrachain K. “Basic VLSI Design Systems & circuits”(PHI)

3. Introduction to Digital Circuits: Rabaey (PH)

4. Paul B Gray and Robert G Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”.

5. R Gregorian and G C Temes, Analog MOS Integrated Circuits for Signal Processing, John Wiley, 1986.

Solar Photovoltaic Technology and Application (PhEE-17O-03)

L T P 4 - - External Marks: 75

Internal Marks: 25 Total Marks: 100

UNIT 1 Solar Cell Fundamentals: Historical development of PV systems. Overview of

PV usage in the world, Solar energy potential for PV, irradiance, solar radiation

and spectrum of sun, geometric and atmospheric effects on sunlight, Solar cells,

basic structure and characteristics: Single-crystalline, multi-crystalline, thin film

silicon solar cells, emerging new technologies, Various applications of solar PV

system in rural India.

UNIT 2 Electrical Characteristics of PV systems: PV cells Material, Photovoltaic effect-

Principle of direct solar energy conversion into electricity in a solar cell,

Semiconductor properties, energy levels, basic equations, Solar cell, p-n junction,

structure. Electrical characteristics of the solar cell, equivalent circuit, I-V

characteristics of a PV module, maximum power point, cell efficiency, fill factor,

effect of irradiation and temperature. Photo-voltaic array & its connections,

arrangements of array according to the voltage, Module & its connections. Faults

& their effects in photo-voltaic cell, array & module (connection of cell,

connection of array, connection of module), PV Module, PV Array.

UNIT 3 Equivalent Circuit Modeling of PV & System Component: Modeling of solar

cells including the effects of temperature, irradiation and series/shunt resistances

on the open-circuit voltage and short-circuit current, Photovoltaic hierarchy: Cell,

Module and Array, PV equivalent circuit modeling, single diode model, double

diode model, PV array model, partial shading condition System components - PV

arrays, inverters, batteries, charge controls, net power meters. PV array

installation, operation, costs, reliability.

UNIT 4 Design of PV Systems: Design of solar PV systems, Process flow diagram for PV

system, Simulation tools for PV system, Life cycle assessment, Estimation of

carbon credit, Financial assessment of the plant, Life Cycle Cost Assessment,

Feasibility study of PV system, Case study of design of solar PV, Stand alone PV

system & its various applications.

UNIT 5 PV System Applications: Building-integrated photovoltaic units, grid-

interacting central power stations, stand-alone devices for distributed power

supply in remote and rural areas, solar cars, aircraft, space solar power satellites.

Socio-economic and environmental merits of photovoltaic systems, Issues, and

barriers in deployment of Solar PV system, Interpretive Structural Modeling,

Application of Solar Photovoltaic system in agriculture, Government Initiatives

and polices.

UNIT 6 Power Calculation: Power conditioning and maximum power point tracking

(MPPT) based on buck- and boost-converter topologies, Module Cost per Watt,

Module Efficiency (Watts per Area)

UNIT 7 Storage System: Energy storage alternatives for PV systems. Storage batteries,

lead-acid, nickel-cadmium, nickel-metal-hydride and lithium type batteries.

Small storage systems employing ultracapacitors, charging and discharging

properties and modeling of batteries.

REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Chetan Singh Solanki., Solar Photovoltaic: Fundamentals, Technologies and Application, PHI

Learning Pvt., Ltd., 2009. 2. R. Messenger, J. Ventre, Photovoltaic Systems Engineering, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 2004.

3. R. J. Komp, Practical photovoltaics: electricity from solar cells, 3rd ed., Aatec Publications, 2001.

4. 4. M. R. Patel, Wind and Solar Power Systems, CRC Press, 1999.

5. 5. R. H. Bube, Photovoltaic Materials, Imperial College Press, 1998. 6. 2. Jha A.R., Solar Cell Technology and Applications, CRC Press, 2010. 7. John R. Balfour, Michael L. Shaw, Sharlave Jarosek., Introduction to Photovoltaics, Jones &

Bartlett Publishers, Burlington, 2011. 8. Luque A. L. and Andreev V.M., Concentrator Photovoltaic, Springer, 2007. 9. Partain L.D., Fraas L.M., Solar Cells and Their Applications, 2nd edition. Wiley, 2010. 10. S.P. Sukhatme, J.K.Nayak., Solar Energy, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

PhEE-17O-04

MEMS Sensor Design and Fabrication No. Of Credits: 4 Sessional: 25 Marks

L | T | P | Total Theory: 75 Marks 4 | 0 | 0 | 4 Total: 100 Marks

Duration of Exam: 3 Hours

Unit 1 Introduction: Concepts of Micro miniaturisation by micro fabrication. Mechanical

Properties of Micro components. Various Mechanisms of Transduction. Concept

of MEMS based Sensors and Actuators. Role of Substrate used for Micro

fabrication. Concept of Technology Cost for IoT Applications

Unit 2 Thermal Sensing and Actuation: Introduction,Thermal Expansion based Sensors

and Actuators. Examples - Thermocouples, Thermal Resistors, Micro heaters.

Sensors for Flow/IR/Inertial Measurements

Unit 3 Piezo resistive Sensors: Piezo resistive Materials. Stress Analysis. Applications:

Inertia/Pressure/Tactile/Flow

Unit 4 Piezo electric Sensors and Actuators: Piezo electric Materials. Applications:

Acoustic/Inertia/Tactile/Flow/SAW

Unit 5 Polymer and Other Low Cost MEMS Sensors and Actuators: Polymers in

MEMS. Materials – Polyimide, SU-8, PDMS, PMMA, Parylene, Papers,

Applications: Acceleration, Pressure, Flow, Tactile Sensors

Unit 6 MEMS Design: Analytical Design of Cantilever. ANSYS Software Applications

References: 1. Foundations of MEMS – Chang Liu 2. Fundamentals of Micro fabrication and Nanotechnology – M. J. Madou 3. Strength of Materials – S. Timoshenko 4. Semiconductor Sensors – S. M. Sze

DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING (PHEE-18E-01)

No. of Credits: 4 Sessional: 25 Marks L | T | P | Total Theory: 75 Marks

4 | 0 | 0 | 4 Total: 100 Marks Duration of Exam: 3 Hours

Unit 1 Digital Image Fundamentals: Visual Perception, Image Models, concept of

uniform and non- uniform sampling &quantization, Relationships between pixels-

neighbours of pixel, connectivity labelling of connected components. Relations,

equivalence and Transitive closure, Distance measures, Color models

Unit 2 Image Transforms: Discrete Cosine transform, Discrete Fourier transform, Fast

Fouriertransform, Discrete Wavelet Transform

Unit 3 Image Enhancement: Spatial and frequency domain methods, intensity

transformation, Histogram processing and Averaging spatial filtering, Low pass

and high pass filters, Color image processing.

Unit 4 Image Restoration: Degradation model, digitalization of circulate and block

circulate metrics, Algebraic approved invoice filtering, wiener filter, constrained

least square restoration, Interactive restoration in spatial domain geometric

transformation.

Unit 5 Image Segmentation: Detection of Discontinuity, Edge detection, Boundary

detection, Thresholding, Regional oriented segmentation uses of motion in

segmentation.

Unit 6 Morphological Image Processing: Preliminaries, Erosion and Dilation, Some

Basic Morphological Algorithms- Boundary Extraction, Hole Filling.

Unit 7 Compression: Lossy and Lossless Compression, Basic Compression Methods-

Huffman Coding, Golomb Coding, Arithmetic Coding, LZW Coding, Run-

Length Coding

TextBooks:

1.Anil K Jain, "Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing", PHI Edition 1997.

2.Keenneth R Castleman, " Digital Image Processing", Pearson

Reference Books:

1. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, "Digital Image Processing", Pearson Chanda&Majumder,

SECURITIES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS (PHEE-18E-02)

No. of Credits: 4 Sessional: 25 Marks L | T | P | Total Theory: 75 Marks

4 | 0 | 0 | 4 Total: 100 Marks Duration of Exam: 3 Hours

Unit 1 Introduction to cryptography: Classical Cryptosystem, Cryptanalysis on

Substitution Cipher (Frequency Analysis), Play fair Cipher, Block Cipher.

Security trends, The OSI security architecture, Security attacks, Security services,

Security mechanisms, Models of Internetwork security.

Unit 2 Symmetric Encryption and Message Confidentiality: Symmetric encryption

principles, Algorithms, Stream ciphers and RC4, Cipher block modes of

operation, Location of encryption devices, Key distribution.

Unit 3 Public Key Cryptography and message Authentication: Different approaches to

message authentication, HMAC, public key cryptography principles and

algorithm, Digital signature, Key management.

Unit 4 Network Security Application: Electronic Mail Security, IP security overview,

Architecture, Authentication Header, Encapsulating Security payload, Combining

Security Association, Key management.

Unit 5 Web Security Requirement: Secure Socket layer and transport layer security,

Secure Electronic Transaction, Network management Security.

Unit 6 Information Hiding: Steganography, and Watermarking. Importance and

applications of Digital Watermarking and Steganography. Properties of

Watermarking and steganography Systems, Embedding Effectiveness, Fidelity,

Data Payload.

Unit7 Classification of Steganography and Watermarking Techniques. Different

basis of classification: Spatial domain Steganography and Watermarking (LSB

substitution, Pseudorandom LSB substitution, Distortion) Frequency domain

Steganography and Watermarking (DCT, DWT, DFT, FRFT) along with

associated algorithms.

Reference Books 1. Network Security Essentials: Application and standard, William Stalling(Third edition). 2. Computer network and data communication by Frozen.

3. Digital Watermarking and Steganography, Ingemar J. Cox, Matthew L. Miller, Jeffrey A. Bloom, JessicaFridrich, and Ton Kalker. 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2008.